IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) fe /. :/- t/^ fA 1.0 I.I [fiM lllllM ^ I4£ 12.0 1.8 IL25 IIIIIJA 11.6 6" <^ /a / .-W v^ f> ^- .^. "-/a niuiugjcipiiiL Sciences CorDoration A^ ^q 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, k'J.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 m^ '\ \\ ■S^' ri? '.r> f/^ CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Ir stitute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproduction& histcrlques ?^ Technical and Bibliographic Notns/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquaa Tha Instituta haa attamptad to obtain tha beat original copy availabia for filming. Faaturaa of thia copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua, which may altar any of tha imagaa in tha reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. n Coloured covera/ Couverture de couieur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommag^e Covers restored and/or laminated/ Couverture restaur^ et/ou pelliculAe Cover title missing/ La titre de couverture manque Coloured mapa/ Cartes gAographiquea an couieur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couieur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) Coloured plates and/or illuatrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couieur Bound with other material/ Relii avac d'autrea documents D n D Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La re Mure serr^e peut causer de t'ombre ou de la distorsion !• long da la marge intiriaura Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajouties lore d'une restauration apparaissent dans la texte, mais, lorsqua cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pea M filmias. Additional comments:/ Commentairas suppiimentaires; L'Institut a microfilm* le meilleur exemplaire qu'il lui a itt possible de se procurer. Les details de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una modification dans la m^thode normale de filmage sont indiqute ci-dessous. D D D E D D D n Coloured pages/ Pages de couieur Pages damaged/ Pages endommagies Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurias et/ou pelliculies Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages d^coiories, tachat^es ou piqu^es Pages detached/ Pages ditach^es Showthrough/ Transparence Quality of print varies/ Quality inigala de I'impression Includes supplementary material/ Comprand du materiel supplimantaire Only edition available/ Seule idition disponible Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totaiement ou partieilement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata. une pelure, etc.. ont it6 filmies d nouveau de faqon it obtenir la meilleure image possible. This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu^i ci-dessous. ^OX 14X 18X 22X I I I I I I I I /I I I I ! 26X 30X 12X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X Th« copy filmed h«r« has bMn rtproducad thanks to tha ganarosity of: D.B. Weldon Library University of Wettern Ontario (Regional History Room) Tha imagas appaaring hara ara tha bast quality possibia considaring tha condition and Ingiblllty of tha original copy and in kaaping with tha filming contract spacificationa. Original eopias in printsd papar eovars ara filmad beginning with tha front eovar and anding on tha last paga with a printad or illustratad impraa- sion, or tha back covar whan appropriate. All othar original copiaa ara filmad batjinning on tha first paga with a printad or illuatrated impraa- sion, and anding on tha last paga with a printad or illustratad impression. Tha laat recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol -i»' (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or tha symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever appliaa. Maps, plataa. charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratioa. Thoae too large to be entirely included in one expoaure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand comer, left to right and top to bottom, as many framea aa required. The following diagrama illustrate the method: L'exemplaire filmA fut reproduit grAce i la giniroaiti da: D.B. Weldon Library University of Western Ontario (Regional History Room) Lea imagea suivantea ont ttt raproduita^ avcc la piua grand soin, compta tenu de la condition at da la nattet* da I'exemplaire film*, et w conformity avac lea conditiona du contiat da filmage. Lea exemplairea originaux dont la couverture an papier eat ImprimAe sont fllmte en commenpant par le premier plat at an tarminant soit par la darniire page qui comporte une empreinte d'impreeaion ou d'liluatration, soit par le second plat, seion le eaa. Tous lee sutras •xampiairas originaux sont fllmte an commandant par la pramiAre paga qui comporte une empreinte dimpreaaion ou d'illuatration at an tarminant par la darnlAre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un dee symboles suivants apparaftra sur la domidra image de cheque microfiche, selon le eaa: le symbols —*> signifie "A SUIVRE", le symbols V signifie "FIN". Lae cartea, planches, tableaux, etc.. pauvent dtre fiimte A dee taux de rMuction diffirents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour dtra reproduit en un seul clichA. il est fiimA A partir da Tangle sup4rieur gauche, de gauche d droite. et de haut en baa. en prenant la nombra d'Imagea n4cessaire. Las diagrammes suivants illustrant la mithoda. 1 2 3 4 5 6 F //*s THE HIGH SCHOOL FRENCH GRAMMAR mttb JEjerciscs, IDocabiUariea, au5 3n^c^. W. H. FKASBR, B.A.. //*sc.^:.;:-/^*-Vft.v*or ofltalzan and Svaimk, University o, jm.o.u.. AND J. SQUAIR, B.A., Associate Pro/e,s.sor 0/ French. Univtrdty CoUege, Toronto. TORONTO : G. M. ROSE & SONS, Entered a^covdine to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the vear one ohousand e ght h.iodred and ninety-one. by me AliniKiKK o, KnnoATiON tor Outario, at tlie iJtp^nm^nX ot Agricultur« nnrno awp Bornrt n Bumrwi, Kosb & CoMr*rr toiomo 1*6^3 PREFACE. The High School French ({rainiimr is iiitenfled to meet the require- njents of both elementary and advanced classes. As will he seen from the taMe of contents, it is divided into four parts. In Part I. the sounds of the language an.l their alphabetical represen- tation are discussed. The results of the most recent investigations in phoneiics have been utilized in so far as this could be doj.e without the excessive use of technicalities. A system of phonetic transcription has been employed, under tlie conviction that in no otlier way can distinc- tions in sounds be intelligibly explained. Numerous examples have been given for exercise in pronunciation, as the fact is recognize.i that no amount of theory will in itseit ensure correct pronunciation of a foreign language without long and careful practice in the utterance of its sounds. While it is not intended tiiat tiie details of this part should be mastered by i^eginners, it is hoped that iJie full treatment here given to the important matter of pronunciation will prove useful, not ordy to advanced pupils, but to such teachers as have not enjoyed exceptional advantages. Part II. consists of an exercise-book accompanied by a concise state- ment of the more important principles of grammar, and embraces a systematic presentation of the verb paradigms and other grammatical forms. This part, comprising somewhat more than a hundred pages It is thought should afford material for about one year's work in ele- mentary classes. The conjugation of the regular and auxiliary verbs is completed in seventeen lessons, the intention being to enable the pupil to begin as soon as possible the reading of easy French texts. The pho- netic transcription of all words used, as well as of paradigms and gram- matical forms, is given for the purpose of aiding the pupil at the outset to acquire a correct pronunciation under the direction of the teacher. IV PREFACE. I t Part III. h a Hystenmti,; «raum,Hr, in whid. tlu; various parts <,f speech are takon „p i,. „nler and fully .liscussed in .letail. It is entirely independent of Part II., an.l numerous exereises of an a.lvanced charac- ter are given in illustratioa c.i ^.h^. th.aore.VlcV. natter. It will bo noted that the illogical and inconvenient division into etymology and syntax has :,een discarded. In this connection it is helieved that the full treatment of each part of speech contimiously will contribute greatly to the convenience of l.otli teacher and pupil. In its scope tins part is in- ten, Hcill)roiui, 1889. I-aint, M -A., Tnut6co,„plet.lelaprc.no„oiation franvaisc, deuxi^n.e <'!7 • r „ f t'".iis, i,iriH, i«fS7; Le frai^-ais Darl6, (leuxjcme od.. ileilhronn, 1880. .-i.n,.et,sche .Studien (eoited hy vv,ibelm Vxetor), Marhur.^ 1887-90 I'i'-t/. K.., Svstematiscne Oarstei.ung rter franzcisiscuen Au.snm..ie, eitce Auriage, Herlin, IM4. Traut,naun, M., Die Spracldaute i,n Allgemeiuen und Die Laute des Knghscheu, Frauzosischen u,hI I)eut«eheu im Besondern, Leip/i. 1884-86. * *" Vietor, W., Elemente der Pl.onetik und Orthoepie dos Doutschen Kngl.schen und Frauz.isischon, n.it RiieksicLt auf Die lie.lurfnisse dat, L., Nouvelle grannnaire historique du fran9ais, Paris, 1889. Edgren, A. H., A Compendious French Grammar, Boston, 1890 Fasnaeht, G. E., A Syntlietic French Grammar, London, 1883; Pro- gressive French Course, IIL Year, Londcm, 1882. Li'cking, G., Franzosische Grammatik. zweite Ausgabe, Berlin, 188.S. VI PKINCIPAL WOllKS OONSTTLTED. Matznor, E., FranzoHischo (Jmm.uatik ,nit l.eHomlorer Beruck«ichti. gung .U,8 Lj^teinischen, dritte Aufkige, Herlin, 188',. Pelli«8ier, K., Acculence ami KHsontials of Syntax, Lon,l..„. 18««; I'rencli Syntax, Loiul.tn, 188?. I'lattner, Ph., Franz.isischo Schulgran.n.atik, /weito Auflage Karla- i-uhe, 1887. Pki^tz, K., Kiiry,gefa88te systcmatischc (Jra.nu.atik der franz.isLschrn ttprache, dritto'Auflage, Herlin, 1880. Whitney, VV. 1)., A Practical (Jranunar of French, Boston 188(5 VVillianus, A., The Syntax of the Subjunctive Mood in French Hos- ton, 1885. Ell. J>ICTIONAKIE8 : l'Acad(5mie francaiae, Dictionnaire dp, septicNine ^'A., Paris. 1878 Behows, J., Didtjonarv for the t',>c,ot, H^rench-lOngii.h -..ul Fng- lish-trenah. 2nd cd., r, on* ion, iss;i. Litt,r6, K, Dicuounaire an -a xamjue irai)eH.«e. tiar-nccc^ «,i i ;,e Wis f' <■'■■ CONTENTS, PART 1. Orthographic Signs. ■ • « . . Sounds. Pronunciation of the Alphabet. ■■-.'. Syllabication. ••--.* Stress. - . , . , ' ■ Quantity of Vowel Sounds. • - . . . Liaison and Elision. - . . , * Punctuation. - - . , _ Use of Capitals. ---„.* Table of Alphabetical Ii:quivnient8. - .. . .. Exampled of Ptionetic Transcription. I. Present Indicative of avoir. -The Indefinite Article. -Gender Number, Case. - . . . ' II. Present Indicative of 6tro. -The Definite Article. -Plural of JNouns and Adjectives. - III. Present Indicative of avoir, 6trc, interrogatively. -Remarks on Interrogation.— Use of oul, non. - IV. The Possessive Adjective. -The Pronoun le, la. le^.-Use of void and vollfi — n ©gt and eV-*^, V. Negative Conjugation. -x^emari^; on ICegation. - Negative Conjugation mterrogatively.-Sl.-Posi^on of the Adverb. - Thyegular Conjugations. -Remarks on Conjugation. -Pres- et Indicative of donner, flnlr. rompro.-Use of the Pres- ent Indicative. — N'est-co pas ? ^"■Jwrt]?r'''!r,'"^ ^^'^^ Relation.-Contraction of" do and VIII T P ?f- ;7^^' ^^'^^' ^^^^^^^1 P^'^"^"" 3rd Person. VIIL The Parti ive Noun.-The General Noun. -Geographical PAOB. 1 2 10 24 24 25 26 27 27 27 29 30 31 34 36 30 42 45 48 Tin CONTENTS. L€HNON. Won! ()r,l..r A '""'P^'"'"' ^«'"«««— TI.ePuHtln.k.tinto.- f»'Je»i>Mte.-Frequ«nt Idioms. • ^^ne ol i ast A. Imperfect Indicitivo „f ,i«„nor fin in . Indicative of avoir. At J Itf T ;""'I»"'.- f.npe, foct ' whither'. <^*'»^--U«e of Imperfect. -Phtce ' where,' tive8.~The Deuionstrativc Adjective. . ^ Ail. Past Definite cf doiirnr ii..f. tv.r*:^" 'u"" '^ ""■"""'• """• -"-—Future. „, »volr, «fre._0:„„litKM.l Seiiteiicea. Jr'N^:' T"*"- """•• -■P— Imperative „; av„„; XVI Present Subjunctive of donner. fl„,r, ro„.pre.--Present Subjunctive of avoir. .tre.-Use of Subjunctive. ^TeneSe quence.-Dxsjunctive Personal Pronouns. . AVII. Imperfect Subjunctive of flonn.,i. « • ,«.ee. Su,,„„et.i . „. J. rrCe' LrZr-'-": A VIII. Present Part ciple of donn«r ««• Afi.« rT.« 1 A *^ "^ nonner, flnlr, rompre, uvolr. of T r ^«^°^'"«»^ «f Present Participle. -Auxiliarie TelsTT^^^^^'"^"^ ^^ ^^«^ Participle.-u'e of C^^ XIX. Use of Infinitive. -Formation of Tenses. ' £:\he^s.l^rrpi-::^^ ^;^"- ^^^— ^-- """"IVet! '^"""": ^-nouns.-Conjugation of alier Ind e„. XXIII. The Demonstrative Pronouns.-Ce and I'l (elle 'etc ) ^ Conjugation of vouloir. . y^nt, eic.).^- XXIV. Interrogative Pronoun.. -Conjugation o poa vol.. 61 54 68 65 69 72 76 8U 82 86 89 "o 97 100 te. — P.lHt - 61 ffoct lere,' - 54 tljec- - 68 te of Ob- - 02 e of and - 66 1 of - bV r>ir. om- - n jent Se- - 7'lffiniU, I'ronoui.H.-Indt.fi.nf,. A I- *■ "i«iicr. o^il«P, HMHler, eti """"flror, luttoyer, AAV Ii. Cardinal Niiin«r>ilu \f w i- . "ate, Ti,:; 0^ ir,? '"■~'^'"' ■'■'■"""•' ""y- LAIX. Konnation of ^iavtil)K ,. - *. tion of Adverbs (Vn, •,;""'*'""'""'' "' >^'Kert,8.-l.o8,. AXX. PreposiMous. - PrepoHitionul Locutions rn. • \- tenir, voli . '^"^""ons.— Conjugation o XXXI, C„„j„„e ,.._Coaj;,,.„tio;„, ^.„,;^, ^^^__^,_^ " The Verb. TJie iNoun. The Article. . Tlie Adjective. Tie i'ronoun. The Adverb. - The Numeral. Tlie Prepositiop. The Conjuuctioii. The Interjection. Abbreviations, Exercises in Traiis.afio,. V'OCAIIITI.ARIES : French-English. English-French. Index. PART III. PART IV. • e 107 II lir, »2o 12.r i27 264 :ir.8 284 326 330 346 364 358 o69 361 372 379 398 Note. -In using the High School French Grr.n.mar, the follo^.in, pla« of work IS recommended : ' ^ 1. Learn the table of « symbols and key-words ' contained in §5. 2. Do the exercises of Part 11., learning as mnch of the theory as is necessary for tins purpose. To this should be a.lded daily systematic exercxses m pronunciation, particularly of the more difficult sounds Conti^nir 'T '^''''''' "' ''"■' ''■ ^'"™^"^ thewhoJeoi the ti.eorv. t^ontmue the phonetic ^xercisee. 4 At this sta.?e, or earliei. t.e reacnng ot simnle lexts suet, ->s the mgh bchool French Reader, may oe .egun, tne student usin. he tn o.y eon amed m i^ar. ixi. to expiam mfficul. ,ramm.ticai points 5. Do the exercises of Part III., learning as much of the tlieorv as IS nececsarv for this niirnr^ao n^ +• ^i , meuiy ciiy lor rnis purpose. Continue the phonetic exercises Tlie :ne;rnce ""' '' ""^'^"^'' ''' ^^"^^'^^ -^"^ p-^ ^^'^ ^oi 6. Do the exercises of Part IV. Continue the phonetic exercises. ( -ntinue reading texts, usin^ part HI. for reference «t/^ ^^7™ Y?'"'""'""^ '-'^ ''''^"-^ "^ "^'■^ "^' and complete Uio study of Part I., with exercises '- r^^enetic transcription. FRENCH GRAMMAR. ORTHOGRAPHIC SIGNS. 1. The alphabet o The letters of the alphabet with their French luiiiies, are as follows : Letter. Name. An a IJ 1> C c D (I E o F f G ff. II h . I I . . effe ache i Letter. Name. Jj ji K k ka li 1 elle Mm enime N 11 enne O o o Pp V& Q q ku R r erre Letter. S 8 .. T t . Uu.. V v.. Name, esse , t6 II v6 Ww double v^ Xx iks Y y i grec Z 2! z^de N0TK8.-1. The French alphabet corresponds with that of English, but k and w arc hardly nsed except in foreign words of late introduction, 2. Words are commonly spelt by naming their letters, as above, together with the name of the accei.t (it any). A newer method, employed sometimes in teaching read- mg, IS to name o by its ' sourd • sound (§ 17, 3), the other vowels as above.an^ the con^ sonants by rheir actual sound in the word + the sound of e ' sourd.' 3. The names of the letters in the newer method areallmasc. : Un a, un f (= un a, The ohfer names^re all masc, except for f, Ix, 1, m. n. r, b: Un b, une 8 (= un b6 une esse), etc. ^ • 2. Other orthographic sigriis are as follows :— 1. The acute accent / (Fr. ' accent aigu '), used only over e (§17, 1): L'6t6, 1'Ecosse. 2. The grave accent y(Fv. * accent grave '), used over o (§ 17 2) anci also over a, u. but without affecting their sound. It sometimes distin-. guishes homonyms: h^'to\ a^'has'; dhB=' Bhxce\ de«=^of tie'- ou=* where', ou=' or'. -LX. FRENCH r.RAMMAR. i I ! ! i i [3. voteutitT-^Tt"""^' ; ^^r ''"^"^^ --flexC). used over any Illv thelosf T "^ ^^""'^^ ety,aological contraction, especi ally the 1088 of an earlier h ; ftue, tfite. tie, h«te, ilftte Observe : None of the above aecent.marks serve to denote .....s. (§ m). 4. The cerhfla , (Fr. ' c^dille '), used under c before ao, u (§ 41 2) • ta^ade, le^-on, re^u. ^^ ' '^' • divM«nnf "'■"''■ ■'■ "''••;*'•*'"»•) *"" 'hat tho vowel Wing it i, divide m i>r„m„,cxat,ou f,,,,,, the preceding vowel : No,.l, navf, MoV.e vowell 7" " , "■"•■ '"P'«'"I"">') »l.owstl,e„„,i. i„„o alinal ■ ^:tXl^:\:r! "'"■'""■'-"- -on,.ectwo.l.and syllables : Avtz-vous ?, tete-a-ttUe SOUNDS. ^ih?; i^^'"" Pi'9nimciatiou will be explained, as far as pos- sib e, by comparison witl, Kn^^lisl, sounds. It must never 00 for^^otten, however, that the rounds of two Ja ^lao 'V/i i /■ uZf^ '""f" (consonants as well as vovels) are alnxost all narron, taxness oi the organs. 2. Lip-ronndinu i^, in soun.ling 'who,' 'no,' 'law') is nnich more energetic in I i^nch, and is more exclusively confined to the lips. Such Ksounds are said to be rounded. 3. Vowel sounds are in general more resonant in French, and voiced consonants more thoroughly voiced. N0TL.-The sound pro.luoed by vibration of the vocal chords, as heard in all vowel, and ,n many consonants, is called voice. The .listinction betwJen r.^r s and Zw consonants may be observed by ut. erin,. in succession ' tome.' ' don> • c^ " pe ' '1 m which t p are voiceless and d, b voiced. ^ • ' 4. English long vowel sounds, as in 'feel,' 'cold,' 'save,' etc., are all more or less d^phthon,Jal. French v.,wel sounds, whether long or short are uniform throuffhont their utterance. wTa7fnp'''°7''f '''!■'' ''■" "'""-' ""''"^'^"^ "' ""'^^''^"^ ^' pronounce,! in Eng. lana than in Canadiit?! Eni.'!iHh. ^ 4-6.] SOUNDS. bearing it is , naYf, MoYse, sion of a final e (=laamie), ct words and 3t all varroir, ned in their ittered Avitli ourid in 'fjiU' 3 nnich mv)re lips. Such I, and voiced ■fl in all vowels IcssH aiKl voiced r 'pet,' 'bet,' etc. , are all ng or short, i. The French language lias thirhj^seren sounds, with- out noting minor distinctions. To ^lenote these ounds Here are but twenty-six letters (§1, note 1), to whicli niav he added two accent-marks ( - ) and the cedilhi. Hence has resulted much confusion. Thus, in 'silence,' 'a.saut,' ..t' 1?^ '''^'"' 'r.^' '^^^^•*^^"'' tJ^« l^^^wy letters indi- cate the *inie sound m each word. So also in ' sot ' beau,' 'autre.' ' [N.B In explaining the pronunciation, these thirty-seven sound, will be first described, and, to avcl.t confusion, the sounds will be denoted by si/M (one for each s-innd), correspo:..ding as far as possU . with t]>e letters of the alphabet and printed everywhere in italics, 'x -^e pro nunciation of the alphabet v/dl then be deJt with (§§ ](5...(J3).] 5. Kcfcreiice-T-Wo of Syiiibols and Key-Words. [Opposite each symh^ i, a key-word, or exa. ^.le, in which th- «ound occurs.] Sytnb. Key-wd. 1. a ...liVche 2. d ...iiiudunie 3. a ... plan 4. b ... base 5. (i...dit 6. e ...lo 7. e ...et6 8. e ...pero 9. ,1 ...fin 10. ,/ ...fini Jyn:b. Key-w(:. n, (/ ,..;^are 12. /. i'J. m . >^. a. id. Ti . •-?0, (5 .. habile ..tiiii ..viand-. . car .e, Home, porte, homme, ^cole. hllTk~^T^ Hlightly more open than for 6, tongue less drawn back (§ 6), and lesa rounding (§ 7, 3). Narrow.] Nasal Vowel Sounds. 12. Principles of Formation. 1. In ordinarv breathing-, the soft palate (terminated by the uvula) hane-s loosely down and the breath passes freely throu^i nose or mouth, or through both. 2. In uttering ordinary vowek (as a, o, etc.), the soft palate presses backwards and up- wards, closing the nose passage entirely. 3. If however a vowel IS uttered with the soft palate hanging loosely a« inordinary breathing, the breath escapes^ tl^-oS^ nose and mouth at once. The resonance of the air in the nose passages gives a new value to the vowel wh ch is said to be nasalized and is called a nasal vowel! NoTE.-The process of nasalization may be well observed before a sTLl h """7 ''f ^"^^^ '' ^^'' '^' -^^«^' '' -P-ted with 1,: ai ule^ tT"^ T I- ^"" ''' --responding nasal, as in ' blanc.' p!:!;:hrnostS:. -^^^^^^^^^^ -^^ '- -^^ -- -p^— by stop. ^^ a, S, ce, 0. 1. «.— Is the nasal corresponding to a (pas, §8, 1). /I'x. : Plan, plante, enfant, danse, an. 2. ^.— Is the nasal corresponding to e (p^re, §10, 4) Aa?. .-^i in, prince, pin, lapln, jardln. 3. a.— Is the nasal corresponding to m (leur, §10, 5) Ex. Un, brun, lundi, tribun, commun. 4. 0.— Is the nasal corresponding to b (mort, §113) Ex. : On, monde, non, bont^, front. '' ^ J^.B.-Avoid carefully the final sound of words like English «san«,' [Artic. -Poaition of tongue, etc.. etn as for dm U ^ '-ia 4> B Ex. -1 ' -— ,— ua a ujiJi i. i . i . i jLi - M-11.. , .n J 8 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [14, 15 hil m Semi-Vowel Sounds. 14. r, U, ..—When tli(3 sounds i (§9, 1), U (§9, 2), u (11, 1) are followed by a vowol in tliesamc syllabic, the stress of voice falls on that vowel ; /, //, u are then nioi-e rapidly and forcibly i)ronounced, and assume a conson- antal value. This is shown by the " i)]aced over them. 1. 2.— Like very brief and wrt/vo^w English y in ' yes. JlJz. : Vlande, niece, pitlii, vleux. 2. fl. — No counterpart in English (^9, 2). Avoid tho, sound of * wall,' ' ruin.' Ex. : Lui, celui, je suia, duel, dcuelle. 3. ii. — Like very brief and w/r/wy w in 'west,' 'we. Ex. : Oui, ouqst. [Artic— Practically the same for these sounds as ordinary vowels.] Consonant Sounds. 15. b, d, f, g, h, k, 1, m, n, n, p, r, s; s, t, v, z, i. 1. b. — Like b in 'barb.' Ex. : Uarbare, beau. [AuTic—Narroiv (§3, 1), and fully voiced (§3, 3) throughout its con ijinuance. ] 2. d. — Like d in 'died.' Ex. : Dame, cle, ardeur. [Artic. — The tongue further advanced towards the teeth tiiar nr the English sound. Narrow, and fully voiced throughout.] 3. /.—Like fin 'fat.' Ex. : Facile, vif. [Artic. — Narrow. ] 4. g. — Like gr in ' go.' Ex. : Gant, aigu, augmcnter. [Artic. — Narroio, and fully voiced throughout, j r^, h. — Is silent. Ex. .Ilomme, lieros, liuroiue, liasard. f ': 15.] Avoid tlio. lout its con th tiiap i(y CONSONANT SOTTNns. h:x. : Car, iac, Canada. 7. I. — Like I in 'law.' Ex, : L.C, Ik, lilas, sol. [Aimc. - .Narrow, anil fully voiced throughout. 1 a w.— Like m in 'imm,' 'duiub.' Ex. : Ufal, Ijlaiiicr, diuiie. [Artio.-.V«;vv.;., and fully roired th.-„ughout.] r;. «.— Lik(>, a in 'not,' 'man.' '>.t. . iinauiu, oa'ianc, nature 10. fl.-Romowiuu],kc„yi„< banyan- orulin .„„i„,. /i.).. Aprnoaii, (liffno, montas-nc. [Aimc-Kud of tl.c tonguo pressed against the Wer teeth l.n l . the tongue ao tl:e .a,no tinie closely pressed ■..■uZT if' ^ "^ the hard palate. Narro., and ^^:Z"l "SZ^ ^ '''''''' '' Ex. : Pa,., papier, p6re, cap, captif. lAnTiG.—JVarroiv.] ro^ea'^Z^^'^':!::,^^^^^^^ The sound is lower teeth aM ^^n ,.^s n ,• L '^1 ''''^''' /'^•^-'-^ «- of the tongue tmva i 1 " ^f^' '^^r!? '"^'' ^'^^ ''^^ a trilling ^ibratiou of the uviila. ^ ' '^'"' P^'odueing ^x. ; Rare, rose, barlaro, autcur, p:.r,.le, libre [AnTJC-Narrow, and fully romd tliroughout.] N0TR.-The above r sound (called in Frouvh r ' nv..i..;..„ - one „owmostco„„„only heard. Another CuKri; '.,"'"'' •''"^'"'■"''''^' '^ ^^^^ fonnorly universal, hut at the pros n^^. Z ■ ' ! '' '"'^■"'^'" ' «'' '^'v.^olaire,') in country district;, or a. .„ ^Z^uCaZ^ r" •'?'"'' "" "" -'''^^—rless) toncrue against the ;oof nf t^ " t.^ ^ ; T ' 1 ' : ' '". :"'"'"' ''^' * ''"'"'^ *"^" ^ '" "^ t^- •rish r. •"""*'' n.aae.i,a.ely bei>,nd the teeth, as in Scotch or 10 FRENCH fJUAMMAR. [16. KS A*. — Lil^e 8 ill 'sin^'",' 'books.' Hx. : Sou, UuiiNer. [Artic— Tlie Umgue furtlicr advanced towards the teeth than for the English sound. Narroir.] It. i.— Like sli ill 'whall,' 'ash.' L'u: : riiiiL, cliereliur. [AuTic— The tongue further advanced towards the teeth than for the English sound. Nariow.j If). ^.— Like t in ' ton,' ' not.' Avoir! the sli^Hit aspini- tion which genenilly lollows this Kurdish sound. £!x. : Table, aniitie. [Aktic— The tongue further advanced towards the teeth than for the English sound. Narrow.] 16. V. — Like V in 'van,' 'nave.' JiJx. : Vite, voua^ vivre. [Aktiu. — Narroiu, and fully voiced tliroughout.] 17. 2. — Like z in ' zone.' Ex. : Zone, IJal/ac. [Artic. — Narroio, and fully voiced througliout.] 18. i. — Like z in 'azure,' or s in 'pleasure.' Ex. : Jour, jadis, majesty. lAwnc.—Narroio, and fully voiced throughout. More lip protrusion than in English.] PRONUNCIATION OF THE ALPIIABP]T. The VowEiiS. [N.n.— Pronounce consonant sounds within words in one syllable with \j\\Q following vowel (§04, 2).] 16. Aji. — Has Um sounds : — 1. Usually thiit of d (madame, §8, 2). Thus, regularlj^ at the heginning and end of words, or when coming before two or nwre consonants, and generally in unstressed (§67, 1) syllables. Ex. : Adorer (dddrd), Canada, soft\, d^h^ ma, ta, Ik, patte, barbe, macadamise. So also in words like the following: Portal, par, cigale, dame, cabane, arabe, salade, vague, cap, attrape, delicate, lac, chaque, face, tache, carafe, paragraphe. 17.] THE VOWELS. 11 than for t,he Lhau for this 2. LesH fiwqm'Ntlji th.-it oUl (lAclic, %H, 1). TliuR, A in a Htress-bearhig syllable {^i\l, 1), a luiforc tlnal n, a in -iiille, -ail. Ex. : LAche (l('iS), grAce, pas, ens, gnus, Ik^-Iiis !, hatnille (IkttM), travail (trdviil). So also, in combinations like the following : Ah !, iin u, basse, posse, passer, eontluniner, f Acher, «^'eraser, proelainer, aeoabler, gagner, cadre, (liable, cailavre, oracle, miracle, sabre, baron, Jeanne, Jacques, and in words ending in -aaion, -assion, -ation, e.g., occasion, compassion, nation, etc. NoTK. -Some orthoeiiiHts (listin^'iiiHli three sounds of a, and there are many woids of „ 12 KIIKNCH (JIIAMMAH. 17.] '.i. Like (' (lo, 5^10, 3). Ttms, o in /i/onosi/f/tih/cs, mikI iii inltidl sijILdhfe he/ore a .suKjIe ('OHsontnif. Ex. : Lv), jo, nio, t«, ho, <"; 5''a^. The beginner should give the letter everywhere its full sound. 4. © is tiilem ;rhen final ((;xcept in monosyllables, sc^e above), ill the what ^mlh\(j>i -es, -ent, niid nlso within irords after a voa'el sound niul (dscwliere where diffjcult consonant combinations do not arise from its silence. (See Obs. above.) ^a;. .• Ruo (ri/), donu(5o, rare, place, ai-je (^ ^), parlai-jo {paries), table, sabre, prendre, tu paries, ils parlent, gaiete, louerai (lurti), li iitenant, ennoini, medecin, samedi. NoTK. — Silent e is called in French o ' inuet.' [Exc. — o fiilcnt also in tlie following : Cerise, serein, and others as exceptions to .'>, above ; Jean (~.a), .Jeanne, Caen {Jca), seoir (and cognates), and when used to soften g (§45, 2, nou 2), fi.; ., mangean^ {7nSi:a), geole, (Jeorges, etc.] Observe : The endings do and -re with silent e aio specially difficult. The beginner should sound the e, as in 3 above, and afterwards gradu- ally drop the e sound : Table {fd hit), arbro {cir hre), etc. 5 Like a (madaine, j^8, 2). Thus, in femmc, in ad- v*rb;4 in •eniinoiit, e.g., pnidemment (prUdanid), etc., iu so-^'!i\iiol (shlanel) (n,nd derivatives), in nenni (ndnij, aud a fow rarer words. 1H-21.J THE VUWELS. 18 IH. II. — ILiH //w sonnds : — 1. Lihviw: (t'lnl ^<>, ij. Thus I or t everyn-her^. irb-n jonnmij a syllable of itself. AV ; Finl, vie (r/). ll.no, al.t.no, Ih,, f|„|r, fUa f/,-,^ i,al..lo vl.sll)llIt(S liul.lllcr {dhiiv), faiiilllu. 2. Liko ? (vlaiHlo. 5^1 I, 1). Thus, wIhmi 8oundo. Oo. — Ilns #//:o sounds : — 1. Liko 6 (zono, §11, 2). Tims, as />m/ mtrel .sound jv when It luis the cnvainjiex in the stres.seU syll(ihle{^i\7). Kx. : Num.'.ro {niinivrd), tlos, mot, sirop, cli-file {dr6l), hftte, vftt.-o So al8.i, in coiubinations represented by : Zone, arrosent, i.lio.ue. Umio, fosse, grosse. [Kxc — Trop {trd, rather more general than trd).] 2. Likc6 (mort, §11, 3). Tims, generally. Ex. : Mort {mdv), corps, poste, etotle, soninie, robe, fol, ^-cole i^.mope, (lot {(lot), votre, octobre. ' [Hxc— Silent in the following : Paon {pa), faon {/ I'l". f«t, fumes (//m), du, due, vue, dur. tare (^// /•/.:), utde, J uge, Sucre, titude. ^ " » . , 4ur, 2. Like ?/ (lui, §1 1, 2 and §!), 2). Thus, re«-ularly ichen united into one syllable icith a folloidng vowel. Ex. : Lui {lui), celui, uuit, puits, jc suis, pluic, ccuelle ((/M«0, ruine. 3. it is generally silent in gn, i^xx (§ 15, 2, note 1 and §55). Ex.: Gut-pe {l«Tif» linnn mnnHio-'P irr'Psiff'^ • boenfs {ba), oenfs (U), voeu {v8). 21-26.] le syllable 26-30.] VOWEL COMBINATIONS. U iS a verbal s (sd), A salt. ilent, palx, Igle, mattre. njugation of ] [lowed by ^i followed l), paysage, :arer words.] §, bean. , Laure, and avoir, e.g., :aurant {ris- sound or r.'.r {n'.esi&) ; 2. Like m (leur, §10, 5). Thus, before r (sounded), gfoiierally before a final consonant (sounded), before 1 mouillde, before two consonants. Ex. : Flour (Jtour), bourre, neuf (no/), seul, fauteuil, (fdtcei), feuille, peuple (pa'pl), oeuvre (oevr), bceuf (bo^/J, ccuf (ce/), moeura (moers). [Exc— 1. Eu = /i (une, §9, 2), wherever it occurs in the conjtigaticn of avoir, e.g., eu («), j'ous (z ii), il cut (il u), nous eussions, etc. 2. Eu = (peu, §10, 2), before a final z, I, or i sound, e.g., crease {krOz), nieule, 6nieute, and in jeune (SOn).] 27. Ey.— Precisely like ay (§23 above). Ex. : Noy, bey (U), grasseyer (grdsne), assoy ez-vous ( as^4 vu ). 28. Oi (ot oe).— Like2« + a (oui, §14, 3, and madame, §8, 2). Thus, generally, unless preceded by r in the sa.iie syllable. Ex. : Mo'i (mM), tol, sol, lol, poll chinols, etoUe, self, pprolsse, gloire, bolte (bftdt), po6le {piidl). 2. Like u-^d (oiii, §14, 3, lache, §8, 1), ^vlien preceded by r in the same syllable. Ex. : Frold (frml), je crols, crolre, droit, droite, trois, refroidi, rol, etfrol, croise. So also, niois (mud), jo bois, and some similar ones. [Exc— Oignon (dno).] 29. On (ofi, oil). — Has tim sounds : — 1. Like u (sou, §11, I), evorywlicre when forming a syllable of itself. Ex. : Coup (/.7(), doux, gout, jour, amour, rouge, Louvre, route. 2. Like ii (oui, §14, 3), when forming one syllable with a following voiml. Ex. ; Oui [hi), ouate, ouest, souhait (mt), tintouin {tetve).. .'iO. Oy.— Likew + a (oui, §14, 3, and niadamc, §8, 2), when final. Ex. : Leroy (hrfid). 2. Like w + ou,ul w,th a renewed effort of utterance, as in « roo,„.,„ate ' when ;arefully pro' u iTiKisT ^'""^^•"^"^•^' ^^-^ -"""^ -" ^e denoted by the doubled ynS. N.uh sounds are, ,n any case, cluefly characteristic of careful or elevated diction. 10. lib.— Like b (bas, §15, 1). E,. : Bas r'^^U, barbare, beau, syllabe, plomber (plohej, abb,'., sabbat. i ..;ri?~ / /"' '"' '- ^""'''' L«^^^^'r«' ^-^"^ some others. 2. ,, ^„„^ Y^, 2) IS .sonnci^^ m a tew words (mostly foreign) : Club (kllcbj, nabab, I 'l<'b, etc. ; hut Christophe Colomb (cdlo), after nasal.] 41. Cc. — Has ttco sounds : — lfri!oT>~\" T'f ""^ ^''f ',^^ ^' generally .^7.„^ after a nasal : Banc (ba), in fin!/' ?" ^"^ ""^ •^""*' ^'''^■' ^""^^'"^^ - before a vowel when final, or before a pause), and in croc (kro), ^f-checs (rS, ]. estnn...e Itabac, and others rarer. 2. For words na -ct. see dictionary.' ^o-y 18 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 41-45.] (gare, §15, 4) in second (serjH) and derivatives. 4. ee=^k + k in : Accla- mation, its cognates, and some other learned words. ] 2. Like s (sel, §15, 13). Thus, before o, i, y and with cedilla before a, o, u. Ex. : Ciel (sidl), ceci, cela, ioi, cygne (sin), place, ^a (nd), pla^ant, re^ois, re^u. So also, the second o of cc (the first =/;) before e, 1 : Kcch» (ahst), accident. NoTK.— In conjugation the « sound of o when required before u, o, u, is denoted by 9 : Placer, pla^ant ; recevoir, re^u, etc. 42. oil. — Has two sounds : — 1. Like s (chat, §15, 14). Thus, generally. Ex. : Chat (M), cliaud, chose, chercher, machine, riche, chute. 2. Like k (car, §15, 6). Thus, in most words from Greek, and m foreign tcords. Ex. : Chaos (kdd), chteur, cholera, chr6tien, 6cho, yacht (Idk), Enoch, Michel-Ange (mikid ah), Munich. [Exc. — 1. Like 5 in : Achille (d§il), Michel, archiduc, archeve(|ue, jhimire, monarchic, cherubin, punch (poS), and others. 2. ch is :tleut in almanach.] 43. Dd.— Like d (dit, §15, 2). Ex. : Dit (di), dame, de, d6, dire, dorer^ dur, salade, mo'), guide, guise, languir^ Enghien. Note 2. — The S sound (jour, §15, 18) when recjuired before a, o, u (generally in conjugation), is denoted by go (e silent) : Mangeant (mar.a), niangoons, geai (2(^), goole, Georges, gagcure ((jdziir). [Exc. — 1. u is munded in : Aiguille (e'j&n), aiguiser, lingual (legiidl), linguiatc f/ej/mst), le Guide, Guise, their derivatives, and a few other words. 2. In aigue, e takes trema to show that u is sounded. ,'}. Final g (§39, 1), is ijenerally sounded in foreign words ; Grog, hui/i- l)Ug, ijouding, whig, Lessing.] 46. Gn. — Like n (vigne, §15, 10). Thus, generally. Ex. : Vigne (vin), agneau, gagner, signal, magnifique, I'Alleniagno. [Ex(!. — 1. In a number of learned words gn=:f; + n: Cognition ( l'd;j. Nil.— Like n (nid, §15, 9). Ex : Nid (m) ananan, nature, cabane, le cap Horn (dm), bonne (lion), donner (dune). [Kxc-l. n is siknt when it ia the ,h,n of a nasal vowel (§33 !)• N . .a (no). 2. nn =n + n in such words as annales (dnndl), innovation an), I tolc'.nu.e (ptolrmr), appeler (dple), application (dplih).UO. [Lxc. -Final p (§39. 1) is sormded in : Cap (edp), croup, sloop and a few o hers. 2. p is ,ihnt in : Baptr.me (hdU.n), baptisor, conipte, dompter, sculpter, pron,pte, and their cognates; .UuU in sept (set septionie (all others with sept sound p). 3. ph.: /• (flni S15 'i\\ Philos ,phie (Jlldzdjii), etc.] • ^ ' '•'' ^^ •• 55. Qq (qii).— Like Ic (cjir, §15, 6). Ex.: Cinq rve/!;;, quality (mUr), quantit6, quatro, q„e, q„el quoi (hui), question, qui, bouquet, c^loqucnt, Charles-Quint [^xc-l. Final q (rare) is regularly mounded: Cinq, coq, etc , but is >^ilent in cniq before consonant or h aspirate of a word multiplied by it 2 , cinq jours (si Mr) ; hut le cinq (.eh) mars (mdr.). 2. The u of q„ ; aadrupede, lo,i„ace, in their cognates and in some rarer words .^. Snmlarly „ of qu^^" (§14, 2) before c, i in <^cjuestre (eku^.tr) e.juilateral, quintuple, le Quirinal and some rarer words ] demoted iTv^'^'^v" ' """' " '"^""' '^''^^^ ^ ^^ ^ in inflection, itis denoted by q„ : Vamcre, vainquez ; public, publique. 56. Rr.— Like r (rare, §15, 12). Ex. : Rare (rare), rose, riche, barbare, drap, gris, p6re, dormir amour, arroser Cardie';, torrent r^dmj e, ciormir, ,J,^''-/' ^"'"^ ^ (§^9, 2) is silent in infinitives in -or, e.g., donner ^^«.;, .s, . «. in most norcns and «./,•.. in -er (-ier) of t.o or Lre sylla os,e.,.,boucherr^..^.V,aanger,entier,%er,ai^ ^-^^^sounde^n.rnonosollal>les,e.o.,fer(J^r), fier, hier,etc., in : Amer \(a>n,r), cudler (r^^), enfer, hiver, and in foreign proper n^neT '..., Jupiter, etc. 2. rr=.-|-. in the future and oo:.//aeqX7r' [courir, n,ourIr, qu.rlr and their compounds, ..,, , je courrai (kurr^ !"■ ^. .-'cmo, m words in irr-, ..,/., irrc'-gulier and many such and lu some words like errata (,rrdtd), corroded, interW.gne, efc ] M FRENCH ORAMMAR. [57-60. 57. Ss. — lias tvx) sounds : — 1. Like s (scl, §15, 13). Thus, when initial (or initial in part of a compound), and g^encrally before or after a consonant within a word. Ex. : 8el (set), sa, sur, silence, splendide, station, vraisemblamWo (wtsfinibldU), parasol, esp^rer, ahsurde (dlmird), bourse, danser. So also, ss always : Casser (alnd), tasse, la Suisse. 2. Like z (zone, §15, 17). Thus, when between vowels. Ex. : Chose (Uz), rose, poison (pfidzd), ruse, hasard, vis.te, maisop (mi-zo), plaisir, d(''Hagri''able. {lS,xc.—Fiiial 8 (§39, 1) is sounded in : Atlas (dttda), bis, jadis, fils (Jis), mars (mars), hdlas, omnibus, ours, and some rarer words. So also in most proper names, e.j/., Gil Bias (bids), Mars, etc. 2. Within words 8 is silent in many proper names, e.f/., Dufresne (dilfrhi), Vosges (vdz), etc. ; siknt in words with des-, les-, etc, e.;/., Descartes (ddcdrtj, lesquels, mcsdames ; but sounded in Xavier de Maistre (rriMr), Malesherbes, Montesquieu, Robespierre, and rarer words. 3. s in trans- before a vowel=2 : Transaction, etc. ; btit transir (trS?isir). 4. G^sir (sdzir), but in conjugation : Ilsgisent (zis), etc. 5. Note the following : Fils (/s, almost universal), gens {ya, occasionally and fam- iliarly gas), lis {li in fleur-de-lis, elsewhere lis), mcers {moers, rarely mcer), os (sing, os or 6, plur. generally 6), tous (tu, as adj., elsewhere generally tu^). For sens see dictionary.] 58. Sc. — Like s (sel, §15, 13) before e, i, y, and like 8 + k (car, §15, G) before a, o, u. Ex. : Seine fscMJ, seie, Scylla ; scandale f'.sMrfa^j, discours, Esourial. 59. Sch. — Generally like s (chat, §15, 14). Ex. : Scliisme (Sism), Scliah, Schiller. [Exc. — Like 6 + ^' in seli^nia (skdmd), and a few others. 60. Tt. — Has ttco sounds : — 1. Like t (terrc, §15, 15). Thus, generally. Ex. : Terre (tet-), table, vertu, tote, votre, amitie (dmitie), question, mixte, chrc^tien, nous portions (portlo), assiette (asUt), attraper (atrdpd). 2. Like « (scl, §15, 13). Thus, jn words with -ti- whose English equivalents have the sli or cy sound, as in 'nation,' 'prophecy.' fiO-63.] THE CONSONANTS. 23 c, maisop Ex. : I'ortion (pdr»io), ainhitieux ((flmlij), easentiel, partial, pl6ni- potentiaire, inertie, patience, initial, initier, aristocratic (dristdkrdsi), propln'tiu, I'Kgyptien. So also : Sati^'t^ (sasidU), Miltiade, balbutier (hdlhilsU), and rarer words, [Exc— I. Final t (§39, 1) is munded in : Net (net), dot, fat, est^ ' east,' ouest, Ciirist {hid .J.'Sii3Christ--.y,~/i kri). So also in : DtHicit, prtjterit and some other borrowed words, and in many proper names, cjj. , IJrest, etc. , and generally in words in -ct, e.g. , abject (dh.^cM), strict, etc. 2. Xote : TJut {hil or hiif, the latter more common, especially as final word or before a pause), fait, n. m., {fit, pi. /r;), sot (so, sometimes aoO- For several words in -pect, -ct, see dictionary. 3. tt--< + i! in a very few words : Cnittural ((juttilrdl), Gambetta, etc. 4. th is silent in asthme (dsm), isthme, Goth.] 61. Vv, Ww.— 1. Like v (vite, §15, Ifi). Ex. : Vite (vit), vanite, venu, vin, vous, vivre, savoir ; wagon (vdijo), warrant (vdra), Avril, Weimar. 2. w^u (oiii, §14, 3) in some words from English. Ex. : Railway (rmd), whig (mHU. QUANTITY OF VOWEL SOUNDS. «8. llurc degrees of leii^^th, lon(j^ half-louq .M,nd shnti are coiiimonly distiiis-uislicd ns follows (Hiinl 'silent c be- in^'" disrco-a r(l(>d) : — 1. A final roar.l mund (including- 7iasals) is short. Ex. : Fiiil, vie, lone, parl6, ridoau, sot, mala, fracas, Canada, donnor, enfant, parlerons. [Exc— Dlx, six, hult before a consonant or li aspirate, and a few exclamations, e.;/., ah !, oh !, etc.] 2. Finn! vowels when .'bounded with follouinq cn??.'re.s), avalauclie (drd/a.S), salnte (se.t), n.onde (md.d) ; je passe ry^^h.sj, faute (fo.t), ixviive(6.fr), zone (z6.n), fosse (fd.s), meule (mU.l) ; relne (ri^.n), ronne (r^n) ; cap (Up), cape, glace, atroce, salade, poche, marine. [Exc— The letters a, 6, t, 6, ft, eft as final vowel sounds are gener- nUy long, even when not before an r. z, .§, r, ^ s.niiid : Grficefgrd.p.), ftnc (<).v), portAtcs (porta.t), fete (f^.ij, Sle (U), ^pftre (iSpltr), ^rdle (drd.l), flute (j!iU), jeftne (z6.7ij.] M iti '! * I 1 ■•Pi 20 FKENC'll ({RAM MAR. [fis-vn. a As npponrs from theses niliiH, fotnj mtn4 smiKh nv(j found oNhf in tlw stress -fwar'nui sif/hthh'. Tlir Vowel sounds of hiW-stri-ss-hi'onHij s,i//al>li's arc ri'-ulnrly cithor hidf-lonq or shoii (pnictic'illy short). Ex. : (Imcieuse, l.f»lfl, fmn<,-aiH, gofit.M-, uuilHonetti-, lnll.us^IMlit^. LIAISON AND KLISION. «9. French when uttered, rciilly coiisists. not of /nm/.v. ns in the printed i-n-e, but of suUdhh' (jrotips: (^u'avez. vous ditV ( h't rv ni (fi ). 70. Within a sijlldh/r qnmp, but not elsewhere, a hnnl eonsonaut (whetlier usually sounded or not) is sounded m one svllable with tlu^ initial vowel sound ot the uext word.' This is ealled in French ' Unison - ' linking-, ^ioiiiin^''* ' !• 71. A few of the consonants chanjyc their sound in liaison. Thus, linal h or xz, d /, j^r^Ar, f^«^, while the n of a nasal is carried on and the nasal vowel loses pa it of its nasality. NOTK.-I.. the Uaimn of ..osals, usnije varies from almost full misality to nlmost total absence of il . 72 The division of a, sentence into syllable j,n-oups depends ehietlv on the closeness of connection m sense and construction. The i)rincipal ^n-oups arc :— 1. Subject, Predicate, Completion : C'est uu l.oii ^m\(si't^himdmi). Nous avons acheti^ de heaux habits (miz droz dSfr de h,r: din). 2 Tl.c Verb with the Pronouns, Negatives, etc., grouped about it : II ne vous en a pas achet.', (il m vuz an d p<)zd§fe). Leur enave/vons iamais achetu ? (/,v..r nil dvd rn Mmf'Z dStd). ^ 3 Preposition, Article, Adjective, Substantive: Sans eux (mzfi); Irs honnnes (R-z dm) ; mes anus (virz dmi) : deux heures (cUiZiV,.r) ; de housann^(h^K:dmi):m^Hiu^g\u^mr(.v.s^l:Apu.r):nonn^e^xveH(na'v iirhic), qu'a-t-il ? (-quo a-t-il?), J'ai ( -;je ai), jusqu'i'i (~ju»(iue h), s'il ( =^8l il). 74. PUNCTUATION. I. The sanii! puiic'tuatioii marks aro used in French as II iMl^llSll. [MHIlt. virgulo. point ot virgule. tleux points. point trintoiTogation iioint (ruxclaimition. Tlioir French names are :- - trait (runion. [ ] crochet8. accolado. f \ * astorisciuo. t croix do renvoi. — tirut, or tiret e.r), fcte (/^.t), torre (te.r), je parlais f'^e pdrU)^ Cambruy (kdhre), roino (rd.n), Ney f?/(V> P'lyer (tpi:le). 9. tf. — Fin r/^^, faini f/e^, salnte (sS.t), Reims (res), ploln (2)l§), simple (se.pf), synibole (nS^tol), syntaxe (setdhs), je vieudrai (ze vledri)^ soln f.s'/'/^j, baragoulu (hdrd(jve), 10. /.— Fiiii (fvi), difficile (difisil). 11. (J. — Guved/d.r), guerre (gk.r), second (seg5), Enghieu (S(jl§). 12. h. — h'lxomme (I dm). 18. i— Flnl (fni), lie (U), lyre (li.r). 14. 1 - Vlandof'?'?a.r;?^, aYeul f'oJttV^, yeux f'?tf j, fille f^^?^, travailler (trdrclie), travail (trdvd.i), grt^sil (grdzil). 15. k. — Car ('/i'a.rj, accorder (dkanU), c\\vi'.tiG-a.(krel1e), cinq (se.k), bouquet (httkd), ae«^u6rir (akeri.r), kilo (kil6), maxime (mdhnm), &&nS\x\\])\\v (mkepiLr). 16. ^.— Lard f /a. >•;, aller i^a/Jj. 17. m. — 3fal (mdl), honinie (dm). 18 n. — Nid (iri), donner (don^J. 19. n. — -Vigne (inn). 20. 6. — Zone (zd.n), cote (kote ), fjiute (fd.t), boaute (h6t4). 21. 0. — Mort (mo.r), Paul (pol), album (dlhom), '22. o. — Bon (ho), conite (co.t). 23. (i. — Peu ( p/i), les b(i.'ufs (le hO), jeune (jQ.n). 24. IK. — Leur (lof.r), coeur (kce.r), orguoil (orgee.lj, coil (oa.i). 25. ce. — Un (oe), parfuni (pdrfoe ), h jeun (d Soe), 26. p. — Pas f/*a^, application fa/;//AYlfs'?oj, absolumenc (dpsdlilma). 27. r. — Rare (rd.r), torrent (tora). 28. s. — Sel (sfi), casser (kds4), scene (sdn), place (plds), facade (fdsdd), la portion (Id pdrsto), soixante (mdsa.t). 29. i. — Chat f 5a j, scliisme (§ism). 30. t. — Terre (td.r), attention (dtasto). 31. M. — ?'Oii (su), ou f'?*^, gout f'y«j, aou (xi), 32. Tt. — Oui (ni), moi (miid), tramway (trdmM). 33. M. — Une (il.n), qu'il fut ('A; i^/^'i), il out (il iij, nous oumes (7iuz u.m). 34. ?«■ — Suite (mit). 35. I'. — Vite (vit), wagon (vdyb), neuf heures (noav (e.r). 76, 77.] PHONETIC TRANSCRIPTION. 29 travailler 36. s.— Zone (z6.n), rose (rd.z), deux heurea (d6z oe.r), exact (eijzdkt). 37. i.— Jour (zu.r), kg6 (dz4), mangeant (mSidt). Examples of Phonetic Transcription. 77. 1. Un jour au commencement d'une bataille, Henri « zu.r 6 komasmH d il.n bdUiA Sri (^uatre ne dit A. ses soldats que ces mots : " Je suis votre kdtr ne di d s^ soldd ke si md ie sui vdtr roi, vous etes Frangais, voiL'i I'ennemi." rud vuz i.t JrSs^ vudld I hwii. 2. Un chien traversait une riviere sur un pont avec nn & m trdvirsH il.n rivU.r su.r de pd di'ik '& morceau de viande dans sa gueule. II apergut dans I'eau morsd de m^.d da sd gO.l U dper.iu da I 6 son ombre, et s'imagina que c'etait un autre chien qui son o.hr i s imdzind ke s etet &■% o.tr §ls Jd portait aussi de la viande. Aussitot, voulant la lui portH dsi de Id i^a.d odd vula Id lui arracher, il lacha le morceau qu'il tenait et se jeta dans drdU il IdM le mdrso k il tend 4 se Md da Teau. Mais il n'attrapa ni la viande ni I'image et il eut i 6 itJz il n dtrdpd ni Id via.d ni I hnd.z 4 il a toules les peines du monde k regagner le bord. ttit U pi.n du mo.d d 7 ln4 le bd.r. ' 3. Du pain sec et du fromage du j)^ ^f'k d da fromd.z C'est bien peu pour dejeuner. s & Ms p'i pu.r dd.zdii^ On me donnera, je gage d me donrd ze ijd.z Autre chose {\ mon diner ; o.tr §d.z d mo dind Car Didon dina, dit-on, kd.r dido diiid dit o Du dos d'un dodu dindon. du d6 .1 de, dodti dcd^\ so FRENCH GRAMMAR. [78-81. i='^:r.t II. LESSON I. 78. Present Indicative of avoir, * to have.' Plur. nous UVOH8, ice have. vous tivez, you have. ils out, they have. SiNO. j'ai, / have. tu as, thou hafit (you have). il a, he (it) haa. elle a, she (it) has. elles ont, they (f.J have. [Pronunciation. — z o mn e r>. lis out un jardm et une niaison. (1. Nous avons un ini et un fren. et elles ont une aniie et une sa>m- 7 Tu as un Iiviv, et elle aune ponime et une ,,oire. 8. lis on une maison et aussi un jardin. 9. Marie a un frere, et ellTa aussi une sceur. 10. Jean et Marie ont une sceur iA 1. bhc iias a brotlier and a sister too. 2. John has a l.orse, and lie has also a earria«-e. 3. We have a house ■ itnd(f). 5 rhey(ni.)have a horse and carriao-e >. lou (2nd sin«-.) have a l)rotlier and sister. 7. M^vy ■i.MS an api,lo ; John has a pear. 8. We have a book • vou lave a pear 1). I have a hrotlu-r, and you (2nd sin ^^ luve a friend (ni.). 10. John ]ias a horse and earrk^e^ iiud I have a house and g-arden. taiiic.re, 82. LESSON II. Present Indxejitive of etre, to be.' Sixa. je suls, I am. tu es, t'//ou art (yon arc ) il est, he, (it.) is. (elle est, ,shfi (if J is. ) Vlvr. nous soiiniies, we are. voiis t'tes, 1/on are. ils sont, they are. {olloHi^ant, they (f.) are.) lPHO^.~,e siit, til ^, il k, d i\ nu som, vuz U, il .5, d so.l 32 FllKNCII (3RAMMAR. [83-85. »ii. The Definite Articlo. Sing. Pj.ur. F. la (r)/' ^''■''* **"*' ^^'''• [PUON.— ^e, hi, III.] Observe : For the form r see ijV'^- H4. The dciiiiite a,rticic is repeated before each noun to which it refers : La iiiaison et le jardin. The liouse and garden. L'onclo et la tante. The uncle and aunt. Les frtjrea et los stuurs. The brothers and sisters. 85. Plur;il of Nouns and Adjectives. The plural of a noun or {idjective is regularly formed by ndding s to the singuhir : Le bon roi, la bonne reine. The good king, the good queen. Les bons rois, lea? bonnew reines. The good kings, the good queens. The principal exceptions are : — , 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -x and tnasc. adjs. in -s, -x remain unchanged in the plural : Le bras, la voix, le nez. The arnn, the voice, the nose. Les bras, les voix, lea nez. The arms, the voices, thi> noses. Le mur est bas et vieux. The wall is low and old. Les murs sont bas et vieux. The walls are low and old. 2. yoans and adjectwes in -au, nouns in -eu and seven nou^is in -on add x instead of s : Le noyau, le chateau, le jeu, le The kernel, the castle, the game, voeu. tlio vow. Les noyaux, les chateaux, les jeux, The kernels, castles, games, les viBUx. vows. Le beau livre. Les beaux livres. Tlie line book. The fine books. The seven nouns are : Bijou(x), jeivel, caillou(x), 2>ebble, chou(x), cab- bmje, genou(x), hiee, hibou(x), oid, joujou(x), toy, pou(x), louse. But Clon(8), nail, sou(8), half-pmny, etc., are regular. 3. Nouns (and the commoner adjectives) in -al change •al to -au and add x, as above. Uu gt''U('Tal rival. A rival general. Deux gt'nL^-aux rivaiix. Two rival generals. But )Ujt Bia(H), hall, carui*,v»l(8), carnival, and a few rarer uouua. S5.] DEFINITE ARTICLE. 33 4. Notc> : CKfl pi. yeux eye; travail, pi. tra,VH„x, ^^rA:,• *;iel, pi. cieiix, heaven, sky. ' ' EXKIK LSK II. La mt're (md.rj, mother. Le monsieur fmesli), gentleman. La montre (md.tr), watch. Oil (h), or. Lo ptjre (pLr), father. 8oiia (m), under. Sur (m.rj, on. La table, f., (tdblj, table. L'arbre, m,, (d.rhr), tree. l/iugont, m., (drM), money. Avco (arch), witii. La l)<)ite (hi'idtj, box. I.(i I'liat ('^a^, cat. Lc cliion ^l2(5j, (log. La dame (ddm), lady. Dans (da), in. L'onfant, m. or f., (afa), child. .4. 1. II est, il a, je suis. 2. Tu es, tu as, elle est. a -Noussommes, vous avez, elles sont. 4. Vous etes, nouM avons, lis out. 5. lis soiit, j'ai, elle a. B. 1. We are, thou art, you have. 2. We have, thou liast ho has. 3. I am, she is, they (f.) are. 4. Thev (m \ a,rc^ he is you are. 5. They (f.) have, I have, he is ^ '^ O. 1. Lcs eiifants sont avec le pore et Ja mf^re 2 Le trcre ou la sc^ur est dans la maison. 3. La montre est a,vec 1 arpnt dans la boite. 4. Le chat et ie chien sont vn-lLf "^''r ?• !• I^« J^^^^sieur et la dame sont dans la yjitu 0. b La dame est avec les enfanta sous l'arbre .laii^lejardin. 7. Les chevaux et la voiture sont sous laibu 8. Je suis dans le jardin avec Marie et Jean ■». Ui dame dans la voiture est la m6re. 10. Le livre est sur la table dans la maison. IL Jean et Marie out le chien % dvn nu, ami vu, n t il, 5 t dl. 2. sf^U, d til, d t il, d t el, som mi, U vii, so t il, «« t cL] Obs ■ 1. The pronoun followinK' the verb is joined to it hy a hyphen. 2 Whenever the 3 sing, of a verb et.ds in a vowel, -t- is inserted between it and the followu.g pronoun, as in a-t-il?, a-t-elle?. 87. Romarks on Interrogation. 1. In an interroga- tive sentence, the ^j6>\smflZ jwmwow/i N»7>y(^c/ (so also ce =;it, etc., and on = ' one', ate.) follows the verb. See paradigm ^ 2^ But when the subject is a noun, the word order is Noun-Verb-Prononn : L'lioin.no est-il 1;\ ? I« *'»« """^ ^here ? Joan Ji-tll moil ohapeau 1 Has John my hat '; 3. Questions are also asked by interrogative trords, as in English : Qnlestlfi? Qu'a-t-il? Whoiathere? What haa he ? Ou eat votre ohapeau ? AVhero is your hat ? 4. The two above methods may, in certain cases, be combined : Votre chapeau ov\ est-il ? Where is your hat ? Oi\ votre pfere a-t-il son argent 1 Where has your father his money : 5 Bv prefjxinq the word^ est -co qne ?, lit., Ms it (the case) thn^?,' any statement may be turned into a question : „ u , You have my hat. Vous avez mon chapeau. -l, ,.■} E«t.ce que voua ave. mon chapeau 1 Have you my hat - 88.] PRESENT INDICATIVE. 85 88. Use of oui, non. 1. In answer to a qnestion, oiii = 'yes,' lion -'no,' are followed, lor ])oliteness, by iiioiisiciir (madaiue, etc.), or by a complete phrase or sentence : Avez-vous mon chapeau? — Non, Have yoii my hat? No, (air), or, monsieur, or Onl, jo I'ai, or Oul, Yes, (I liave it), or, Yes, (madam, I madame, j'ai votie cliapeau. have your hat). EXERCISE III. Le chapeau (Mpd), luit. LY'cole, f. , (I'kdl ), school. Ti't'glise, f. , (('(jli.z), church. L'liabit, in., (dhi), coat. Ici (isi), here. L;i f/d), there. ]\liulame ( inddd/nj, madam. ^falnan (vuivia), iiiamina. Monsieur (mcHvi), sir. A. 1. As-tu? Est-il? (lu'il a ? A-t-il ? Ont-ils ? Non (no), no. 0\\'l(u), where? Oui (ni), yes. Que ? (he), what ? Que, conj., (ke), that. Qui V (ki), wlio ? La rue (rii), street. lue village (vild.z), village. Est-ce (ju'il est? 2. Est-ce 3. Elst-ce que je suis ? Est- ce (|ue vous avez ? Sonimes-nous ? 4. Est-ce qu'ils ont ? Sont-elles? Est-ee que tu as? 5. Avons-nous ? Est-ce 'ju'elles sent? Est-ce que j'ai? 6. Es-tu? Est-ce^que tues? Est-ce que nous sommes ? 7. Avez-vous? Etes- vons ? Suis-je ? Jl 1. Ami? Ar: thou? Thou art. 2. Is he? Are tlK'y(m.)? Are we? 8. Are you? Have you? Have thoy(f.)? 4. They (m.) are. Havel? I have. 5. Hast thou ? Has he ? Have we ? 6. We have. Have you ? Have they (m.)? 0. 1. Jean ou est-il ? 2. II est dans la rue. 3. Quest le chapeau? 4. II est sur la table dans la maison. 5. (^u'avez-vous dans la boite, monsieur ? 6. J'ai I'argent etla montre. 7. Ou sommes-nous, maman ? 8. L'eglise ou est-elle, madame ? 9. Elle est dans le village. 10. Avez- vous une ecole ici? 11. Oui, madame, nous avons une ocole dans le village. 12. Qui est \k avec le monsieur et la, dame? 13. Qui a le livre ? 14. Marie a le livre. 15. Oil sout les poireei? 16. Elles sont dans la boite. 17. Marie a-t-elle une sceur? 18. Non, madame, mais 36 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [89-91., 4 41 ell(3 a un fr^r^. 19. Jean, est-ce que, tu cs lA, ? 20. Qui, mamaii, je siiis ici dans le jardiii, 21. Ijcs lut^ssieurs fit, les dames oil sont-ils ? 22. lis soiit dans la niaiison. D. 1. Whore arc tlie children? 2. They arc under the trees in the garden. 8. What have they (ni.) in the box? 4. They have a hat in the box. 5. Where are tlio lady and f^centleman ? 0. They arc in the liousc;. 7. Is tlie churcli in the vilhige ? 8. Yes, the church is in the village, and the school too. 9. Are the horses under the trees? 10. No, sir, they are in the street. 11. Where arc you (2nd sing.) Mary? 12. I am here, mamma, under the tree. 13. Is the dog tlicre under the table ? 14. No, madam, he is in the street. 15. Have you the hats and coats? IG. .Tohn and Mary, are you there? 17. Yes, mammj), we r»re here. 18. Have the gentlemen the horses and dogs ? 19. Who has the hats ? 20. They arc there on the table. LESSON IV. 89. The Possessive Adjective. Maso. Fem. Plur. Masc, Fkm. Pmtr. mon ma (mon) mos, mtj. notro notro nos, oar. ton ta (ton) tos, fhi/. votro votro vos, ]/our. son sa (Bon) ses, his, her, its. lour lour lours, their. ■ [Pron. — 1. mo, 7na, wL 2. W, id, tt. 3. so, sd, sL 1. notr, ndtr, nfi. 2. votr, voir, v6. 3. Ue.r, Ue.r, Im.r.l Obft. : 1. The forms men, ton, son in parenthesia are used instead of nia, ta, sa, bfifore a vmvcl or Ix inutc: Mon uiuie, my friend (i.), ton histoire (f.), ?/'W »t.()r>i, son aimable tante, his amiable aunt. 2. Since son (sa, scs) means equally- ' his,' •her,' ' its,' it can only be known from the context which is meant. 90. Agreement. A possessive adjective agrees with the noun denoting the ohject possessed, and is repeated before each noun to wliich it refers : J'ai ma plume. Elle a son livre. I have my pen. She has hor Iwok. li a sa plume. Nous avons notro He has liis pen. We have our argent. money. lis otit lours li vres et lours plumes. They have tholr books and pens. dl. In speaking to a person of his (or her) relatives, the title monsieur (pi. 'mt;.vsicur,s), mjidame (pi. mt^^-damcs'), 91-05.] THE PERSONAL I'RONOTTN. 37 mademoiselle (pi. ?>2e,s'(lemoiaelle.s') is often i)olitcly pre- fixed, but never in speaking to others of oner's own relatives : Mudame votre infere est-elle malade ? Is your mother ill ? Ma mire n'est pas malade. My mother is not ill? 92. The Pronoun le, la, les. The personal pronoun, direct object, of the third person is : — MaSC. FeM. VlAlK. lo (r), him^ it. Itt (1'), her, it. les, them. [PRON.— /f', Id, IL"] Obs. : 1, The forms are exactlj- like those of the definite article, bujist.-ind, not before nouns, hut instead of nouns. 2. For the forms in parenthesis, see §73. 93. Position and Asreement. Personal pronoun objects in French are (with one important exception, 5^15.->) placed immediately before the verb, not after it like their English equivalents. For agreement, see §81 : Oi\ est la r^gle ?— Marie I'a. Where is the ruler ? Mary has it. Avez-vous le papier et les plumes ? Have you the paper and pens. — .Te les ai . I have thoin. 94. Use of uoici .and uoila. 1. Voici (niidsi) = ' here is ' or ' here are,' and voil«\ (vudld) = ' there is ' or ' there are,' Sire preceded (like verbs) by the protiouns and fol- lowed by the nouns they govern. 2. Voiei and voili\ must be distinguished from est and sont + ici and lj\ : La dame est iei. Voltsiladame. Elles sont 1{\. Les voll^. The lady is here. Her© is the lady. They are there. There they are. Note.— Volcl and voili\ are made up of voi(8)= ' see '+ci = 'here' and l{i = ' there' (lit., 'see here,' 'see there'). 95. // est and c'est 1. Translate 'he,' 'she,' 'it,' 'they' by il(s), elle(s) with etre + an adj., or + a pre- dicate noun with adj. force : Elle est jeune. II est ag^. She is young. He is old. Cette fleur est jolie ; elle est jolie. This flower is pretty ; It is pretty. II est m^decin. Elles sont mar- He is a doctor. They are trades- ohandes. v^otnen. Elle est AUemande. She is (a) German. 38 FRENCH r.RAMMAR. [90. I 2. But tninslMtc. 'lie,' 'she,' etre + rt deternunate mmn. Cost nil l)on mrdociii. EhI-co uu Frauyai.s 'i Co sout (lea hommes cc'sU-bres. Soiit-covosaniis? C'est une jolie dame. NoTE-Anounwiihanrtr^l^•?^aJ[v.>.wm^v rt(7jcc/w, etc., or in the ynr*dtive. von- Btruction ie said to be di'tcnniiinte. it/ 'they ' l)y ce with ire is j; good doctor. la ho a Frcuchman ? Tlicy are celebrated men. Are thoy yi)ur friends '! She is a i)retty lady. La cliambre (Sa.hr), room. Le champ (Sr>f, field. Le crayon (hrilo), pt'ucil, DerriiTC ((Jf'rti.r), beliind. Devaut (dera), beforq, in front of L'^curie, f., (dliirl), Htal)le. L'encre, f., (n.h-j, ink. EXI'^IW ISF- IV. Le fils C/s'Jj son. L;Vl»as (Id hi)), yonder. La malic (mdl), trunk. Le papier (jMptr), paper. La plume (jdiimj, i)cn. La porte (pd.rf), door. A prt'sent (prdzci), now. J. La fllle (Ji.l), daughter. A. 1. Oil est-ee que tu as tcs plumes, mn, fiUe ? 2. les al dans ma boite, mnman. 3. 'Vow pn.pier et ton encre oil sont-ils, mou tils?. 4. Les voil;\, mon prre, sur la tabic dcrricre la porte. 5. Vos chevaux, oil sout-ils iY present, monsictir ? 6. Us sont dans I'ecuric. 7. Qui a mes livres ? 8. Voici vos livres. 9. Vos chapeaux sont dans la malle dans votrc cluunbre. 10. Jean a sa plume et Marie a son papier. 11 . Oil sont vos enfants, madame ^ 12. Les voib\, lA-bns,dnnslc champ. IB. Est-ce que yous avez vos plumes et vos crayons? li. Oui, monsieur, nous l(^s avons. 15. Ofi est le chien? IG. Le voih\ de- vant la porte. 17. Voil^ les chiens avec les enfants sous les arbres l^-bas. 18. Les messieurs et les dames sont avec mon pere et ma mere dans le village. 19. (^^ui est la dame devnnt la porte? 20. C'est ma mere, monsieur. 21. Qui sont les messieurs sous les arbres devant I'ecole ? 22. Ce sont mon pere et mon frere. B 1. Where are vour brothers and sisters ? 2. They are in tne field unde'r the trees. 3. Who has the pen and paper ? -1. I have them. 5. There is our house yomler ; who is the gentleman before the door? 6. It is my 96. 97.] NEGATIVE CONJUGATION. 89 father. 7. Their hats and coata are on the table behind the door. 8. Are the horses in the tield now? 9. No, sir, tliey are in tlie stable. 10. Have you (2nd sin^.) your ink and paper, my dau^^hter ? 11. No, nuimnia, they are oil tiie table. 12. Are our peneils in the box ? 13. No, here they are. 11. Where is our do^'- ? 15. There he is with the children in the field. 1(5. Has Mary her pen and pencil ? 17. No, sir, John has them. IH. Where is the diurch in your villa^^c? 19. There it is behind the trees. I'D. John has his ])en, an 1 Mary has her pencil. 21. Who •uo the ladies in the carria^j^e ? 22. They are my sisters. J>(J. LESSON V. Nejiiitivo CoiiJus"atlon. [I am not, etc.] Sing. Je no suis jms. tu a'es puH. il u'est iniH. PLtTB. nous no sonimus pas. voua n'etes pas. ils no soiit pci8. [I have not, etc.] Sing, je u'ai pas. tu u'as paH. il n'a pas. Plub. nous n'avous pas. vous n'avez pas. ils n'out pas. [l*HON.— 1. Seiidpd, tiinilpiX, il n a pa,imn di^rypa, vu n dv<^ pd, il II. o pd. 2. §e ne s&i pa, tu n d pd, il n i pii, nu na nom pa, vu n Lt p(i, il nt so pd.] Obxeive: For elision ot o m no, see §73. t)7. Komarks on NoK-ation. 1. The nes-fitive^, ^Zow^/ vith (I verb, consists rcv^-ularly of tfw parts, nc p/ecedintj the verb, and some other word or wordi^ (commonly ttan) following the verb : Je no suis pa« son ami. 1 am not his friend. II n'est point habile. He is not (at all) clever. •io no suis jamais en reta'-d. I am aever late. 11 n'est plus ici. He is no longrt^x here (or h«^ i» not here now). Ils n'ont quo dix francs. They have only ten fraiics, Exc.— Both no and pas jjenerally precede the simple infin. : Donner ou n^^ pas iionner, ' to give or not to give. ' D nvMSMH 40 FllENCn CiUAMMAR. [1)7-100. n M « 2. If the verl. in omitted (l)Ut iindi'i'st<)i)d), tluj iie L^ omitted : E8t-ill.U-IN»Hencoro( = iln'c8t la he there ? Not yet ( ho Ih not puH encore ;i\). , yet there). 3. Nothiiif; ])iit thu persomd prononn (>hj<'d(s) may coiuc beiw'-ci' lie iuid the voi h : A-t-il la plume "i-Tl ae l:t pas. Has ho the pen ? Ho hm not (it). 1)8. Negative Coiijiiiifation liiteiroyratively. [Hare I not /, etc."] SlN(}. ii'ai-je paa 'I n'aa-tu pas? n'a-t-il pas? PlUK. n'avons-iious pa.^ ? n'avo^.-voiis pas ? n'oat-ils i)as 'i [Am I not ^, tti'.'\ SlNO. no suis-jo pas ? n'es-tu pas ? n'est-ilpaa? Pl.nu. no Honimoa-noua pas? ni'los-voiis p:iii'? no sont-ils pas ': [Pbox.— 1. n t\,5 /. :, // '' til /ni, n. d t il /><«, n dro »ii pa, n an' rvpa, n m il pa. 2. ne H&i.h pc), n r til pn, n it il pa, m- soni nu pa, n e.t ru 2Hi, lie ndt il 2"^'li 99 Si *Yes/ in correction or contradiction of a negative, is more 'usually si (or pardon, etc.), not o.ti : Jene i'ai pas. -SI, monsieur, vous I haven't it.-Yc«, (sir,)y..uhave (i< ), I'avez, or MivU si, monsieur, vous or Mxcuse me, (sir,) you have (it). I'avez, or Pai-don, monsieur, voua I'ave/.. o -.r r Voua n'avez pas la Iettre?-Sl, je You have not the letter? Yen, \ I'ai. "'*'^'" ^^^'' 100 Position cf the Adverb. An adverT) is re^ni- hirly placed after the verb (rarely l)etween subject and verb) : Charles porte «o«vent ma canne. Charles often carries my cane. KXERCISE V. Aujourd'hui (dzurdm), to-day. Parce (lue (pars ke), because. L'autre, m. or f., (d.tr), other. La poohe (pd^.), pocket. Chezr§^;,atthehouse,shop,etc.,ol. Pourquoi ? (purhna), why . Le cousin (hize), cousin. Quatre (kdtr), four. La cousine (kuzin), cousiu. Quelquefois (UlkefM), son.etn«eB. 100.] NEGATIVE CONJ LMiATlON. 41 I'.ncoro (,Jh).r), still, yet. Kii retard (t% reta.r), lttt«. L,i tillu (Ji.i), girl. La n)h«i (rol>), tlresB. 1, 1 forrt (fdn.), forest. Toiijmuis (tit^.n.r), always, still. ' .>! t'niiut (fill), franc (about 20 cts.). Troia (trua). Lo gar von (ijdvso), hoy. II est die/ nioii imuhi, lie ia ut my fatlier'u. A. 1. roiir. N'avez-vous })a,s votre livi'c? L'O. Si, monsieur, noiH I'avons. 21. Avez-vous encore nni plume? 22. Je ne I'ai ])lus ; votrc cousine I'a. 2.-). Pour- < luoi n'avcz-vous qu'un clicval ? 24. Parce quo mon pere a r.Mitrc. B. 1. Are you not at my fatlicr's now? 2. No, T am no l()ii;;cr there, I am at my cousin's. 3. Have you only one iiorse? 4. I have four horses and a carriayre. 5. You sometimes. have not your hat. G. Oh yes, here it is. 7. Why is your cousin (f. ) late to-day. 8. She is not late ; she is never late. 9. Are your sisters not yet here? 10. Not yet, they arc still at our cousin's (m.) 11. Have you not sometimes our pens aiul paper? 12. Yes, sometimes, but your brother has them now. 13. Are your sisters at your cousin's (f.) in the village. 14. No, they are no longer there. 15. AVhy have you only three hooks to-day? K). Ik'cause my brother has the others. 17. Our books mid paper are always on the tal)le in the room. 18. I liave only one franc in my pocket, but I have three francs? 42 FRENCH (jIRAMMAR. [100-ioa 4' in a box in luy room. 11). Arc you never late ? 20. les, sonictinics, but 1 am not late to-day. 21. Where has yotir sister her hats and dresses ? 22. She has them in her trunk in her room. 23. Haven't you your books to-day i' 24. Yes, sir, we always have them. LESSON VI. 101. Tlio Rej,nilar Coii.hnrMtions. French verbs arc conveniently divided, accordin- to the intinitivc end- ings -cr, -ir, -re, into three coiijuj;-ations :— I. 11. ^ HI. Donner, to give. F'mir, to finish. Koniprc, to break. Like these reHi)ecti\ely are wmjugated all regular verbs with corres- ponding inlinitive eliding. 102. KciiiJirks oii Coiijus-iitioii. 1. The distinctions o^coke, mood, tense, etc., are in ^-eneral as in Englisli. 2. Tlie distinction between stem (i^'cncrally Invanaltle in "i ^-iven tense) and enclinc} {variable for mood, tense, etc.) is of^-reat imiiortance. 8. Enj4-lish perij)hrastic forms must not he Lderally translated into French : .... {(Uive you?), or Arc you giving?, or Do you give ? 103. Present Indicative of f/owwer, ^«/>, rompre. [I,jive,a7n]i,ju^Mt-(3 also, biter rocfathel y i\.m\ ncAjatwely, nccording- to rules jUready given (^^ 8(), 87, 1)0, 1)7, 1)8) : [1)0 I Hpatk ?, am I speaking !', (tr.] [I cla notfniuli, cun not fidshiii.ii, f/r.] [-arlc-jo, or est-cc quo jo pavlo V je no linis pus. ji:,r!es-tu, or est-ce (juo tu paries? tu no finis pas. paile-t-il, w est-ce qu'il parle ? il lie finit pas. piirlons-nous, or cst-ce que nous parlons 'i nous no linissons pr.s. etc. et(j. etc. \^l)o I not hreak ?, am I not hreakhu/ f, etc.] est-cc que je ne roinj)s pas ?• no roinps-tu pas?, or est-ce quo tu ne romps pas?, etc. nc ronipons-nouspas ?, or est-ce que nous ne ronipons pas?, etc. Oils. : 1 . The form parle-je ? ( pdrlc.H) is comnionly avf)i(]o(l by est-oo que? 2. When the 1 sing. pros, iiulic. is a ?«o?/o,s7///a/(/c est-ee que? i« ftlonv. permissiJiU (est-ce ([iio jo romps ?, etc.). But al-jo ?, suis-jo ?, and some others are allowed. 104, The nso of tlio Present Indicative is in gene- ral like that of English, but ol)serve its idiomatic use to doi.jte (chat has been and still contbmes to be : Dopuis ( — ' since ') quand ( — ' v/hen ') How long have you been here ? f?tes-voiis ici ? Jo suis ici depuis trois jours. I Iisive been here for three days {or for tliree days past, or for tlie last throe days). 105. N'est-ce pas?( = lit., 'Is it not?') is equiva- lent to Englisli * Do I not?,' ' Is lie not ?,' ' Had they not ?,' etc., etc. : 11 a rompu ma canno, n'csfc-ee psis ? Ho broke my cano, did lie not ? KSLEIK ISE VI. A fa j, to. L'oncle (o.li), undo. Avant (araj, before (of time). L'ouvrago, m., (nvrd.z), work. La brancho (hrd.s), branch. Parhir ( iidrl('), speak, lia i-'A\mc( kdn ), cane, walking-stick. Petit ( }> little. lK'i)uis (
  • .m), exercise. Midi (midi), noon. Le vont (rd ), wind. De bonne heury. J'^arly. ill I 44 FRENCH (JRAMMAR. [105. A 1. Jean que donno-t-il fi sa iiic'rc? 2. II domic su pluiiic ct hou crayon, a. Nc^us dunnons nos livrcs et nos. ■ themes ;\ notre pi'ofesscur. 4. Pouniuoi ne les donnez- voivs pas fi votre pere ? 5. Finisscz-vous voire ouvrage, mes eiifants? G. Qui, monsieur, nous le linissons. 7. Les en- fants donnent leur ar^-ent h lenr pere. 8. Je parle a wn mere et h ma scuur. \). Mon pe<-e et ma mere parlent ii mon oncle. 10. Le vent rompt les j'-riuids arbres. 1 1 . Les petits iiar^ons n.mpent les brnnclies. 12. Les domest uines fiiiissent leur ouvra^n^ de bonne heurc, n'est-ce lasr 13. Oui, monsieur, lis le llnissent tonjours avant muli. 11 Vous rompez votre canne, n'est-ce pas? 15. ^on. madamc, je nc la romps pas. IG. Pourquoi ne limsspz- vous pas Vos themes ? 17. Farce que nous sommes la- tiffues. 18. Poui-quoi ne parlcs-tu pas h ton frere r* l.». i ar- monsieur, ils les tinissent. 2 t. Marie linit-elle son ouvrage .-' '>5 Qui madame, elle le Unit. 2G. Donnes-tu ton ar^^Mit {\ ton pi're ? 27. Non, monsieur, je ne le donne pas h moi- pere, ie le donne h mon oncle. 28. Depuis qnand h's en- fants sont-ils ici ? 29. lis sont ici depuis une semnme. B 1. Do you finish your Avork early? 2. 1 finish al ways before noon. ?,. AYhv do you not ^'i^^e your exercise to your teacher, my boy (eiffant)? 4. I do give it to my teacher. 5. AVhy is .John breakinj^ the box ? G. He is breaking- it because he is nau^^hty ? 7. Does the Avind not break the i,n'eat branches ? 8. Yes, it breaks the branehe? and the trees too. 9. Are you g-ivinir your pens and pen- cils to your ipother, my children? 10. The servants arc finishin'i,^ their Avork, are they not? 11. No, they are not finishin'i,^ it to-day ; they are tired. 12. Why does that boy nots])eak to'hissislier? 13. Because he is naughty. 14. We are giving our friend a horse and carriage. 1 5. 1 ou give your brother a book. IG. John does not speak to his brother. 1 7. INlarv does not finish lier exercise. 18. You are breaking the cane, are you not? 19. No, sir, lam not breaking it. 20. Mary ncv(-r speaks to hvv cousin (f.-> 21. AVhy does Mary not give her cousin (f.) the book? 105, 106.] GENITIVE AND DATIVE RELATION. 45 ion no ,su iS et 110^ iicz-v'oi;s igc, mes . Los eii- vrlc a Wi\ pari ei it a 1 1 . I.CS iiiestiqiU'S ]-cc lasV ant 111 id i. 15. Koii. 3 linissez Qimes fa- 1<). Par- themes ? iourd'lini. 23. Qui, ouvra ge ? on carg-ent pas h moi? lid Ics oil- mainc. finish al r exercise e it to my 6. He i'^ 3 wind not 3 ]»raiu'hep ^ and pen- rvants arc ey are not does that nanghty. -. 15. Tou t. speak to R. 18. You r, lam not roiisin (f.-)- the hook? 2l'. Because she hasn't it. 23. Why do they (lii.) not give their mother their money? 24. They give it to their father. 25. You do not hnish your work ? 2(). Oil yes (rnnis si), I do finish it. 27. The fathers are speaking to their sons. 28. Tiie little hoy does not finish his work. 2!). The mother and her daughter are finishing their work. 30. IIoav h)iig have the ladies been there? 31. They have been there for a week. LESSOX VII. 100. The Genitive :uul native Relation. 1. A f re- (jiiciit use of de ( - 'of,' etc.) +/7- suhsfafftive is to indicate the poH^Bi^dve or genkice relation : Lt'> mure do Marie. Mjiry's mother [or the mother of Mary) Le pi're do iiion pero. My father's father. La branche d'un arbre. The branch of a tree. 2. A frec^uent use ofji ( -= ' to,' ' for,' etc.) + a suhstantive is to indicate tlie indirect object or datire relation : II parte h sou i)ere. He is s^<'./V>/"<^ tlui article le, les are always contracted as follows : — au(=-dele). »u(=Jilc). dc r ^ 1' (le la J'l la de8 { =-de les). a«x ( =a les). Obs. : No contra. -tiony/iih the vronoxm Ic, la, !«» : -To parlc delodonner, ' lapeak of f,'iviiijr it.' 108. The Dative Personal Pronoun JJrd Person. lul, (to, for) him, or (to, for) her. leur, (to, for) (hem. [Pkon. — l^f'i, fc'-r.] 109. Lni and leur precede the verb (§93), but follow le, la, les : We are speaking to him (or to hor). I am giving Mary a rose. I give her It {or it to lior). I lend the children my books. I lend them (to) thom. Nous lul parlons. Je donne une rose ;\ Marie. Je l.'i I'll donne. Je prete mes livres aux enfants. Je les lour prete. EXERCISE VII. k((i) to at. Demander ('rfcmacJc^, ask, ask f 01 Aimer (hnlu', like, love. La gare (gd.r), (railway-)station. Bien (hw), well. OUir h (dhei.r), obey. Le charpenticrr5ar;)a«?r' ^carpenter. La planche (pla. s), board, plank Cherchcr (Sirsr), look for. Preter (pri'tc'), lend. Le couteau (htto), knife. Le sou (m), cent, half-penny. Doja (dr.^d), already. Le voisin (maze), neighbour. A. 1. Le petit jxnrQon que donne-t-il h son pere? 2. II lui donne le chapeau de sa soeur, n'cst-ce pas ? H. Qui est hVbas dans le iardin dc ton pore ? 4. C'est le cliarpcnticr ; il chcrclie une planclie. 5. La. tille du monsieur, pourquoi n'obeit-elle pas ;\ son professeur ? G. Elle ne lui obeit pas, parce qu'elle jic raiinc pas. 7. Jean demandc un sou {\ son pore. 8. A qui est le livrc sur la table ? 9. II est h la dame. 10. Les chevaux dcs messieurs ne sont plus dans rccuric. 11. Les mallcs dcs dames sont dejfi a la gare. 12. Pourquoi ne pretez-vous pas votre couteau il 109.] DATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 47 lonfnnt? 13. 11 nc (Icmande pns mon coutoau. 14. Les ciirniits do nos amis no lour obcissent i),'i,s toujours. 15. (,)ue dcin.'indez-vous h votre mere? IG. Jc lui demande 'un 'joutcau. 17. Los onfants dc iiotre cousin donnoiit les j)Oiiimos aux cnfants du voisin. 18. Nous protons nos plumes aux cnfants du profbsseur. 19. VoihY les cliicns des messieurs dnns le jardin do votre oncle. 20. Marie domande uno })omme i\ sa more, ot unc poire a s'a soeur. 21. Ousontlos planches du charpontier? 22. Les VGil;\ (lorriere I'ecurie. 23. Jean que clierches-tu dans la boite dc ta soeur ? 24. Je clierclie les plumes de mon p6re. 25. Est-ce que vous obeissez A, votre pere et i\ votre mere ? 2{\. Qui, monsieur, nous lour ohoissons toujours. 27 Que cliorchoz-vous dans le jardin? 28. Nous ciierchons' le chapoMU dc I'enfant. 21). Tu nc demandes pas ton couteau ;\ ta more ? 30. Si, monsieur, jc le lui domande. B. 1. He gives his father his books, does he not ? 2. Yes sir, he gives him them. 3. Does John obey his ftithcr and niotlier? 4. Yes, he oheys thorn alwavs. 5. Has your fatlicr's servant a do.o-? G. No, sir, the dog- belongs to our neighbour. 7. The watch on the table is my father's. 8. Are the gentleman's horses still in the stable? 9. No* sir, they arc in the held. 10. Mary gives her book to the teacher. 1 1. Do the trunks belong to the ladies ? 12. Yes sii', and the hats too. 13. The lady's children do not obey their teacher, because they do not 'like him. 14. Why do you (2nd sing.) not speak to tiic gentleman ? 15. Because I do not like him. IG. Where are the carpenter's boards ? It. They are in the stable. 18. Why do you not give them to him? 19. Because he does not ask for them. 20. Who has the apples? 21. Our neighbour's children have thorn. 22. Why do you not obey your teacher? 28. We oliey him always. 24. Are vou asking your father for the apples ? 25. Yes, sir, we ask him for them. 2(.. What are you looking for? 27. I am looking for my father's hat. 28. Whose is the horse in the field ? 29 He is my uncle's. 30. Arc the ladies' trunks at the station ? •"^1. Yes, sir, they are there. 32. T am speaking to the ^•arpeuter's son. 33. Why does onr fri<^nd's daughter not obey her father ? 34. She obeys him always. «►'*» fi 48 FREN(m GRAMMAR. [no 113. 4t f LKSSON VI U. 110. The Partitive Xoiin. 'Some' (or 'any'), wlu'llior expressed or imp/ fed belbi-c a iiouii in Kurdish is i-c-ularly expressed in Frciicli l)y iW. + fhe dejinife artfde: J 'ai dc rargcnt. I have (some) money (lit. , of the numcy). A-t-il do I'argentV Has he (any) money ? Avee des amis. Witli (some) friends. NoTK \ noun in this constnu-tio.i is said to be uscul in a part!t!ve sense or parti- Unci!,, bcrausc impart onlj, of 11,.- «l.olo (.nonry, friends, cto.), is dc-noto. Possession is expressed by tlie definite articl • (or hy tlie d(f. art.+a dat. jyron.) if tliere is";^o andnquituiv^ to the possessor : Je vous donne la main. I give you my hand. Us utent le chapeau. They take off tlieir hats. 11 leur coupe les chevcux. He is cutting tlieir hair. KXERCISE VIII. Animal, m., (dnimdl), atumal. L'or, m., (o.r), gold. Assez de (and), enough (of). Le pain (pe), bread. '•I ii|f 60 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [1 1 a 1.; Lc pays O'^''^.^ c;<>">it'>'y- l'eii8L'f (/lasc), iliiiik. Pen do 0"i A little. Pour (pii.r), for. Riche fr/sj, rich. La sole (Knd ), silk. Trav.aillor (trnrav'), work. Tros f //-v^; j, very. Trop (le (tro), too much, too many Utile (ntil), useful. La vertu (vtrtil), virtue. Have yon any more money ? I have no more money. I have but little money. I have hut few friends. We like them very inncli. Beau (h6), beautiful. Rcaucoup ku), much, many. Bon (ho), good. La capitale (kdpitdl), capital. Demcurer (dpmiird), live, dwell. En (a), in. LY'picier (ejrisU), grocer. Le fer (ft'.r), iron. Le fromage (fromd.z), cheese. L'homme (6m), man. Ici-bas (Ui h)), here below. Le morccau (mdrsfi), piece. Avez-vous encore dc I'argent? Je n'ai j)lus d'argent. Je n'ai gut're d'argent. Je n'ai que pen d'amis. Nous les aimons liejiiicoiip. A. 1. La. mere donnc dcs ^lommcs ctdcs poires;\sa fille. 2. rourqiioi no dcmnndcs-tn pas nn son h ton perc ? o. I'ar- ce qu'il n'a pas d'argent. 4. L'epicicr a dc l)on fromaj^-e. 5. Avcz-vons encore dn pain? 6. Je n'ai plus dc paili. 7. Lc monsieur cst-il riciic ? 8. Non, niadamc, il a, tr6s pcu d'argent. 0. Lcs hommcs aiment la vertu. 10. Lc fer est trcs utile. IL Lc Canada est un beau pays. V2. Nos amis dcnicurent en France, mais nous demcuroiis an Ca- nada. 13. Paris est la capitale dc la Franco. 11. L'homme pensc ct travaillc ici-bas. 15. Les chicns sont quclquefois tres utiles. IG. Avcz-vons dcs plumes on dcs crayons? 17. Jc n'ai ni plumes ni crayons. 18. Qno donncz-voas A lasoeurdu professeur? 19*. .Te lui doiinc dcs pommes. 20. Avcz-vons bcaucoupde pommes? 21. Nous n'avons que pen dc pommes. 22. Que dcmandcz-vous an monsieur ? 23. Jo lui demande un morceau dc pain. 21. Lc chcval travaillc pour I'liommc. 25. La, dame a unc robe de sole. 20. Le monsieur a unc montre d'or. 27. Nous avons trop dc pain, mais pas asscz dc pommes. 28. Lcs cnfiints dc nos amis ont dc bcanx cliiens. 29. Nous n'avons plus dc pommes, mais nous avons encore dcs poires. 30= Les hommcs aiment beaucoup I'argent. 11(7-119.] PAST INDEFINITE. 51 II 1. Do you like pears? 2. Yes, we like them very iiiiu'li. .*}. Horses nre animals, ami men are animals also. \. Have youany g-ood bread? 5. Yes, martnm, we have oood hread and ^^ood cheese also. G. France is a beautiful c'omilry. 7. Ottawa is the capital of Canada. 8. Has the rnri)(3ntej- any money ? 9. No, sir, he has no money. 10. Have we any ink and paj)er? 11. No, sir, we have neii hur ink nor paper. 12. Here below men work and think. i;i. What ai'o you asking- m v father for ? 14. I am askini? him for some paper. 15. The lady has a silk drc^ss and a gold watch. 1(5. ^Phe grocer has good bread and cheese. 1<. Have the cluldren silk dresses? 18. No, madam they have no silk dresses. 19. Have you much money ? 20. We have but little money. 21. We have too many cipi.les, but not enough pears. 22. We are not rich, we have neither gold Avatches nor silk dresses. 23. Hm ve you many pens? 2 4. We have but few pens. 25. Have you any more paper ? 20. I have no more paper, but I have still some ink. 27. I like a,pj)les and pears. 2S. We have noinoi'e])read. 29. Paris and Ottawa are capitals. 30. Our ineiids arc iii France. 31 . Horses ai-e useful. 32. Child- nm love their fi-iends. 33. We have but few friends here. o4. I have but little money. LESSON IX. 117. pjist Participles. [Clbrn.] [FlnUhed.] [Ih-nhn.] [Had.] [Been] '1»""<^- «"!• ronipu. eu. 6te. [VMos.—ddiir^Jhii, rn/)ii, ii, (!f('.] US. The Coiiipouiid Tenses of a verb are formed trom Its past parficijile along witli an auxiliary (usually avoir, sometimes etre), as in the following section ll'^* Tlie Past Indefinite. ! r have (jimn, or [/ harcjiiiislxd, or 1 !/ar,'., etc.] Ifnishal, ctr.] j'aidomie. j'ai fini. Ui u,s donuii, etc. tu as imi, etc. / have broken, or / hroke, etc."] .1 ai rompu. ku as rompu, etc„ i*'"*'°^H^^H jy.. "^»i^H >^^B^H '} JB^^I '^^^^1 »tl 1 ^^^^^^^^^1 ,^ i4 , -JLsll^^^^^^l #1 52 FUKNCll (JUAMMAK. [Il9 123. [I hare had, uv l' had, rtc] j'lii cu. iit»us iivoua eu. tu art eu. vous live/, eu. il a eu. il« <»'t «"• [/ hart hei'i, or / ^'fi-, .^I'.J i'ai i't6. noua avous vie. ux as i■a«'^ vous avoz et6. !..« Word order. 7'fe »H.«7/;-<7/ M <"<;,'-'*' '^ N„u» no ruv..„« ,.u.hn _^^^^,. ,,„„„ ,,„,„, N'tt-t-clk jamais cl,- Wl . ,. . ,. 1 In a eomf 'nnuT .".IH- post ,.,rtki,l-' "fy'- '" fe--"^" •'"" comicmn 1 .,;.,.J ,^,ieH wlii>',h i) recedes : J'ai «n. ...e» kvous ■, J. lc« a, ^,^^.^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ , HI .l,mii6»' What buokaai.ll..^ give tlicmV nii.>lv< Uvi'cs leur a-t-il tu)nuL» . . . , * ;. When used a. an odjectice, t.,c past part.cple «r« //Ay an adjcct'ire: UhL (ut II J A broken cane. Uue caiiue rompue. ' 1... T... !>:..* --;;•»- r;"t x:^^"- has happened or /?<^s been ippuuu^j, pened ( = Kn^^- i^^'-"^*^ ) ' J -ill llnl mou ouvrage II u 6t6 ici liier soir. EUe u cluiiit^ toii'.o la inat'^^^ft Je les iii visitcH on ISSo. ' ,T'al.iuitt6 Paris l'liivc;rpasso. .1 .. 1 c,;^ i.v I (have) t\nlslu>('. my work. He wuH hero yesU-iaay evoning. She lias been sinsinKjiU morning. ^ visited them in 1885. I left Paris last winter. J'al H«itt6 Paris n.iv.r passo. ,-;^ ^^,^ , ,,^ ,,,,r,i in six days. Dion a eree le niondo eu s>x jours. ( -- crcat ^^^ ^^^^^^ N B -The lV..t ludetinite is the ova.nary past tense of Avoir froid, />r fo/(i, ifcmgs,. ;.....:*•;,<. //aV.s.'y. , . .,.|^,ie Ws'"",(^'-'''"-''<«''^"- Avoir suit, ;^c«/u/.vy. AvoircuvieUc,/ux..-,( Avoir sonuneil, 6e «^eey/y. Avoir fal.n, he h^-^^'^^j ^^^,, ^ovt de, he wron. Avoir lionte de, he ashai/itu ui. 23.] I'AST INDEKINITE. KXKItC'ISI-: IX. 53 Alluinor (dli'tinr ), kindle, liglit I lieu (l>li), vi'i-y. Lti l»i)is (bud), wood. 1 ).cliirer (ilf'§iri'), luar. I>uau, f., ("dj, water. La t.!iKLro (J'nirjr), window. I' ei iiior (ftr/iic), closo. Lv feu (/'>)i fire. Hier (h'.rj, yesterday, doner ( ruiii), ])lay. La lec^ou (Icfii)), lesson. La niendiant ( >/i<7. Je lie le liiiai pas doime, ])aree (|u'il lie la }i;is (U'luaiule. 7. L'eiifaiit a t-il roiupu les moiveaiix de hois? 8. Noii, monsieur, il ne les a pas rouipus. V). I\larie iiounpioi ne porte-t-elle pas sa. rol)e de -oie. 10. Pai'ecM[u'elle I'a deeliiree. " 11. Les daiues out iVoid ; pourqiioi lU! lei'inez-vous pas les leiietres? 12. .Te lit! les ai pas ieniiee.-, i)ar('e (]ue J'ai eliaiid. 1.'). Marie nc porte i)as sa ^'obe de soie paive (pi'elle a peur de la de- cliirer. 11. Vous aNez lurt (le restertoujours ici. 15. Kst- oecpiej ai tort, mainan, dejoueravec Jean? 10. Non, nion (ils, til as raison de jouer avec le petit i>'ai\' on. 17. Jean a soif; il deniande de I'eaua sa mere. IS. Le pauvremen- diaiit a IVoid et I'aim ; il demande du pain. 11*. Nous jivoiis alhnne le feu, parce (pie les dames et les messieurs out {Void. 20. Est-ce (juc vous avcz eu froid hier ? 21. Oui, iiioiisieur, nous av^/ns eu bien froid. 22. Le j)etit pii\'on a penr de jouer av( c les autres, il a pcmr de tomber. 28. Qim dcniande-t-il ? 2 4. II demande de Targent ; il a hesoin de plumes et de crayons. 25. N'as-tu pas lionte de dc'chirer tarobc? 26. Je ne I'ai pas d(5cliiree, niaman. 27. Que il<'mandcs-tu, mon enfant ? 2S. Jc demande du pain ; j'ai f;iim. 29. Pounpioi n'allum(3Z-vous pas le feu ? 30. Par- ce (pie nous n'avoiis pas besoin de feu ; nous avons assez eliaud. 31. Oil est le chapeau de soie de votre p6re? 32. Le voiU\ sur la table. j" J i 54 FRENCH (JUAMMAR. [123, 124 ir 4t *. .Ill . 7? 1 Whv have vou not kindU-d the lire? 2. We are not ;.oUl ; ^ve are v:.ivm eno.i^^h. '^. Why have >.>u not ch.se(lthewiiuh.w^y 4. We have close«Ul,em .». ^V h y pU«s:> Because he has iio need <7faH'leH. 7. There is your sist.-r's sdU dress ; vhvdid you not Vive it to her? 8. I did not ,nve it to heiN because she .lid not ask IV.r it. 9. ^> ere you not cold vosterdav y 10. Yes, sir, wt; wen; very cold, hut we are varrnenou|;hto-chis. 1 1. Did the little boy hreak the pioces of wocHiy 12. Yes, he bmke them 1^. \Vhy 1 i. She dco. not wear it because she is alVaid of t.-arin^- it. 1:.. Have you liuished vour exercises, (mesj children ? U>. Yes, sir, we have linished them. 17. The poor little boy is hungry and cold ; he has nee(l of bread. 18. What is the ^^^ifi^^^^J^^^^^ for *^ r.K Ho in liskin^- for bread and water. 20. 1 heic is the ^gentleman's silk hat ; why did you not jj'ive it tx) him :> •>l I did not ii-ive it to him, because he did not ask toi it. 0'>* Are vou asking' for water? 2:i. No, sir, I am asking }ov bread ; I am hungry. 21. We are cold, why did you not close the windows ? 2.5. We did not close them because ^ve are warm enough. 2(',. There is a poor beggar ; why do vou not give him brea.l ? 27. AVe have already given ,,iuL bread and water. 28. Why does Mary no oiiger wear her silk dress ? 2'J. B(^cause she is atraid ot tearing it. 30. Am I wrong in pla ying with the others ? 31. No my bov, YOU are right. 82. We gave the little boy bread, be- cause he was hungry. 33. Are we right in giving him money ? 34. No, sir, you are wrong ; he does not need iiAoney. LESSON X. 12-lr. Imperfect liulieativc cf donner, finir, rompre. [I was ijiriiiii, I [I lafi/nkhliKj, I {J "'««'* hreakinn, I list (I to (jire, etc.} je (lortii Ills. tu (lonii als. ■ il (loini alt. nous ilonii Ions. vous doiin iez. ils donn jilont. used to ^finish, < l<\\ je i\\\iss uIk. tu Wwiss a is. il fiii/'.s-s ail . nous fin/.vs ions, vous fhit.s*' io?;. ils fiui*s uieut. ■med to break, etc. ] je romp ais. tu rouip ais. il rouip ait. * nous romp ions, vous romp iez. ils rnim> jilent, 124-127.] IMi'EHl- ECl' rxniPATrvK. 65 OH..: The Ht..,„ of «„lr Hh..wH th.. ,.„,ar...n..nt .U.(«lo.H. ..,,«). 12.5. Lupcrfect Ii.cliciitlve of auoir, etre. [I find, vxiff. to hart-, ,tr ^ r/ H ,w alt, ils av iilont il ,'.f ..«<- -i , p., "^* " otalt. lis i:.t aliMit. 12<;. The Imperfect dciiotc^s :— i Wlnt wW/ni. ,. pin or nmfinued to happen : '^^' lUfeueire. ^\ e often un»mI to H|MMik (or H,,«ke) Ar . ^^^ the war, ursmorts. I lie Kojiums wore >ivvuHtuu»n\. to burn t .' nir dead, ^"t.i'r""""' ''" ' '■" ''"' '^-^ ^"«" "•■'" --.""«. who , I], , „ , found liim, ii]).ii-iait, pendant que nous eliiin. tt,. .. ot ^^ -^-^; li ^'«t (niarohe) A la ville t ^''"''*'"' "* ^^'^ post-office. A la ea,„pagne ?^ ^^ '" (^^^^^ *») '^^^ -ty. A I'c^dise. -^'^ the country, to the country. A I'eooie. " ^^^ churoii, to church. E ^^ school, to school. I't! • 56 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [127. 4t i\ tfS ft So iiUo with luiiues of cities, tofrns, riUiujea and most coil t? fries inasc. : II est (iiuuche) i\ Paris. Nous (lemeurons uii Canada. He is In (walks to) Paris. We live 111 ( 'anada. 2. Feminine numes of confments, CMiudries, provinces^ large idantU take en, always idthmt the definite article II est (va) on France. He is In (goes to) France. 3. Dans denotes place uitliin irhich or into which, and is more specilic than h or en : L'argent est iiu magasin dans Ic The money is at tlio shop In the tiroir. drawer. II entre dans la maison. He goes into the house. AUer (die), go. L'annde, f., (and), year. Apprendre (dpra.dr), learn. La dent (da), tooth. Donner (ddne), give away. Dormir (ddrmi.r), sleep. L'(5cole, f., (dcdl), school. Ensemble (asa.U), togetlier. La famille (fdmi.l), family. Jamais (Same), ever. Londres, m., (lo.dr), Loudon. EXEROISK X. Madame, Mme (ituiddni), Mrs. Mademoiselle, Mile (midmi'id~H), Miss. Monsieur, M., (vieHtd), Mr. Laphilosophief7/7or,rt/?"^,philosoj)hy. Pleurer (plGrd), weep, cry. Quanu (ka), when. Rencontrer (rakotre), meet. Souvent (sura), often. La tete (tej), head. Triste (trixt), sad. Lorsque (Idrske), when (never in- Trouver (fruir), find. terrog.). La ville (vil), town, city. Qu'avez-vous, monsieur ? Wliat is the matter with ycu, sir 2 Je n'ai rien. Nothing (is tlie matter with me). L'ann^^e pass^o. Last year. A. 1. Avez-voLis jamais etej\ Paris? 2. N on, monsieur, je n'ai jamais ete k Paris, mais j'ai ete a Londres. 3. Nous parlions souvent h monsieur votre p6re, lorsque 11 demeu- rait a Londres. 4. Les pir^ons de nos families jouaicnt souvent ensemble, quand nous demeurions h la eampag-ne. 5. Avez-vous ete {\ I'efflise hier ? 6. Out, monsieur, nous avons ete k I'eglise ensemble. 7. Quand avez-vons ete t\ 127.] TMI'E1?KE(T TNDirATTVE. 57 Piiris ? 8. J'ai etc a Paris I'aiiiu'o })ass('o. J). J'avais line iiioiitro d'or et un chapcaudc sole, quaiid jetais iX la villc. 10. Vous avcz rencontre U. Bejart, n'est-ce pas? 11. Qui, je I'ai rencontre, qnand il diunoiirait h notre villag-e. 12. M. Chopin est triste anjourd'liui, qu';i-t-il? 13. II a nia.l anx dents. 14. Le petit jargon a sommeil ; il a besoin do dorniir. 15. Vous etiez trlstc hier ; qu'aviez-vous, iiiadanie? 16. Je n'avais rien. 17. Depuis qnand etiez- voiis lA, lorsqu'il a trouve son argent? 18. Depuis unc seinaine ; 11 Fa, trouve derriere la maison. 19. II le cher- clinitdepuis trois seniaines, lorstiu'li I'a trouve. 20. Les en- taiits oiiont-ils ete? 21. lis ont etc t\ lecole. 22. Avez- vons cnvie d'aller k la ville? 23. Non, monsieur, pas aujourd'hui. 24. Mile Bojart a envie do porter sa robe de soiu. 25. M. Joui-dain avait envie d'ap])rendre la i)liiloso- ])liie. 26. Lorscpie j'etais h I'eglise liier, j'ai trouve de iai'*>-ent. 27. :Mlles Jourdain ct Bejart etaJent k leglise (Misomble. 28. Le monsieur avait mal aux dents, et je ne Jul ai pas parle. 29. J'ai rencontre M. Ciio])in, quand il (Icuieuraii h la ca.mpa^'-ne. 30. II avait souvent mal A, la tcte, quand il demeurait chez sa s(eur. 31. Le monsieur n'avait pas peur do dor^'ier de I'arg-enta son vieux domes- tit |ue. J). 1. I often used to speak to him, when we lived in the city. 2. The children were at school, when we were at tlifir father's. 3. AVhen we were livinj,'" in the villa.-ive money to the poor (pi.). 4. Why did you not speak to him ? 5. Because he was tired. 6. Did you h;ive the tootliache yestei'day ? 7. No, sir, but I had the hcidache. 8. Mme .Tonrdain had no desire to learn philos- njihy. 9. M. Jourdain is sad to-day ; whatis the matter with ]iim '^ 10. He is sad because he has given away his money i(> M. Doraiite. 11. I found some money, when I was at chiuvii yest(M-day. 12. The father does not wish to '-ive liis son money. 13. I met him yesterday, when I was in t!if village. 14. His sister used to give liim ink and ];ens, Avlicn they were at school. 15. What is the inatt(;r with you, my boy? 16. I am tired, and have need of sleep. 17. Ifow long lind you beeii in the c«nintry, when T gave your father the money ? 18. Where were you, when the cw F*i. <■■> FI^^^^^S ^1, * V 'l ;i i^^^l ^^^S^^^^^^^^^H •J HflHH 'i ■^ . 58 FltENClI (JllAMMAR. [127-129. * «; ft children were i)1ayiiig" uiuler the trees? 10. We were working- in the Held. 20. AVhen I w;is at my father's, my brother had a desire to go to the eity. 21. When did you give your brother your gold watch ? 22. I gave it to him last year, when I was at my sister's. 23. You are sad to- day ; what is the matter with you ? 24. I iiave toothache and hendache. 25. Why do you not look for a doctor? 20. Because we have no doctor in our village. 27. We were linishing our exercises, when you were at school. 28. We finished our lessons yesterday. 29. You have been crying, my son ; what Avas the matter with you ? 30. I was hungry, v/hen I was at school, mamma. 31. How long had you been thore, Avhen I gave him the books ? 32. 1 had been there a week. ih LKSSON XL 1*28. The Fciiiiiiiiic of an Au.i<3ctivo is nigularly formed by adding c to tlie mayc. dug., but adjectives end- ing in e remain unchanged : M. Grand, /'. giaiidw, tall. Jf. Facile, /''. facile, Ka.sj/. Joli, jf>li«, pretty. Jeune, jeuuo, youiKj. Ain6, ainee, Elder. SinctTc, .-siuci'ro, micere. 129. Irrcjiiilarities consist chietly in changes of the stem on adding tlie feminine sign e. Thus, when o is add(id : — 1. Final f- v, x = s, r(of nouns in -eur as adjs.) = s, o -^ ell or qii, ?►- = gii : Af. Actif, F. active, actlre. M. ]ilaiic, F. blanche, white. Href, br^ve(i^l7, '2), hrUf, Frane, franclio,./ra7d-. Hcureux, \\e\\VGU.n&, happy. Sec, :<(X'lie tS17, 2), ^Zr^. IV'.cieux, pr<''cieuMe,/)recio?(.s. Public, \mh\u\uii, jULhlic. Flatteur, iiatteuse,/a//:t!W%f/. Lous:, lonsyue, Imnj. FExc. — Forx: Doux, douce, mmxt ; faux, faussu,/rt/.sr ; roux, rousse, ?r(/(of b.vir, Ai'..), rttiiiu the .s- Honnd (§1.5, Ki) in the feni. ] 2. Final -el, -ril, -W:\, -on and fretjuently -s, -t dovMe the final onmnant : 129-181.] DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE. 59 M. Cruei, /•'. ciuelle, crml M. iJan, F. I>a88c, lotr, 1 areil, pa.dlle, M,. fji,,^, y,,,^^^.^ ^^^_ Ancieii, ancienue, andent. CJros, grossc, Uh, ■ 15on, bonne, ./ood Muet, lauetfce, rz'/w/,/,. So also, gcntil, gentillo, vlr. ,• „ui, „„He, vitll. ll>~l : Has, rase, /a/- ,• p,,.t, j.ivto, rmr/.v, and a fcu' others. -(iUihli^s I lor tlio fcmuiino : .!/. lioan o. ).el, /-: hello,.///... .1/. Nouvcau ornouvel, F. uonvcllc,ne,r 1-ou o. fol, foiu, ,,arl. Vieux or vicil, vieillo, o/d •Mou oy niol, niollo, mft. Ohs : Tlu. fonn in -I is used tr : L. 1,.! arhre • I bel 1. An ii hr'^fore ^j fimfl con.^onanf bocomos ^. unless the I'onsona-iit l)o doubled (i^lT, 2, uoto) : .»/. Cher, F. cliero, dear. M. Sec, i^. stchc, rf,v/ L^'gcr, k'-gorc-, //,/A^. Coniplet, cc„npl6to, complete. Href, b,i,v., brief. Secret, secrete, ...../. .,„!;^,^;/*"'f*'^"- 1- ^» ^^'^'v7>,,fe> adjective more asu- .iii\ jo/fo/rs Us noun : Im hommc riel.e. Unc pouime nnu-e. A i-iH. n.an. A ripe apple. '1\ Adjs. U'om proper nouns, adjs. o^ physical qufdHu participles as ai/js., almost always fo//mr': ' Y' l=^"gno anslaiso The Enffli.sh language. I'ueafecl.aud. Une lampo eass^T-e. Hot coOee. A l,..okon lamp. 3. The followiug- of very comuion oceuiT.iice, uearlv ■yl'^yiiys precede : -^ 15->n, ;iood, 1ieanM>'d-^nn>, . jenncs }/nvm,. Ciran.I.to//. I.o„s' hv., :>l.-.uval«, ftad .roll, pn ft,,. yien., ./,/. (;,os. /.•,, rourt,./..,;./ Vllain, w//y. p^.ti^^ ,^^^^^^_ I'il. Tlu> Doij»ou8trativo Adjective. '^^i-'^'f- Purii. Vl/". CO (oot)\ ., • , , 0/w. ; The fonn cet is used before n vowrl or li vmte. *.t«,|;|"i tn4 i, N'1 60 FRENCH (JRAMMAR. [1S2, \m. it it lif.i '? 132. Todistiii^-uirili ' this ' from ' tlmt,' or for f'///y;7/r/.v/y, ei ( =- icij iiiid lii arc respcetivjiy addetl to tlic noun by a hyphen : Ce livie, cot amie, cet lioiiiUR'. Cette phune, vvtto aniio. Cet luilMlelioiiiine, vv lion oncle. Tt's lioiuim's, oes fcmines. Cet liui'iiiic'-fi I't eette feiiuiK'-la. Tills (or tliut) bonk, frieiirl., iuan. This (or tli.'it) pen, frii lul. Tills (or tluit) clever .nan, [^ood uncle. These (o/- those) men, women. Tliisnuui and tliat woman. tliii. The dcinoustrntivc adjective, is rcjU'Citcd before each noun to Avhieh it refers : Cctte niaison etee jardin. This house and garden. EXERCISE XI. Ainci\u(hd), line, fine-looking, handsome. La langue (la.g), language. Blanc (f>la), white. Long (la ), long. Coniplet (hople), complete. Maintenant (metena), now. Deux (dii), two. Noir (vTui.r), black. Dithcile (dijisil), difficult. Les (euvros, f., (a'.rr), works. Etudicr (vtinlle), study. Le panier (pdim), basket-. Lafenniie (jam), woman. Petit (jxfij, sm.ill. ^ Fran<;ais (fm-sr), French. Lepomn-iior(';'oy/;K'j, apple-tree. (lentil (■'<'>/!), nice. Le poirier ('/y»«rvr;, pear-tree. Lag. J'ainie beaucoui> cette petite fillc, elle est si g-entillc. 7. J'ai rencontre I'autre jour votre anciennc g-ouvernantc ; ellc est mainte- nant cliez M. Kibot. 8. Qui est cette jolie petite filler sous I'arbrc au jardin? 9. C'est la, tille de notrc ancien voisin. 10. Avez-vous t'tudiela lan.4,nie fi-ancaise? U. Un pcu, et je Tainie beaucoup. 12. Les chevaux sont des animuux 133.] DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVE. 61 tres utiles. 13. Avez-vous jamais eu k-s oeuvres coni- l»lrtes de ^Loliere? 14. Oui, monsieur, mais jc ne les ai l»lus. 15. Voi]{\ un bel arbre ; c'est un pdmmier, n'est- eepas? 10. Non, monsieur, c'est un poirier. 17. L'au- tre jour, lorsque j'etais cliez mon voisin, je lui ai donne un livrefranyais. 18, Aqiiiestceg-randcliapeau ? 1!). II est h mon pere. 20. Notre petite sa'ur portait hier unc robe blanche. 21. Nous avions I'annee passee un grand clieval blanc. 22. Qu'avez-vous, monsieur? 28. J'ai soil:; je cherciie de I'eau. 21. Voilfi de bonne eau, sur la tabic. 25. N'avez-vous pas encore fini vos Iccons ? 2(j. Nous ne les avons pasfiniv's; elles sont trop longucs. 27. Cette vicillo femme oil dcmcurait-elle I'annce passee ? 28. Elle dcniciirait cliez son tils aine. 21). Ces petites filles pour- (|iioi cst-ce qu'ellcs ])leura.ient ? 30. Elles pleuraient parce (lu'elles avaient froid. 31. Votre oncle porte-t-il un grand chapeau, ou un petit ? 32. II porte un grand chapeau. />. i. Theother day I met your old neighbour. 2. There is a. Hue horse; whose is it? 3. It is my brother's. 4. Whose are those beautilul children under the apple-tree in the garden? 5. They are my bi'other's children. 6. Have \('U ever had Scott's complete works ? 7. Yes, I used lo have them ; but I haven't them noAv. 8. Was not your sister wearing a Avhite dress yesterday ? 9. No, sir,* she Avas Avearing a l)laclv dress. 10. Where does your old goA-- crness liA^c noAv? 11. She lives at my sister's, but last \(>ar she AA'as living at my eldest brother's, 12. What Avas the matter Avith that little child ? 13. lie AA'as thirsty, and I gave him some AA^ater. 14. That old lady Avas living hisc year Avitli her son; lA'herc is she living noAV ? 15. She is liAing Avith her eldest daughter. IG. There are tAvo fine trees ; they are pear-trees, are they not ? 17. No, sir, they are old apple-trees. 18. Did you meet iIk^ old gentleman in the village yesterday ? ID. Yes, sir, I met him and the old lady also. 20. I found some large a;)pl('s in that little basket, l)ut they are not good. 21. Who is that pretty little boy in the gardevi ? 22. He is my cousin's child, 23. The oth( r day^ Avhen I was at my bi-otlier's, I gave his little girl a Fren'^'i book. 24. Your ex- ercises arc not long ; why have you not finished them ? 4f : ib si 62 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [138-130 f-f'i m 1!" 25. What lan^u'/i^'-c are yon studying: now? 26. I am ■i^H studying'- the mhmk'Ii lajifj^ua^a^ 27. Do vou iiiid it diffi- cult? 28. A little, but I like it v(!ry much. 21). That little boy was crying", Avas he not ? 8*0. Yea, he had the toothache. .SI. Had your fnther a large horse or a small one. 82. He had a hirg-e horse and a small one too. 88. AVhat was that old gentleman looking for ? 34. He was looking- for his s(m's house. 85. In what house does his son live ? 86. lie lives in that large, white house be- hind the church. LESSON XII. 134. The PiiJsc Definite of donner, finir, rompre- [I garr, ffr.l [I Jinwhed, etc.] [I hroh, etc.] je donn ul. tu douu as. il donn ». nous do!in runcfit. vous donn ates. ils donn 6rent. jc romp Is. tu romp is. il romp It. nous romp linos. vous romp ttes. ils romp IriMit. jo fin Is. tu fin Is. il fin It. nous fin tiiie«. vous fin Tto«. ils fin iront. [PRON.— 1. ze (Und, til dona, il dona, nu dond.m, rn dond.t, il ddnt.r. 2. zefni, tiifni, ilfuii, nnfni.m, vujtni.t, iljini.r. 3. ze rdpi, til rnpi, ilropi, mi ropi.m, ru ropi.t, ilrnpLr.] 135. Past Definite of auoir, etre. [I had, etc.] [T ivas, etc.] j'eus. nous eiimes. je fus. nous ffimes. tu eus. vous elites. tu fus. vous filtcs. il eut. ils eurent. il fut. ils furent. [PRON.— 1. .^ ft, til il, il il, vuz fi.m, vnz il.t, ih il.r. 2. zcfil, til /il, ilfil, nufil.m, vnfii.t, iJfii.r.] 136. Use of the Past Definite. The past definite is used in the literary narrative 4i)le to denote tchat hap- pened (completed past action), or ichat happened next (successive events) : Les Romains bruKs^'nt Carthage. The Romans iijnrnt Carthage. Dieu accepta les pn'sents d'Abel, God accc]!)?''! the gifts of Abel, qui /f't'??f' plus pieux que son fr^re ; who jcas mO; . t i^diteous ihan Ills mais il d^tourna les yeux de ceux brother ; but. he tui-ned away his L%-140.] INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 63 do Cain, parce que son cn'ur xx'dtait cj-es from those of Cain, because his I)iis pur Uu jour Cain et Abel heart wax not pure One tlay claient seula dans un champ, et Cain Cain and Al)el vcrc. alone in a fiekl, se Jeta sur Abel, et le tun. and Cain fell upon Abel, and slew him. 0/... ; The past dcf. wwr denotes like the impf. (S120) what waKhappcninn or vsed to happen or cnnfimu'd to liajijicn. l;{7. Peisoiijil Pronoun Objects, fiornc ohjcctivo forms have been ^nven in ^\)2, lO'J. llie reiuainino- ones are : — T)at. or Ace. nous, vs, to (for) ?j.s. vons, you, to (for) yon. se, themselves, to (lor) them- selvefi. Dat. or Ace. me, me, to (for) m<. te, thee, to (for) thee. se, himself, herself, itself ova's self; to (for) himself, etc. 1.3S. Position. Tliey precede the vei'b (§1)3), and also precede le, la, les, if present : 11 me prete la plume. He lends me the pen. II ...e la pnHe. He lends It to me (me it). F.Ue se flatte. She flatters herself. Ellos se les emprmitent. They borrow them for themselves. 139. The Interroffative Adjective. SiNo. Pr.uR. M. quel? quels? ^ F. quelle? qnelles? / '"^"^^ -^ what?, 7ohat(a)/. Quel livre ? Quelle plume ? Whieh (what) book? WhUh (what) pen? Quelle belle sc^ne ! Quels lu'-ros ! What a beautiful scene ! What heroes ! l^!-0. Indefinite Adjectives. Some of the commoner UHli^hniies are : — Adjs. : Quelque, some ; chaqne, each. Adj. or Pkon. : Autre, other ; tout, toute, tons, toutos, all, every. EXERC ISK XII. Anglaisfaflr^.^ J.English, Englishman. r:'exemplaire,m.,rrrr^;,Alrj,copy b arrivee, f., (drivd), arrival. L'heure, f., (o^.r), hour. Arnvcr (arire), arrive, come. Jeune (.?:6.n), young i.orie.shoi./..»c;,,vuo,..s,foie.st. Le matin (mate), morning. ' ^' ^^'"S- Loiseau, m., (luizo), bird. H 64 FRExVCn GI{AMMAR. [140. i J I'artir (j'drfi.r^, leave, go auay. La ijcrdrix (pcrUrlJ, partridge. I'unir (piiiii.rj, punish. Quitter (IU<>), leave (tian.). So rt'unii- (n'unir), assc'ml)lo,meet. Lo boir (f^Pd.r), ovenii)g. Tout f/z/j, all. Tuer (tiicj, kill. Last ( vouiiijTf. La cliausi'M ( S(i.soJ, .song. Le chasseur (Scim.rJ, liunter. Le clienc (sc.ii), oak. Lc cocjuin (hoke), scoundrel. Lo si.c{i,ro, qiuiiid jVtais jciuic. :>. OiYii tin sou fiviv, Al)cl, et ])i,u It; i.uiiit. a. No's nmh cliaiitt'ivii'r liicryoir do Ik'Hos cli.'iiisoiis choz inoii poro. 4. Qaollc cluiiisoiichaiitait votro s(-ur luor soil-, lorsquc j'arrivni''' 5. Kilo cliaiitait uric l)olIo cliausou do l^urus. (>.' Co iouiic Aui^lais liuit sou ouvra,i;-o choz uiou ].orc liior soir'ct il choi-oho uiaiutoiiaut oiieoro do rouvrao-c. 7. Los clia'sscurs tuoi'out luor l)oaucon]) dc pordrix dans Jc bois dc luon pore. 8. (^)uollo cliausou avt^z-vous cliautoo ? <). Nous avous cliautc uuc dcs belles cliausous do lloluo. 10 Ou troitvatcs-vous YDS amis? 11. Nous los trouvauies choz uoiro cousiu. 12. Nous rouii)iuios notro caiP'o sur lo dos dc CO cfKiiiiii. m. Cos co(iuiiis so rouuimit hior soir daus lo bois dorrioro lo villa^-o. 11. Nous fiuiiuos uotro ouvra^-o cc matin. 15. Nous avious Far^ii-out, lorsqu'il arriva. 10 Oui vous douua cos belles pouimes ? 17. Notre cousin nous lo. donna, et il nous donna ih belles poiros aussi. 18. Notre ami roin])it sa caune, lorscju'il etait {\ la ville. 19. Tous los honimes et toutes los fomnu^s sont hVbas au cliani]). 20. Tous los (nifants (luittoront locole hior soir A (piatre heurea, 21. Los oiseaux so rounlsscnt ce uia,tin dans les arbres ; ils out onvic de partir pour un pays chaud. 22. A quatro heures nous.arrivames choz nos aiuis, nous dosoimdimes do la, voiture, et nous onti-anics dans la niaison. 28. ]\ronsieur votro pore vous donna-t,-il cettc montre'-^ 21. Oui, madame, il me la donna. 25, Quel bel arbi'o*' Dc quelle espocc est-il ? 20. Cost un chene anglais 140, 141.] FUTURE INDIOATIVF. 65 lis, nous ■21. Tons les hoinnios ici-bas out leui-s petits defauts. -VS. Quelle l.elk; femnie ! Qui est-ce f e *'J ? ;^9. C'est la Icmme de uotre aiieien voisiu. II 1. AUtiiose scoundrels arrived Inst evening. 2. Why do you not lend nie \'our pen and ink ? 3. Becnusel lent t heiii to your brother. 4. What son<>- was your sister siri^'-- h\o;, Avluai we arrived ? f/. 8he Avas sin^iii^r one of Moore's l;t;iutirul song's. 6. (Xir friends broke their canes on that little scoundrel's l)nck. 7. At ibur o'clock our friends ar- /•ivcd at our cousin's, aligiited I'roni their carriag-e, and went into the house. 8. All men have their faults. U. Who pi ve you those books and pencils ? 10. Our teacher ^»-avc us ihem. 11. That young- Frenchman finished his work ihis morning-.^ 12. All the children are yonder in the v.oods. i;]. The birds assemble in the trees; they arc cold, and they have a desire to leave this cold coun- rry. 14. Ofv/hatsort is that tree yonder? 15. It is a l-'i-ench apple-tree. IG. What sort of hat Avas he wearing- ^vhen_you met him? 17. He was Avcaring^ a silk hat.' IS. Did you meet those four larg-e black horses yesterday ? r.». Yes, sir, Ave met them in fi-ont of the school. 20. All th(! children finished their Avork and left the school at four o'clock last evening^. 21. Who gave you that fine copy of Slinkespearc's Avorks ? 22. JMy father g-ave it to me, Avhen 1 was young. 28. Cain and Abel Avere brothers, but Cain did not loA^e Abel, and he killed him. 24. The hunters went into my father's Avoods, and killed partridg-es and ('tlier birds. 25. All the boys and girls are at school to- day. 2fi. Have the children found their hats ? 27. Yes, they found them in the other room. 141. Future [I sliall give, etc.} jo (loniier jii. til (lonncr as. il clonner a. nous (Icnmrr ons. vous (lonncr oz. ils donuer out. LESSON XIII. Indicative of donner, fink, rompre. [I sliaJlJinUh, etc. ] [/ shall hrcal; etc. ] JL finir ai. tu finir as. 11 finir a. nous finir ons. voiis finir cz. ils finir ont. je rompr af. tvi rompr as. il rompr a. nouH rompr ons. vous rompr ez. ils rompr ont. S' ' (.-1 n; > '* 'mm 66 FHF.Xrn flHAMMAR. [141-144. *»: », [I'hon. — I. kv. ilA»iK, ti, flo/ira, il ddiird, ini doiiro, vu ddurt', if. ddnrn. 2. iejiiiire, tu^finnd, i^ fhn'ru, najiinro, rn/iniri-', tljitnrn. 3. ^i' ro/iri', tii rn/>ra, ilrnjon, ini rdpro, vii roprr, if rtipro.] 142. Future Indicative of aco/V, eifre. [/ nhaff han , ceded by the def. art. or a pass. adj. : Jean est Ic plus jeune des fr6ros. John is tlio younffest of the brothers. Mos plus chers amis. My dearest friends. 4. If the superlative follows the noun, the def. art. is not omitted : My most faithful friends. Sha is the most learned lady. Mes amis les phis fidle3. C'est la dame la plus instruito 5. After a superlative, ' in ' =de (not d, dans, etc.) : L'homme le plus riche de la ville. The richest man in the city. 1 15, 140.] IRHECITLAU COMPAIUSON. 67 145, Irregular Coiiipiirisoii. Bon, miiiivalH, petit have a special coiiii);iraLivo form : — I'OS. CoMl'. SUI'ERL. PoH. COMP. '•on, iiiolllenr, Iv iiicillciir. niiiuvalH, pliv, lu piro. or iiuiuvaiH, plus in. IM'tlt, inoltulro, lenioindrc. or petit, plumi). 140. Adverbs arc compared in ^'•uiier.il like adjec- t'lrcx {hy pliiH and iiioIiih, preceded by invari.-ihio le i 3U])crhit.), oui note tlic tbllovvin;;^ irreg-uhir lbriii8 : — I>u'ii. (/W/. \\\\v,u\, htlttr. le mUm\, (th( ) Ix.^t. mail, hndli/. pis, //-or.se. le pis, (fh( ) irorsf.. pou, little. mollis, Ic-iM. le molii.s, (the) least. EXERCISE XIII. S(;PKKL. le plus III. le plus p. IC .\iinal)lc' (iindhl), ])loasaut. .\|)ivs (d[>n:), aftor. .Viissitot {[\\c((Utf6 kx'J, an .soon as. l.'avdine, f., (dimii), oats. L(j l)at()ii (hdtoj, stick, Kit'iitnL (I'tcfoJ, soon. Le lile (hh'J^ wheat. Caiiiulien ( kdiuidle), Caiuuliau. Cher, HTo (Sc.r), dv;\.v. Dciiiaiii (dentc), to-morrow. Tout (Ic suite. L'aimL'c prochaine. Apres deinaiu. Avoir (r)iiitentioiide. To intend to Le foil! (j'l'ie), hay. Le fruit (frfii), fruit. (;!rand (. Xous donnerons do I'ari^-ent k co pauvre niendiant. !■ . Non, monsieur, mais nous '*" I'lir donncrons tout de suite. 7. .Moii pere est plus i^i'.ind (|ue moH oncle. «. Nos amis se reunirontj'ila ville iM'ivs.leiHMM). seurri I'om- pront dcs bntoiis et Mlliuiicroiit h; feu, aussitnt tiiiils ai'i'i- vcrout (Imih lo hois. li', .Jc.-ni n'cst i>}ih si ^raiid ([U*: sa siiiur Muric. 18, Vous (iuittc^rcz Toronto (luiniiiii i\ tiu.'itn! lu'iiivs," ii'est, co juis? 11. \on, nioiisicui', noiis jivons int,i;ntioii do |»;i,i-t.ir Mprrs doniaiii j\ (|ii;it.it! lK'ur('+^, 15. Notre cliicii est plus inc-ciiimt (jiio i(! cliii'ii . Domain nous etiidieroiis I'Amre de Mo\ iere. 27. (,)ui est eette belle danie ? 28. C'esi la, dame la plus aimable de toute la vllle. 2J). La pomnu; est le fruit le plus util(; de notre pays. 7i. 1. We slia,ll leave this eity, as soon as our friends ar- rive (fut.). 2. iMy sister is taller than my motlier. ,'5. My uiiele is not as tall as my father. 4. These a])ples ar(i bet- ter than the otliers. 5. Ap])les ar(5 not so dear as pears (see No. li) of A). (>. "Why do you not elose the windows V 7. AVe shall elose them immediately ; we are notso warm to-dav as yesterdav. 8. AV(; shall iiave more wh(iat tlian oats next year. U. Your i'atlier will luinish you to-morrow , because you have been naughty. 10. Canadian apples are better than Eng-lish ai)ples ; they will be dear next year. 11. What kind of dress was your mother wearing- ycstei'- day? 12. Yesterday she wore a white dress ; to-morrow she will wear a black dress, lo. This dog" is not so cross as the other [one]. 14. Orir neighbours will assemble at the church to-morrow. 15. I am cold ; why have you n<»t kindled the lire ? IC). I shall kindle it imm(;diately. 17. Have you given the horses the hay? 18. No, sir, but we shall give it to them immediately. 19. Who is that Ud-UM.] CONDITIONAL OF AVOIll. 69 li.iiKisoi.ic m.-iii? 20. Ifo js the most pleasant gentleman 111 Mic' town. L>1. Vvlicat is tli.^ most usrCul ^nKluct of our coimrry? 22. Ix'cd oak is notso^-oodas wliitisoak. 2;j.()ur • In-- IS not so cross as om- n('i«lil)our's dog. 2 I. I am very cold ; why do you not kindle tiie liiv? 25. I shall kindle ir iiiinicdiately, and then you will ho w.-inner. 2(5. The jvd house is larger than llMMvhih; [on,.]. 07. Ho will i)re;ik liis cMne over th(! bacdv of lli.it scou'ulrel. 2.S. When I nni ill i1h' town, r shall give you some apples. 2!). To-morrow wc shall study Moliere's rArarc, tmd the day after to- iin.i row his Misanthfope. 30. Good fathers punish their children, when they .-ire naughtv. 31. We slinll linish eur lessons at four oVloek this evening. 32. John will soon he as tall as his fathei-. 3:i ]\r.-,rv will m^ver be as t;ill .'IS lier mother. 31. Our neighbours will havea better li'ius(., as soon as they are rich enough. 35. The hunters will hi! m my father's Avoods to-day, and they will kill some partridges. LESSON XIV. 147. Conditional of donner, finir, rompre, [I .should break, etc.] je roiTij)!' ais. tu roiiipr als, 11 rt»iiij)i' ait. nous romjjr Ions. vous roiiipr lez. ils rompr aieiit. I / sh(>v/(l tjive, etc.] je (loiiner als. tu tloiiiior als. il v. -]. ^ ori', tu 6n\ il ord, nvz 6rU, rvz drU., ih. drL 2. ze. RP.rh, '« ■•" r,-, il seH, nu seHo, vu serie, il sere.] *«'!'* If 70 FUENCfT GRAMMAR. [149. ♦ if 14}>, Coiiditioiijil Sonton^os. 1. ThG conditional h used to ('xi)r(!ss wli.-it; fcoiild happen (result) in case some- thing^ else ware to happen {{ix)\\(\\t\on) : (Condition) Si ju rceltjiismalcyon If T s.-ild (or if I were to say, or sans faiitos, (Rtsidt ) le inaitre se- wore I to say, or Hhould I say) rait content. my lesson without mistakes, the master would bo pleased. N.n. — Rcnienil)er that a remilt clanxc in the cuniUtiitnal rei^iilarly has tliu if clanw ill tho iinpcrfcct iiiilic, whiitcvcr he tlie corrcspoiuliny Knl,^ form. 2. Riniilai'ly, a, result clans-e in the future reciuircs the if clause in the present inJic, whatever be the Eiiii;'. form : (Gondit'ioii ) S'il ost iei deniain, If he Is (or be, or will l»e, or ( Rtsult ) je lui donnei-ai I'aigent. should be) here to-morrow, I shall give him the money. Ubs. : For elision of i in si, sec- S">'. 3. After si ^^ ' whether,' tha fat. and condl. may he used, but never after si - ' if ' : J'j lui iluHiande (dcmandais) s'il I ask (was asking) him whether sora (serait) ici demaln. lie will be (would be) here to- morrow. Batir (Idti.r), build. Car (kd.r), for (conj.). Chaud (So), warm, liot. Content (hold), pleased. Fort (Jo.r), l\ard (adv.). Froid (frad), cold. (Jater (ijdtr), spoil. EXERCISE XIV. L'iiiver (ivLr), winter. Mauvais (move), bad. Neuf (iKi'f), new. L'ouvrier (urric), workman. La pens6e (pdii;), thougiit. Perdu (pi-rdii), lost. Reciter ( resiti',), recite, (irnereux (^,^(!'//'i/v'>^, generous, liberal. Sans (i^d), witliout. Heureux (orii), h;i,p[)y. Si (u), if, \vliether. L'hiroudellc, f. , (irodrl), swallow. Le temps (ta), time. Dans i;e temps-la. At that time. Sans di)ute. No iloubt. A. i. Si les enfnits des voisins sorit a I'ecole, nous leur doiiiKn'ons des j)()inni(^s. 2. Si ma- mei'e (!st encore ici, jc lui reciterai ma leron. ,"^. Si j'avais uii livi-c, je vous le preterais. 4. Je deniandijrai a mon })erc s'il a de Far^^'ent. 5. S'il n'a pa,s d'argent, je le demandcrai ii ma mere. 6. Si 149.] CONDITIOxVAL OF AVOIR. 71 vons avicz uii enfant vouh Io g-Ateriez, si vous ne Ic punis l..i. nuoli.i it. 8. Nos voisii.s halJ.-nient une nuiison neuvc un sdi^'^^i T' ' ''"^ '• -^^^^^'^ ^^ ^^--^^ n'avaient^^ * Si uu^^n^^^^^^^^^ "leilloursann-s, s'ils sont bons. 11. biuu^Myon anno les niaiiva,is livixs, il est perdu niions moms. K.. Si un ^ai-Qon aime les bons livres et lc>s bonnes pcnsees, il sera bon et ^n-and. 17 8i no^ .mis <•. yaient moms d'argent, lis seraient plus heureux 18 Nols ^tT;z '^^r:^:^''7^T ^^ '''''-''' ---- -hZ J.>mr;^^^^"^-^;,,^^-^^t^^:-^'^ -Ht pas tou- si (Void i < H.., • , ■ "^' '^^ ^^^ ouvners n'avaient pas ^i ivoicuci, cues „«to.ai'i;;;tu>,,i';.'' ir r:™:^^ l„^"",r''-'? Tor,"'"'?';,' ' '"""^^^ P-chalntcfnl Mxiions. 2o. Les liirondelles nous quittent • elles li me It mieux les pa,>-s cliauds (jue les pave froids' -^^ T ni /? 1 ' ?!-'^ •''''■••''^ '^^""^' i"on livre aussi. tlH m •'> Tf7i ? "I"^ ^T?^' ^''''' children, you Avill spoil " m. 2. If I had a knife, I should lend it to Vou 3 Tf w J ; yiore money, should we be more happy /l' sth min ; not always the happiest. 5. We sUu ^ive ou^ mS louis children some apples, if they are there 6 If wo ^I'oukU^ive our unele this monc^v, would 1 e be pieol^P tl.o.-e slnll 't hi;^^?''^ ^T' I""'^^- '■ "'^^^ «'^«^Jd be 1 ? '^^1^1 t r:J|W if* *■ 1 I ^^^^^^^^^^^1 »"' o^^^^^^^H ' ^"'i^^^^^^H ■1 ^I^I^B •: r*w w f i 72 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [149, 150. like cold countries. 14. If a boy likes bad books, he will luivc bad thou^^lits. 15. Slioiild you be f>-lad, if we were to build a new liouse? IC). We had not a cent, or we should have given it to that poor man. 17. John will ask his father whether he has any money. 18. If his father has no money, he will ask his mother for it. 10. If those boys have broken those canes, the gentlemen will pun- isli them. 20. If that lady were riclier, she would be more generous. . 21. If boys love great books and great thoughts, they wil 1 be great. 22. The swallows would stay here all winter, if they did not like warm countries better. 23. The workmen are not working to-day; they were too cold this morning. 24. At tliat time M-e Avere noj; rich, or we should ha ve given more money to the poor. 25. If that boy's mother does not jmnish him, she Avill spoil him. 26. We do not punish children, if they are good. 27. A boy 53 lost, if he loves bad books. 28. If that young man had less monev, he would be happier. 21). If you stay here, we sliall be much (hien) pleased. 30. If you were to work hard, you would be happier. 31. The Avorkmen Avould be cold, if they did not Avork. 32. He Avas very rich at that time, and used to give much money to the poor. 33. I should have given the beggar my money, if he had asked for it. 34. If A^ou ftu) should recite your lesson Avell, your teacher Avould be much pleased. 35. Books are the worst friends, if they are bad. LESSON XV. 150. Imperative of donner, finir, rompre. [Give, etc.] [Finish, etc.] [Break, etc.] fiIl^ 8. (qu'il fim.s.s e.) &aiss ons. Qniss ex. (qu'ils fiiw'ss ont.) 06s. ; The forms in parenthesis are subjunctive forms (§158) used as imperatives. [Pron.— 1. ddn, k il ddn, dorw, ddn4, h il ddn. 2. Jiiii, k if finis, Jinisn, finiad, k il finis. 3. rri-, k il rti.p, ropo, ropd, k il ro.jh] donn e. (qu'il donn e. ) donn on 8. donn oz. (qu'ils donn ont. ) romp 8. (qu'il romp o.) romp ons. romp ez. ; qu'ils romp ont. ) 151-154.J PRONOMINAL ADVERBS. n aie. (qu'il ait.) 151. Imperative of avoir, etre. [Have, etc.] ^^^^ ^^^ -, ^y **"^- soy on.. ayoz. sois. soyez. ((|u lis aient. ) (qu'n soit. ) (qu'ila soient. ) LPuo.v.-I. ^, kiU, m, eld, kUzi. 2. sud, kilsuu, .ndXn, sudle, kiUM.] 152. The Nejrativo Imperative. [Do not ,jhu:, etc.] [Do not have, etc.] nedoimepas. n aie pas. (qu lino donue pas.) (,jn'ii „-^it pa^ ) no donnoiis pus. „-,,y,,„, p,^^ no (lonnez pas. „,.,y,, j,^,^ (qu lis no donncnt pas. ) (qu'ils n'aient pas. ) i,,!'^;?';/'^V*^^" *'^ Objects. 1. Personal pronoun ob- ]Mi^joUom the imi>ewt,re{\mt not tiic sul.junctive as im- p.u-at.), nnd arc joined to it and to one anotlier by hyphens • Pretez-lul la pluuie. Len.l ].i„. the pen ^^■';';^ *^'-^"f- Len.l it to hin,. Qu .1 me la prC-te. I^'t hi.n lend It to me Liiac^"" '"' ^''^ '^'•^ "^^'''^^'''•""""i''''-"'^'^^ instead of mo, to : Pretez-moi hoL'^d is/r'"'"'"' '^ "'^"'^^^' ^'^ ^"^^^-^^ '^'^ Ne la I ai pn^te/ pa^. Do not lend it to him. o. When a verb governs hen objects, the ace fie la es, stands nea't the verb, except when along with lui o^ lour before the verl) (§§93, 109) : Dat. Acc. VKRn. Ace. Dat. Vrvs nous les donne/. Donne.i -.lo;5 -nous. ^"^- Acc. DAT. VEiir. Tous le Ini donnez. Voiis los lour donnez, 154. The Pronotninal iltlYerbs are ; — V. (0 (at, on, in, into, etc. ) it or the7n ; thrre thifhn: ^■- "^^ULT.'.'^'''^ ^ '*'■ ''^'"^ ' '"^' ^^''' •^■^"^'^ ^/'^^^^'« ; .-'■'"-, any; %* -''"'''Mi ^^ :m '!N I :i' I 55: 6« n; hn ■ «« FRENCH CaiAMMAU. ri55-157. in «« I fir 155. Position of y aiitl en. They follow the sani^ rideH as jjern. pron. objects, and when alony- ^xitli pers. proiis. nlwiiys stand last, en folio fri)ifj y. 15(5. Use of y and en. I. Tliey an; wiiiivaUnit to a, prej).+a jji'on. stand iii^' Ibr things '{movi^ rarely for per- sons). Tnus y = a(dans, mw, (iHi.)+2Jron., and cn-do + pron. : Peuaez ti mt's parolcri. — ,I'y puiise. Think of my words.— I think of tham. Dounez-rooi le li\Te;j'eii ai be- (!ivo me the book ; I have need of soin. It. 2. Used parfifirrly, en = 'some' or 'any ' may not lie o.nit- ted, as oiten in En^'. : Avez-vous do Fargenti?— Jen ai. Have you (any) money? — I have(s()me). A-t-il unc plume V -II en a une. Has lie a pt'U 'i — Ffe has one. 11 en a de Ijonnea. He has (some) good ones. 3. Place where, already mentioned (or implied), is y or en : Est-il au jardin ?— II y est Is he in the garden ? He is in it( there). J'on arrive dans ce moment. I come from it this moment. 157. Y avoir. Y + fhe 3 sing, of avoir forms a macli used impersonal verb : — il y a, (here is ("or a7x). il y aura, (here ivi'l be. il y avait, there was f'or were). il y aurait, there would he, il y eut, there tvas (or were). etc. EXERCISE XV. Le bonheur (hdmv.r), happiness. Commenciir ( cdmase), begin. Le courage (kurd.r:), courage. Dt^sirer (dtzirc), wish. Eh bien ! Je nen ai pas. Je n'en ai plus, iS'i! voua plait. Le lait (l^), milk. La marine (marie), bride. La piosp^riti'i (p.ospdritej, pros perity. Very well ! I have none. I have no more. I lave u-.ne left, I have none now. If you please. C«>iurne ils sont heureux ! How happy they are ! l.>7.] PltOXOMINAf, ADVKUBS. 73 A. 1. Doiuicz-inoi de cos poiros. s'il vous plait. 2. Non, iHonsieur, nous no voiis en donneroiis pas, nous n'en avoiis ]Ms nsscz. 3. Votrc eiilhut (Icmaiido dos ])oinmes ; lui en (l.)ii]icrai-je ? 4. Non, matlenioisellc, no Jiii en donncz pas ;). iMonsieur votre pore desire dii papier. 0. Donnez-lui- 011. 7. Si.j'avais dc !'ar-cn(., n'estce pas? IG Eh i)i('ii ! pretez-en JXmon pere. 17. Voil;\ la mariec ; qu'elle soit lieureuse! 18. No pleure ])lus mon enfant; aie du courage. li). Finissez vos logons, mes cnf'ants, ct n'en coinmencez plus ce soir. 20. Voih\ des pom mes, donnons- • ■11 aux enfants. 21. Non, monsieur, ne leur en donnons ]n\>, lis n'en ont pas besoin. 22. Voih\ les petits enfants ' Cuiiime lis sont heureux ! 23. Qu'ils aicnt toujours du ])on- heur! 24. (^Hielle belle mariee ! Comme elle est lieur- eu^e ! (Qu'elle ait toujours dc la, prosperite ! 25. Avc7- vuas des clievaux, monsieur ? 2('.. Oui, monsieur nous en nvoiis un. 27. Qu'y a,-t-il dans la boite? 28. II y a des plumes. 21). La lille de notre voisin a-t-elle encore des I'oires ? SO. Elle n'en a g-uere. 31. Y a-t-il des clievaux '. 1. Don't cry any more, my boy ; be happv. 2. Give us some l)read, if you please. 3. We have none ; we gave 1! .1 na >' to the beggar's child ren . 4. Arc tliere an v horses nitlielield? ,5. Nj, sir, there arc none. G. Lendmeyour lioi-se and carriage, sir, if you please. 7. No, sir, I shall lint lend them to you. 8. Have you anv moi-e money? "■'. I have Imt little. 10. Have you linislied vour lessons Hiy children. 11, Not yet, papa. 12. Very well, finish tlKMii, and don't, begin any more this evening. 1 3. If there ^vcre any paper here, I would lend you some. 14. How •''ppy the bride is! May she always have prosperitv ! I ■». Oive me some of those pencils, if you please. ] G. What aucs your brother wish? 17. lli^ wishes some w.ns and h'''i5,«l •*s "« sj ; ^- 76 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [157-159. ir ' h *if'.iii. pnpor, 18. Very well, ^ive liim some. 10. The be^pfar is iiskinj*- for money. 20. Don't ^ive liim any ; g'ive liim some bread and milk. 21. Let us ^'wo the l)egg-ar's child some money. 22. No, do not ji^ive him any, let us fj;-ive him an apple. 23. Give us some more apples. 21. We have no more. 25. What a beautiful child ! May he al- Avays be j^food and liappy ! 2('). The little boy is askiufx for'milk. 27. Very \V(^il, ^ive liim some. 28. Have you a cane, sir? 29. Yes, sir, I have two. 30. Have you nny nilk in the house ? 31 . Yes, madam, there is some on the table. 32. Let us have couraofc, and we shall be hap])y. 33. The children are asking for apples. .34. Don't ^ive tlicni anv ; thev do not need them. LESSON XVL 158. Prosrot Subjunctive of t/oA7A7e/', finir, rompre. {I (may) (jlre, etc.] [I (may)fnuh, etc.] [/ (may) break, dr.] (que) je romp o. ((j^ue) til romp es. ((px') il romp c. (oue) nous romp Ions. (cpio) vous rouip lex. (qu') lis romp ont. ((juc) jo (lonn ©. (que) je fin/,ss o. ((pio) tu donn es. (que) tu finis.t ea (qir) il (lonn e. (l"') il fin^.s o. (que) lunis domi ions, (que) nous fin/xs ions. (cue) vous (lonn iez. (que) vous finm iez. (qu') ils clonn cnt. (qu') ils fine's- ont. [Pron.— 1. (b ) .^e rldn, (le) til don, (k) il don, (I'c) nu ddmo, (ke) rudoinc, (k)ilddii. 2. (ke) ze finU, (ke) til finis, (k) iljinis, fkrjvii finixio, (ke) vujidide, (ic)ilfvis. 3. (ke)zero.p, (ke)tilro.p, (k) il ro.p, (ke) vn rojnd, (ke) vu rl^p'ic, (k) il ro.jx] Obs. : 1. Tho coiij. quo='tliat,' in part'ithesis, is commonly learned with tlio subj. paradigm, but remember that quo doos noi in itself dcicrmiiie fhi' wood. 2. The parndi<,'in meanings (' I may jyivc,' etc.) are only apjn-oximate, as will be seen from the pxamiites below. 159. Present Subjunctive of avoir, etre. [I (may ) hare, etc.] [I (may) he, etc.] (que) j'aie. (que) nous ayons. (que) je sois. (que) nous soyons. (que) tu aies. ((pie) vous ayez. (que)tusois. (que) vous soyez. (qu') il ait. (qu') ils aient. (qu') il soit. (qu') ils soient. [PrON.— 1. (ke) r.,\ (ke) til >\ (k) il ,\ (ke) vuz no, (h ) ruz !%,'■, (k) ih (\ 2. (ke) r.e md, (ke) tu 4ud, (k) il sud, (ke) nil fuaXo, (ke) m tnuiie, (k) il .•?««».] LoO-162.] DIS.HJNCTIVE PEKSONAL PRONOUNS. 77 100. Use of the Siibjiiiictivo. Some of the commoner uses of tlio sul)J. arc : — 1. In II mihordhmte clause iiitroclnccd l)y que = 'that': n. After verbs such as voulolr = 'to will,' » "« must speaK. I" L-T. 11 faudra J I You ^vill have to spoak. 1(»2. Disjunctive Personal Prououn*,. All the pers. pi'on. forms already given are used alojuj irith the verb (^as >ject or object ), and hence are called 'coyijnnctim. The Pnrins not immediately connected with a verb are called disjunctim. They are :— I "►n -»«I * •-.hi 78 FRENCH (UlAMMAX. [1G2, 103. Sinq! inol, /, 7ne. tol, Uunt, thee. lul, //(', /*/»/. Plur. nouH, irr. US. VOUM, l/(>ll. OlIX, //('// (ill.), (/l< III (ill.), ollc'H, fhrl/ (f.), //,,/// (f.). [PuoN. — mm, fnti, l/ci, el, iik, rii, <>, r/.] 10;j. Some Uses of the Disjunctive Vers, Pi on. aro : — 1. Ahsoliifely {ii verb hvAug Imjilicd, but not exiircssed) : Qui est 1;\?— Mol (eu.v, dies). \\].<> ia tlioie? I (tliey). 2. M'tiiv i\ prepoKition : Pour die. Aveumol. Sanseux. For her. \Vith mo. Without them. 3. As predicate after ce + etre : C'estmol, cVsttol, c'estlul, c'cstelle. It is I, thou, he, she. r'cstnous, o'est VOU8, cesout eux (elh's). It i.s we, yon, they. EXEIW ISK XVI. Abimer (dhimej, spoil. Flapper (fnipe), knock. Absent (dUxa ), absent. TntelligeiiL (etilirM), inteniguiit. Atiii (pie (djc b ), in order that, so Mt'-oessaire ( inWsi'.i-J, necessary. J^o imvcui ( pdm ), relative, parent. Le pasteur (pdstui.r), pastor. Pcrdre (pi.idr), lose. Pour (|ue ( pn.r ke ), in order that, so that. Quoi(pie (klidkr), aiihough. Ilegretter ( rci/rrtr), regret. Souhaiter (siiif('), wish. that. L'argent, in., (drr:a), silver. Avant (pie (dra h ), before. Bien (pie (Jiie. Ir), although. Content (kotn ), glad. Le (Mi (de), thimble. Dc^sirer (drzin'), wish, want. Fach6 (J'asil), sorry. II faut (fu), it is necessary, must. Chez nous, chez moi, etc. At our liouse, with us, at my house, etc. J'eu suis i\\d\i\ I am sorry for it. J'en suis content. I am glad of it. A. 1. II faut que nous finissions uoti-e ouvragc avant ({uatre heurcs. 2.^ II faut que le tils du medecin soit cliez nous ce soir. 3. Etes-vous content que nion frere ait rom- pu sa canne sur le dos de ce coquin-)A ? 4. J'en suis hien content. 5. Nous soninies bien contents que vous ayez trouve votrc argent. 6. Je suis fache que tu aies perdii le 1(18.] I>IS.rUNCTIVE PEltSONAL ritONOUNS. 79 de dar-ciit dc ta mvva. 7. Nous no batirons pas une iiiaison, avnnt(iau nous soyons assuz riches. 8. Lo pro- Icsscur d(\sii-c quo vous liuissicz vos tlit'inos. 9. Nous re- ^Tcttous braucoup (luc ]c pasteur soit absent. 10. 2^[arie est tres contcntc quelle soit aussi ^-rancUMpie nioi. 1 1 ( )uoi- (lue Jean soit plus «Tand quo .Marie, il est nioins intellik'nt qii elle. 12. Je deniandc dc Vn /«-ent a nion pere, afin (lue j eii aie assez. 13. Ma nirrc drsire cpie nous fei-niions les tciirtres, afin que nous ayons plus cliaud. 1 1. Nos amis dr- sii-ent (lue nous restions eliez eux. 15. Bien (pie vous lui doiimez beaueoup d'ar^-ent, il n'en aura jamais assez. U). Les inei'es ainient toujours lours enl-ints, quoidue les on- tniits soient quc^hiuffois niecliants. 17. Le pere n'est pas t'unreiit ii-e-t-elle que je lui donne ee iivre? 29. Parce qu'il est a '• le. oO. 11 taut que le domestique rompe ces niorceaux <1<' hois, et qu'il allume le feu, car nous avons froid. />'. I. I desire you to finish your exei'cise. 2. Thou^-h eliildren are sometimes nauj^-hty, their mothers always love tlK'iu. 3. What do you want, my little g-irl ? 4 I want yuur little ^\v\ to ])]ay with me.* 5. You must close the jviiulows, for we are cold. 0. I am very ^Had that vou arc iH'iv. 7. Ai-e you not sorry that your sister is not with us ^ '^ \ OS, I am very sorry for it. 9. Arc you not g-lad that ^v(■ have a ^'•ood fire in our room ? 10. Yes, I am very ^lad I'f !'• 11. Thou^-h John is older than Mary, she is more mtcilig-ent than he. 12. Who is knockino- ? 13. R is we vurneis-hbor's children. U. W^hat do vou want ? 15 We ^vaiit your little boys t. . pla y with us. 1 G. Does your mother ;vish us to live with (ch(^^ you ? 17. Xo, she wishes you to live with !inr. 1- '" • ^ • -^ il,? I'll te '•I utri M ■,:*». *•■ ' "I \\ (' sliall Rot hav a carriage, mti 80 FHKNft your father's houst; ; I Avish you may have much hMppiucss'. 22 I wish you to live with us. 2.'J. If you Averc to live with us, we shouM belutppy. 21. Chihlreu must obey tlieir parents. 25. Our friciuls desire us to live with them.' 2('.. I want you to eh)se tlie windows, so tjijit we sli/ill not be cold. 27. I am «-la,d the Ix'o-o-ar is no ]oii,-ry. ;}2. You have spoiled niy brother's silk ha t ; are you not sorry for it ? 33. Yes, I am sorry that I have been nau;.;]ity. LE8S0N XVTT. 164. IiiiDoifect Siib.jmictivoof (yo/7/?e/-,^A7/>, rompre. [(That) I nhiht. [( That ) I broke, tni{/ht !/ire, cfr.] Jiiii.sh, rfc] hrml; etr.] (que) je (lonn asse. (que) jofin Isse. (que) je romp Isho. (quo) tu (lonii .-isses. (que) tu fm Issos. (que) tu romi) Isses. (qu')il(l.)iuij1t. (qu')ilfiiitt. (qu^)ilronipit. (que) nous donii .-isslons. (que) nous fin issloiiH. (que) nous romp IrsIoiih. (que) vous donn assio/., (,,nc) vous Hn issicz. (que) vous romp Isslez. (qu') ils donn assent. (qu') ils fin issent. (cpi') ils romp issent. [Prox.— 1. (h-) .re rldn(l% (Ir) fii donas, (k) il dnna, fkfjvii ddmUlo, (ke) vu ddnd.^ir, (k) U ddiuis. «2. (b^) Hofnis, ( kc ) tr,f„;^, (k) !/ fni, (ke) nnjiuisu), (ke) rn^finUv', (k) if.jhii.^. .3. (ke) rx ropU, (ke) tiirop's, (k) il ropi, (kv) vu ropisto, (kr) ni. ropisV, (k) il rrrph.] 165. Impeifcot Siibjiinctivo of auoir, etre. [(That) I had, ml>/ht hare, ate] [( That) I was, ware, might he, etc.] ((pio) j'eusse. (que) nous oussions. (que) je fusse. (que) nous fussions. (que) tu eusses. (cpxe) vous cussiez. (que) tu fusses, (que) vous fussiez. (qu') il eftt. (qu') ils eussent. (qu') il fi\t. (qu') ils fussent. [PBOX.--1. (kr)^iis, (b'.Jtil ih, (k)il u, (kr)nuz iisio, (ke)vuz iM,i, (k) ih iis. 2. (ke) zeflls, (ke) til fas, (k) il fa, (he.) nu fUsio, (ke) vufilne, (k) ilfiis.] (10.] TENSE SEQITENCE. 81 1 0«. Toiise Rcqiiciice. Anjj other- feufte than the pre- sr/// in- f(,tnre{'i^\\\\) in the p)veniiii- ciniiso roLnil/irlv iV(|UiiTs Mic f iff perfect .snt)J(nn'f}re in tiic y-ovcrncd cl.-iusc' So .'ilso for onnpnnn^l sultj. tenses, iW. au.ri/iani b(dn«eon. sidcred ns the iT>'/> ; ImI'F. .F.MUVsiralH Past. Dki". ' < CoNDL. (It'siralH \ /"I slrnl Lui'il iM'st At. i I «ltVsirt'i'als/ ill II fallait que j' y fusso. ^1 was desiring him to roiiiiiin. (k'Hired lilm to roiiKiln. should desire li tin to I'einaln. EXEIK ISF XVII. / It was iiocfssary for me to be there. U had (was oldiired) to be there. ,](' .h'sireraia quo vous y fussiez. I should like you to be there. A. 1. Nous desii'ions quo voiis y fussiez nvaut notro ar- nvee. 2. Je lui ni donne de I'nr^'-ent, alin qu'il en donnat .'HI niendiant. 3. Nous etions contents que vous no fussiez I'Ins pauvrci. 4. Lc pere etait fache quo son ills cut donne ien contents que les enfants lourdonnassentdesmorceaux Uf pain. 23. D(:'sireriez- vous que je vous donnasse de I'ar- J4_ ♦I tifj ^,1 " !• rS IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) A, // <. .V^'. ,v >%* v^4 % :/ "^ 1.0 I.I 1^ ■ 50 ^ m ^ 1^ 12.0 L25 i 1.4 1.6 % VQ / ."^ > /A Pnnfr»rfrQT^nir» Sciences CorpoMoR ^% ^>c^ V -^ Ci^ 23 WE<^T MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 972-4503 '■^ -: z r 82 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [166-168 gent? 24. Oui, monsieur, car j'cnai grand besoiii. 25. Mon pore ne desirait pas epic Ic petit; gar§on abiinat son clia- pcau. 26. Nos cousins n'avaicnt plus de pommcs, ou notrc onclc aurait desire qu'ils vous en eussent donne. B. 1. We should like you to give us some paper and pens. 2. The teacher would like you to finish your lessons at once. 3. We gave the poor little birds bread, so that they might not be hungry and cold. 4. You would soon have a good fire, if you would break those pieces of wood. 5. We wanted you to give us some bread. 6. Although our friends were poor, they were always happy. 7. We regretted that our friends had no more money. 8. We were wishing that you were here. 9. We gave money to the beggar, before we gave our children any. 10. Our cousins were wishing that their father would liv^e with them. 11. The children closed the windows, so thj^t we should not be cold. 12. We were there, before the others arrived. 13. The carpenter would like you to give him some boards. 14. I should like you to be there. 15. It was necessary for me to close the windows. 16. I should not like the servant to spoil my gold watch. 17. Your father was sorry that you had given money to that beggar. 18. I was very glad that you were happy. V^. Our children had no more money, or we should have liked them to give you some. 20. I had to be there, before the othei's came. 21. Although John was older than Mary, he was not so intelligent as she. 22. I should like my father to be happy, when he is (sera) old. 23. That little boy was glad that I had given him some apples. 24. Our parents loved us, although we were often naughty. 25. Did he not wish us to come ? LESSON XVTII. 167. Present Participle of donner, finir, rompre, avoir, etre. [OiviiKj.] [FinishiiKj.] [Breaking.] [Hariixj.] [Being.] doun unt. fin m ant. romp ant. ay ant. et ant. [Prok. — 1. dona. 2. Jinisa. 3. ropa. 4. eia. 5. (^.ta.] 168. Use and Agreement. The pres. part, has the force of an adjective or of n, verb. As an adjective, it agrees ; otherwise it is invariable : 1G8-171.] AGREEMENT OP PAST PARTICIPLE. 83 3 g-bid Une scfene frappaiito. Les inourants. A striking scene. The dying. Kilos sont charmautes. They are charming. Pleurant, elle continua son T6cit. Weoplng , she continued her story. II tombait souvent en luarchunt. He often fell while walking. N. B.-En iH the only prcj.. follov.eJ by ajn-es. part—all others take the iiifin ■ Le rri.no 9. Use of Auxiliaries of Tense. Avoir + the past part, forms th(3 compound tenses of all transitive and of most intransitive verbs (§170) : Perf. Infin. avoir donn6, to have given. Perf. Part, ayant donn6, harimj ,jiven. Past Indf.f. j'ai donne, / have given, gave, etc. Pi.uPF. Indic, j'avais donn6, Ihadgivan, etc. Past Anterior, j'eus donn6, 1 had givni, etc. FuT. Anterior. j'auraidonn4, I shall have given, etc. Coxdl. Ant. j'aurais donn.^, I should have givsn, etc. Pkrf.'Subj. (que) j'aie domu', (that) I may have given, etc. Plupf. Subj. (que) j'eusse donn6, (that ) I might have given, etc. 170. mre + the jmst part, forms the compound tenses or all reflexive verbs (§175) and of a fe?c intransitives, of • which the folloAving- are the most important : venir, to come. naitre, to he born. arrlver, to arrive, come. niourlr, to die. aller, to go. decider, to die. So also, most of the intransitive compounds of venlr (devenir, becimie • rovenir, come hack, etc. ). ' ■* tomh^'^^air'' °^ ''^****' '' ''"''' '"'*'' «ntror, enter, retourner, go back, ^^ • [/ have arrived, etc.] je suis^ nous sommes "j tues Urriv6(e). vous etes iarriv6(e)s. il (elle) est J ih (ellos) sont J n/ '^ * • /^«^'*®®'«<'^* Of Past Participle. The past part, or a verb conjug-ated with etre always agrees with the ■^iioject (unless the verb be reflexive, §177) : ^larie et Georges ^taient arrives. Mary and George had arrived. i«fuand t^ites-vous arriv6(e) ?, or ar- When did you arrive ? . i'iv6(e)8 ? Elle parle d'etre arriv^o. She speaks of having arrived. S4 FRENCH ORAMMAR. [172. •« fir HiiJ 172. Uso of pompoiind Toiises. 1. The pluperfect is of coininoner occurreiu'o tlinii tlic past antcHnr, aiul is regularly used after si = * if,' or when custom, continuance, etc., is implied : Si j'livnis cu rargent, jo Tauraia If I luul had tlie money, I should doling. have given it. J'avalH souvont flnl avant son ar- I often luul flnlHlKMl befoie his riv«5e. arrival. 2. The past anterior is rarely used except after con junc- tions of time, such as lorsquc, qiuiiid - Mvlien,' apres quo =-- * after,' niissitot quo, dos que = ' as soon as,' etc. : AussltAt qu'il out flnl, 11 partit. As soon Jis he had flniHhed, ho went away. 3. Observe the use of the future perfect in a subordin- ate clause in \yhk'\i futurity is implied : Je lui parlerai, quand ilanraflni. I shall speak to him, when lie has fliiishtMl. 4. The rules for conditional sentences (§140) and tenM' sequence with the su])junctive (§§l(il, lOO) apply to the aux- iliary of com p. tenses : Si j'avai8bienr(!'cit6, lemaitreau- If I had recited well, the master rait (''te content. would have been pleased. Je suls content que vous ayez nV I «iu glad that you have suc- usKi. ceoded. EXERCISE XVIII. Acheter (date), buy. Le chant (M), singing, song. L'affaire, f., (dft'.r), affair. Charmer (Mryne), chajrm. Amuser (dmuzcj, amuse. Le fat (fdt), fop. L'Angleterre,f.,fayZf• "'"'^er bought i silk hat worn /r y,.:i ;/^f ITth^i- !s?|?-"-e tosdiool to-day, I should have been sorry fo?it 6 r^nnr M>iit to the United ^.tates. 7. If that little fop had broken •^ 8 No" s r T\ "^' """'? ^""^ "'^^'^ b-n glad of ohcrs 7v''^^ ''^ "<'^«'' fe"^d at the misfortunes of otiicis. 9. Having had many ■-ir.fortuncsin this countrv i„,r „ ■ y ' '■ • '- arrived ast week. 12 Hn v c 1 ,; iV w 1^ """"'y """^'^ '"'« t'"" my daughters had c»i 1". 15. Would you not like very much thit the w« I'aa not gone to school to-d^y ? la ™I am sony S 86 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [172. 173. fir ! they have ^^one to school. 17. Singinj,^ and playing, the little children have amused their mothers all day lonj*. 18. We had f,^one to church before you had arrived. lU. That bird's song has charmed us all day long. 20. Did you close the doors and windows? 21. Yes, sir, we closed them. 22. If the children liad come soon(U', we sliould have given them some apples. 23. I shall give the little hoy some money, when he has finished his work. 24. AVhen did you speak to your mother of that atfair? 25. I have never spoken to her about it. 20. Ihiving given away my apples to the children, I have none left. 27. If my brother were here, I should be very glad of it. 28. If I had l)0ught a silk liat, I should luive no money left. 29. I am glad that he has gone. 30. I should like him to have come. < LESSON XIX. 173. Use of tlio Iiifliiitivo. Some of the commoner uses of the inhnitive arc :— - 1. Without any prepositmi : a. After such verbs as voiiloir = ' will,' dcsirer - ' wish,' 'like to,' i)Ouvoir= 'can,' 'may,' savoir- 'know how to,' 'can,' devoir = 'ought,' oser - 'dare,' falloir= 'be neces- sary,' etc., and after many verhi< of inotion : Pouvez-vous ronipro ce baton ? Can you break this stick ? II vous faut tvHvalller davantage. You must work more. Allez cliercher du pai)ier. Go and get some paper. &. After verbs of pereewing, such as voir ^ * see,' ecouter = ' listen to,' rogarder - ' look at,' etc. So also, after faire = ' make,' ' cause .o,' and laisser - ' let,' ' allow ' : Je vois venir le train ; je le vois I see the train coining ; I see it vonlr. coining. 06s.; In constrnotion (b.) governed nouns regularly /o??om> the infinitive, \ut the pers. pron. obj. acco')i2)a)ues the finite verb. 2. Preceded by de, after et re as impers. verb + adj., after many verbs like regretter - ' regret,' etre faclie = * be sorry,' prier- ' bog,' ' re(|iiest,' ordonner =-' order,' etc., after nouns to form an attributive phrase, and after most adjectives : 173,174.] FORMATION OF TENSES. 87 II est facile do falro orln t*. • lairo ceia. Jt jg easy to do that Je voiis prie do m'aldep. t k„„ \ . T . , ^ ''eg you to help me. Le crime de volep. tv,^ • V ., ,., ihe crime of stoiilln«!f. Vous otes hbre do rotonrner. You are free to ^o back j/t.i»isti5i __ persist, ftiiiior — < liiro ' <7r^-.r<^» * ' «.«.«., to denote desfinatmn, purpose, eta , *' ''"'* '''^''' II a „or,i>,t^ ft „„„, ,n.,.,,„,„p,„ j,^ ^^.^^^^, ,_^ l„t„„apt.„« „, CAe»tf«>,Io,Vf„,r„. That i, easy to do. une maison k vondro a i, vonaro. A house for sale (^to bo sold). 1T4. Formation of Tenses. By the followinfi- rnloc guui) veibs may be known from five forms of the verl. '^'^^\\<^i\ lynncipal parts ov primary tenses: ' 1. I'RKS IXFIN, ii^ nnpmai- rBl.r 1 . ,To' oL •ettrr.aucoup do ne pas avoir etc cela, nous en serous couteuts^ 17 J ^^^'',^5'^' . 2e.Si.no rs^mirir^^oSx oueJ^vif^^^ P' Tto^saurons le gn.ndl.aMr de visiter nos ^ vous prie, monsieur, de me donner de 'argent 27 Ja. 29^11 n'aurartVs rtosi ii batir cette maison, s. je ne 174,175.] IIEKJ.EXIVE VEUUS. 89 lui jivais pas preto do 1','ir^^eiit. 30. Votre petit ffurc^'on pourqiioi n'est-il pas k I'ecole ? ni. J'ai peur de I'y laisser allcr. B. 1. Docs your brother like to work? 2. Yes, he likes to work, but he prefers to play. 3. I am sorry to say that I was wroii^^ 4. He asked his lather to let hiiu fro to school. 5. His iMther does not wisli to let liiiu ^-o to school. (>. AVhy does he not dare to speak to his father? 7. lie is afraid of otrendin^- him. 8. I jim f>-lad to have the per- mission of speakhi^" to you about it (en). 9. We shall have the ^-reat pleasure of visiting our friends, when we are in Tui'onto. 10. Your friends and relatives will have the l)l('.!sure of speaking to you, when you are in Toronto. 11 . I am afraid to speak of it to my father ; I prefer to speak of it to my mother. 12. There is a very line silk hat ; I should like to have it. 13. Do you need to work ? 14. Yes sii , I have gi-ent need of working. 15. I don't like to go to church to-day ; I pi-efer to stay at home. 1(5. I asked our neighl)or to let me have some api)les, but he has no more. 1 1 . He is sorry to say that he luis none. 18. AVliy is that lit! Ic girl not at school ? 19. Her mother is afraid to let her i^o to school. 20. There is a nice little house for sale. 21. I sliould like to buy it, ])ut I have not money enough. 22. Shall I not have the pleasure of seeing you, when you tire here? 23. Oh, yes, sii-, with great plejisure. 24. He will not succeed in laiilding his house, if he does not have more money. 25. I should not have succeeded in seeing liini, if my brother had not been with me. 20. I am glad to sny to you that you are right. 27. If we succeed in do- ing that, we shall be much pkvised (at it). 28. I shall bo glad to stay at home to-nioi*i'ow. 29. Are you afraid of saying that to your mother ? 30. No, sir, I am not afraid of saying it to her. 31. My brothers and sisters will be glad to see me. LP]SSON XX. 1 75. Reflexive Verbs. The suhject of a reflexive verb acts on itself as reflexive object. Tlie comjjound temes are always formed with etre, as in the following section. 90 FUENCH (iUAMMAll. [17(M79. 11 \ 176. Con.lnfrntlcn of se flatter : — pRKR. Inmn. so {\Mter, to jlatUr Pkkk. Inkik. sVHro fliittt''(t')(H), 'o rt»r'.s sc/f. hare. jhiticfcd om'/i ndf. .':;i;.s. Taut, so flaitant, JlnftfriiKj I'krk. Pakt. s'l'-tant llattt'(e)(H), /tay- iiiij Jlaiterrd o?h''« .sc//. TuES. Indic. [IJlatter inifscff, etc.] jc me Hatte. tu te Hattea. il (ellc) se llatlo. nous nou8 ilattone. vous VOU8 tlattt!/. ils (ellea) se flat tent, etc. Past. Indkk. [[ have, jldttn-td myxeif, etc."] je me suis \ tu t'us Itlatti'Kc). il (elle) s'est J uoua nous soinnies vous vous ("•tea ils (dies) se sont etc. S flatti'i(e)8. 177. The Past Pjuticiplc jiK^rccs Avith tlio reflexive object (unless it l)c indbrct j ■ lis se sont flatt«''s. Elle s'est r«!'jnuie. But : EUes se sont aoheti'i des robes. They have flattered themselvca. She (has) rejoiced. They have bought themselves dresses. NoTK.— The aux. Gtro ia considered as rejiUiciny avoir, aiul the a;,'reement is ex- plained by the f,'enenil i)riiioii)le(§l'21). 178. Uso of the Keflexive. 1. The reflexive is very coiiunon in French, and is often expressed in Knj^^lish by the passive (especially of unspecified agent), or by a non- reflexive verb (generally intransitive). A reflexive + a prep, has often the value" of an English transitive: Ma montre s'est trouv6e. My watch has boen found. S'ai-rGtor. So porter. To stop. To l>o (said of health). So Ji Titer. Se troiuper. To hasten. To be mistaken. Se cloutor de. Se tier h. To Huspect. To trust. 2. In the plural reflexive verbs cxpn^ss either reflexive or reciprocal action : EUes se flatteut. They flatter themselves {or one another). 179. The Passive Voice is formed from the various tenses of etre ^ the past participle, which agrees with the subject : - 179-181.] USE OK TffE fASSrVE. 91 [lam (or a,n Unn,j) prai.U, .tr.] f/ A«.e /^eeu^or .ret., or ,rr.. UinyJ pramU, etc.] JO SU18 -v M A , il (elle) u eto J ;i()us aoumies \ noua avons 6t<5 \ ^^""•^("^«- vou8Hve/^.te lou^.(e)«. VOUS vlOH i ' lis (elles) out 6t6 etc. 0/«. ; The i>aHt part. nvr>l-fo nnti(m (Vnllor aii vdlar;o. U. Kl l.wii, . ( i>^, VOUH vous otos trompr. do cl.omin. 12. Si .10 no in'o nis pas troiMpodochciniii,.iaui-ai8et(5doiAchoziiioi. l.-i. (.no doniando CO potit pvr.on ? 1 i. II n'^-st troin,K. d. porfo : l cd.oroho la iiiMison do M. Mo.vior. 15. iMadoiHoiscllo votro sa-ur couunont s'.st-ollo portc^o ^?^'l>"'^;"\f ^^^^* IC. Kilo iVa oUi lualado (pi'vino iois. 1/. Tu as (k mochaiit,iiu.unis? IH. Oui, luaman. H». Jo mon suis doutoo 20. Vous Gtcs-vous l)ion nmusoos .-m bal, inosdc- moisoUes? 21. Nous nous y Homines bion a inusoos. JL. Ko- ouissoz-vous, parco ((uo votro rCconiponso sora p:rando. 23. Ainuscz-vous,niesonfants; vous no soroz pas toujou s icunos 24. Cotto damo est ainnV^ do tout le niondo. 2,>. Je mo suis douto do (lueUiuo chose; co co(,uin a, vole la mon- tred'or do notro voisin. 20. Vous avoz ton, madamo ; vous vous otes trompoo dans cottc affaire, 27. Mais noii, monsicHir, io no mo suis pas trompoo. 28. Commc Ics pe- X enfants s'amusent ! 30. Co jeunc homme est anno ot rcspccto do tons ses voisins. 31. N'otes-vous pas fache quo jcmcsois trompe? 32. Jc suis content que vous vous sovez trompe. . • o o t hit, tto.-v 7? 1 How arc von this morninj?, sn-? 2. T am voiy W0I1" m'adam 3. Have you been well the whole year.-' rihavo been ill only Ince. 5. Our nei,Wd.or's horses stopped in front of our f^-ate. 0. I an^ sorry to say that Tollr^ mistaken. 7. Where do you desire to ^ ymv,., ladies ? 8. We desire to ^o to churoii, sir. 9. A\ ell the. vou have taken the wron^ road. 10. Eejoice, for you will have a Ln-eat reward. U. How did you en.ioy yourselves at the b^Ul, la,st evening, young ladies ? 12. Those yomv^ ladies are loved and respected by everybody. 13. 1 lie book was found by my brother. 11. Our neighbor's watch 1S1,182.] TMPEIISONAT. VERBS. 98 was stolon by llint little raHcul. 15. AVlio is at our door ? IC). It is M. M»;rcit!r. 17. What is iK^askiiiif for ? 18. lie is at the wnuif*- door; ho is lookinjjc for M. lilanc's house. ID. Kn.joy yourselves (mns) boys ; you will work better for it (e.n). 20. If those ^jfeiitlcMiKMi \vm\ not tnkini the wron^ road, they Avould luivc been at home now. 21. I suspected somethinj;' ; that rascal has stolen my watch. 22. I have lost my watch and money. 23. I suspected it. 24. If I nm not mistaken, I shall soon be at home. 25. That gen- tleman is wronjj: ; he is mistaken in that affair. 20. Are you not .'isliMmed to say that T am mistaken ? 27. That younjif mnn is loved by everybody. 28. Mv father is not well ; lie has l)ecn ill for a year. 21). IIow those d(>f»'s enjoy them- selves ! 30. Did you enjoy yourself in Paris? 31. lam sorry that I was mistaken. 32. Wo are very glad that he was not mistaken. 33. Everybody is mistaken sometimes. 3 i. AVhy do you not stop ? 35. Let us stop ; we have taken the wrong road. 30. Do not stop; you have not taken the wrong road. 37. Our neighbors have but few friends. 38. You are wrong ; they have many friends and relatives in the country. LESSON XXI. 182. Imporsoiial Verbs arc conjugated, in the 3rd sing, only, with the subject il ( =^ * it,' 'there,' used inda- fuiHely and absolutely). Such arc : — 1. Verbs describing natural phenomena, as also in Eng- lish : Plont-il? — Non, monaieur,llnelRe. Is It rntnlnie: ? No, It Is snowtiiff. II a (I6|srel6. II picuvra bientot. It thawed. It will rain soon. a. So also, f{iIro = ' to do,' * make,' used impersonally : Quel temps falt-II ? — II fait beau What kind of weather is It ? It Is (temps). ' fine (weather). II a fait froid. II faisalt obscur. It was cold. It was dark. II fait tropchaud dans cette chain- It Is too hot in this room {or this bre. room Is too hot). Obn. : Distinjfuish the above from constructions with a j)er«onfTi subject : Le temps est beau, ' The weather is fine.' L'eau est froide, ' The water is cold.' ifiii FRENCH GRAMMAR. ^ 182,183.] 2, The irreg-. verb ftillolr-'to be necessary,' 'must,' •be obliged to,' "liave to/ *^tc. : — Injin. Pres. Part. fall^4r. Put. Irn}!)/. il xaiiclra. U fallait. Condi. Pres. SiihJ. il faudrait. (qu)'il faille. II faut quo je parte. ^ II mo faut partir. ) ^ '""«^ S"' Past Part. Pres. Indie fallu. il faut. Past DeJ. il fallut. Imp/. Suhj. il faimt. II 'ul faudra rcster. ^ II faudra qu'il resto. ) ^^ ^^^^ ^^""^ ^ (^^ obliged to, etc.) stay. 11 ne faut pas voler. We must not steal. a. Followed by a noun, faliolr== • need ' (also expressed by a.vo!r besoln do), and takes the dative of the nerson vreding : II faut ini Jean a bcsoin ohapeau k Jean. 1 _. , , , , . , , ) John needs a hat. !8oin d un chapeau. ) 3. Avoir preceded by y and used i7npersonally : II y a. II y a eu. There is {or are). There has (or have) been. II y avait. II y avait eu. There was {or were). There had been, etc., like avoir. a. Distinguish voIl;'i=' there (emphatic) is or are' from il y a= • there (uneinphatic) is or are,' and observe the use of il y a in express- ing time (reckoned backwards) : Voll^ un he\ arbre ! II y a mi bel arbre dans la cour. Nous sommes arrives il y a trois,^ Jours. I 11 y a trois .^ours que nous J sommes arrivi'-s. / II y a i.rois jours que nous som- mes ici. There is a fine tree ! There is a fine tree in tlie yard. We came three days affo. We have been here for three day lequircs de before a following" infinitwe : li est facile de faire ceia. It is easy to do that. 184] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 95 184. Conjugation of f aire, 'toclo,' ' make. '' cause to etc. ; — ' ' Pres. Part. Pa»t Part. Pren. Indie. Pad DeJ . faisant. fait. fas. faisons. fia, ^'^'Pf- t'ais. faites. Inipf. StihJ. ^aisais- fait. font. fisse. Pres. Suhj. [Impvc. fais, faisons, faites.] fasse, (-es, -o), fassions, (-iez, -ent). Pres. Ir,jm iaire. Put. ferai. Condi. ferals. EXERCLSE XXI. Agr6al)le (dqredhl), agreeable Le lac (Idk), lake. La carafe (Icdrdf), decanter, water-bottle. La livre (li.^rr), pound. Le clou (kluj, nail. Comme (kom), like. Coiitinuer (kotiniiej^ continue. Faire (fe.r), make. Frais, hniche ('/ri,frd.§), freah, cool Je fais venir du pain. Je me fais faire un habit. Je me suis fait faire un habit. Bon jour. Bon soir. Vous trouvez ? Longteuips (IdtaJ, long, a long time. Le tsmps (faj^ weather. Trouver (trurc'J, find, think. La viande (ila.d), meat. I send for hread. I am having (getting) a coat made. I (have) had a coat made. I Good morning. -j Good day. vGood afternoon. Good evening. Good nighs. Do you think so ? A. 1. Bon jour, monsieur, comment vous portcz-voiis ce matm? 2. Je ne me porte pas bien, il fait; trop chaud. .^. Vous trouvez? Moi j'aime le temps chaud. 4. Trou- yez-vons que ce temps est trop froid ? 5. Non, madame .16 1 aime comme cela. 6. II fait chaud aujourd'hui, mais 11 tera phis chaud demain. 7. Je ferai bAtir une maison qiiand je serai assez riche. 8. II faudra que je sois chez moi ee scir. 9. II y a de belles pommes dans ce panier. iu. voilc^ de belles pommes dans ce panier ! 11. Y a-t-il lon^nempa que vous etes ici ? 12. II y a quatre ans que nous sommes ici. 13. Que faut-il k Marie ? 14. II lui faut uiio robe nruve. 15. Je desire que vous me fassiez faire une table. 1(5. Je desire qu'il fasse chaud demain. 17. Bon soir, madame ; il fait beau, n est ce pas ? 18. Ce men- '^»j 96 FRENCH f^RAMMAR. [184. sieur s^^st tait faiiv. un luibit. ID. Je m'en suis fait fane unaussi. 20. 11 fait Lien chaiid, maie leau du xac est encore froide. 21. Comment trouvez-vous le temps au C'lnada ''> 22. Je le trouve presciue toujours bien ag^reabie. 23. Est-ce (iii'il y a. de Fcfiiu fraiclie dans la maison.'> 24. Oui, monsieur, en voiL\ dans la carafe ^ur la table. 25. Que vous faut-il ce matin, monsieur? 2o. -J me faut une livre de viande et (luatre livres de pam.^ 2L XI fautnu.- nous fassions venir du villv^-e do la viande ct du pain. 28. L'cau du lac sera ])lus cliaudc, s il contmue ;\ fairc chaud. 21). Le Ills du cliarpentier a tait vcnir du villajre des planches et dcs clous. 30. II faudra que nous arrivions avant midi. 31. Que ce pauvre chien a cbaud ! 32 11 +aut des planches au cha rpentier. 33. qn en tera- t-ii ? 34. II cii fera une table. 35. (,)ue faites-vous, ma- dame ? 36. Je tais une robe pour ma petite lille, et j'en fais venir une autre de la ville. , , , j B 1. What does Mary need. 2. She needs books and paper. 3. We must send for bread and meat. 4. We wish that you would get a carriage made for us. o. It is very Warm to-day. G. Do you think so? I found it vep agreeable. 7. I have had a coat made. 8. Where is it? 9 There it is on the table. 10. 1 do not like warm weather. 11 How warm that poor horse is 1 12. I am getting a table made. 13. AVe had a house built last year. 14. Are there any line pears in the house? 15. Yes, there are some in that basket. 1 0. That gentleman's ,son sends to the vil- tee for meat and bread. 17. Has not the carpenter s son sent to the village for boards and na ils ? 18. Yes, sir and there they are behind the stable. 1<.). AVe must have a house built next vcar. 20. Have you been long here ? 21. 1 ha,ve been "here for four hours. 22. (iood monnng, sir: it is very fine, is it not ? 23. Yes, sir, but it will be war- mer 24. If it continues to be warm, the lake water will be warmer. 25. There is good fresh water in the dc- canter. 20. What does the carpenter need ? 27. He needs nails and boards. 28. What will he do with them ? 21-. He will make a table with them. 30. I wish it would be hue to-morrow. 31. It will not be cold to-day. 32 I shall h*ve a coat made next week. 33. And I shall have one 1S4-1S7.] USE OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 97 M. U- iiifen i«' not re I(> tieii Ic votro lo sien le leui- F. \i\ inicnno la iiMre lu ticiino Isi v»')tro la sienuo la leur iiuulc too. 34. Will tho gcntleinaTi send to the village for a silk hat? 35. No^, there are none in the village. 3(i. I had a coat made, and 1 shall have another one made. ;'>7. I need four pounds of bread and one pound of meat. viS. Give me some water ; I am not well to-day, it is too \vr.im. LESSON XXII. lS5o The Possessive Proiioiiiis. SlN(!ULAR. PlUUAI.. M, F. Ics iniciis les micnncs, mine. les iiotrcs, ours. log tiens les tiennos, thine, yours, les v«)ti'es, yours. les sieiis les slenncs, Ms, hers, its, one's. les Icurs, theirs, one's. [Piiox.— 1. le mie, Id mten, Id mie, U mUn. 2. le n6.tr, la n6.tr, U iid.tr. 3. lette. Id tien, letie, U tUn. 4. le v6.tr, ldv6.tr, Uv6.tr. r>. le xul, Id sUn, U sie, U sUn. 6. le loe.r. Id ha.r, le, he.r.] 01,^. : 1 . The fern, (except, for leur) is formed as in adjs. of like en(linp(§§128, 129, 2). 2. Do aiid{\+lo mien, etc., contract as usual (§107); du mien (-de+le mien), nux miennes ( = t\ + les miennes), etc. 3. Note the accent mark in notre, v6tre, ab- sent in the poss. adj. notre, votre (S<. Asrreement. Possessive pronouns agree in qen- (Icr and numher witii the name of tlie object po.^.^ie.ssed, \ind 11) person with the possessor : 'I'ai mes livres et elle a flo sien t u i i i , , , I Niin. J vif^yg j^y books, and she lias hers. (les siens. 187. Use of Possessive Pronouns. 1. After etre mere oimerslilp is regubrly expressed by h-^a perl pron (disj.), while the use of a. pass. pron. implies distinc I ion of ownership: < 'cttc montre est h niol. This watch is inino {or belongs to mo, i.e.,1 am the owner of it). ''•ticmontroestlumionno. This watch is mine (as distinguishwi from one or more others not mine). 98 FRENCH OllAMMAR. [1S7-180. If *•• " ;'i * 2. The emphatic 'iiiy own,' etc., is generally trauskited by the pron. .simji/y : Cherchez mon th6me et lo vAtro. Look for iny exerciso and your own. 3. The idiom 'a friend of mine'-un do iiics iimis : Cette (lame-lh, est uiio de iiies That lady is an aunt of iiilne, tantes. II a amone do scsamis. He brought some fileiKis of Iiis. 0/as. ; Remember that inon, ton, etc. (§89) are always adjectives, and stand before nouns, while lo nilon,lo tlon.efc., are always jironomis, and stB.ndinxt end of nouns. 188. Oonjujiatioii of fl//e/', 'to^o': — PrcH. Infill. PrcH. Part. Paxt Pari. Pns. ludic. aller. Fnt. irai. Condi. irais. allant. all6. vais. allons Itf>Vj'- vas. allez. allais. va. vont. Prex. Svhj. flmpn. va, allons, allez.] aille, (-es, -e), allions, (-icz), aillent. , 189. Conjiifration of ewyoi/e/-, 'to send': — Pres Ivjin. Preti. Part. Pad Part. Pres. Indie. envoyer. envoyant. envoy6. envoie. envoyons Put. Iitipf- envoies. envoyez. enverrai. envoyais. envoie. envoient. Condi. Pres. Snhj. [Impve. envoie, envoyons, envoyez.] euverrais. envoie, (-es, -e), envoyions, (iez), envoient. Past De/. allai. Imp/. SiihJ. allasse. Past De/ euvoyai. Imp. Siihj. envoyasse. Le marchand (mdrsa), merchant. Le retour (rctu.r), return. EXERCISK XXII. Couper (hrpe), cut. L'(4to«e, f., (etqf), cloth. Le laitier (Utul), milkman. Va ehercher du bois. Go and get some wood. II ira en ehercher. He will go for some. Je I'enverrai ehercher du lait. I shall send him {or hot') for (some) milk. J'enverrai ehercher du lait. I shall send for (some) milk. J'irai trouver mon pore. I shall go to (for) my father. Je vais faire cela. T am going to do that. A votre retour. On your return. *■ .I'M l-'^O.J USE OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. A. 1. Si vous alJez clierchor ihi loif i^ no,.i.vot,.o .-etou... 2. ot':Jl'^^if,:^Z-r\'Z iLl.utK,!. ,>. ,J(. v.ai,, trouvcr ma mere ct l-i, vAfi-,. r T 7. I'O cluirpentier va clicrciier nil! ,1 '" "'"""• 8. Of. Otos-vous alio lie, r,"'t'^" '=''',^''V''''''''""=^- 13. Nos voi.i„« sent M^^XtrXjfZ^T""' "^^ '""^• "otrcs, ,„afeil. nc 1,.. out " o„v " 1 1 1™??'-''' '"' voyer chercher de I'otoHcehcz emarclnnd 1-, n"'" '"" raoi |lc vos ,,o„,„,es, jo u'on ai pa/ mol n,"! iV ?""«f" (lu elia,riieiit or va councr ■'>■ Lc fils vontarrivor domain^' 18 'v f'''""^^.!"*- !''• Nos cousins ''•■ <,H.'allc..vrfMrc ^^Z^^"'T] '^'■••--"™;"-"- tiiirouu lial.it '>1 Tl V. • , ■ Jo \',' N ;■',':•'., ,!"™ '""'P^'^"- -'r>. J'y ^■'I'-rolo. 27 Simon;,,V ; f ''"'' ""^ Als aillent cNorohcr dos poinuic. o," /''""*" "''•J° l'«"™>-rais .■"il« trouvcr sa mere HO H'i) T, 7-'' ^* '■'"^'^ S^'^''?''" j'in.is fairc mou ouvra'se. "" ^""'"' P=^« ^' '=l"'«'i .^^^ 1. Where arc vou o-oincr =;,. n,- am S-oiuff to mv uncle """ «''"" '"'■ ■>l>pli those (ones), the coUe-lu, f. s., jfo7^ner. wllvs-lh, i. ^\.,j former. [Pron. — I. se. 2. sesi. 3. seld. 4. seUii, sd, S(i,sH. 5. seU2i si, sU si, sd si, sel si. G. selMi Id, sel Id, su ld,sH id.] 191. Use of ce. It is used most commonly with etre, and must be carefully distinguished both from il (elle, etc.) and from il impermral. Thus,' 1. Ce and the personal il (elle, etc.) : C'est Jean. C'est mon ami. It is John. It (ho) is my friend. C'est mie Alk'mande. C'est olle. Slio is a German. It is she. C'est moi. C'est vous. Ce sont eux. It is I. It is you. It is they. Co sera bien peu. C'6tait asscz. Thtit will be very little. It Av;it' enough. Voil^ des fleurs ; olios sont jolies. There are flowers ; thoy are iiretty Je connais cet homme ; 11 est I know Ihat man ; lio is a doctor. m^decin. H est Franyais. Ho is a Frenchman. 191-195.] CONJUGATION OF uou/oi'r. 101 2. Oe and the impersonal 11 : C'est facile. Ce sera facile k faire. That iS easy. That will be eaayto do. (.''est clair, voua avez tort. It ia clear, you are wrong. II est facile de faire cela. It ia easy to do that. II Ob I clair que voua avez tort. It is clear that you are wrong. 192. Coci=--' this' (the nearer) find cela =* that' (the farther away) denote aonmthing pointed out or indicated, but not yet named : Cela est joli, mais je pr6f6re cecl. That is pretty, but I prefer this. NoTK —Cela is often contracted to ^u in familiar lan^age : ^a ne fait rien, 'That doesn't matter.' 1$)3. Celiii-'that (one)', 'the one,' 'he,' is used of persons or thing's, and is regularly followed by a relatice da use or a do clause : t'olul dont voua parliez est arriv6. Ho of whom you spoke has come. Ceu.v . : The Fr. idiom is, lit., ' the latter and the former.' 195. Conjiig-ation of uou/oir, ' to will ' 'wish,' etc. : — Infin. vouloir. Fut. voiulrai. Cnndl. voudrais. Pres. Part. voulant. Impf. voulais. n c.i,,' I. I CO. UU.UI Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. voulu. veux. voulons. voulus. veux. voulez. Impf. Snbj. veut. veulent. voulusse. [Impve. juillcz. ] veuille, (-es, -e), voulions, (-iez), veuillent. niM'.t;.:«<' rn^HiH ^H ^^1 ■ 1 102 FRENCH aRA\rMAR. [195 Ml • a EXERCISE XXIII. Le beurn (hiv.r ), hixtter. Le conseil (kiixLi), advice. Cuoillir (hvU.7'), gather. Entrcr (iXtrt'.), come in. Facile (fddl), easy. La fit'vro (jU.vr), fever. Le general (zditerdl), general. Les habits, m., (dhi), clothes. Merci (mtirsi), I thank you, thanks. Le poito (j)(iHe), poet. La prune (prime ), plum. Savoir (Hdvfid.r), know. Mon vieux (vUfJ, old boy, old fellow. Comment allez-vous ?'! Commentya va-t-il? Wfamiliar). How are you ? How goes it? Comment 9a va? j Et vous ? Cela ne fait rien. Qu'est-ce quo cela lui fait ? Cela no lui fait rien. Nous voudrions bien en avoir. Voulez vous bien m'en donner ? And how are you ? That makes no difference What is that to him ? That is nothing to him. We should like to have some. Will you have the kindness to give me some ? A. 1. Qui frappc ? Cost moi. 2. Voulez-vous entrer? Oui, monsieur, ,'ivec S"rfiii(l plaisir. 3. Voulez-vous me donner mon habit et celui de mon fr6re ? 4. Nous allons c'herelier nos chevaux et ceux de nos voisins. 5. Vous voudriez aller cherclier des pommes, n'est-ce pas ? 6. Oui, monsieur, et nous voudrions aller cliereher des prunes et des poires. 7. Voulez-vous bien envoyer cherclier du pain et du beurre? 8. Oui, madame, j'en enverrai cherchcr. 9. Comment Qa va, mon vieux? 10. Qa ne va pas tr6s bien, j'al eu la fievre. 11. Mais vous allez mieux i\ pre- sent, n'est-ce pas ? 12. Vous avez perdu de I'arg-ent, n'est-ce pas ? 18. Oh oui, mais 9a ne mo fait rien ; j'en ai assez. 14. Nous voudrions bien finir notreouvrage avant midi. 15. Get habit-h\ est fi mon frere, et celui-ci est i\ moi. 16. Qui est celui-kY ? 17. Cost mon frere. 18. ^ Que va-t-il faire? I'.). II va curillir de.s ])ommes. 20. A qui sont ees chapeaux? 21. Celai-ci est ;\ moi, et celui-h\ est k mon pere. 22. J'ai ma. montre et celle de ma soeur. 23. Voulez-vous bien nous donner un conocll? 24. Avcc plaisir ; que voudriez- vous savoir ? 25. Je n'ai plus d'ar- 195] CONJUQATTON OP UOuloir. 103 ^'oiit, mais cuia ue fait i-ieii. !>(;. Napoleon ct Wellington ctaieiit deux grands g-oneraux ; celui-ci etait Ang-lais et i;clui-hY I nuK-ais. 27. Voulcz-vous bicn envoycr chercher do I cncre et du papier? 28. Oy\, madame, je vais en cn- voyer cherclier tout dc suite. 21). Bon jour, mon vieux • ,:oinment 9a va? 30. Qa va tres bien,'merci : et vous ? .U. Cette montre-h\ est k mon fr6re, ct celle-ci est h ma HL'iir. 32. Ofi sont nos habits et ceux de nos enfants ? .>:.. i.es yoila sur Ja table. 31. Co sont mon fr6re et ma sa'ur lA-bns, n est-ce pas ? 35. Qui, monsieur, ce sont eux. Mu^ Mon pure m a donne ces prunrs-ci, et il a donne celles- la a ma soiur. 37. Voil;\ nos clous, ceux du clianjcntier et los votres. 38. Je voudrais bien savoir on sont mes inl.its et ceux de mon frerc. 39. Je voudrais bien avoir de eette belle etofFe. 40. Voulez-vous demander h votre meredu pain pour ces pauvres enftmts? 41. Qui mon- sieur, si vous Ic voulez. ' B. I. How are you this morning-, old boy ? 2 I am very well, thanks ; and how are you ? 3. I am not very wel, It IS too warm. 4. Will you have the kindness to scud for my books and my brother's ? 5. I shall send for tlinn immeduitely. (>. He has lost some money, but what IS hat to him ? 7. He has no moi-e money, i)ut that is iiotinng- to him. 8. Napoleon and Victor Hug-o were two f^ivat men ; the former was [aj g-eneral, and the latter Fal poet. ,). ihese apples are mine, and those are my broth- 10. I should like to have my watch and my sister's \ e arc going- after our books and our sister's 1'^ I sliould like to go for some ink and paper. 13. Oh no sir shall send for some. 14. Will you have the kindness to end me some money ? 15. I should like to lend you some l^ut I have no more. 16. Good morning-, my friend, how -n-o you ? 17. Not very well ; I have been ill. 18. What was the matter with you ? 19. I had the fever. 20.1 Hioiild like to know where the carpenter's boards are and our own. 21 I should like to have [some] of those beautiful h,g. -Wh-.t ' (.. Leqnol (laquollc, etc.) =^ 'which ?', 'which or wh^t one?, ngrces in ^.W.>. with the noun refeiTed to /...ucllo dcs dan.cs est 1^. ? ^hlch of the ladies is there ^ Au.,,u.« des .es^eurs parlie. To .MeU of the gentlen^/were , , you speaking ? ^^^. .- KnK^ • which? • and ' what ? ' as adj. ..so.ne fonn of quel ? (§13^) 'imiy/'et^"^"^"*'"" of ;,o..o/„ 'to be able,' 'can,' /"/". Pr.s. />ar^. Pant Part. Pre, hulir n , n / P""voir. pouvant r>„ • '^ "''' ^'^Z- Pourrai. pouvais ^'"^ P""''''" ^'''^•' ''^"''•^■• Condi Pre,. Suhj. ^'" P^uvent. pusse. pomrais. puisse, ('-es, -o), puissions, (-iez, -6nt). KXKRcisr: XXIV. An.u.saut (dwurM), amusing. Fr,,ppo,. (jWip/-) strike Lel.eaii-fr(,reC/>rf/AV..,.) hn.t'u'i' i. T -,; . • c,- 1.,,^. ' -^ ^' " ^•'''' "'■ '^ "'•■^'oire, f., (>,ind.r), story. ™.- IK,„ve. le taire, si v„„., vo„I». r„„ ,„ay ,I„ il, if „,„ „i,|, ^^IJxe..h,fa,re.qua„dvousvuu. iou n.ay do it, when y<,u wish. mm ■ ^Bj^K I '= - m 1 N ''1 '^HII 1 ion FT^KNnil fJUAMMAU. [108, If*"** • » 1. 7 " ,?P1"''- Je voudraifi hioii lo faire. I Hlumld liku tt» ilu it. Coiunio vouH voudro/,. As y<»u like. Qu'a-t-il pu lui donncr ? What ran lio have given hiui ? Ccla 80 pt-ut hie n. Thai may well be (may 1)0 ho). A. 1. Q\n Mvcz-vons tronvo oIm'/ voiiHM'ousiu ? 2. J'y ui tnnivi'' f^oii hcui iivrc^ ct su Ix-lk'-sduir. .'J. A qui jivez- vous domir votn; couteiiu? 1. Je r.'ii donnc j\ mou petit frere. T). Si Jo puis savolr (pii lui a . Vous pouvoz le fnire commit vous voii- drez. 7. Votre iuui (luu vous a-t-il doiiiK'? 8. 11 m'.i doiHKMie rar^rcnt. \). .I'ai voulu voir uu-s amis, mais jc u'jii pas [.u. 10. Siiiousavioiis pu \o. lairc, lunisenaurioiis (•to contents. 11. qm va clu'ivluT do I'oau? 12. Uo'i j'irai en cliorcher, si jo puis troiivor un soau. l.'i. AuipK'l de CCS pii\*oiis aycz-vous parlo? 1 1. .T'ai ]>arl6 an Hlsdii marchaiul. 15. Lcquol do cos iiuvssiimrs est votre ouclc'.^ 1() Mou oucle est colui au bout do la table. 17. Do (pici avoz-vous bosoin? 18. .T'ai bosoin d'uuo livro do suciv. 11). Co monsioura roiiipu ma canno; {\ quoi pousait-il? 20. Qui cliorchlcz-vous ? 21. Jo cliercbais lo froro dc noti-c voisiu ot colui do iiotro ami. 22. Lcsipiols do ccs cliovaux sont fi vous? 23. Lo blaiic est h nous, ot lo noir est ji mon ouclo. 24. J'ouvorrai cliorchor do 1 otoffo i)0ur ma robe, si jo puis trouvormou i)orto-moiniaio. 25. Aux- quols dos chovaux avez-vous douiio du foin ? 2(). J'oii ai doune au votre ot fi colui du voisin. 27. (,>uaud |K)urrai-i(' ftiiro mon ouvrai^-oV 2S. Vous pouvoz U; fair(>, quaiul vous voudroz. 21). Pourrous-nous partlr domain pour la villo? 30. Vous pouvoz partir aujourd'hui, si rows Ic voulez. 31. Nous voudrions bien onvoyor choroli.'V 1- modocin. 32. Coiumo vous voudroz. 33. Votre ;.,i" qi' vous a-t-il pu diro ? 3 4. 11 nous n, raconto une histoiro amusanto. 35. Clioz qui domeuroz-vous, dopuis quo vous otes ici ? oC. Jo domouro choz ma socur. 37. Co petit gargon a frappo sa s^cur. 8,8. Cola so pout bicn ; c'est un mochant pe-it r?. Whom arc you thiiikinn^ of? 9. I aiu tliiukiii^ of my iiiMtlicr. 10. Wliich of those g"«^ntlcmuii are your coUMins ? 11. ^ry cousins aro those under the tri>e. 12. If our fricnda h.id Ix'cn al)le to do it, \vt; shouhl have been «lad of it. 1.). '1\) wliicli of those ladies did you g-ivc your purse? 1 i. I pive it to tlie one wlio is in tlie carriajfe. 15. Your sister has lost iier purse. HI. 'Fhat may well be, for she is very eanless. 17. I should like to ^'•o and ^'•et some cloth (■ II- my dress. 18. You may ^^o and get some, whenever > ()Li wish; 1!). To which of tlu; liors(!s did you give water ? 20 We gave some to ours and to our frieiKl's. 21. Whom •lid you find at your neighbor's? 22. We found (there) y.»ur ])rother-in-law and sister-in-law. 23. The little boy ;i>ks who is here. 24. That little girl would like to llnlsh licr lesson. 25. Slie may finish it, whenever she wis-hes. 2(;. You may speak to the Ijeggar, if you wish. 27. I should like to go to church to-day. 28. As you wish. 2','. I should like to see my fri(nids, but I have not been Jilfk!. 30. What can you have done to M. Mercier? 31. WHio will go and get some bread ? 32. I shall go and ^'et some, if I can find my purse. 33. The servant will ^■(■t some water, if he can find the pail. 31. WHiat were you speaking of to my father? 35. I was speaking to hiiii of my brother and our neigld)or's. 30. For whom wci-e you looking this morning? 37. I w^as looking for our cousins, Init I Avas not al)le to find them. 38. May I go now? 30. You may »1o as you wish. LESSON XXV. 199. Tho Reljitivo Pronouns. 1. qui, ii'?io, which, thaf , ivhom (after a pr< p. ). -. quo, ifhom, irhich, .'hat. ■l (lout, tcho.sc, of ivhom, of ivhich. 4. oil, ill ivhich, into which, at ivhich, to ivhich, etc. •'). Icquel, m. s., lesquels, ni. pi. ^ , , i-w«iw.ii^ f c I •• r 1 (^'^"'O, ivhom, U'htch, that. laquello, I. s., lesquelles, f. pi. J ^. quoi, what, which. [I'iujN-.-l. ki. 2. ke. 3. do. 4. «. 5. lcki:l,ldkii,Um, UkcJ. 6. Ha.] Ohs. : For the contraction- of dv> and h with luqael set; §107 above. 108 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [200, 201. !iii| 200. Ajjrreoinoiit. A j-clntivo T)|-()n()nn (\Mlicther vari- able or iupar. in Ibri'i) is of tlu! (jender, number and per- son of its antecedent : Moi qui 6ta»s (' ous lativc proiionn of most; conmioii use is ^i&i as subj ict, and qiit^ as direct object of a verl). Q'ui= ' whom ' (of ;permns only) is also used after a prep. : La dtur.e qui ohdiito. 'J'ho lady who sings. Les livrea qui s(mt k moi. The books which are mine. Los tableaiix que j'ai aohct^s. The picture^i that I have bought. L'oncle chez qui jci dcmourais. The uncle with Avhoin I lived. 2. Tlie force of Ao k-a relatim is }2:enerally expressed by dont = * wliose,' ' of wliom,' ' of -which/ etc. : Les amis dont nous parlions. The friends of whom we were speaking. La table dont le pied »5Lait cass6. T)ie table of which the leg was broken. a. Obaerve the order of Avords in : L'6ccM( r dont J'ai I'sirdolso. The pupil AvhoHo shito I have. .'5. Oh (most usually adverb) sometimes has the force of djuis (etc.) + a relative: La maison oii { dans laquelle) je demeure. The house In Avhich I live. \. Lcquel (laquelle, etc.)-Mvho,' 'whom,' 'which,' 'that' must l)e ustni of anima/s niid things after a prep., and may be so used of persons : Les chevaux au.\(iuels je donne le Tlie horses to Avhich I give the foin. lif^y- Lo monsieur ;iuqu«l je parlo. The gentleman to Avhoni I speak. a. licquel is also used instead of qui (que, etc.) to aroid ambiguity: Les scvurs de nos amis, Icsquclles The sisters of our friends, Avho(tlic sont chez nous k pn'^sent. sisters) are with us now. 5. Qiioi stands after a preposition (rarely otherwise) : Voih\ de fiuol je parlais. That is Avliat I was speaking of 6. The al)solut<> 'what,' 'which,' 'that which' i\s^ mhject is re qui. an.d yi\\ (^)ject or predicate ce quo: 'of wluit, ' that of wliicli ' is cc do^t : 201-204.] CONJUGATION OF sauoir. 109 Je voia CO qnl vous amuse. I see what anmses you. Je sais ce quo jo aais. I know what I know. Vous savez eo quo je suis. You know what I am. II est sourd, ce qui est dommage. He is deaf, which is a pity Ce dont j'ai besoin. ^hat I have need of. 7. '11(3 (or she) who,' ' the one(s) who,' ' the oiieCs) which ' ' those who,' etc. = coliii + qui (que, etc.) : Nous a,hnirons ceux que nous ai- We admire tlioso whom we love nioi)'.;. Ma baj,ae est plus jolie que cellos My ring is prettier than the ones quo vous avez. y,,^, have. _ 202. The relative pronoun, often omitted in English ?v never omitted in French : ^ ' Lo tableaa quo j'ai vu hier. The picture I saw yesterday. 203. Conjugation of connaitre. 'to know,' 'be ac quamted with,' etc. :— I"jin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past ^ef. connaitre. connaissaiit. connu. oonnais. connaissons. connus. " '«<. Impf. conuais. connaissez. Impf.Suhj. connaitrai. connaissais. connait. connaissent. connusse. L.>um. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. connais, connaissons, connaissez ] coimaitrais. connaiase, (-es, -e), connaissions, (-iez, -tut). ^?'*; £«nJ»«^«tion of sauoir, 'to know,' 'know' (bv mental effort), ' know how to,' etc. :_ "w ^ ^oy Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indk. Past Def. sachant. su. sais. savons. sus. I^Pf- ' sais. savez. Impf. Subj. J""^v'''i3. sait. savent. susse. Pres. Subj. [Impve. sache, sachons, sachez.] sache, (-es, -e), sachions, (-iez, -ent). EXERCISE XXV. Auparavantrdpam'i^;, before, for- La poste fpd.t), post-office. Tn«tr'' '^^', , . ^'' P'^^P"^'^^ (prdpri4t4), property. •T"stef.«.,;.j„3t. Rendre rr^^.o^r;. give back La justice (^iMis), justice. Se respecter (respatr.o<3.'i j, p-.rson. self. '""I'ter (pdrte), cany, take. Se trouver (Iruviih be. Iiiji'n savoir. Flit. aaurai. Coudl. saurais. *« ' «l I ■ »• i-H 110 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [204. Mf Mi •Mi*' ilii3 !| I ilk' '" A. 1. Je coniuiis le monsieur qui est twee monsieur votre pere. 2. Siivez-vous ce que je vais faire? B. Oui, monsieur, vous allez faire ce (jue j'ai fait. 4. Je fais toujours ce qui est juste. 5. Nous n'aimons i)as ceux qui ne font pas ce qui esc juste. (>. (»)ui sont ccs 'Leiix messieurs ? 7. Celui i\ qui je parlais est niou onele, et I'autre est mon cousin. 8. La maison ou nou. demeurons est la propi-i- ete de M. Ribot. 9. Les dames dont nous parlions soiit ici. 10. Qui avez-vous rencontre k la vill ^. ? 11. J'ai ren- contre beaucoup de personnes dont jo ne connaissais que peu auparavant. 12. Le monsieur dont vous avez trouve la montre est arrive. 13. Les maisons que nous avons achctees sont dans votre rue. 14. La lettre que ma fillo a portee h la poste est pour mon frere. 15. La dame qui etait malade s(3 i)prte mieux k present. 10. Le monsieur chez qui je demeurais n'est ])lus ici. 17. Cost nous qui avons fait cela. 18. C'est moi (pii ai fait batir cette mai- son. 19. La dame qui a perdu le porte-monnaie (jue vous avez trouve vous prie de le lui rendre. 20. Qui est celui-lA ? 21. C'est le fils du monsieur, qui etait ici. 22. La table que le charpentier a faite n'est pis assez ^rande. 23. La table qui se trouve dans votre cliambre est i\ moi. 24. Lc monsieur que nous connaissions ne demeure plus ici. 25. Je sais bien ce que vous savez. 20. Nous connaissons la petite fllle quo vous avez rencontree dans la riie. 27. Savez-vous que j'ai fait batir une maisou ? 28. Non, monsieur, je ne le savais pas. 29. Savez-vous qui est cliez nous? 30. Je vous ai donne ce que vous avez demaiide. 31. Je vous ai donne ce dont vous avez besoin. 32. Ce qui est juste reussira. 33. Ce dont vous avez besoin n'est pas ici.' 34. Le monsieur dont nous avons acliete la mai- son est M. Mercier. 35. Savez-vous oil est la nuiison de M. David? 30. Connaissez-vous la maison de M. David? 37. Celui qui ne fera pas cela sera puni. J5. 1. I know what you have done. 2. Do you know what I am g-oing- to do? 3. No, sir, I do not know what you are goin^ to do. 4. Do you know the lady who was with my mother ? 5. No, sir, I do not know her. 6. We always do wiiat is just. 7. I iove thos*-. wlio do what \^ just. 8. He who does not what is just will be punished. 204, 205,] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. Ill 1). Who arc tliose boys? 10. The one to whom I was speaking is tli^c car]).Mitcr's son, and tlio other is the mer- fliaut's. 11. The chihlren of wlioni we Avere speaking have come. 12. The Iiousc in wliich we live is in your street. 13. The white liouse Avhere our cousins live is the property of M. David. 14. Tlie letters we carried to tlie post-office were for our uncle. 15. Tlie ladv who lost her purse is my mother. IG. AVe do not know tlie gentleman whose purse you liave found. 17. Mv cousin who was ill is better now. 18. The box wliich is in your room is my sister's, r.). Do you know where my peiicil is? 20. I do not know. 21. Do you know U. David's house? 22. I do not know it. 23. I shall give you back what vou have given me. 24. The little girl (whom) we met in "the street is iny cousin. 25. The little boy Avliose pencil we found li;is come, and asks for it. 2('). The horse Avhich is yonder in th(! held is mine. 27. I gave her what she aski'd for. 2^. Whom did you meet at your uncle's? 2*). We met many i)ersons whom we did iiot knoAv before. 30. What are you asking for ? 31. lam asking for what I need. 32. I give you wluit you need. 33. Idont give you what you ask for; I give you what you need. 31. The gentle- man with whom I used to live 'is not here now. 35. The lady wdiose house we bought is ^Inie Kibot. 30. He Avho does not love justice will not succeed. 37. She Avho do(;s not resi)ect hevself will not be respected. 38. If every- hody did what is just, we should all be happy. 39. Will you carry to the post-offlce the letters which I have given you? 40. Excuse me. sir, you have not given me any letters. 41. You are right ; there they are on the table. 42. (Hve them to me now, and I shall go at once. 43. Thank you ; you are very kind fhonj. LESSON XXVI. 205. The Iiidcfiiiito Pronouns of most frequent oc- currence : — 1. On = 'one,' 'someone,' 'we,' 'you,' 'they,' 'people,' etc., makes a statement imthnnt .specifying any particular person, and often coi-res ponds to an Eiig. passive (especially when the agent is 7iot specified) : m ml i ■.■*w I ' »»! m 112 FRENCH r.RAMMAR. [205, 206. On dlt quo la reine ost malade. On lie pent pus faire cela. OU SO'UK!, On vous (leinniido. On u uttrape 1<; larron. They wiy (It !» said) the (jueen is ill. You cannot do that. Some one is ringing. You tiro wanted. The thief has been caught. OI)s. : 1. The verb with on is aUvavH Snl siiuj. 2. On often becomes I'on after a vowel sound (especially after et, on, on, qui, que, quel, si) to avoid hiatus, but not usually when the foUtnrhuj word lie-ins nith 1. 2. Quclqii'un (f. quelqu'uiio) =' somebody,' 'some one,' 'Muy one,' with its plur. qiiclques-iins (f. quel- qiics-iincs)- 'soiue,' 'some people,' 'any,' 'a few,' is the pro7i. corresponding" to th(i adj. quclque (§140). II y a quelqu'un h la porte. There is somebody at the door. J'ai vu quelquos-unes de vos I have seen some (a few) of your amies. friends. Avez-vous des cerises ? Have you any cherries 1 J'en ai quclques-unes. I have a few. 3. Qiielque chose = ^ something,' 'anything,' is mascu- line, though formed from the fern, noun chose : Quelque cliose est tonibo. Sometlilng has fallen. Avez-vous quelnerez-vous cette apres-midi? 6. J'am^nerai mon Ills e, ma filh;. 7. Qu'avez-vous a])porte? 8, Jai apporte .lies livrcs. 0. Avez-vous amenc quehiu'uu ? 10. Noil, monsieur, je n'ai amenti personne. 11. Vous l^. '. 207.] nHTHOCllurHlCAr, IRREOtTLAIilTIES. 115 n'avcz i-hm ,H,,,orto. 12. , 01, si, nous avons a.morte I . JNoub lions proiiKiiicrons dcin.ain ft quatre lioures 1 ;vonr;^r,r?"''"=""^'^ "" "^^ i'«"';nou^? 17 s II .no lb iKMi i-iiiff this /iftcrnoon ^ IS He i> 111 not brniff any one. 10. AVhat will tlioy („„) l.rii t /„ ...'.•■•ow? 17. They („„)wiU not I.-i„ganvHirns'l8,"lTj 1 IK^'^rrw,""-'-,/"- ^"/°^' '"' broushtliis boofe iiiii li.ipci. 20. AMien do you bcifin to plav' 21 Wn beffm at four o'clock. 22. Wli,u l,nl been iLYj^ht to vo,^ S n ;,Kn ''"'^,'w "".^''™?^''' '»"'«• 24. Youare wantZi "t oor ^7 W '^^ '"• ^5 '' ""' ''^''y ^'"' «™ •NT,; ; ''"' '""''' ""•■^<' "'«" 'Jcen doinj-s iw ,. ^^ " ?;""' *•■'''" '^ ^valk to-morrow? 30. We , Ivvays take a walk ...t four o'clwk. 31. To whom have ..•ou spoken about (de) that '^ 32. I have no ^oken of £ tBt Mi *m- m !»• *J» 116 PRENOTT GRAMMAR. [207, 208. •f ^**» ''"k* Mil • *■■ •« ;i:rt ittojinyonc. 38. Tim t scoundrel lias been caught. ,'Vl. Yon (tu) arc cryiiifjf, niy child ; wha,t is the matter with you? 35. I have lost my book. 208. LESSON XXVII, Cardinal Numerals. 1. un, une,/., (m, u.n). 2. deux (cUi). 3. trois (trml). 4. quatre (kdtr). 5. cinq (sek). 6. six (sis). 7. sept (sdt). 8. huit (mt). 9. neuf (nu'f). \ 10. dix (dis). 11. onzo f'o.zj, 12. doiize (dii.z). 13. treize (tre.z). 14. quatorze (kdto.rz). 15. quinze (ke.z). 16. seize (sc.zj. 17. dix-sept f'rfi s^^^. 18. dix-huit f'dw mhen unites together compound numerals under 100, except where ct occurs. 2. Et stands regularly in 21 31, 41, 51, Gl, is optional in 70, 71, omlffrd in 81 and elsewhere. 3. 'A (or one) hundred '=:cent (noun). ' A(or one) t liousand ' = mille. [Pron.— 1. The JincU consonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, is silent before initial consonant (or h asp.) of a word multiplied by them, not elsewhere : Cinq livres (^se ;j.?.r^, but le cinq mai (le sek m&). 2. No elision or liaison occurs before luiit, onzo : Le onze (le d.z) ; les onze francs (U o.zfrd) ; le huit (le hwit) ; lea huit livres (le ui li. it). 3. t is soundul in vinsrt from 21 to 29, is silent from 80 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux cent un, etc.] 209-213.] ooNJuaATioN op reoeuoir. 117 -09. Quatro-vins-t and the nmltijdes of vent take -s only when immediately precedini/ a uoun,\)v when tJiev themselves are used a.s noun,s of number: Quatre-viiigts francs. Kiglity francs. Tiois cents francs. Three hnndred francs. Los cinq cents. Lea quatre vingfs. The five hundreds. Tlicfourtwcntiea. But : Troia cent un francs. Quatre-vingt-un francs, etc. 06s. .• They are not nouns of number in dates or when used as ordinals (S218). 210. Miiltiplic.itivos. 'Oncc' = uiio fois, twice - doiix fois, ' three times ' = trois fois, etc. : Dlx fois (Hx font cent. Ten times ten make 100. 211. Idiomatic Expressions of Affo. Observe the rolloAving : — Quel age nrez-vous ? Row old are you ? J'ai vingt ans. i .,„, ^^^^^y ^^^^^^ ^j^j Uue fille ftff 6o He .^ ix ans. A girl six years old (or of age). A 1 ftsro .le vmgt-ciuq ans. At the age of twenty-five (years) Je suis majeur. Elle est inlneurc. I am of affc. She is not of age. 212. Conjiia-atioii of uenc/re, ' to sell ' :— Injin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Be/. vendre. vendant. vendu. vends, vendons. vendis. Fut. Imp/. vends, vendez. Imp/. Suhj. ^^"^*'^- vend, vendent. vendisse. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. vends, vendons, vendez.] vende (-es, -e), vendions (-iez, -ent). 06,,. .-The only irregularity of vendre is the omission of the t in the 3 sing, pres I'Klic. Elsewhere it is like ronipre. & t • 213. Coiijiig-atioii of /-ecet/o/V, 'to receive':— In/in. Past Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Be f. recevoir. recevant. regu. resois. recevons. regus. "f. Imp/. regois. recevez. Imp/. Suhj. recevrai. recevais. regoit. regoivent. regusse. toiidl. Pres Suhj. [Impve. reqois, recevona, recevez.] recevraia. regoive, (-es, -e), recevions, (-iez), regoivent. Obv : See §41, 2, foi- the ? before o or ». St^T^k'^^'^ few vefb« i,, -oir fonu, in son.e t,'ra.ninar8, a sepaiate oonjuRation (the »»•«, verbs in -re being the 4t,h), vendrai. Condi. veiulrais. !!W 118 FRKNrir riTUMMAR. mm If*"** !:««« in S (I- III., W: W [214. 214. CoiiJiiKjitioii of deuoir, 'toovvu' 'oLiiiliL' - uu. to,' etc. : ' » o ' I.Jin ili'voir. rut. (levrai. Condi. (levrais. n.cH. Part. rant Part. Pren. Jndic. (lovaiit. .lu (f. .luc, 1,1. e uii'tt'o (mc.frj, yard. How often? How many times? A Meek A fortnl^'ht. At liow mucli a jumnd does that meat soil ? I am to go away to-morrow. He ought to do it. He must have done it. He ought to have done it. A. 1. Conibion dc i)(;rsoiines y a-t-il dans la maison? 2. 11 y en a (.luinze. -3. Cotte etoH'c so vend cher ; elle so vend viiift-t fi'aiies Ic metre. 4. Je dois doiiuer vingt francs fill marcliantl ; combien devcz-vous Ini en donner? 5. Je dois lui en donner vin^t-cinq. ('.. Le })i'ofesseur a dfi tc voir hier, car il a })nrle dc toi a nion pere. 7. Ce sucre-ci so vend molns elier (jne celui-la. 8. lAIa mere doit partir pour les Kta,t^>-T:niri demnin soir. 0. .T'aurais du le donner a ma mere. 10. Le marcliand aurait du le vend re a dix- sept sous la livrc. 11. Los cnfants devraient obeir ft leurs parents. ^12. II faut que vous me le vendiez neuf sous le metre. 1,3. Jedois le vend re onze sous la livre. 14. Com- bien de Ibis avez-vous ete a Londres ? W. .J'y ai eteti'ois fois. 10. Je n'ai etc (lu'une ibis aux Ktats-Unis. 17. Qc petit s-ar(,'on quel ao-e a-t-il ? IS. 1 1 a sept ans, et sa petite soiur en a vm(\. 1!>. A combien ]y. metre cette etotfe so vend-'^lle ? 20. Elle se vend dix francs le metre. 21. Vous !U.] coKjtTOATiov OF receuolr. 119 ;|U.UK voire petito nilc ..uU.e .nXle? 28 E^ :n. Vous dovez allor . ia ville doLn'o^c pl;"^'"^^ /A . How often have you been in France? 9 T h. I't'cn there three times 8 Af xvi n. 1 \*^"^® '^ /. I have c'lorhsell? 4. ItselLatil^lncs V™^^ is (costs) dear; yououghtto le"m^ j;;!;^-, .^^^^ II^ . "a ). b. I cannot let you have it ciieaper 7 K Of, co«t me three times as dear as this o e 8 Yonr fjither must have seen vmi o w^ , * ^^^^ still V in T . ^ • ''• -^^^w in^"y Ii'ive vou ^i\n f 10, 1 have no more 11 A<- i,.^-.,, ^ "*iv^ ^uu ' m-i^ ^ ^**m M "*« *i! 1 ' *■ r ■^ ^H '-a^^Bi^M^ .^^^H ^^H f^^Hs^ i^l I^^^BiB'; D^^l ^^^H ■ni ■ H|! 1 1 r 120 FRENCH ORAMMAR. [215-217. li ' )-* ill: ^ii i>« LESSON xxviir. 215. Ordinal Niiiiienils, tVom 3nl up, aro formed hji adduKi -ieiiie to i\w. v(m\\i^\mu\\\\\:^ cai'dinal, final o bciii;; (lroi>p(!fl. Cinq adds n and nenf cliani^^cs f to v bctbro -ii)niu : let. premier ('premW^, f. preniiftre. 7th. septiftme f's^/'I^.wj. , fsecond (fO'jo), t. bccoihIo. 8th. huitit'-ine (hUitU.m). tdeuxit)mo (ilirM-.m). 9th. neuvKiiie (nOi^d.viJ- 10th. dixi6mo (dizh\m). 11th. onzii'ino f'/T^I^.wi^. 2l8t. viiigt ct un ItNino f r^< 4 i'lnh). m ). 2'-Ind. viugt deuxliDino (vif, (liizlLm). Tlio numerator is ex])resse(l by a 3rd. troial6nio (trm\~M.m) 4th. quatri^ine (' A*aww«) and denii (as ac?/) ; ^ = un quart ; ^ = un tiers* : One-eighth. The three- tenths. (The) lialf (of) tlio year. An hour and a half. Half an hour. Three-fourtha of that sum. Oha. : 1. Before its noun doinl is invar, and joined by a hyphen, but agrees else- where. 2. Use la inoltl6 (not cloml) where 'the half of is (or may be) used in English. 217. Tho Time of Day is indicated as follows : — Un huiti^nie. Lea troia dixii;inea La moiti6 do I'ann^e. Uno heure et demie. Uno doini-heure. Lea troia quarts de cette aomme. Quelle heure est-il ? II eat deux heures. Troia heurea et demie. Troia heures (et) un quart. Quatre heurea luolns un quart. Trais heurea dix (minutea). What o'clock ia it ? It is two o'clock. Half past three. A quarter past three. A quarter to four. Ten minutes past three. Quatre heures inolns cinq (minutea). Five minutea to four. II eat midi et demi. It ia half past twelve (noon). II est minuit. ' It is twelve o'clock (night). A sept heures du soir. At seven o'clock in the evening. A quelle heure ? At what o'clock ? k trois heurea pr^cisea. At three o'clock precisely. Vers lea troia heures. About three o'clock. !» 217 220] NAMES or months and days. 121 Oh».: 1 •ItlM'^ll e«t (always *f„y.); Mt waH'.II Atalt, t-tc. 2. lIoiii-ofHl is nmh.rHto.Hl r.. Th. word uMuuUn l.ortm „untte,l. fl. - A quarter to.'or .^„"nv n.inu c.« to- i. .|..„..r..„ ,.,. ehe fol)„vvi„^ ,.o„r „.oI„h ( Mohs' or :,nin„s') Z spoc.llod tinu<. /. 'Twelve oVlock ' Is n,.tvr«|,mzo luMircn. 218. Dates, Titles, etc. 1. Proinlor= • first ' is tlio o„hi ordinal used to dcnofo tlio r/./^ o/ ^//,. /„o«M or the numerical title oj a ruler : UpiviMlonnai. Cl.arica premier. Thcnrstof May. C[.ar]o.stlu,FlrMt i'iuis,U,arti()iKs, (-icz, -cut). So r.lso sortir : Je sors, tu sors, il sort, nous sortons, etc., etc. EXERCISE XXVIII. Assassinor (dmHin6), assassinat^e, mur- Le miniiit (miiim), midnight. ^QY. r^G mois (mud), month. La belle-m^rc (hi-l me.r), motlier-in law. Rcntrer (rcltrd), return home. Le chapitre (Mpitr)) chapter. Le tome (to.m), volume. Se oouolier (hiU), lie down, go to bed. Le train (tre), train. La fete (fi.t), festivity, birth-day. Le volume (vdliim), volume. Se lever (hvd), rise. ^.1. Monsieur votre pore (inaiid partil pour la, Franco ? 2. II part le dix a,out. 3. Nous allous h la ville le jeudi et le samedi. 1. Le premier jnin est ma fete. 5. Le dix- neuf juillet est la fete de ma sanir. homme ; il va tons les dimanches ;\ I'eglise. 19. Henn quatre fut assassine. 20. J'ai trouve cela dans ce livrc, tome trois, chapitre quatre. 21. Cela se trouve dans le cinquit^me chapitre du sixiemc volume des ceuvres dc V'^taire. 22. Je voudrais qu'il sortit h onze heures pi"''- cises. 23. Quel jour est-ce? 24. C'est lundi. 25. Nos 221, 222.] NAMES OF MONTHS AND DAYS. 123 amis vont nrrivcr vers les (lu.'itro licuros. 20. II vi\ par- tir pour le'i P:tats-Unis ]o onze dii mois prochnin 27 Le .louze mars il a fait l)i(«n froid. 28. Lo matin nous sortons n iieul lieurcs et un quart, et Ic soir nous rcntrons A, cinq l.cnrr.-s. 21). Madame votre belle-nu>re est sortie A, midi un (i,mrt. 30. Elle va reutrer ;\ trois lieurcs. 31. Nous iiniis couclions toujours avant niinuit. 32. Cc monsieur lii'Jcuacra j'ujourd'liui A. midi precis. y>. 1 . AV hen did your mother ii:o out '? 2. She went out .'It il quarter pnst twelve. 3. What o'clock is it '^ 4 It is hah -past two. 5. When do you rise [in] the morning? (•■ 1 nse always at a quarter past six. 7. He will leave on the iifteenth of March for England. 8. The children will return home about live o'clock. 9. I ^-o to church every Sunday. 10. Our little boy froos to school every inorning at half-past eight. 11. There is a good little boy • ho rises every morning at six o'clock. 12. The fifth "of .Tilly is my brother's birthday. 13. Tliose children go to I.c.) We ^o to the city Fridays and Saturdays. 30. Henry the bighth had SIX wives. 31. At what o'clock shall you go to hod :> 32. I shall go to bed at twelve o'clock precisely. LESSON XXIX. 222 Formation of Adverbs. 1. Adverbs may be lonucd from most adjectives nv adding -m....* fo the /Vm a(lly.' 22.'{. Ooiii|):irisoii of Adverbs. 1. As arc; com- pared Hhe adjcctires {^\\*\) by pins (...que), inoins (. . . ia. Pen, nioins, le moin.s. Oils. : Iteancoup ' ' iiiuch,' or ' very much,' and is Tievcr modified by aiiolheradv. 225. ' Asmnch' aiitaut ; 'somucli '==taiit ; 'worse' (of health) ^ plus lual. Obs.: Never nse ' anssi bcaiiooup ' or ' si beaueoup.' 220. Position Of tlic Adverb. See §100. Note tlm' aujourdliui =- 'to-day' liier = 'yesterday,' deniaiu-r 'to-niorroAv,' iei - ' here,' 1A-' there,' tf>t = 'early,' and tard 'Inte^' norer come between the au.rilinr}/ and the participle : Nous sonimes arrivtts hior. We came yesterday. 227, 228.] CONJUGATION OF dire. 227. Injin. croire Ftd. croirai. Condi. oroirais. 228. L[fin. (liro, FhL •lirai. Condi (lirais. Conjiigration of croire^ 'to believe,' Pres. Part. Pant Part. Pres. Indie. croyant. cru. crois. croyons. ^^pf- crois. croyez. croyais, croit. croient. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. crois, croyons, croyez.] croie, (-es, -e), croyions, (-iez), croient. Oonjugration of dire, 'to say,' 'tell':- Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. disant. dit. dis. disons. ^mpf- dis'. dites. disais. dit. disent. Pres. Suhj. [hnpve. dis, disons, dites.] 125 ' think ' :— Past Def. cms. Impf. Suhj. crusse. Past Def. dis. Impf. Suhj. disse. dise, (-es, -e), disions, (-iez, -ent). EXERCISE XXIX. Al )sol ument (dpsdliinui), absolutely. Avant hier [(dvSt id.r), day before yesterday. Le bateau (hdtd), boat. Lecordonnier(^X-(3rcid«?(/^,shoe«iaker. Elcv6 (dvd), raised, bred. Faoilcment (fdsilma)^ easily. Fou (fa), mad, insane. Bateau ;\ vapeur. Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau ?\ V Honnetefdw^.^^, honest, true. Marcher (mdrSdJ, go, walk. Le navire (ndvi.rj, ship. Poliment (pdlimaj, politely. Le Soulier (sidiS), shoe. Tant O'^J, so much, so many. La vapeur (vdpoe.r), steam* Steam-boat. What is the news ? Que dit-on de nouveau ?J Croyez-vous que cela soit vrai ? Do you think that is true ? Je ne crois pas que oela soit vrai . I do not think that is true. Je crois que cela est vrai. I think that is true. Je le crois. I think so. On croit. It is believed (people believe, it is thought). ^^ dit' It is said (people say). Illcdit. He says so. A. 1. Que dit-on de nouveau? 2. On ne dit rien de nouveau. 3. Qu'avez-vous dit k mon p6re ? 4. Je lui ai • it qu^j \ous ei-ic/. lui. u. vviui aim maison qui est oien batie ; je voudrais qu'elle fut la mienne. 6. Mes scullers "•K *^l I I >« 126 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [22 33. I told him that I was going to leave to-morrow. LP]SSON XXX. 229. Propositions. The commoner English prepo- sitions, with some of their French e(iuivalents are •- 1. ' About ' = environ, vers, snr : En viron dix francs. About ten francs. Vers les dix heurea. About ten o'clock. Avez-vous de I'argent sur vous ? Have you any money about you ? 2. ' Above ' = au-dossiis de : La cuisine e.st au-,lc8«us de la cave. The kitchen is above the cellar. 3. * After ' (of time, rank, order) = apres : Apr68 Ic bal. After the ball. Le premier aprds Ic roi. Next after the king Mettez I'adjectif aprf.8 le nom. Placo tl.e adjective after the noun. J. 'Among.; Mn the midst of ' = parmi ; 'among' (dis- Uno hrobis par.nl les loups. A sheep amon^ wolves, i'artagez I'or ontro les hommes. Divide the gold amon^ the men. .'). ' As ftir as ' = Jusque, JiisqufV : Alloz jusositioii..,l Locutions, like uu-dossiis de .l«iMiii .'I, etc., are used i„-ecisely like siinpJe prepositions ': II pas-sa ,Y trav.r« le l.ois. He pas.scl throuRh the wood. Au dohY ,lo la riviere. Jloyon.l the stream. 2in. Averhfot^m ^-overned by a preposition must be III the titjimtwe, exc'ei)t {iftor on : Sansponser. En .Il8;u.t. Without thInKlnff. While suying. Apres avoir ,Hms6. After havlnff th«««.|.t, (af Ler' thinking). 2.^J2. Coiijufiratioii of ^ew/>, 'to liold ' and uenir, 'to /"/;/. Pres. Pari. Pant Part. Pres. Indie. Paxt DeJ\ t-^'""- tiens. tenons. tins. tiens. tenez. Tmpf. Snhj. tient. tiennent. tinsse. [Impve. tiens, tenons, tenez.] tienne, (-es, -e), tenions, (-iez), tiennent. So also, vonir : Je viens, tu viens, il vient, etc., etc. 2ii',i. Coiijug^ation of uoi'r, ' to sec ' : — hfin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie, voyant. vu. vois. voyons. ^^^'PJ' vois. voyez. v"y''*i3. ^ voit. voient. Pres. Snbj. [Impve. vois, voyons, voyez.] voie, (-CS, -e), voyions, (-it..), voient. EXERCISE XXX. AcconipagnerfaZvTjr7anff;,accompany. Pendre (pdt.dr), hang L-assembl^e. f., (dsdhU), meeting, Le printemps ri^re/a;," spring ^ S'^thering. Rappeler (rdple), recall. P.on pour (ho pu.r), kind to. Regarder (rcjardc), look at. Le chemm de fer (hme de fe.r), Lerestaurantrr.\sM.«;, restaurant, railway. L^, souvenir (snvni.r), remem- )t>rm6rement (d^rnUrma), lately. brance, recollection. Diner (dind), dine. , gur (sil.r), on, about. La heue (116), league. Le tableau (tabid), picture. Le paysan (peizci), peasant. De temps k autre. Now and then. Ilestveuumevoir. He came to see me. voir. Fat. verrai. Condi. verrais. Past Def. vis, Jrapf. Suhj. visse. I'll' t«, jj iiU) ' f>a «*1 M I* It n ■A'.'\ 130 FRENCH GIIAMM7\R. [28n Venez me voir. ■ II vjent de me voir. II a pasi86 choz nous. II a pass6 devant chez nous. Come and see me. Ho haa just seen me. He called on us. He passed our house. ill' Rappelez-moi au bon souvenir de Remember me to our fiieiidi, nos amis. A. 1. II viendra nous voir apr6s cinq heures. 2. Ji nous a accompagncsj usque chez nous. 3. Mous verrom' nos amis cesoir firasscnibloe. 4. Avcz-vous vumouperc derni(irenient ? 5. Oui, monsieur, je \unis de parler avec lui. 6. Dites D, votrc ami do passer cliez nous ce soir. 7. Quand avez-vous vu ce monsieur-lil ? 8. II vient de passer devaiit la niaison. D. Nos amis viendront avanr. I'hiver. 10. II y a un p^rand pommier devant la porte dc la maison du paypn. 11. II a passe c1k!Z nous en allant a I'eglise. 12. Pendez ce tablenu-ci au-dcssus de celui-h\. 13. Combien d'ar;=*-cut avez-vous sur vous ? 14. .)'ai environ vingt-cinq francs. 15. 11 demeure k environ dix lieues d'ici. 16. Cette dame sera ici vers les oiize heures. 17. Avez-vous jamais demeure en Angieterre ? 18. Oui, madame ; j'y ai demeure pendant environ trois ans. 19. Ce monsieur est bien aimable, n'est-ce pas ? 20. Oui, monsieur, il est toujours tvds bon puur moi. 21. Venez nous voir de temps A, autre. 22. Cette petite fille estaimee de tout le monde. 23. Mon p6re est arrive par le chemin de fer. 24. Voulez-vous bien dine: avec moi au restaur- ant? 25. Non, monsieur, j'aimerais mieux que vous ve- niez diner chez moi. 26. La dame m'a dit qu'elle viendrait avec les enfants. 27. Je demeure au Canada depuis envi- ron buit ans. 28. Regardez ce petit tableau qui pend au-de^- sous du grand. 29. Nous allons voir nos amis dans uiie isemaine. 30. Eh bien, rappelez-moi h leur bon souvenir. B. 1. My fother has just departed for France. 2. When will you come to dine with us ? 3. We shall come and dine with you next Thursday, 4. Last evening, as he was going to church, he called on us. 5. When did you see our friend ? 6. I have just been speaking with him about that affair. 7. Tell your friend to come and see me to- morrow evening. 8. Have you any money about you r 9. Not much, I think ; about ten francs. 10. The gentle- 283, 234.] CONJUNCTIONS. 131 mail told iiic that he would come about fivo o'clock. 11. The children will come before noon. 12. 1 lived in France for (pendant) four years. 13. I have lived in Toronto for about ten years. 14. Tlint gentleman is very pleasant, is lie 7iot? 15. Yes, he has always been very kind to me. IT). That lady lives about twenty leagues from here. 17. Do you see that small i)icture which hangs under the large one ? 18. You will come and see me this evening, will you not? 1<). Yes, I shall be there at a quarter to eight. 20. There is an apple-tree before the door of his house. 21. He passed our house at half- past nine. 22. ITow long have you lived in Canada? 23. I have lived here for about three years. 24. Did you come by the railway? '2h. No sir, I came l)y the steam-boat. 20. When shall you see your lather and mother? 27. I shall see them in two weeks. 28. Well, remember me to them, when you see (tut.) them. 2;). Come and see us now and then. 30. You shall see your friends at the gatlioring this evening, shall you not? 31. We believe so ; if we see them, we shall tell them that you are here. 32. Your friends will come before (the) spring. LESSON XXXI. 234. Conjunctions. 1. ' Am\' SiitQv a verb of motion is u nexpressed : Allez leur parler. Go « Morto . Jiisqu'iY fo qiie= ' until ' may (dfrat/s take, tlicsu])- juiictive, but the iiidic. is often used when rel'errinjj- tu completed p((st aci'ion : II niarolia Jusciuji co qu'il nous He walked until he met ua. ronoontra (rciu'ontrfit). 7. Si = 'if my/^/<^/r?// takes the Indhuttlce and excep- tionally the Kuhjam'tlm (as a substitute tor the; i)Uii)f. indie. ) : Si j'uvalH [or j ousse) su cela. If I had known that. 8. Quo - 'thnt ' takes indicative or subjunctive accord- ing to the context. It is necet' omitfed, as often in English : Je dis quo voua Jivoz raison. 1 say tliat you are right. Je suis fiiche «iuo vous jiyoz raigon. I am sorry (tliat) you are right. 235. CoiiJ ligation of mettre, * to place,' * put ' : — lufin. mettre. Fxit. mettrai. Condi. mettrais PruH. Part. Pad Part. Pras. Indie. Pant Dtf. mettant. mis. nieta. mettons. mis. Imp/. mets. mettez. Inipf. Sithj. mettais. met. metteiit. misse. Pns. SuhJ. [ftnpve. mets, mettons, mettez.] mette, (-es, -e), mettioiis, (-iez, -eut). 2J5G. Con jiv^ixtion of prendre, 'to take': — Injin. Pri's. Part. Paat Part. Pres. Indie. Pant Def. prendre. prenant. pris. prends. prcnons. pris. FxLt. hnpf. prends. prenez. hnj)/. Subj. prendrai, prenais. prend. prennent. prisse. Condi. Pres. Subj. [Imjrve. prends, prenons, prenez.] prendrais. prenne, (-es, -e), prenions, (-iez), prennent. EXERCISE XXXI. Apr^s que (dprd ke), after (that). Le libraire (librd.rj, bookseller, Atteudre (dia.dr), wait, wait for. L'oie, f.. (iid), gno.se. Aussitot que (dsitd ke), as soon as. Oter (die), take off. 2;{H.] CONJUNCTIONS. 13S liO coin (knd), conior. Coiirir, run, (kuri.r). iK'sque (di ke), asHuun aa, when. Kurire ('f/^n.rj, write. MiiipDrter (ffpdrfe), take away. Kimuyer (dnMile), annoy. L'iiijure, f., (iHii.rJ, insult. A la bonne heure ! II ni'a dit dea injures. II fait glissant. Je I'ai niia h la porte. II mot son habit. II se mot bien. Elle est l)ion miae. lis se mettent h table. II se met c'l travailler. Prends garde an chion. Pronds garde do tomber. La inerrofpit.rj, nUmv,. Prendre (pnH.dr), take, get. Prendre garde (««» 134 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [236. t- »i |.---4i IV , naio. 23. Ce puuvro inendifint est saiiH parents ni ainis 21. Notre chien n, apport^ cola, yaiis (lu'on Ic lui ait dit. 25. D68 quo mon chion m'a vu, il s'ost mis {\ c(mrir vers moi. 2(). Prcncz la lor.tro (pii osr, sur la tahU;, ot oni[x)rtoz-lji {\laposte. 27. Kostcz avoc nous ; nous allons nous niettre -X table. 28. 11 m'a ImIIu Io nicttro X la porto. 2^). Los enlants no Ibront pas Icur ouv ni^c, sans qu'on Io lour diso. 30. Mettons nos chapoaux, ot allons nous pronienor. 31. A la bonne heuro ! allons-y. Ji. 1. Takcoll'your overcoat and hat; we are g-ohiff to sit down to dinn(!r. 2. T.iko care not to fail ; it is very slip- pery, i). I had to turn liini out of doors ; he insulted me. 4. Tnke care ! That child will fall. 5. That is a cross dog ; beware of him. (5. As soon as we arrive there, wo shall tell our frien fin iss ons. vo»n fin iss «z. ile fin iss ent. Impcrfect, je romp 8. tu romp s. il romp t. nous romp ons. vous romp ez. ils romp ont. Imperfect. [/ was giving, used to [I tvasfirithmg, used to [r^vas breaking, usedto g^ve,etc.] finish, etc.] break, e.c] j« f*« iss als. je donn nis. tu donn als, il donn alt. nous donn Ions. vous donn lez. 'Is donn alont. J t'l fin iss als. il fin iss alt, nous fin iss Ions. vous fin iss iez. ils fin iss alont. je romp als. tu romp aU. il romp alt, nous romp Ions, ils romp alent. \ I: I i |l- Hi, filM h« t ^h' 136 Past Definite. • [/ gave, etc. ] je donn al. tu donii as. il donn a. noixs donn /lines. voua donn Atea. lis donn 6reiit. Future. [/ shall give, etc.] je donner al. tu donner as. il donner a. nous donner ons. vous donner cz. ils donner ont. Conditional. [/ should (jive, etc.] je donner uia. . tu donner ais. il donner ait. nous donner ions. vous donner Icz. ils donner aieut. Present. [Oive, etc.] 2. donn e. 3. (qu'il donn e.) 1. donn ons. 2. donn ez. 5. (qu'ils douu ©nt ) FRENCH GRAMMAR. Past Definite. [I fiimhed, etc.] je fin Is. tu fin is. il fin it. nous fin ttnes. vous fin Ttes. ils fin irent. Future. [I shalljinish, etc.] je finir ai. tu finir as. il finir a. nous finir ons. voua finir ez. ils finir ont. Conditional. {I should fnish, etc.] je finir ais. tu finir ais. il finir ait. nous finir ions. vous finir lez. ils finir aient. Imperative Mood. Present. [Finish, etc.] 2. fin i 8. 3. (qu'il fin iss e, ) 1. fin iss ons. 2. fin iss ©z. 3 (qu'ils fin iss ent. ) [237. Past Definite. [/ broke, etc.] je romp is. tu rcmp Is, il romp It. nous romp tnios. vous romp Itos. ils romp Iront. Future. [I shall break, oic] jc rompr ai. tu rompr as. il rompr a. nous rompr ons. vous rompr ez. ils rompr ont. Conditional. [/ shordd break, etc.] je rompr ais. tu rompr ais. il rompr ait. nous rompr ions, vous rompr iez. ils rompr alcut. Present. [Break, etc.] 2. romp s. 3. (qu'il romp e. ) 1. romp ons. 2. romp ez. 3. (fiu'ils rom'n eiitJ 237, 238 ] AITXILIAIIV^ VERBS. 137 Subjunctive Mood. Present. i),,,, '■ HKSKNT. Present etc.] (que) je donn e. (quo) tu donn cs. (qu ) il donn e. (que) nous donn ions. (que) vous donn iox. (qu') ils donn ont. etc.] (quo) je fin m e. (que) tu fin i.v,s eg. (qu') il fin r,s« e. (que) nous fin m Ions. (quo) vous fin m lez. (qu') il8 fin iss ent. etc.] (que) je romp c. (que) tu romp es. (qu') il romp e. (que) nous romp ions. (que) vous romp iez. (qu') ils romp ont. , ' ' "''-J etc 1 Ol"e)tu^o„„a„„s. (iueuufc "l"") i» romp !,«,. (.,..■) ildnnnat. („uM n fo r" Cl-) '" romp ,„„.. <-■'— "<"rn:«"::::::: <"-,;r::-r:: Auxiliary Vebbs— Simple Tenses. " 2;{8. Tlie auxiliary verbs avoir to hnr^ ..nrj -^^ ^ *«, are conjugated in i„ei.. «in>p,e tc^st'lf/ ■Zt:!!!''/'' Infinitive. Pres. avoir, ^o have. p^,,,. ..^^^ ^^ ^^ P.irticiples. PRES. ayant, '.avin,/. ]>ft,,^ x.„„, , . Past, eu, had. Pau^. ^.' i 1 AST. et6, ham. Indicative. Present, ,, J ai. nous avons. • • t„ „„ j^ ^ii''"^- uous sommes, tu as. vous ai'^ez. 11 a. lis Mit. •, ll est. lis sout. «W» f! ^1 ^^••"■pNn d^^^sSB' Ih B SSES s^^^H MlM4f»44^ fli^^^K v^^^^H -'H'-mttm ' :^^M ^^^^1 m 1 ,8 are, in reality. verh ,,hra«e8,' of which the auxiliary is the verb. They are closely analogous to correspondmg Lnj^h.h constructions. Avoir and 6tro a.a also used as independ- ent verbs. *^ Irregular Verbs in -er. 239. Verbs in -cer jiiid -ger, 1. Verbs in -cer, e.a. nx iincer (avase), advance/ require the « sound of c (^i;>, 13) throug-hout their conjugation, and hence c be- comes 9 before a or o of an ending (§41, 2, note), but not elsewhere : Pre^. Part. Pres. Indie. avaiiQant. avaiice. Impf. Suhj. avan^asse. avaii^asses. avan^at. avail passions. avaii^assiez. avan^asseiit. Impf. Indie. Past Def. avainsais. avan^ai. avances. avan^ais. avanpas. avance. avani( for the fut. and condl. This is shown orthographically as follows : — 1. By changing" e or e to « (§17, 2, note), e.g., monor, ' lead,' cedor, * yield ' : Pres. Indie. Prf^n. Suhj. Fnt. Condi, mbne. in6ne. mfenerai. mftnerais. mimes. - mfenes. mtjneras. lufsnerais. m6ne. rnf^ne. • mfenera. niisuerait. menons. menions. In^llerons. mftnerions. menez. mcniez. m^nerez. iiifMieriez. m6nent. indnent. m6neront. m6neraient. But cfider : c6de, etc. }c6fle, etc. <6iere.i, etc. c^dcrais, etc. 068. .' In mon(5-jo?, «i of the endiiij? in not ui ilo, and hence no accent on the steni- vowel. Like »nonor : Verbs with stem-vowfcl e (for exceptions in -eler and -eter, see below). Like cMer : Verbs with stem-vowel 6 + cov.sonan/., e.g., rdjarnor, 'reign,' etc. Note. — Verbs like cr^or, 'oroato,' are regular : Je cr^e, e*.c. 2. Most verbs in -eler, -eter, however, indicate the e sound of o by doubling 1 or t (§17, 2, note), e.g., .appelcr, ' call,' Jctor, ' throw ' : Pre.'i. Indie. appelle. appelles. appelle. appelons. appe z. ai)pellent. So also, jetor jette, etc. Pras. Suhj. appelle. appelles. appelle. appelions. appeliez. appellent. jette, etc. Fut. Bppellerai. appelleras. appellera. appellerons. appellerez. appelleront. Condi. appellerais. appellerais. appelSerait. appellerlons. appclieriez . appelleraient. jetterai, etc. jetlerais, etc. A fe?r verbs in -eler, -eter take tlie a^fv^ accent pre- cisely like metier, e.g., achcter, *bny'; achate, etc. achate, etc. achcterai, etc. aehftt^iiaif, etc. 241-244] IRREGULAR VERBS. 141 Exceptions like achotor : ai^neler. lamb. »(5pouB8eter, dust. modeler imdel -^"eter. peck ,^^,,,,^ ,„^, X^^l^ t3ourreler,i7oad. yr^X^v freeze P^er, peei. »/.'»/. 6pou88eteraI according to the DUtimmaire de VAcad4rrm. Exceptions like nppeler or achcter • Lotteler, bale {hay, etc.). caqueter, cackle. cannuler, <7>-ooye. ciseler, chuel. 243. Aller, fo go :~ hfin. Pres. Part. Past Part. all(4. crocheter, pick (a lock). allant. Imp/. Indie. allais. Pres. Subj. aller. Flit. ii'cii. Condi. irais. Like aller H'fii aller, r/o away. 2-43. Bnvoyer, to .^end : Pres. vais. vas. va. Indie. allons. allez. vont. [Impve. va, allons, allez.] Pcuit Def. allai. Imp/. Subj. allasse. aille, (-68, -e), allions, (-iez), aillent Infin. envoyer. Fid. euverrai. Condi enverrais. Pres. Part. envoyant. Imp/. Ind. envoyais. Pres. Subi. Past Part. Pres. Indie. envoys. envoie. envoyons envoies. envoyez, envoie. envoient. [Impve. envoie, envoyons, envoyez.] -e), envoyions, (-iez), envoient. Past Def. envoyai. Imp/. Subj. envoyasse. envoie, (-es, Like euvoyer : renvo.ver, send away, dwmm'. Irregular Verbs in -ir. 244. Acciuerir, to acquire :~ Ivjin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def ac.,ne.rai. ac^u.n^ ^^i:;, r"^r\ "^'^'^ ^'^^ Cu„1l P o I- -r 'I'Cquiert. acqui6rent. acquisse. (^ >ndL Pres. Subj. ylmpm. acquiers, acqu^rons, acquerez ] acquerrais. acquii^re, (-e., -e), acquc^rions, (-iez), acqniferent. Like acqu^rlr : •' reconquorir, reconqvsr. tHas only the infinitive. 1 ■ 142 FRENCH GRAMMAR. •« m i ♦«5;::':; i I I 1 i <1!W. ii if i . Hi' [245-248. Holy watei . Consecrrated bread. 245. B^nlr, to Mess : — Is retjular, but has also an trrej/. ^jcm< part. 'b6nit, used only as adj. De I'eau b6ulto. Du pain bdnit 246. Oourir, to run : — Irifin. courir. Fut. courrai. Condi. courrais, Pres. Part. courant. Imp/. Ind. courais. Pres. Suhj. Past Part. couru. Past Def. oourus. Imp/. Svhj. courusse. Pres. liidic. cours. courons. cours. courez. court, courent, [Impve. cours, courons, courez.] coure, (-es, -e), courions (-iez, -ent). Like courlr are its compounds : accourir, run up, hai^tcn. dlscoiirir, discourse. reconinr, runamain, apply. concourir, co-operate, don- enoourir, incur. secourir, succor, help, cur, compete. jmrcourir, run over. Note. — Courre, chase{a, hunting term) sometimes replaces courlviu Iheinfln. 247. GvLGillir, to gather, pick: — Injin. Pres. Part Past Part. Pres. Indie. cueilli. cueille. cueillons. cueilles. cueillez. cueille. cueillent. [Impve. cueille, cueillons, cueillez,] cueillerais. cueille, (-es, -e), cueillions, (-iez, -ent). Obs. : The pres. indie, /ut. and condl. are like those of donner. Like cuellllr : accueillir. welcome. *a88aillir, assail. recueillir, gather, collect. fsaillir, jut out. *Regular ivfut. and condl. : Assallliral, etc. fSalllir, gusk out, rush forth, is regular like flnlr. 248. Dormir, to sleep: — cueillir. cueillant. Fut. Imp/. Ind. cueillerai. cueillais. Condi. Pres. Suhj Past. Def. cueillis. Imp/. Suhj. cueillisse. tressaillir, start. In/in. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past De/ dormir. dormant. dormi. dors, dormons. dormis. Fut. Imp/. Ind. dors, dormez. Imp/. Suhj. dormirai. dormais. dort. dorment. dormisse. Condi. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. dors, dormons, dormez.] dormirais. dorme, (-es, -e), dormions, (-iez, -ent). 248-252.] Like dorinlr : emlormir, put tosloep. s\-iulonnir, /all adeep. rodonnir, mieep ayain. reiidormir, put to sleep aijain. IRREGULAR VERBS. 143 reDoiiillir, hoil cnjain. iiientir, lie. *•««« ,j^>»»*- My mm,i 253. Gesir, to lie, lie Imried : — Injin. I 'ad Part. Pant Part. Pv-h. Indie. g^sir. gisant. gisons. Put. Impf. Ind. gisez. gisais. git. gisent. Condi. Pres Sulij. [Impre. , , ] [253-258. Pant DeJ. Impf. Suhj. Note. — Its most frequent use is in fpitaphu : Cl-|flt, ' Here lies,' Ci-ffiHcnt, 'Here lie.' 254. HaYr, to hate: - Injin. Pra. Part. Pant Part. Pre.s. Indie. Pant Dif. hair. haissant. hai. hais. haissona. ' hau. Fvi. Impf. Ind. ■ hais. haissc/. Impf. Suhj. hairai. haissais. hait. haissent. hai'sse. Condi. Pres. Suhj. [Imprm. hais, hai'ssons, haissez.] hairais. haisse, '(-es, -e), ha'Vssions, (-iez, -ent). Obs. : Half r losex its diofrenn in the 'pri-s. iiidic. sing, and linperat. tdny. and takes nodrcuinflex accent; otherwise like flnlr. 255. Issir, to spring (from, de), he descended : — Used only in the past part. Issu : Je suis issu, etc. 256. Moiirir, to die : — Infn. mourir. Put. mourrai. Condi. mourrais Pre.s. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. mourant. mort. meura. mourons. mourns. Impf Ind. meurs. mourez. Impf. ,Stthj. mourais. meurt. meurent. mourusse. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. meurs, mourons, mourez.] nieure, (-es, -e), mourions, (-iez), meurent. Obx. : The stem-vowel ou becomes ou wherever it bears the stress. Like mourir : se mourir, be dying (used onlj' in infin., prea. and impf. indie.). 257. OuYr, to hear: — Is hardly used beyond the infin. and pa.'it part. : ' J'ai ouY dire,' '1 have heard said,' etc. 258. Ouvrir, to open : — Infin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. ouvrant. ouvert. ouvre. ouvrons. ouvris. Impf Ind. ouvres. ouvrez. Impf Suhj. ouvrais. ouvre. ouvrent. ouvrisse. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. ouvre, ouvrons, ouvrez. j ou rir. FiU. ouvrirai. Condi. ouvrirais ouvre, (-es, -e), ouvrions, (-iez, -ent). Obs. : 1\icpres. indie, is like that of donner. liii 258-201.] lURECJULAP VEUIJS. 145 Liko ouvrlr : pntr'ouvrir, open Hlitjhfhi. iMiiviir, open cujain. artenir, belon/i. (■ontLiiir, eontain. (It'iLDir, detain. cntretenir, entertain. (imlntenir, maintain. ohieiiir, obtain. v*it i'uir, retain. soutoiiir, suntain. vonlr, come. avenir, happen. lulvenir, happen. convenir, agree, f^uil. contrcveiiir, violate. clrconvenir, circumvent tlovenir, become. disconveuir, he discordant. intervenir, intervene. 260. Vetir, to clothe:— Iiifin. Prts. Part. Pant Part. vetant. Impf. Ind. vetais. Pres. Snhj. parvenir, attain. pr6veiiir, prevent. provenir, 2rrocecd.(iTom, de). revenir, come hack. redovenir, hecomtir. tnit. viHirai. vrtirais. Like vfetir : (leviHir, divest. se (iLH'Otir, take off clothing vetu. Prcs. Indie. vets, vetons. vets, vetez. vet. vetent. [IiHpre. rets, vetons, vetez.] Past Def. vetis. Imp/. Subj. vetisse. vete, (-es, -e), vetions, (-iez, -ent). revfitir, clothe, invest, ae revfitir, put on clothing. Irregular Verbs in -ro. 2(J1. Battre, to beat :~ Loses one t in pres. indie, siny. : Hats, bats, bat ; otherwise like roiiipre Liko battrti: 'nntithnttrii,Jight, ojjpose. d6 battre, debate. se (ii'ljattre, stnujgle. rabattrc, diminish the pri^se. •Mix Mm c; I ill III iiMi 140 l^'RENCTI CJUAMMAR. 202. Iloire, to drink :— InJin. Pns. rart. l^ant Part. Pres. Iiidk. boire. buvant. bu. bois, buvons. Fut. Imp/, liifi. Um. biivez. boirai. buvais. hoit. boiveiit CoiuU. Pres. Svhj. [impm. boin, buvons, buvez.] boirais. boive, (-es, -e), buvk)ns, (iez), boivent. Like boIre : einboiro, coat (iiii)ai;itinjr). Veinboire, Iwoome duli. *Used in Srd perH. 2C53. Hruir«, to nmrmur, rustle:— [2(52-205. l*a.st Dif. bus. Imp/. Siihj. bttsae. Iinhoiru, iinhihe, imbue. roboire, drink mjain. InJin. i'ms'. Part. Paxt /'art. Pren. bruire. bruyant. I)riiit. bruis Fut. l»i/i/. Ind. bruit, bruirai. bruyais. bruit Condi. Pren. Suhj. [Impve, , - > bruirais. Indie. Pa.^t Drf. Impf. Suhj. -] NoTKS.— 1, The^/mv. part l)ru.VJint, ' iioiay,' is used as adj. only. brulHHant, bi'uiM8Hi.s, etc , brulnsu, etc., are rtl.so in use. Tiio tonus 2(>4. Clore, to close, enclose: InJin, clore. Fut. clorai. Condi. clorai.s PrtH. Part. Pant Part. clos. Impf. Ind. Pres. Ind. ilos. clos. clot. Pa^t Dif. Impf. Suhj. Pres. Subj. close, (-es, -e), closions, (-iez, -ent). Like ciore : d^clo-e, throw open. "enclore, inclose. *6clore, hatch, opcn(of flowers). tforclore, foreclose, debar. *nas alsoi/m-. plu :, 6cl/. Siihj. cond.iisisse. coiiduisant. conduit, condins. conduiaona Lnpf. hid. coiiduis. conduisez. conduisais. conduit. cnn, take apart •Only in Srdnnc,. atulplur. prr.s. indie an.i r.rd ,in,j. unpf. Obsolescent. a.v part, lul and rclul resi.ec.tive.ly. No past def. or impf. mbj. trad part. nui. "^ 2«7. ktrL\ to he :~ .See §238 for the full conjugation. 268. Confiro, to preserve, pickle :-~ Pres. Injin. Prts. Part. Past Part. Pns. Indie. contit. confis. confisons. confis, confisez, confit. confisent. [Impve. confis, confisons, confisez.] Instruirp, instraet. reconatriiire, /v(ww/n/«t. <\itv\\ivv>, dentroy. cniro, cook. rocMiIre, cook atjain. flulrts shine. Iroluire, ijli^ten. {nulrc, injure. confisant. Imp/, hid. confisais. Pres. Suhj. Past Def. confis. hnpf. Suhj. confisae. confise, (-ea, -e), coalsions, (-iez, -ent). coufire Put. coniirai. Cniidl. confirais Like conlflro cl6..onfire, di..c. Oonnattre, to know, he acquainted with .•— In/in. Pr,,,. Part. Past Part. Pres. hidic. Past Def. coumutre. connaissant. connu. connais. connaissons. connus. nnn, '*H " ^^PMnd. ■ comiais. copuaissez. Imp/. Siihj. eon.uutrai. connaissais. connait. connaissent. oonnnsae J-"'f^' Jre.s.Suhj. [im^rc. connais, connaissons, connaissez. J oonnaitrais. eonnaisae, (-es, -e), connaissions, (-iez, -ent). 06s..- Stem-vowel 1 has circumjlex (t) everywhere 6^oret. ifatu mrmm -... *§ 148 FRENCH OUAMMAR. [269-271. •till ft:: Like oonnattre : nxdmunaSttv, tv>ttokm>w. coinpomitn-, rt;>i>«or (law 'pattre, j/mze. rtH!oiinaUro,rer()7»»'« lias If. f ■ ■ •'•nUi iW ■nil' '^ ' fflu| ii*i -WW wp™ ' 1 '1 II* JifV ^ » ♦1H, lO* ■ 150 FllENCFt GRAMMAR 6crire. Fut. ^crirai. Condi. dcrirais, ^crit. 275. Ecrire, to write : — Injin. Pres. Part. Pant Part. ^crivant. Impf. Ind. (^crivais. Pres. Subj Pres. Indie. ^cris. ^crivons. ^cris, ^crivez. 6crit. ^crivent. [Impve. 6cris, ^crivons, ^crivez. ] [275-278. Past J)ef. ^crivis. Imp/. Subj. ^crivisse. derive, (-es, -c), 6cnvions, (-iez, -ent) Like 6criro are all verba in -(8)crlre : clrconscrire, circumscribe, proscrire, presciribr. d.6crir<-', describe. proscrire, proscribe. Inscriro, inscribe. r6(;rire, rewrite. 276. Fairo, to do, make : — souKcrire, subscribe. transrrire, transcribe. Infill. faire. Fut. ferai. Condi. ferais. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. fait. fais. faisons. fia. fais, faites. Impf. Subj fait. font. fisae. Pres. Part. faisaxt. Impf. Subj. faisais. Pres. Subj. [Impve. fais, faisons, faites.] fasse, (-es, -e), fassions, (-iez, -ent). Obs. : See §22, 2, Exc, for 'jrroiiunciatioyi ot faisant, etc. Like fairo : iii6 faire, harm. par faire, complete. recl6faire, undo again contrefaire, imitate. d6faire, undo. fortAirc, forfeit. *iiialfaire, do ill. *Use(l in infin. only. 277. Frire, to fry (intr.) : — refaire, do again. Silt Isf aire, satisfy. snrfaire, overcharge. Infin. frire. Fut. frirai. Condi. frirai s. Pres. Part. Past Part. frit. Impf. Ind. Pres. Subj, [Impve. fris, Pres. Indie. fris. fris. irit. ] Past Def Impf. Subj. 278. Lire, to read: Infin. lire. Fut. lirai. Condi. lirais. 61ire, elect Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. lisant. lu. lis. lisons. Impf. Ind. , . lis. lisez. lisais. lit. lisent. Pres. Subj. [Impve. Ks, lisons, lisez.] Past Dff lus. Impf. Subj. lusse. liae, (-es, -e), lisions, (-iez, -ent). r661iro, re-elect. relire, read again. 279-282.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 279. Mettre, to place, put :- Pres. Part. mettant. Imjif. Ind. mettais. Pres. Suhj. Infin mettre. FuL mettrai. Condi. niettrais Like inottro se mettre, begin. admcttre, admit. t'Oiiiinettre, commit. t'ompromettre, compro viise. Past Part. Prea. Indie. mis. mets. mettons. mets. mettez. met. mettent. [Impve. mets, mettons, mettez.] 151 Past Def. mis. Imp/. Suhj. misse. mette, (-es, -e), mettions, (-iez, -ent.) 280. Moiidro, to grind : ddniettre, di.imi«s. proniettre, promise. 6inettre, emit. TonwMre, put back, handto. s'entromettre, interpone. reproniettre, promise again, omettre, omit. souinettre, submit, permettre, permit. traiismettrc, transmit. Pres. Part. moulant. Imp/. Ind. moulais. Past Part. moulu. r-rcs'. Indie. mouds. moulons. mouds. rixoulez. moud. moulent. Pre.s. Subj. [Impm. mouds, moulons, moulez.] moule, ^-es, -e), moulion.s, (-iez, -ent). Imp/ Ind. naissais. Pren. Suhj. Ivfin moudre. FiU. moudrai. CondJ,. moudrais Like inoudrc 6n.ou(lre, rvhet. re.noudre, gri^ . again. r6moudre, sharpen 281. Naitre, to he horn, arise, sprhig up: hjin. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. naitre. naissant. n^. nais. naissons. nais. naissez. nait. naissent. [Impve. nais, naissons, naissez.] naisso, (-es, -e), naissions, (-iez, -ent). Ofo. .- stem-vowel i has the circumjlex (f ) everywhere before t. Like iiattre reiiaitre, revive. 282. Plaire, to please : — /"/«. Pres. Part. Past Part. plaire. plaisant. plu. Imp/ Ind. plaisais. Pres. Subj. [Impve. plais, plaisons, pFaisez.] plaise, (-es, -e), plaisious, (-iez, -ent). Lik'j pla'ro : coiuphiire, humour. d6ii]aire, displease. *U tait hoa no circumjlex. R. Past De/ moulus. Imp/ Subj. mouluBse. Flit. naitrai. Gondl. naitrais. Past De/ naquis. Imp/ Subj. naquisse. r,a. plairai. Condi. plairais. Pres. Indie. plais. plaisons. plais. plaisez. plait, plaiscnt. Pa.st De/ plus. Imp/ Suhj. plusse. *talre, say nothing about t*imm m it" : m •MMlli 152 FHENCH GRAMMAR. [283-286. { I 'u {'l ' I'**;' 'I i ^ * .,' ■1 !":■' It* i ■ ■li».||! 283. Prendre, to take : — Injin. Pres. Part. Past Part Pres. Indie. Past Def, prenurt. prenant. pris. prends. prenons. pris. Fut. Impf. Ind. prends. prenez. Impf. Snhj. prendrai. prenais. prend. prennent. prisse. Co7idl. Pres. Suhj. [Impve. prends, prenons, prenez.] prendrais. prenne, (-es, -e), prenions, (-iez), prennent. Like prendre are its coippounds : apprendre, laarn. entroprctidre, undertake, rapprendre, learn again. tl6 prendre, jiorf. s'^preiulre, be taken (with). rt}]n-eiulre, take back. d6sapprendre, unlearn. se iu6prendre, be mistaken, surprendre, surprise. . coiiiprendre, understand. 284. Resoudre, to resolve : — Pad Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. resolu. r^sous. r^solvons. r^solus. rdsous (no f. ). r^sous. rdsolvez. Imp/. Snhj. r6sout. r(^solvent. r^soiusse. [Impoe. r^sous, r^solvons, r^solvez.] InJin. Pres. Part. resoudre. r^solvant. Fut. linpf. liid. r^soudra,!. resolvais. Condi. Pres. Subj. r^soudrais. resolve, (-es, -e), rtl'solvions, (-iez, -ent). Like rosoudi'o : *absouj. suive, (-es, -e), suivions, (-iez, -eat), lake suivro : s'en.suivre(iiiipers.), it/oUows. V our auivre, pursue 288. Tistro, io weave : — Used only in i\w past part, tlssu and comp. ient;es. 289. Trairc, to milk:— 153 Past Def. suivis. Impf. Sv.hj. ouiviasy. Infill. traire Put. traii'ai. Cu.all trairais. Pres. Part. trayant. Ivipf. Ind. trayais. Pant Part. +rait. iVes, Indie. trais. ti'ayoiis. trais. trayez trait, traient. Pasi D&f. ImpJ ,^ubj. Pres. Subj. [Impre. trais, trayons, trayez.] traie, (-es, -e), trayions, (-iez), traient. soiistniire, mbtraet. *ll)r,iire, brai). Like traire : uhs'.viure,abKtract. axtraive, extract. atiiuire, attract. rentraire, duni. disLi-aire, distract. rctraire, redeem (Icfjal). *Coiunionly usod only in tlie infm. and the 3rd pern. pres. indie, fut. and condl 290. Vtiiiiero, to conquer, vanquish : — Infill. Pres. Part. Past Part. Prts. Indie. Past D'f. vaiiicre. vaintiuant. vaincu. vaincs. vainquons. vainquis. Fnt. Impf. Ind. vaincs. vainquez, Impf Suhi. vaincrai. vainciuais. ' vainc. vainciuent. vainquissk Conill. Pres. Subj. [Impre. vaincs, vainquons, vainquez j vaincrais vainque, (-es, -e), vainquions, (-iez, -ent). Obs. : Stem c ( = fc) becomes qu (§55, note) before any vowel except u. T.ike vjiiiicro : eonvaincre, convict. 291. Veiidro, to sell :-- Irregular only in 3rd sing. pres. indie. : II vend ',t omiUed). Like vendrc : All verbs in -auare. -ondre (except preuiire), -ordre, oudre, -ord.e ItU *-i' n ^■'i I,' {'"•% lit*" I<( 154 FRENCH (HI AM MA II. vivre. J^'ut. vivrai. Condi. vivrais. Like vlvro rovivre, renioc. v6cu. 292. Vivrt?, to live :— Injin. Pres. Part. Pad Part vivant. lmi>f. Ind. vivais. Pre,s. SuDJ Pres. Indie. vis. vivons. vis. vivcz. vit. vivent. [/m)W(i. vis, vivons, Aavez.] [292-295, Past Def. v6cus. Iinpf. Snl>j. v^cuPde. vive, (-OS, -e), vivioiis, (-iez, -eiit). Stirvivre, sunripr. Ikkegulau VEKJis IN -oir. 29.3, Avoir, to have: — See §238 for the full conjugation of this verb, lake ••.voir : ravoir, have a;/ain (used only in infin.). 294:. Rccevpir, to receive: — Infin. P. en. Part. Past Part. i res. Indie. recevoir. reccvant. re^u. re^ois. recuvons. Fut. Impf. Ind. reyois. receve'«. recevrai. recevais. revolt. rei^H)ivi;nt. Condi. Pres. Siihj. [/??t/;?;e. regois, recevons, recevez.] recevrais. re9oive, (es, -o), recevions, (-iez), resolvent. NoTK. The few verbs in -oir (all. irre|jful;ir) form, in some j^ramniars, a separate- con ju^'ation (the iird, verbs in -ro beiny the Ufh)- Like recevoir are all verbs iu -evoir : apuroevoir, 2>''>''^aiit parts, are du (f. due, pi. du(e)s) and redii (f. redue, pi. redu(e)s) re- spectively. 295. Asseoir, to neat: — /iijln. Pres. Part. Past Part. Pres. Indie. Past Def. assis. ( assieds. /assevons. assis. Past Def. reyus. Impf. Suhj. reyusse. I: asseoir. Fut. assiirai. asseyerai. assoirai. Condi. ^assierais. fasseyant. uissoyant. Impf. fasseyais. V assoyais. /> res. Suhj. [t'mpre. Pres. Indie. j assieds. /asseyons. \assois. ' assoyoiis /assieds. fasseyez. lassois. vassoyez. fassied. fa....^^^ jiit. lassoit. lassoieiit. /assieds, asseyons, asseyez.j lassois, assoyons, assoyez.] Impf. Suhj assisse. (asseye, (-es, -v.), asseyions, (-iez, -ent). -| asseyerais. lassoie, (-es, -e), assoyions, (-iez), assoient. I aasoiraia. 295-209.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 155 Like iiNHeoir : sassoir, .s(7 down. se nusseoir, m7 duwnarfnhi. » nu.Hs..o>, fit hndly ~o,r, r««.a«. calm. Ncoir, I. lee^nnivij. fsurseuir, M,^,«,.i.V,,,Wer.. Ucl ,n .n? ^,rr.. of the followi,,,. : Pre., indie, nied, si^er.t (meH-siorl, mossi6ent) • .;.;;,. v,«Z<«ficyait.Heyaient(.nessoyait, n.esseyaiei.t,) ; ?m'.. .«/,; si^e, silent (mos- I , iiiess-.tent); /^,^ si,:.ra, sic^ront, (...essiLTa, .ncssicronl ) ; «,/„?;. .i^raifc. sieraien^ ,iM, .. l)6choiv, to dec/ ina^ decay :~ / .//m. 7';y.s. Part. Paul Part. Pre,. Indlc. (livanir. d^chu. d^chois. (U-choyons. /•'"/. Tmpf. Ind. flt-chois. deohoycz. choir : '*''"*"*'•'■"''■■ • 'rovhoit, fall again. Hardly used 1)cyond the infm. and rom^*. f. hid. puuvais. PrcH. Snhj. Pa.sf Drf. pus. Impf. Svbj. pusse. Like MMMivoir': ^inoiivuir, ai(,ii.-T. *Past}iart. hast no circAimji.cx. 8<)<). Pleiivoir (impors.), to rain: — In/hi. Prc.fi. Part. Pa.^t Part. Prtw. Indir. pleuvant. plu. il pleut. Imiif. /lid. il plouvait. /'/v.s. Svbj. [fmpve. , •, 1 il pleuviait. il plcuve. 301. Pomoir, to be able, can, may, etc. ;- Ivfin. PrcH. Part. Pant Part. Prl ! ■4*.-.; !■' Nil I 158 choir §296 circoiiciro 268 circonscrire 275 circonvenir 259 ciore 264 combattre ...... 261 commettre 279 comparaitre 269 comparoir 269 conipiaire 282 comprendre 283 crmpromet ire .... 279 conrevoir 294 conclure 265 concoiirir .* . 246 conduire 268 confire 268 con joindre 27 1 connaitre , 269 conqu^rir 244 consentir 248 construire 266 contenir 259 contraindre 271 contredire 274 con tref aire 276 contrevenir 259 convaincie , 290 convenir 259 coudre 270 courir 246 -courre 246 couvrir 258 craiudre 271 croire 272 croitre 273 cueillir.. . . 247 cuire 266 D. d^battre 261 d6cevoir 294 FRENCH GRAMMAR. d^ichoir §296 dc^'clore 264 d(iconfire 268 d«!'construire .... 266 d6coudre 270 d^couvrir 258 d^crire 275 di'icroire 272 d(''croitre 273 dt'-dire 274 duduire ... 266 dMaillir 249 defaire . 276 d('ijoindre 271 d6mentir 248 d^mettre 279 d^partir 248 d^peindre 271 d(6plaire 282 d^pourvoir . . . 304 d^prendre 283 dt^sapprendre . . . 283 deaservir 248 deteindre 271 d6tenir 259 d^truire , 266 devenir 259 d^vetir 260 devoir 294 dire ,i74 disconvenir 259 discourir 246 disjoindre 271 disparaitre 269 disaoudre 284 distraire 289 doruiir 248 duire 266 E. ^bouillir 248 6choir 297 [306 ). ('iclore §264 ('jcouduire 20{» (^criro 275 ^lire 278 emboire 262 ^mettre 279 ^mondro 280 ^^mouvoir 299 empreindre 271 enceindre 271 enclore 264 encourir 24() endormir 248 eiiduire 266 enfreindre 271 enf uir 252 enjoindre. 271 enqii^rir 244 ensuivre 287 entremettre 279 entreprendre 283 entretenir 259 entrevoir 304 entr'ouvrir 258 envoyer 243 ^preiudre 271 ^prendre 283 ^quivaloir 303 ^teindre 271 etre 238 ^treindre 271 exclure 265 extraire 289 F. faillir 249 faire 276 falloir 298 feindre 271 f^rir 250 tieurir 251 forclore 264 306.] forfaire frire. . . . fiiir . . , . LIST OF IRREGtTLAR VERBS. 159 G. goindre 271 §276 o. 277 obteuir §2r)9 252 offrir o'yH oiiidre 271 R. ral)attre §261 rappreiidre 283 rassooir 295 gfsir . H. II air. 253 254 J. 262 265 266 imboire inchire iiuluire inscrire 275 instruire 266 interdire 274 intervenir 259 introdiiire 266 issir 255 *''"«^tre 279 ratteindre . 071 ""'r 257 ravoir.... ocjg <'"^"'' 258 reboire ' 262 r** reboiiillir. . 248 P^^tre 269 rocovoir '. ' " ' 294 I"^^'"^« 269 rechoir 296 parcourir 246 reclure ' 265 reconduire 266 rcconnaitrc 269 recoiiqudrir 244 reconstruire 266 parfairo . . 276 partir 248 parvenir 259 peindre 271 J. J^^""^''^ 271 pleuvoir '.' 300 P^^cevoir 294 recoudre 270 pcrmettre 279 recourir 246 P^^iadio 271 recouvrir . . . . 258 P^'^^i^e 282 r6crire .' .' 275 recroitre 273 I.. 'ire 278 '"ire 266 M. maintenir 259 malfaire 276 iiiaudire 274 in^connaitre 269 "pressentir .... . . 248 274 pr^valoir 303 mentir ^"^ pr<5venir 259 refaire .....' 276 m(^prendre 283 produire ' ." .' ." .' .' .' ' 266 '"''•' '''"'^''^ ^' ^ "^^'^^^oir 295 promettre 279 promouvoir 299 proscrire 275 m(!'dire m^faire P°i"f're 271 recueillir 247 poiirsuivre 287 recuire 266 P""rvc)ir 304 red^faiie " 276 PO"^'oir 301 redevenir 259 W^dire 274 redevoir 294 prendre 283 redire 274 Prescrire 275 redormir ," .' 248 i'<^'duire 266 r^t^lire 278 mettre 279 moudre 280 '""'^irir 256 mouvoir 299 N. naitre 281 ""ire 266 relire 278 leluire 266 remettre 279 remoudre 280 P^o^«"'r 259 remoudre 280 Q* renaitre 281 *^"f !''} 244 rendormir 248 ^"•^rir/ rentraiie 289 renvoyer 243 If til ■I ♦•www IS: Wf.** ftp;*-*' ■■M: ' ^'' liJ' 160 rcpaitro §269 reparaitre "^fi'.* reparlir 248 rept'indrc . 271 repentir 248 icpreiulro. 283 roproduire 200 reprotuettrc . . . 270 rcfjuc'irir 244 r^soudro 284 resscntir 248 reasortir -48 res8v>uvenir 259 reatreiiulre 271 rcteindre 2,11 lUENOH OIlAMMAR. S. sail' . . *5247 Halisfairo 270 savoir 302 sursooir . survenir. survivre [300. ..,.§29.-. 2.-)!i 2<>2 T. secourir. 24B 8(''(luire 2l!() sentir '^'t-i- seoir 295 servir . 248 sortir 248 8on{Tnr 258 souniettx'c) 279 smu'dre 286 sourire ... 285 souscrire 275 retraire 289 revaloir 303 revenir 259 rovetir 2(50 revivre 2!)2 revoir 3(H: rire 285 rouvrir 258 tairc 282 teiudre 27 1 tenir 259 tisti e 2SS traduire 2tiook. 35,. iiead that V^tter. 26. They . are reading their book. ••fn .4?aU-hov>. inilU'v. , Im bur... v\\o\v, fall. sjj^ti'ui; ciUur,jiiiAi)ri< voulr, cofne. SOS, 309J AUXILIARY VERBa So also, the following compound.'^ of venir : devenir, beconj^. pavveiiif, attain. r(':Icvenir, beeoim: again. provenir, proceed. intervcnir, intcrmne. revenir, come back. 167 sur^enir, supervene. {To have fjone.] Hre alle(e) or all6(e)s. [Having died.} 6tant mort(e) or mort(ejs. [/ (have) arrived, etc.] je suls arriv^(e). nous sommes arriv6(e)g. tu es " vous etes « il(elle)est « ils (elles) sont " .309. 1. Avoir or etre^ the past jMrticiple forms the compound tenses of a number of Intramsitwes (see list be- low), the g-eneral distinction being- that avoir, when so used, denotes action, wlnle etre denotes state or condition resulting- from action : Tlie rain canio through the window. The rain is past. She jEfi'OAv up very fast. She Is grown up. 2. Tteference-list of verbs with avoir or etre : La pluie a pass6 ])ar la fenetre, La ])luie est pass6e. Kile a fjfrancll bien vite, Elle est granrtie. aborder, land accoiirir, run to. ;r'( roitre, increasi. fipiiafaitrc, apiwar. liaisscr, /(?;/, decline. cesstT, ccane. changer, change. f Ton ve, grow. lU'liorder, mwrjlow. 'li.ehoir, decay. 'Itcroitre, decrease. (ie^('n(5rpr, degenerate 'lemeurer, remain. *(Iescendre, descend. disparaitre, disappear. (Jehapper, escape. t-k'liouer, be stranded, fail. enibellir, grow handsomer. (■niigrer, emigrate. empirer, grow worse. expirer, expire. grandir, grow up. "monter.r/o up. *partir, set out. passer, pass. riic'napper, escajm again. redesceiidre, come down again. rcmonter, go up again. *rentrer, go in again. repasser, pass again. *ressortir, go out again. ressuciter, revive. rester, remain, "retomhei; fa II again. *retourner, go back. sonner, strike, toll. *sortir, ,170 out. *toinlier, fall. vieillir, grow old. ^MV,y generally with etre. and placed by some grammarians among verbs taking r|^ Any verb in the list, used transitively/, must, of course, take avoir h iii'u pass6 la plume. Avrz-vous rentr6 votre hWi lis ont descendu le tableau. He handed me the pen. Have you hauled in your wheat ? Thty have taken down the picture 'Hi,, ! ■ iin y 168 FRENCH (GRAMMAR. [309. 6. The meaning also determines the auxiliary in a few other cases : t ; l« Avoir. convenir, suit, become. disconvenir, Jiot to suit, he discordant. repartir, revly Nous sonunes convenus du prix. Le prix ne m'a pas eonvenu. Etro. convenir, agree. disconvenir, deny. repartir, (jo away again. We a^roecl on the price. The ririce did not suit me. Qu'est devenu son f r^re ? Je sais ce qu'il est devenu EUe est n^e. EUe est morte. EUe est mont^e. EXEIICIS*. XO. What has become of his brother ? I know what has become of him. She was born. She died. She has gone up {or upstairs). NoTK.— In this exercise, verbs havinj,' the iiaterisk in the list §309, 2, are to be con Jugated with 6tre when intransiti\T. 1. Your mother has come, lias slie not? 2. No, she has not yet come ; she will come to-morrow. 3. Our friends have gone to church ; let us go (there) too. 4. The old gentleman who lived in that house died last night. 5. (The) Queen Victoria was born on the twenty-fourth of May. 6. My little sister was born on the tenth of March. 7. How old is your father ? 8. He is seventy ; he was born before the death of Napoleon. 9. What has become of your brother ? 10. He has gone to (partir pour jFvAnce. 11. When did he go? 12. He went yesterday morning. 13. Is your father out? 14. No sir, he is in. 15. When did your father return ? 16. He has not yet returned ; he will return next week. 17. The servant has brought down the trunk. 18. Where is your sister ? 19. She has gone down for breakfast. 20. Where are the children? 21. They have gone upstairs. 22. Why did they not come down when I was there ? 23. What is the matter, my child ? 24. It was slippery, and I fell. 25. My father has gone into the house. 26. Although he was born rich, he is now poor. 27. He died poor, al- though he was once rich. 28. I have not seen him to-day ; what has become of him ? 29. I don't know what has become of him. 30. Have you taken up the gentleman's trunks? 31. Not yet, but I sh 'I take them tip immediately. 32. At what ochx;k did your sister go out this morning ? 33. She went out at half -past nine. 34. Where is my sis- ter ? 35. She has gor- upstairs ; she has gone to get her books. •e pourrais iiiti:i 310.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 169 310. Otiior Vorh Phrases. Several verbs when fol lowed I3y an tirfirutvce, have a sort ot auxilia t f" i" sen c wnat a.iala^'ous to that of avoir (etro) + tlaTTm^ 1. Vou)olr=.'wm,"wishto,"wantto,"desireto,'etc • Je no veux pas restor. I ,,.|„ ^„, ^.^„,^^,^ II vouclrait (btcM,) lo savolr. He wo„,a l,Ue to I.aow it. She would not listen to ine. He woulfl have IJ" ed to do so. IIo so gootl as to do so, a. Distinguish from ' will ' of simple, futurit,/ : Ello vouB 6co„tera. ghe will n.tcn to you to, intend to, etc., vanes in force in different tenses • EUen'apas voiilu ni '(Scoutor. II .airult vonhi le faire. VeuiUoz le faire. FuT. [I xhaU have to (he oblujea to) come hack, etc.] je devrai revenir. tu devras revenir, etc. CONDL. A\T. Pkes. Jjjpj, [/ am. to (hare to, in- [/ mas to (had to, in- t<)idto,7>nistJremain, tended to) speak '^'•^ etc.] je loein. I have iiuulo the children study, He win make them listen. Tie haasm'e force of a transitive infin. after faiu'o : Je ferai 6crlro une lettre. I shall have a letter written. 7. Laissor =^ ' let,' has usually the same constructions as fairo : Laissez ecrire les enfants., Let the ehihlren write. Laissez-loujf \fir -les) Ecrire un th^me. I^et them wnte an exercise 8 1 O.J AUXILTAllY VEillJS. 171 \T,„,< ..I . . ^ ffolnff to Is Jibout to) buy it An.,, a Ions no„. arr^ter. We were about to stop 11 allalt se Mover. tt„ ^. We was on thoijoliit of tlroAvul.iff 9. Similarly the;.r..s. and imp/, of venlr do + /./.. give a kind of Ji; vioiis do le voir. T i,^,,.. » ^ 7, ,^ , ,, ^ "'ivo just soon him. 11 vonuit do 1 outondro. H. b.»i {«»* i . -i. lit. ii.itl just hoard it. EXEIM LSK XLII. Si vouH voulie. bien me le dire. If you would kindly tell me 1. \Ve do not M'ish to leave this country ; we should like to remain .re butif we eannot, we shall go. 2. You ought to go lleZ cinldrcn ; it is late. 3. \\e cannot go home • it is .luk t 1 i .^ t.ldustor.e;waitforhim. 4. wLnnot gJl:!?:^ .^^^^^^ ti.e letlei, if we lad known that you desired it. 6. That beggar eouhl a vo had work If he had wanted it, but lie was too lazy ; he wo ild'o " o their father told them that they were t. leave before (th!)nS' l'>. lou might have seen them, if you had been v,--^ling to come wit^i - 1. Our teacher told us that we were to write\his Ji 1 1-'. AVe are to have a house built next year 13 Thoir t.. , ""^ ;;.- write their exercise. 14. We shoiil^Hke't W : W S^ 'Me were rich enough. 15. We said to the iimkeepei, will you b^ J 1-nd as to have our horses saddled? We are goi ig to s art H). Opium makes [us] sleep. 17. It is very wirm • if f i • . , oontinues, it will kill the crops. ^ ' ' '^"' ^'"^' ^''^' EXEKCISIJ XLIII. .I'te:;':' ^r'r^C'M '"u"°' ''-'''" •-''">»''' ue sueut. .. ihat girl could write, if she wished (if) lua „ ^ Wautiful picture. 7. Ye». J l«ve ]u,t bee., .howiug it tu :»» «. i\ ■ 4 5 •* m •I •• >«ti ^ ^t^s III 1 I k 172 FRENCH (SKAMMAIl. [310-812. your mother ami sister. 8. When did you see my father ? 9. I had just been speaking with h'm, when you came. 10. What are you going to do to-morrow? 11. To-morrow we are to go to see the hivalkks and ilmArc de Triomphe., and the day after to-morrow we are to see Notre DavuinnH i\\o Louvre {n\.) 12. We ought to have visited tlie Louvre when you were with us ; j'ou could have shown us tlie fine pic- tures. l.S. Miiy I go with you, when you visit the Louvre next time? I shouhl like to have explained to me some of the beauties of the finest pictures. 14. Tluit gentleman must have been in Paris, for he sijcaks French like a Parisian. 15. Wliy did you not make those ladies sit down, when they were here ? 16. They said they would not stay, be- cause you were out. 17. There are ladies at tlie door. 18 Very well, show them in. 19. Your son ouglit to write his exercises. 20. Very well, make him write them. 21. If I had made him study his lessons when he was at school, he would have become a better man. AgkkExMext of Vp:iiiJ and Subject. {Ml, General Rule. The verb agrees with its sub- ject ill 'number and person: lios hoiniiios sont mortels. M«ii are mortal. Tout le nionde est ici. EverjlxKly Is here. Tol et inoi (nous) ne fiiisonsqu'un. You unci I are but one. ;il2. Simple Subject. Special rules for the agree- iiieut of a verb with one subject are : — 1. A cnllect'ive siihj. sing., w^heii not folloiced by de, or vf\\iM\ folio iced by da + the sing., has a sing, verb : Le pouplo franyais est brave. The French people are brave. Le senat I'u decide. The senate lias (or have) decided it. La plupart du luoiulu le croit. Most people believe it. 2. A collect Ive snbj. sdng. + do and a plur. takes a pliir. verb, unless the sense of the collective be douiiiiaiit : Une nu6o de sauvages Tattaqufe- A cloud of savages attacked him. rent. Une nu6o de traits robscurcit. A cloud of arrows hid him. Une partie des soldatn restcnt. A j>art of the soldiers remain. Une p.-irtie des bourgeois protesta. A p:irt of the citizens protested. Cettesorto de poires est chere. This sort of pears is dear. a. When so uised, ail ir.rhs of quantity, e.g. beaucoup, peu, etc., the now;?s noinbre, txa.'iutlto (without art. /iiiid In piupart are rcguliwiy plur, in sense ; so also, force ^o being understood) : I '^12.J AGREEMENT OF VERB AND SUBJECT. 173 Iffaiicoiip de gens peiisont ainsi. Poll do geiia le Huveiit. Que il'ennemia m'littjMiuont ! \.;jiibro d'Ath^iiiensavalent fui. La i>lu])ar:!; des soldats i>6r!ront. Force sots le toutcront. Many people think so. Few people know it. How many enemies attack me I A number of Athenians luul ti^a. Most of the soldiers perished. Many a fool avIII try it. ft. Boaucoup, p<.„, eomhlen, used ahsohttelj^, are sing, or plur ac- La i.lupart votferent contre. The majority voted nay. loins de deux ne valent rien. Less than two Is no use. I-uu" /"'"" " '*"'""* ^^'"" ^'"'^^ ^^S"^« *»*«» «"- «»^«"t eaeh „, ''"'-"^e)- other. 1«« d-un offieier, plus d'un g^. More than one officer, more than neral furent tu6s. „„, ^^^^^^^ ^^^^^ j^.j^^^^ aki^itcM^s w!/V'''^'"''''Y^^''''^'"^ only When the pre- 1 tTci s to a preceding plur. : Sont-ce vos amis 1 -Ce sont eux. Is it your friends ? It Is they. te doivent etre les slens. Those must be his. Ce sont nos semhlables. They are our fellow-creatures. ^^3 deslrs, ce sont sa loi. His desires are his law. But : C'est moi ; c'est toi ; c'est lui ; c'est nous ; c'est vous. mol el?- n"""^'/' t'^' '^''^^ -^'^ '^' ''"^ ^^^^- ^ *^>^ construction, mo. e especially in familiar language or t^ avoid harsh locutions : Est-ce les Anglais que je crains ? Is it the English that T fear v C ost eux qui I'ont fait. It u they who did it. ^cst des bStises. That is stupidity. J^o tut-ce que quehiues lignes. If it were only a few lines. J The verb with «e is simj. when tl,e predicate i« a nmn.m/ + anoun C'e«t dix heure* qu'il sonnc 1 1 is ten o'clock that ih striking. UN *- s: ' •• ■» I j * » ••■ " » '■ ft ■ ' M!| l'» 174 FUENCIl rjUAMMAU. [312,3113. e. SI t'e n'est ia always King. : 'Qtli, si oe n'ost no3i)arent8? ^Vho, If It Ih not our parents? 4. II (impors.) always lins a amy. verb, whatever be the logical subject : II ent arrive^ bten lies cho8C8. 3lHuy thlii^H liavu happened. II en restu trois llvrcs. Three pouiulH of it roiiialn. a. Iinporfcr is construed ^;er«o»a//y or im/x rmnalli/ : Qu'lniporto (Iiiiportoiit) les dt'pena ? What iiuittWH tlic cost ? 3t',i, Coiiiposite Subject. A verb I'oiuinuii to tint or more suhJi'A'f.s is rt'^ularly j)lur. ; when the subjects d'tlf'cr in] era. the verb Mi^-rees with the Id jjers. (if any), other- wise with tlie 2nd : Sii sa'm* et lul 8oi;t l;'i. Quels 8ont vos ainiM? 'I'ol et iiio! ne faisouH qu'un. Qui Ctes-vows? His sister and ho are there. Who arc your friends? You and 1 are hut one. ^Vho are yon ? a. With subjects of different pers.,/V('o?ia„sy/r nous, vous, istjciicrMy used : Vous et hii (vous) I'avez vu. You and he have seen it. b. With ou=:'or,' nl ... nl= 'neither. .. nor,' the verbis sin;/., if the sense is clearly alternative {i.e., the one subj. excluding the other), otherwise generally j9/?tr. ; I'un on I'autro is alwaysimuj. : Sa vie on sa niort en depend. His life or dcatli depends on it. Ni lul ni votre fr^ro n'aura ce Neither he nor your brotlier witl poste. have that post. N 1 I'un nl I'autre ne sont bons. Neither are good. L'uno on Tautro viendra. The one or the otlior will come, ti'un ou I'autre jour me convlent. Either day suits nie. c. If the subjects (generally without et) are synonymous (or nearly so), or form a climax, the verb may he sing. : Sa digrnit^, sa noblesse frappa His dignity, his nobility .struck tout le monde. everybody. L'heuro, le lieu, le bras so The hour, the place, the arm ;tro choisit aujourjccts arc rmtintulal. d by a word in the simj., c.c,., tout, rleii, etc , the verbis .siny. agreuii.- witn it : Kemords, (Tainte, perils, rien ue RenK,r.so, fear, .langers, nothing m'o retenne. deterred me. e. With an interveimuj clause, e.g. uln«l er,s'. of tlits antecedent (see also liehit. Troii.) : ("est nous qui la vons fait. It is w«. who Imvo done it. Dieux ( voiis) qui m'oxauccz ! (Ye) ( Jods avI.o hoar me ! EXEiinSE XLIV. 1. The Frencli people arc brave and gay ; they (il) have theirf'.se,^; de- feels, but also their good qualities. 2. Few people believe that the eartA IS not round. .;. Most people believe that the earth will be destroyed. 4. Tlie greater part of his friends abandoned liim. 5. Many think that our friends will not succeed. 6. A great number of Hien were killed. 7. The Canadian people are brave, they (il) will always be free. 8. More than one house was burnt. 9. Less than two will not be enough. 10. Is It your friends who live in the house on the hill ? 11. Yes, it is they ; they have lived there for two years. 12. You and he were there, were you not? 1.3. Yes, he and I were there, and your brother too. 14. Will you and your brother come and see us, when you are in Toronto ? 15. ^Ye shall be very happy to (dv,) visit you. 16. Do you see those two children ? Both were born [on] the same day. 17. You or I shall speak. 18. There happen many misfortunes here below. 19. There aross a great quarrel between them. 20. Who went for the doctor ? 21. It was (pres. ) I who Avent for him. 22. Do you see those two gentlemen ? Both have had houses built this year. 2.3. Religion, truth, honour. all was abandoned. 24. Many think that you will never be able tc %, ->. %.-^^ .0, .0^ \t IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-S) w// / * " Vl^ ^^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 ,50 "^ 2.5 u liiii 1^ 1^ 12.0 1.4 1= 1.6 6" P <^ '/# /i ^. 7. ^-^ PhotogTdphic Sdences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14580 (716) 872-4503 «; ^ '^\ ^"i^> ^ f^U^ r^^ ^" ^. w t^. \ ^ ^ s« 1 • 1 1 1 j - i - . \ Ml HI iillr:: j,..,. :■. Mil ^ 176 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [314-316. build your house. ' 25. The majority are not always right. 26. If there happened such misfortunes to me, I should leave the country. 27. Were it only a few lines, I sliould like you to write to me. 28. If you and I were young, fine things would be done (reflex, impers.). 29. Who can hftre done that, if not bur friends ? 30. Neither he nor his brother car go away ; both must stay. Position op Subject. 315. The subject u^nhWj precedes the verb. Excer>. tions to tliis rule are noted in the following sections. 316. iMterrogrutive Word Order. Direct inter roqa- tion is expressed as follows : — ^ 1. A personal jironoun subject (also ce or on) follows tae verb and is joined to it by a hyphen : Parlez-vou8 franyaii* ? Est-colui? Do you speak French? la it he? a. The letter -t- is inserted after a 3rd sing, with final vowd before a pron. with initial vowel : Parla-t-elle ? Parle-t-on? Did she speak? Do they speak ? h. A final e of the 1st sing, takes acute acxeiit : Donn6-je ? (ddud ze). Do I give ? 2. A noun subject precedes the verb and is repeated after it by a pleonastic pronoun; so also, poss., demonstr. and indef. prons. : Get honimo parle-t-11 anglais ? Does that man speak English ? Cela est-ll vrai ? Ig that true ? Les miens ne sont-ils pas bons ? Are mine not good ? 3. Questions are also asked by interrogative umds (adj. pron. adv.) : Quel po6te a ^crit eela ? A quelle heure partira son ami ? Qui est la ? Qu'y a-t-il ? Lemuel des deux est parti ? Combicn coAte cela ? "^ -il?/ What poet wrote that ? At what o'clock will his friend go? Who ia there? What is the matter ? Which of the two has gone ? Combien cela coftte-t-il ?/ "**'^ "*"*"* ^«^« *^^^^ «««t '■ a. The word order of either of the last two examples is commonly permissible for noun snhjcrt under this rule. b. The word order of tlie last example is obligatory when the verb has a dht^ct object (not reflexive) or a prepositional complement, or when am- 316,317.] POSITION OF SUBJECT. Oil hi rol tient-11 sa courV Dequoile rol parle.-t-Il? ™- tiot as ^nE^Sf :'■'•"""'*'' -^l"--«"''y of direct quota- ^^ft-tLt^^fti.Sr:/:!^!)-.'""' '^ ""'*'"■"" ^''^ V-vola.„,, P..,„o.ety.^, (i:o„g,„vc-theU.„«l ,.„,.,.. tUe Von I •, if J, 3 1, tyrant ! iN<" fuf « ''^'"joms. ,yays gave hhu sonie. "*-e uue pour oela. If it were only for that. Mm i i ,Mi H I 'I • I KM n' ' m ' *Wi«w«( 1 ^ » i f' ir:: l« , , I f..4i. i: 178 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [317 3. Ver Ire. com 11 Du moiiis (levrait-l A peine le jour lut-I) arriv^. Such adverbs iu'e : ii peine, hardiy. aussi, hence. aussi bien, vwreover. au mo'ma, at lenj^t. du inoiiis, at least. liter certain adverbs IIo sUouU! at Icai^t wait. Hardly luul tho cluy arrived. toufcefois, althinir/h. en vain, in vain. raronient, rarely, probablenient, 2>r(il)ahly. etc. "peut-Otre, 2^rhap,i. encore, hesulei-. toujour^, however, tout au plus, at inoxt, tl'autant plus, the more. 'Pout-Gtre quo does not cause inversion : ' Peut-Otro qu'il le fera,' ' Perhapi be A'ill do so.' 4. Soinetiiiies in exclamatory sentences : Avons-nous eric ! II«>u we sliouted ! 5. AVlicn ti predicate adjective heads the phrase: Telle fut l.-i flu de?Cartluige. Such was the end of Cartilage. Quelque riche que soit cet hoinnio. However rich that iiiaa Is. *6. Very commonly in a relative clause (especially when a second relative clause qualities its subject) : II fera ce que pent faire un hoiiuno He will do what a man can m ho qui se respecte. respects himself. Dites-moi cc qu'a fait votre anil. Tell me what your friend did. Di.s-moi oh est ton anil. Tell me where your friend ie. NoTK.— The relative is unstressed (proclitic) and naturally stands next the verb whicli governs it. *7. Commonly after c'est que and in the second mem- ber of a coniparatice sentence : C'est eu vous qu"esp«^rent ton.-*. It is in you that all hope. J'en ai plus qtie n'on a mou anil. I have more of it tlian my friend has. *8. Commonly when an adverb, e.g., aiiisi, ici, la, etc. or an adverbial phrase heads the sentence : Ainsi va le inonde. So goes tlie worhl. Bientot viendra le prlntemps. Spring avIU soon come. A la tete de I'armtSie fut port6 At the head of tlie army Avas car- r^tendard sacr^. ried the sacred standavd. *9. Quite exceptionally, when the verb comes first : Viendra un autre. (Along) will come another. Etant doun6e8 les conditions. Granted tlie condition p. *fIolds good only for noun subject, excopt very rarely, e.;;., ainsi dH-il Note.— iVo inversion of noun suoject ueuaiiy occurs if the verb has a direct object or ». prepositional complemewt. oil oi8,3ia] THE PASSIVE VOICE. 17^ 318. indirvd, intp,rro(jntion h.is no special rules of word oiaer apart from those of the clause in which it occurs : Dis-moi ce qu'il a (lit. Tell me what he said. EXERCISE XLV. 1. Is that book yours or your brother's? 2. How much did these bfoks cost ? 3. I do not know b dw much they cost. 4. Does that mer- chant provide you cheap with what you need ? 5. What is the matter Willi that l)oy this morning? 6. I do not know what is the matter with hnn. 7. Do I say, or can I say, tlie lialf of what he has done ? 8. Whatever men may do, they cannot escape death. 9. Wliat books did your father buy, when he was in the city? 10. Your father told me what your brother lia.l done. 11. Your brother told me wliat he liad done. 12. Will you tell me where those men were, when you saw tlunii? 1.3. I cannot tell you where they were. 14. We have more books than that geideman has. 15. We have more books than you have. 10. \ irtuc is a beautiful tiling, lience we hne it. 17. My father IS here ; perhaps he will come to see you. 18. However good men may i'e, they are sometimes poor. 19. Such are my reasons for doing so 20. Y ou have told me that my friend has gone ; I did not know (impf ) it but perhaps you are right. 21. I wish you were here, were it only to •.courage us. 22. That man does not respect himself, lience he cannot l)c good. 23. Come and see us, said he, as soon as you can (fiit ) 24 If I do this, tliought he, I shall be punished, hence I shall not do it. ^.y. \Mieu was your little brother born? 20. I do not know where that man died. 27. To whom did your friend give his gold watch ? 28 I do not know ; perhaps he gave it to his sister. 29. I cannot do (de) such tilings ; am I not [an] Englishman ? 30. Do I not tell you that I shall be there, and that I shall see you ? The Passive Voice. ;U9. For Illation. The passive voice of a transitive yorl) IS formed from the auxiliary etre + ^7?ej*>^.sf par^ ictple, which ag?'ees' with the mbject of the verb in aen- der and number : -^ PRES. IxFix. r.tre louche) or lou(5(e)s, to ha praised. Pej:!.\ Infin. avoir ^t*:^ loue(e) or lou(5(e)s, to have been praised. I'HKs. I'AUT. .itant lou6(e) or loiuHe)s, hnn,/ praised. Pkrp. Pakt. ayant ^t6 loue(e) or loue(e)s, having been praised. Ml !Di •»•• f ji; |fc If'*,, 180 FRENCFl GRAMMAR. [319-321. f^l 2» • a j I*',* " •> : . I » » 1 « * / :' ,.H; *4> '' U» . «^ .. 3 { >W Pres. Indio. [/ am. (I am hrinij) jjraixed, < ^•. ] je suis^ tu es >loii(''(e). il (elle) est J nousaommcHi voua t'tes >lou(''(e)8. il6 (elles) sont J etc., etc. ^'(e). Past Indkf. Ini>ic. [/ have been (I was) praised, etc.^ j'ai «''t<^i tu ast''te !-l()Ui''( il (elle) a vU) nous avona 6i(i\ VOU8 avez <\U- |-lou(''(e)s. ila (ellea) ont ('•t^J throughout. Obn.: 1. The j)ast i)arti(;i])li' lf iiftor VOUH aqrrcsiHt/i the dense: ' Maflamc, vonri screz iii6pn,si'>c de tons,' ' iMa^lam, ^oii will be despised by all.' 820. The Afjrciit. The person hy whom the action is done is usunlly denoted by par, wlien a .specific intention or definite volition is implied, and ])y dc wlien the action is habitual, uxuql, or indefinite : Elle fut saiaie par le voleur. She was seized by the thief. lis sont ainies de tons. They are loved by everybody. La reine fut suivie do ses dames. The (^ueen was followed by her ladies. Le g(''neral fut auivi de pr^s par Tlie general was closely followed by I'ennemi. the enemy. 321. Remarks. 1. Traiisitires only reg-ularly ha.ve the passive voice, but the intransitives obeir, des'obeir, pardoiiiier may also be made passive : Vous Ctes pardonn68 tous. You are all pardoned. Elle est toujours ob^ie. She is always obeyed. 2. Tlie passive is much less used than in English, espc- ^>ially if the agent be not specified, or if tlie correspond iiii,'- French verb is intransitive, or if an indir. obj. be present. Substitutes are : a. A verb with the indefinite on : On m'a tromp6. I have been deceived. On se doute de moi. I am suspected. On a r^pondu :\ ma question. My question has been answered. On lui a, rendu I'argent. The money has been given back to hmi b. A refieocire construction : Ce livre so publi«» h Paris. This book Is pnblisibed in I'aris La guerre se fontlnuu. The war wa« eontimied. Voilii ce qui se dit. This is what is beinj? sjiid. m. 322.] THE REFLEXIVE VERB. ISl iM^.t./'"''-'''^''''' '^^^^''^'"''^^ ^'^^ P^'^it^^ force after f«ire Lo f erez- vous vendre ? Will you have it scr- T Jolavisbattro. I saw her be.,; *,a. Une faute ,Y 6 vlter. a mistake to be ..voided. } EXERCISE XLVI. He is obeyed. On lui oWit. II est ol)i''i. On me I'a pardonn^. I have been pardoned (for) it. 1. America was discovered by Christopher Columbus. 2. The first .co.nhel. 4 We have been deceived. 5. That gentleman has been "ustaken nx that affair. 6. Where is ti.at said ? 7. Oh, that L sa d everywhere. 8. AVho conrnxitted that crime v c, It was ^ r n ig^^^^^^^^ :;^-i2''i h ''" '.: "^' '^' ^--'"^^^^ ^ "• ^^"' ^« ^- been p:?;^ \ll\ d ;7% ? ''"' ^' ^^°"'' ^•'- ^ '^=^^^^ '^^^^ tow that you had ,tdone. 14. Is that not done everywhere? 15. Oh no that is never done amongst respectal,le people. 1(3. How unfort/mat'e he is ! He ^ a good fellow, but he is deceived and suspected everywhere L tloh r " • '' r '^^''^ '^ ^'^^"^ ''' Th^t man is not a sdd on' V " " '''^'' '^ '" P"P'^^- ^^' There is a house to Dcsold. 20. Ihere is an exercise to be done. 21. That -beei^-ir wi^ gn.n bread and milk 22. We were made read our lessl 2T al .a man to be feared. 24 They were told that you were not here. Iway? ''" "'"' ""' ^'"^ '"'^ '''''' "^^ ^"«"^^« bad gone The Reflexive Verb. ''^22. 1. A reflexive verb (or a verb used refloxivelv^ repi-esents the subject as acting on itself as reflexh^Iobl t/lT '^-^^ ^""i participle forms the compound tenses Ox all reflexive verbs, as follows :— Prks. Infik-. se flatter, to flatter mie's self. Pkhf. Infik- s'Mro flatt^(e) or flatt^(e)s, to have flattered oue^s sdf. i'KEs. l-ART. 86 nattant, flattering one's self. Pkhk Pakt. s'6tant flatt^(e) or flatt6(e)s. Aa.m., ^a/««rec^ on.'« self. mm 22: I I* M\ 1 Ii*ii4:i 18i FRENCH GllAMMAR, (.322-31:4. Indie jitivc. [I flatter myscf/t "/<• je :ne I'lfte. tu cc liattes. il (elle) so natto. nous nous hattoiiB. voiis vouH flattcz. ils (elles) He flaiteiit. PA{SfI?i(DEP. [/ ( have) /rt«crea mym(j\.tAc. je mo sals'! tu t'c'H iflatt<5(ej. il (elle) s'ost j nou8 nous soiiiiiiesi vous A'cnis OtoM |-flattt^(e)s. ils (olles) se sont J etc., etc. Imperjitive. [ Flatier thy^vlf, etc. ] [7)0 not flatter thyself, etc. ] flattous-nous. ne nous flattens pas. tiatte-toi. flattez-v<]us. ne tc flatte pas. ne vous ilattez pas. (qu'il se flatte. ) ((|u'ils se flatteut. ) (ciu'il ue se flatte pas. ) ((|u'ila ne se flat tent pas.) NoTRH.-l. So flatter, so flattant, etc., are the infinitive and participial forms found in dictionarieH, l)ut so must be replaced by mo, to, etc., according to the sense. 2. Except in the use of Ctro as anx., reflexive verbs have no pemliantics of conju- g'atto?! on account of beiii;.' reflexive. 328. Keflex ivo or Reciprocal. A reflexive verb often has rectprocal fbrc(\ especially in the plural. Am- biguity is generally avoided l)y some modifying expres- sion : JThey flatter themselves. \They flatter each other. Elles se flatteut. Elles so flattent I'une I'aiitre. They flatter one another. On so dupe iiuitnel lenient. They clieat each other. 324. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. In com- pound tenses, the past j^articiple of a reflexive agreefi in gender and numlier Avitli the reflexive object, unless tJmf object be indirect : Elle s'est ^crit''o. She cried out. Elle s'est clit k eile-meme. She said to herself. Us se sont «Scrlt. They wrote to eacn other. Ellea se sont achot6 des robes. They bought tliemseives ar ?aaeb. 324-327.] THE KEFLEXIVE VEHR 183 J; ^"f.^V^" ■:<"'<:'=''™ "'yoct, a difect object may w cerf^ the verb, and with this object the p.a rticiple X"^ . Lcs pl„me= ,„-ils SB «,„t ache,^,,. The pen, they bought themselves. .'{25. Omission of Reflexive Obloft i Tf,o„i o>uitted With tk. pa.t ^^raoipij::::^^^^,^^ le temp, &„„«. jhe time pa^t by. 2. So also, xisually the reflex, infin. after ftilre i-nnri ofttm after hUsser, s«„tir, ioir), but wili. frcrfuem^ex ceptions ; se with rec«>oc«; force is not amlfZ ■h le, ferai t,.,re ( =,«„ t„,™). j ,hril ,„„ke them keep „l„„t. I see them assemble. Let them a^jcHse each other. A cry made him jump up. This difference alone would lyive made Jansenius protest La bourse .-est .,.„v.e. The purse ha. been touna. Cela «, raeeate partout. That I, being t.w everywhere erfiiy'^lif.i.X:)?' ''^ ^" ''"^"^'^ «o»-../««. (gen- SWcot: ;^ht'' 'T""- ''^^P' ^^"'"■"' be(„f health). a3.eo,r , se hater ; se tromper, ete. Sit down , hasten , be mistaken. Of antS™t^f r ^«i-«i-^^- haa the value Se passer de ; se souvenir de, ete. Do without ; reeoUeet ' .0 .raV^pTestrspeSt! ^X'-' ''''' "'''" ' "^ Je lea vols asgeinblor. But : Laissez-les s'accuser. Un cri le fit so dresser. Cette seule difft^rence eilt fait so r^crier Jansenius. («: 184 FllENCH aiUMMAll. fi » ♦. f 1 ' It ;„ |,jp— Ill It !tt ■••■1. r [327 Prks. Indio, il (JO airay, etc.'] je in 'en vais. tu t'en Viw. il 8 'en va. noua nous en allons. VOU8 voua en alle/. ila s'en vont. Impve. [Go away, etc."] allons-nou3-en. va-t'en. allez-vous-en. (qu'il s'en o^Ule. ) ((^u'lls s'en Past Inoef. Indic. [/■ have gone (I uxiitj away, dc] je in'cn suisA tu t'en es J-alle(e). il (elle) s'en est J nous nous en Hoinmcs"j vous vous en (Hes >alk'"(o)s. ils (elles) s'en sont J Impve. (neg.). [Do not (JO away, etc,'\ ne nous en allons pas. ne t'en va pas. ne vous en alle/. ])a8. aillent. ) (qu'il ne s'en aillo pas.) (qu'ila ne s'en aillenc pas. ) Est-ce que jo ni'en vais ? Vous en alle/.-voua ? S'en sont-ellea all6es ? lis ne s'en sont pas all^s. Ne noua en aonnnes-nous 16(e)8 ? EXERCISE XLVII. * Elle s'est rappel^' ce que j'ai dit. ^ ^,, , i i . t -, .„„ , , ^^ , ., . ,. I bhe remembered what I said JliUe s eat souvenue de ce que j ai dit. J Je nie le rappelle, \ Je m'en souviens. / Je me le rappelle. Je me souviens de lui lis se souviennent de moi pas al J I remember it. I remember him. Je m'eii sera. II s'en passe. Elle s'est fait mal .'i la main. Elle s'est cass6 le bras. Elle s'est tue. They remember me. I use it (I make use of it). He does without it. Sl;e (has) hurt her hand. She has broken her arm. She became silent. *In Ke rairpeler, sc is indirect, in se souvenir, se is direct. 1. They have not yet gone away ; they will remain here till to-mor- row. 2. When you are in front of Mr. Jackson's, be good enougli to stop. 3. How have you been during these years? 4. I have been very well. 5. How has your mother been, since she ha^s been living in Tor- onto ? 6. How unfortunate I am, she exclaimed, my friends remember me no longer. 7. When the door opens, we can go in. 8. Where is my book ? I cannot do without it. 9. Why do you not make use of that pen? 10. It is no^ a good pen; I cannot use it. 11. There are 327.] TilE UEFLEXIVE VERB. 186 Horno ladies in the parlour ; very well, have them sit down, uiul uhU t hem t.. \uuL a hUlit. 12. Why are you crying, my littU, girl ? l.'i. I have fallen ami hurt myself. U. Where did you hurt youraelf ? If). I hurt my hand. 1({. Why did tlioso ladies not sit down ? 1 7. They would not sit down, because they could not stay. 18. If you wish t<. use this ink and paper, I shall give yim4>, it had thwidered. etc., etc., like 3 sing, of cloimor. N0TK.-Aimrt from being limited tc the 3rd sins:., their conjufjation does not differ from that of ordinary verbs. Some are regular, others irregular. 329, 330.] IMPERSONAL VEIins. 187 Nuoh vorbs are : I'l. inoir. rain. t,r.M..- » •» -. Inlre -^'m.'iko,' is also much used impersonnllv to 'l«s('nl.o yrm///,^,., temperature, etc. : 1 ^•^'^^>"««"> to .MUn.psfa.t-ilV What kind of weather I« it V « - ,n d fora ohscur ce soir ! w... ,t l.o dark Uus eveuh g ' II f.ilsalt (toiiibalt) do hi pluie. 11 f'aiHiilt du vent aussi. ft was raining It was windy too. 'v a III \T'' ^ "'■" • ^^''''^ ''- T'-- '- '-»• I« there? -t-iir; ''."^'f.r"'- Thereisnot. There has not been. Yauratiiv j^f ^■^■'^ l^^ -? Has there been? Han there not been? ama t-d ? II pent y avou-. Will there be ? There may be. sense : ''"* ^^^'''^' ''^'''^ '' sometimes used for il y a in tl.is II e-st des hommes qui le eroient. There are men who think so ,,; /• " -y " = ' ^^^«'*« i«/ ' there are,' ('there ' un.^tre^^P(1\ U 'ntlocail ^ndefame and general, the other\v^>.c///c vJlutr/""'""'/' 'f " ^'^^^ ^^^ '>^"« -' ^h« table. oda les plun.es, sur la table ! There are the i.ens, on the table, lis sont arriv^,s II v a trois iours. Thev eame three days ago. II Con; rt vait trois jours que jV^tais 1, ■>ien y a-t-il a la ville ? II y a dix milles d'ici k la vill i. I had been there three days. How far is it to tlie It is ten miies from 1 Cftyl i^ 'ere to the iiity 'Y'> 18',i FRENCH (illAMMAR. i Mr**" 1 V*. 1 :« I ll A* I ; [381, n3i 3.'J1. Falloir Mu; necessary,' expresses the various meaiiiiig-s of 'jiiust,' ' -)e obliged to,' ' aave Lo,' 'need,' ;is follows : 1. * Must ' + infinit'we = faI!oir + qinS and suhjioffivc : II fnut que jo parte. I must go. II faudra que vous restic;/. You will have to (be obliged to) stay. 2. Or the suhjccf of 'must,' etc., if a pcr-^oiial pronouu, becomes indirect object oi" falloir + iiif .liiive : II mo faii'lrait icster. I should he obliged to rcniaiu. II leui- fant fairo cohi. They uuist do that. II iui a fallu ])arlcr. lie was forced (obliged) lo sjicik. o. Tlie in/iiutii'c construction without indirect object is used in generai or indejinite statement ; II faut faire sou dev-^oir. One must do one's duty. II ne faut pas voler. We must not steal. 4. YixWoiv + imUrect object uml n substantive signifies lack, need: II faut inie ardoise h Jean. John needs a elate. II leur faudra cent irancs. 5. Sen falloir - ' lack ' : II s'en faut de beaucoup que I'un They will need .i hundred francs. The one is not nearly so good as the other. vaille I'autre. 382. Other Iiiipersonals. 1. Besides faire and avoir, already noted, many other verbs take a special meaniiii;' as impersonais : De quoi s"agit-il? II est souvent arrivii (jue, etc. II vaudra mienx ne rien dire. 11 y va de ses jours. II se pent (jue je me trompe. What is the matter ? It has often happened that, etc. It will be bettei' to say nothing. His life is at sti>ke. It may be that T am mistaken. OI)s. : (>)injiare the literal nieauiii^s^ : Aj»ir, act, jirriv'ir, arrive, valoir. '" wortii, aller, //'), pouvoir, Ix' able. 2. IMany verbs may stand in the ord sing, witli imper- sonal il rejiresentii^g a logical subject (sing, or phir.) fol- lowing the verb : II viendra nn meilleur temps. There will come a happier time. II en reste trois livres. There remain three pounds of it- II est arriv6 des messagers. Messengers iiave arrived. 333.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 189 3lili, Oiiii^Kion of /'/ phrases, such as : Rosto ;\ sav'jir. Ximport J. Mieux vaut tard que jamais. LESSON XI.IX. II is understood in certain It roiimlns to be seen. No matter (it inattern not). Better late than never. It is (lark. It is getting late. It is (lay (daylight). The sun is shining. It is foggy. It is comfortable (pleasant). It is snowing. It is mild. II fait obscur. \ II fait noir. J 11 se fait tard. II fait jour. II fait du soleil, II fail du brouillard. II fait bon. II tombe de la neige. II fait doux, 1. If the weathfir is fine, we shall go for a row this afternoon. 2. I*-. was raining this morning, but now the sun is phining. 3. It is not comfortable here ; let us go out for a walk. 4. It is getting late ; let us go home, 5. It was raining last evening, then it froze, and now it i.s slippery, 6. It is not comfortable in those counlries where it is very (/aire hmucovp dc.) foggy. 7. It is too windy ; we shall not go for a row. S. It is getting late ; the children will have to go to bed. £, What time is it? 10. I do not know, but it is already daylight. 11. Is it? Well then, we shall have to get up immediately. 1*2. It had been snow- ing frr two days, and we couldn't go for a drive, 13. It has been rain- ing since yesterday morning, and it will be better to remain here. U. My sister is very ill ; her life is at stake. 15. We cannot go away ; it is raining. 16. No matter ; I do not fear tlie rain. 17. How did you enjoy yourself yesterday ? 1 8. We did not enjoy ourselves at all ; it was raining all day, 10, If it is very dark this evening, we sliall not go to see our friends. 20. Yes, it will be better to stay at lionie ; we ciui easily amuse ourselves. 21. How long have you been in this city? -2. I came here three years ago. 23. What sort of weather will it be to-'no!Tow ? 24. I do not know ; I am not a good judge of such things. 25. It has ])een raining for two days ; we are tired of being here. 26. lu v/inter it is generally mild in Italy, but it is often cold in Canada. 27. Those two men are disputing ; what is the matter ? 28, It is about f s- agir d( ) «.he price of a liorse wliieli one sold to the other. 29. It was 'fery warm yesterday, but it rained in the night, and now rt is very w \ Fm H <■<.». i*ii Vvl'i 190 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [333-336. i'Ti IV.', , . comfortable. 30. I think (that) it will rain, but it may be that I am mistaken. 31. We need another house ; this one is too sntall. 32. Their number is far from being complete. 33. Letters have come which tell us that there has been a great storm in the United States. 34. How far is it from Toronto to Montreal ? 35. By the railroad it is three hundred and thirty-three miles. The Indicative Mood. 334. Ti\c indicative is the mood of assertion (direct or indirect) and of iyiterrogation (direct or indirect). It stands both in principal and in subordinate clauses (aftirmative or neg-ative) : Dieu cr6a le monde. God created the world. Moise dit que Dieu cr6u le monde. Moses says that God created the world. Ok allez-vous ? ' Where aroi you going ? Ditefc:-moi oil vous allez. Tell me where you are going. Je le ferals, si je ponvals. I should do so, if I could. Notes.— 1. It should be noted especially that the indie, is regularly the mood of in direct disr.oi,rse and of ' if elause,. 2. When the verb of a subordinate clause is sub- junctive, the mood is determined by the context and not simply by the fact that the clause is subordinate. Tenses of the Indicative. 335. Periphrastic Forms. Such forms, so common in English, are not used in French : Je parle. I gpeak (am speaking, do speak), n a ^cj-lt. He has written (has been writing), n dlsalt. He was saying (used to say, etc.). 336. Elliptical Forms. Ellipsis of part of a verb form is common in English ; in French the form is either fully given or entirely avoided : J'irai.-Mol, je n'lral pas. I shall go. -I shall not (go). II a promis de venir, mais il n'est He promised to come, but he did pas Venn. „ot (come). II est venu. -Vraiment ! He has come. -Has he ! (Indeed !). Vous viendrez, n'est-ce pas ? You will come, will you not ? 11 ^tait Horti, n'«>st=ce pa« ? He had gone out, luul he not ? 337,388.] TENSES of the indicative. im 387. Present. The present tense is used :— 1. To denote wluit is happening (including the habitual ««n wult- depuis trois jours. J *"S^) ^^^ three days. Obs. : This idiom is always expressed in English by ' have,' ' have been,' ate. 3. Instead of a past tense in animated narrative : La nuitapproche,li„stant arrive, Night draws on, the moment C^sar se pr6sente, etc. comes, Cffisar appears, etc. a. This use is much commoner than in English, especially side by sida with past tenses. h. C'est . . . que + a past teme= ' was . . . that ' : C'est 1^ que je I'ai vu. It was there that I saw him. 4. Instead of a future in familiar style : Nous partons demain matin. We go to-morrow morning. 5. As a virtual future after si = ' if ' : Je serai content, si vous venez. I shall be glad, if you (will) come. 338. Imperfect. The action (or state) denoted by the imperfect is in g-eneral viewed as being- in progress (i e 'is CO itempora7ieous, customary, cotitinued, etc.). It is used':— 1. To denote what was happening, when something else Happened or was happening : II 6talt rruit, quand je sortis. It was night, when I went out. 11 parlalt, pendant que je chantais. He was talking, while I sang. ^. To denote what used to happen : II se levalt de bon matin. He used to rise early. ^Jlt parlais souvent de cela. I often spoke (used to spe»k, ■would H^ionjc) of that *.^' itomain? brWaient leurs morts. l1io Ro.naus were accuston.ed to burn their dead. U 1 FRENCH GRAMMAR. !!|::r:a V'- i [338, 339. a. To denote what continued to Uajjpeu : Son ptre 6tuit negociant et do- His father was a merchant and inourait dans cette rue. lived in this street. 4. To denote what had happened and atlll continued after il y a. . . quo, voici (voil/i) . . . quo, dopiiis, dciJiiis quand ?, depiiis . . . quo (cf. §.337, 2) : Je lo diRnis depuis longtemps. I had long been suyiiij;; bo. Voil.'i un an que jc le dlsals, I luul been Kay In;? so for a y( ar. 5. In indirect discourse, after a past tense, instead of tlio present : Je croyais qu'il revenalt. I thought he was eoniin^ baek. Je demandai ou il 6tait. I asked where he was. But : " Oh cst-il ? ", deniandai-je. '• Where is he ?", I asked. 6. Eegularly.in an ' if clause when the ' result ' clause is conditional : S'il venalt, je serais content. If he came, I sliould be glad. 7. Occasionally, instead of the jjlupf. and the condl. ant. hi conditional sentences : Si je ne I'arrC'tals pas (=r avals Hjul I not stopped him he would pas arrets), il touibait (=-so- have fallen from the train. rait toinb6) du wagon. 8. Sometimes instead of the past def. (§340) : La lecture finie, le pfere Alph^e so The reading concluded, father Al- drcssait, niarehait h grands pheus rose, Avalked about with pas, voih\ 8'6criait-il, etc. great strides, there cried he, etc. a. Ihis use renders the narrative especially graphic and vivid. 339. Past Indeflnito. The past indefinite is used :— 1. To denote what has happened or has been happeninq ( = English tense with 'have,' reference to the present being implied) : J'ai flnl mon ouvrage. I have finished my work. L'avez-vous vu dernierement ? Have you seen him lately ? Je I'ai souvent rencontr6. I have often met him. J'ai chants toute la inatin(5e. I have been singinji? all moriiin^;. 2. To denote what happened ( = English past tense, uo reference to the present being implied) : 339-341.] TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 193 lis sont arrives ce soir. They arrived this evening. Jo I'al vu 11 y a clix ans. I saw him ten years ago. De quol ost-ll mort ? What did he dlo of ? a. This is the ordinary past tense of conversation (Including narra- tive in conversation), rortrspniideiice, etc. It is also a very common past tense of newspaper narrative style, interchangeably with the past dcf. (§341, 3). h. A historical statement of de.taclicdfact, of which the time is ^mspe- rifie.d, is very commonly in the past indef. : Morse a In ventc le tt'degraphe. The telegraph was invented by Morse, Troie a etc detruite par Ics (irecs. Troy was destroyed by the Greeks. 8. Occasionally instead of Si future anterior^ : Attendez, j al bientotflni. Wait, I shall bavo finished soon. 34:0. Past Doflnito. The past definite is used in tlie literary narrative style to denote a pad event or a succea- ,von of such past events as mark the progress of the nar- rative ; it ansAvers the question ' what ' liappened ?', or ' what happened next ?' : Dicu ei'6a le nionde. God created the world. T,a guerre dwra sept ans. The war lasted seven years. On for^a le palais, les sc616rats They liroke into the palace, the uoserent pas r(!'sistev longtemps et villains did not dare to resist long, Jie songftrent qu'a fuir. Astarbe and only tlioii^sfht of fleeing. As- vonlut se sauver daMS la foule, tarbe tried to escape in the crowd, niais un soldat la reconnut ; elle but a soldier recognized her ; she flit prise. was captured. a. Some verbs have a special force in the past def. : Avoir; j'eus. To have ; I received. Savoir ; je sus. To know; I fonnd out (learned). Connaitre ; je conniis. To know ; I realized. 341. Exiiiiiplos of Narrative. Tlie following- ex- nnii)les ilUistrate the principal uses of the past def., impf., past hidof., and historical iwesent, in narration : 1. Les ia cs, qui cependant entouraieiit cette maison tout embras^e, voyaient avec line admiration mt'l(^e d'epouvante que les Su^dois n'en sortaiont point ; mais leur ^tonn^ment fut encore plus grand lorsqu'ils virent ouvrir les portes, et le roi et les siens fondre sur eux en di-sesp^rds. Charles et ses principanx officiers i^taiont arm^s dY,p(''es et de pistolets : mm im I i ' i i I'll {••♦"'''^ M laiiii' f^::; n 194 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [341-343. chacun fclra deux coups .'i la fois h I'instant que la porte s'ouvrlt • et dans le niome cliu d'd-il, jetant leurs pistolets et s'armaut de leurs ep^rs lis flrent reculer les Turcs plus de cinquante pas; mais le moment d apr6s cette petite troupe fut entour^e : le roi, qui 6tait en bottcs selon sa coutume, s'ombarrassa dans ses (iperons, et toinba; vingt et un janissaires se jottent aussitOt sur lui : il jette en I'air son 6pie pour sV^pargner la douleur de la rendre ; les Turcs reininfjnent au quartier du baclia.— Fo^^iaire. 2. Stanislas se lUroha un jour k dix heures du soir de rarm6e su^doise qu'il conniumclalt en Pom6ranie, et partlt avec le baron Sparre, qui a 6U depuis ambassadeur en Angleterre et en France, et avec un autre colonel : il prcnd le nom d'un Frant-ais, nomm6 Haran, alors major au service de Su6de, et qui est mort depuis commandant de Dantzick— Voltaire. 3. LoxDRES, 5 aoAt.— Hier soir, h onze heures et demie, un incendie a 6clat6 dans I'atelier de composition de la National Press Agency. Plusieurs pompes h vapeur arriv^reut imm^diatement sur le lieu du smistre, et I'incendie s'6tendit avec une telle rapidity, que toute la maison a 6t6 completement d^truite. II n'y a pas eu d'accidents de personnes,— i/e 3Iatin. 342. Pluperfect and Past Anterior. 1. Both denote what had happened, like the Eng. plupf. : Lorsque je I'avals (eus) fini. When I had finished it. 2. The plupf. is of much commoner occurrence than the past ant., and can alone be used after si = 'if,' or when custom, continuance, etc., is implied (cf. §338) : Si je I'avais vu, je I'aurais dit. Hml I soon it, I should have said so. J avals toujours flnl avant midi. I always liaxl flnished before noon. ^- .^}^' P^^'i^^^f^^^or denotes what had happened im- mediately before another event. It is rarely used except, after conjunctions of time, such as lorsque, quand, apres que, aussitot que, ne . . . pas plus t6t . . . que, etc. : Aprfes qu'il out din6, il partit. After he had dined, he set out. 343. Future. The future is used :— 1. To denote what will happen : lis viendront demain. They avIU como to-morrow. Je les verral bientot. I ,,,,..,„ ^,,^ tbem soon. Je ne sais pas s'il viendra. I know not whether he will come. 341-343, I 343-345.] tenses of the indicative. I95 II' ne rostera ])a.s. tt,. *.. ^ T, ^ ^ He win not stnv. 11 lie vont pas rester • Ti„ t.. .. Co chasseur resto souvent au bois That hunter win .ff pendant des mois entiers. whnln „ .'^^''" '•^•""*" LICI8. v^ljfjlj, months 111 the woods. /'. Observe the following eonnnonly occurring forms • Ne voule^-vous pa. renter ? will you not «tuy v Jo ne re«tcral pas. I «hall not «tay. ,^^^2. Kegularly in a subordinate clause of in^liedfutur. I'iiyoz-le, quaiul il vlendra. ' Pav him m,t.„ i T.',,;* .„ y ^i"i> when he coinus I'aites comnie voiis voiulrcz. Do is vn , «i ra„t,i„ejevlvr..l. As long as I ,iv„. H. To denote probahilit,,, suppoxitmn, etc. : II sera malade. , 1 suppose (no doubt) ho is ill t Sometimes with imperative force : Tu lie, tueras point. n V ^ J hou Shalt not kill VoiLs voudrez m'l^couter « . ,_, . ^ sourer. Bo good enousrh to hear me. «. ihis use IS coniinon in official style (edicts, etc.). I^T. I"*;"''' Anterior. TXmfittiwe anterior is used — I. To denote wha,t .6"«7/ /^y,,,, //«^,^,,;^,,/ .. ^'""^ ' 11 aura bientot fini. tt lie will soon have done milllt^i^^ >'»% («f- §343, 2) and ^™fta. *.a..clvo>.s«,..o. ™,..., i, ,„,. ,^,„„ y„^ ^^^^ ^_^_^^^ ^^^___^_ ^ T^ shall ao out. 'f me serai tromp6. T *i ^ "iwst have made a mistake. ■v":r:;::r;::::;;':r" ''™'' "■"""• ^-■■" '» -~'y HtvMter soralt line faiblesse. t„ k„„,^ . 10 hesitate would be weakness. :i' 11 196 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [346, 346. r^*ml ''' Mi k^aw « M [J ^^^mnlil '«!...•■=• ' ' ^^^^^H^^HIR l^^;,,.^ . . ^HH 4 HH it.. 1 , ^^H ||i"f "'*' 1 ! 6. Distinguish Eng. * should' of e first volley the Duke of Holstein. who coJand.d the Sw;di;i cavalry recnved a cannon-shot in the back. The king asked if he was cad: hen.«.,^o/.Z(use:o.)that he was r,«e ou/; : ife ,„arf.. no "pTy (.some tears/ / from his ey.s ; he (.e) hid hi. (I.) face [for] a momen with Ins r A.; hands ; then he ru.h.d into the midst of the enemy at the head of his guards. ^ The king of Poland did all that one Hhonld expect from a prince who ^^asM,ht^r^ for his crown; he himself hrorujht hack his troops three t. mes to the charge ; but he fought with his Saxons only ; the Poles who/or.n.rf his right wing, Jl.d at the beginning of the battle. Charlel «-o. a eomplete victory. He did not stay on the field of battle, but /::i::s^h;r "'^^^^^'^"^^"^"^"^^ ^^-^ ^^ pow. who'^. The Subjunctive Mood. 348. The subjunctive denotes, in general what is tinymt, etc and usually stands in a subordinate c la ise. .i49. Subjunctive in Noun Clause. The subiunc- ive IS used in a clause introduced by que and servin^as logical subject or as object of a verb :--- ^ 1. After expressions of desirifig (including willing wishing, preferring) and avoiding : ^ ^' Je desire ( veux) qu'il parte. I desire (wish) him to go. Je souhalte qu'il alt du succfes. I wish that he may have success. He prefers that you should stay. Avoid his seeing you. II l)r6f6re que vous restlez. Evltez qu'il ne vous vole. Such are : aimer, like. ^yiter, avoid. aimer mieux, prefer. prdf^rer, prefer. avoir envie. be desirous. prendre grarde, takecare(lest). aisirer, desire, wish. souhaiter, ivish. generlir"**'^ ^^"^^ '^'^''^^' "^ '"^ ^^'^ '"^^"- '^^"'^ ' ''^ *^'*'' *'^»*«^' Prends garde que cela ne se fasse. Take care lest that happen. N il me tarda, I long. vouloir, will, wish. etc. I I i J ■ it- !•■ «»• 1 1 f 3 ' II 1 1|B! H 'V't'f'n ( ■ «•*«£ ' « 1; t * ! ■ ' 4 -^ •. .1' .. ', ■ : "' : i • ';.; *■■' :. 200 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [349. 2. After exprcHsiona of commandhuj (including reciucst- ing, exhorting''), forhidil'mij, cothsenting: Vous onloiinox (juo j'iilUo. Je doiniindo <|Uo vidnafMmZ. veiller, take care etc. deinander, ank. eiiiix'cher, hinder. exliorter, exhort, exiger, exact. laiHser, allow. s'ojiposer, oppoxe. ordonner, wder. 8oalso,tie:' II faudra qu'il parto domain. Such are : I approve of his coming back. Tie deserves to lie feared. iu i3 better for you to stay. H ' will have to go to-morrow. ai)prouver, ajwove. Ctre indigne, he ^mworthij. trouver niauvais, disapprove. avoir intdret, be interested, juger h i>ropos, thinkfit. troiixcr juste, think just. blanier, blame. louer, praine. trouver iujuste, thiiik unjust dt^approuver, disapjmwe. iiiuriter, deserve. valoir, be worthy. etre d'avis, be of opinion. tciiir (h ce que), insist. etc. 6tre digne, be worthy. trouver bon, approve. So also, a large nuinber of impersonah of like force ; Uf).] THE SURMTNCTIVE MOOD. 201 I facile , foinj, , . II +ten»i)8, time. himpurtant, im/mrtant. ii #,.„, ;, .. f JllHtc, /(fvif. + niit,iiitl, naturni, + iitk!es8fiirc, mcrniiarj/. +>'>' >*ouha\Un; to he im'^hed. +(to\il)Hitui>\i!,(ijuitc)idwj>le. il pmit HI! fiiirt', it may Im>. •1 HUflH, it KIIJ/U-CM. il Vivijfciiiioiix, (7 inf,rttfr. otc, tuid thuir opposiu,**, II oonvient, it in/lttiry/. «'c'»*ta8«..z, it iHemmijh. il oNt, i> is. . . . fi'i proiHw, ^w-opcr. f^bien, we//. -l-llOIl, //()(«/. hoiivciKihle, jitliinf. I-08Hontifl, eHHfntinl. +iKli;Hiii.r, to /jr desired Ktfs-voim content (111 "iUolt uiv A,.«, 'i i,' •'« roffrotto .iu'il «„ t p " f ^"" f "^ '"' '^ ^'^'"^ ' " .'• "onto .lurvclL , c H J" " "'^"'^ ""^' y*'" ''•--' '-»• Such are : ^'^ ^"^ "'"'^ ^"" """-'f'- +(5toniianf , nHtmiaiinj. + f:icli('ux, (timni/ini;. +^^^-nn-a\,,rfi antoninhed. Ctro, /w . . . +.'ifHi«'L\ !/fieved.' +^nt'n aise, v,'n/ f/lad. +chaniuS ;vv/, ff»yr?/. +heuroux, hnppi/. ,„, . - +in(Iif,nitS ^'I'iUnnnnt. etc T . ■'"*'••« I>"s stands in both • • « crains qu'il no vienne. r J^ ' Joo..al„scju'ilnoviennep„« I ^^^r ho w^ come. . Je no cains pas ,„'il vienne j ^L tV V"' '''"" **"** l^'**"!" "no vienne? Bo von not fo.v. 1 -i, •^1 .)« t'i-Hl«:nal8 ou'il vr.if .. / " "f ^'■•^' 'i« ^vill come ? iuiniirer, in nutonisfied. li'Mi^vr, (/rievf-. '^\ (jue cehisoit vrai. I deny tluit that is true. II e«t rai-e que vous iiy«z tort. You are rarely in the wrong. Such are : . contesler, disjinfe. deHcsperer, ik'npdir. disconvenir, flrny. (Ussiuuilur, iiot cnvfesi^. se (lissinmk'r, be hidden. dontor, doubt. il est, it i.s ... } +douteux, doubff^il. + ia,n\, false. + inii)OSBil)le, imjwssible. + l)ossil)Ie, posdble. +vai'e, rare. de (a) (jnoi burt-il ?, uj' ivhat use i.s it. } il Mc sert de (i\) rien, it is oj no tise. il s'e)i faut, tliereis wanting, il se i)eut, it may be. ii,''norer, nut kiioiv. il iie se i)eut pas, it cannot be. nier, den;/. il seiul)le, it secmn. etc. a. II seiiiMc regularly has the ,s?%". , since it indicates slujht prohahll ■ tiiy asdistinguislied from il p:irait = ' it appears,' 'is evident,' and il me semblO" ' it appears to me ' (personal conviction) : II scinldo que vous me cruignio/. It seems that you fear me. II mc seinble (il puruit) (pie vous It seems to me (it appears) that me criviffiicz. you fear me. h. Verbs of douht and dtnial used VKjatlmly or inttrroijativdy regu- larly retpiiro no in the subj. clause : Je lie nio pus que je ne le sois. I do not deny that I am such. c. Ignorer + ne(jaiim—' know well,' and hence takes indlc. : Je n'is'iioro pas qu'il a menti. I know well he has lied. NoTK.— Peut-Ctre quo, perhaps, and sans doiitc que, doubtless, require thf^ indie. G. After expressions of perceimng, thinking, hnou'inrj, declaring, remlting, Lat 07ily when uncertainty or douht IS implied ])y negation, interrogation, or condition ; other- wise tlic indie. : Vorra-t-on que j'aie pleur^? Je no erois jias ({ue ce soit hii. IG8j)6i'ez-vons qu'il rcussisso ? Je no siiis pus sur quil vienno. Si je pr^tendais qu'il out tort. But: Je erois ({Ue c'est lui. J'esp^i'o qu'il r^ussik'u. Will they see that I have wept 'i I do not tlunk that that is he. Do you hope he will succeed ? I am not sure Ik; will come. If i claimed that Ive was wrong. I think it is he. 1 hope he will succeed. 349,350.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 203 Such are : affiriner, affirm. s'apercevoir, perceive. aiiprendre, learn, hear. asHurer, assure.' s'attendre, expect. avertir, ivartK avouer, declare. conclure, conclude. oonnaitre, rrcoiji.ae. croire, believe, think. declarer, declare. deviner, r/vcss. dire, say, tell. se douter, suspect. Ocr.re, imte. entendre dire, hear said. espt^rer, hope. V^iyoiv, foresee. Otre certain, be certain. pron.ettre. promise. etre v^vm^U, be persuaded, se vv^^^X,;, recollect. arm a\\in /.^ .n. etre sftr, be sure. se rijrurer, imagine. se flatter, jlatter one's self. iina<,nner, imagins. s'iina),'iiier, imagine. jufa'er, judge, think. jurer, declare, ouhlier, forget. penser, think. persua" Adjectival Cla.isc. Tlie sub- il *2 -t 204 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [350. i' 'MM I ^ lint n't** ;?:;^i»; ), .i t i*MU . ;■■■««» IS. •ft- 1. When par J >ose or unattahied result is expressed : Montrez-iiioi un chcinin (^ui con- Show ine a way which leads to duiso h la science. knowledge. a. The indie, however, is used to express what is regarded as/ar;/! or certain ^'etrnlt : Montrez-moi le cheniiu qui con- Show me the road which leads t(j duit k la viile. the town. J'irai oii je soral libie. I shall go where I shall be free. 2. When the ])rincipal clause contains general negation, interrogation implying negative anm-er^'ov conditi/tn (all of wliicii imply non-existence of tlie antecedent) : II n'a pas de raisou (|ui vaille. He has no reason worth anytJiin<'. As-tu un seul ami (jui soit fid(?le ? Have you one friend who is true ? SI j'al \u\ ami qui soit fidele c'est If I have one friend who is true, it lui. ' is he. a. Oeneral negation is sometimes merely implied : II y a pen de gens qui le sachcnt. Tliere are few people who know it. h. When tlie negation is 7iot (/cneral or when the interrog. does not. imply nc'i/ntiir, aiiKircr, tlie iiullc. stands : Ce n'est pas vous (i[UO je craf ns. It is not you that I fear. NVst-co point un songe que je vols ! Is it not a dream that I see ! c. In a nei/atire relat. clause no (jiot ' ne . . . pas ' ) is used when the principal clause is imjatwe or implies negation : Est-il un seul qui no tremble ? Is there one who does not tremble ? 3. After an expression of opinion containing* a superht- timov^vwl, unique, premier, dernier (rll witli super- lative force) : C'est le iiu'illour ami que j'aie. He is the best friend that I have. C'est le si'nl ami que j'aio. He is the only friend I have. a. Wluvt is stated nnrcservedly as fact requires the indie. : CJ'est la sonic chose (lu'il a dite. It is the only thing he said. 4. With concessive force in compound relat. and indefin- ite clauses ( = 'whoever,' 'whatever,' etc.) : (>>uoi que vous fassiez. Whatever you do. Qui qu'on y puisso elire. Whomsoever may be elected to it (Jui que tu sols, parle. Whoever you are, speak ? (Juelles que tioient vos raisou*. Whatever be your reasons. 351.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MoOi). 205 3.>1. Subjimetive in Adverbial Clause. The sub- junctive IS used in clauses of adverbial force, as follows :- Jinlf^ ^;oi'Junctioiis of time before whicJi or up to ichich (avant que, en attendant que, Jusqu'i\ ce que) : l)is-le-lui, avant qu'il purto. Tell it to hi,n, before :,e goes A..seyez-vous, on attendant qu'il Sit down until he comes back. revlonne. J'attendis Ju8qu'.\ ce qu'il reviut. I waited till he returned. a Jusqu'/, ce que may have the indie, when referring to completed pad event : at- II resta Jusqu'jY ce quo j'y 6tals. Ho waited till I was there. 2. After conjunctions of pur^oi^e or remit (afln que pour que, de crainte que, de peur que) : J'c-cris ceci afln quo (pour que) I write this in order that you may vous sachioz la v6rit4 know the truth. Je le tins do cralnto qu'il ne ton,- I held him for fear he would fall bat. «. So also, de sorto quo. en sorte que, do telle sorto que, do facon que, de numi^ro que. tel . . . quo, tollement . . . quo, wheix denot- ing ;jMr;jose (but not result) : Agis de sorte que tu r6u..isse.s. Act in such a way as to succeed. tiru : J agis de sorte quo j'ai r6ussi. I acted so that I succeeded. 3 After conjunctions of a^ncimon (en eas que, au cas que, c^ moins que . . . ne, pourvu que, suppose que en siipposant que) : i ** '•^' q»e, Jo viendrai au cas que je sols I shall come in case I am free to- hbre dema.n, ou .Ymolnsque morrow, or imless I am de- je ne sols retenu. tained. a. After si = ' if,' the jilxipf. stihj. stands exceptionally (§355, b). h. A (la) condition quo takes indie, or mhj. : Jcluidonnel'argent i. (,a) con- I give him the money on condition •litlon qu il partira (or parte). that lie will go. so^'.'.'iV"'*-"''! **" *"'" **"' ''" *''*'* **" "«"^"^' ha^'^ <^'>'^dl. : ' Au cas ou c->la scivut vrai, ' I,i case that slu.ul.l lie true.' 1 After conjunctionH of concession (quoique, bien que. encore que, nonobstant que, soit que . . . soit que or li ^^^H ■ • a, Tm •"<• 9 ™ :^^ • M v> ^^B i^H »*. V J^^^^H ll li(.^^^H I^H ifl ~3^B fl J. '* ^'^^B' ^B t |^bI[ ^1 -flM! i^^H 206 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [351,352. I * t . '■ 4 » I ' . ■»: "■ 1 OH que, pour (si) poii quo, si tant est que, uial^ru que) : — Blon (lu'il soit nialade, il ira. Althougli he is ill, he will go. Pour pen «iu'il fut malade, il se If lie were ever so little ill, ho croyait niouraut. thought himself dying. a. The use of a suhj. after adverbial 4iucl<£uu (tout, si, etc.) + quo = ' however ' depends on the same principle : Quolcinc^ gi-and que vous soyez. However great you may be. SI bravo qu'il so croic. However brave bethinks liimself. h. Qniintl (iiiGine) concessively sometimes takes j>h(.pf. siihj. for comU. ant. (cf. g.'M'), 6) : Quund (in6inc) il ureut dlt cela. Even if he had told me that. 5. After conjunctioiis of Jiegative force (noii que, noii pas que, loin que, sans que) : II partit suns quo je le susso. He went away without my knowing it. f). After que replacing any conjunctioJi requiring the suhj., and also after que replacing si = ' if ' : Venez quo ( =afln quo, pour que) Come, tliat I may see you. je vous volo. Si je vais et quo je le voie. If I go, and if I see him. .'552. Subjunctive in Principal Clause. The sub- junctive is sometimes used in principal clauses, as fol- lows : — 1. p]itlier Avith or without que to denote what is de- sired, etc. : Ainsi soit-il ! Vive le roi ! Plut k Dieu qu'il en fut ainsi ! Qu'il piirto tout de suite. Je iiiouro, si je mens ! Le croio (pii voudra ! So be it ! (Long) live the king ! Would to God it were so ! Let him go at once. May I die, if I am lying ! Let him believe it who will ! a. Qne + ord pcr.s. pres. suhj. regularly serves as impve. ; so also, sometimes the 1st sing. : Qu'il parto. Let him go. Quo je vous ontondo. Let me hear you. NoTi!. This coiistnicf ion, as also those wirjioiu, ♦jUe, may be explained by ellipsit^of ?ome expression of desire, command, etc. (§349, 1, 2). 852,353.] THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 207 '2. The pres. mhj. M mng. of savoir, nrid sometimes of so souvenir, to denote modified assertion : Jo no sacho rlen cle plus beau. I know nothing finer, II ii'est pas h\, que je «icho. He is not there, as far as I know, NoTE.-SacUe so used, cmd vive i« qui vive?=' whogoesthere?', are regarded by many as irreg. indie, foniis. Je douto Quoique je doute Doiitez Jo douterai ^qu'il vlenne. ;i concessive clause (cf. §351, 4, h). a. Theprea. .mhj. also sometimes expresses condition or concession: VIenno I'ennemi, il s'enfuit. If the enemy comes, he flees Qu il perdo on gagne, il partira. Thougli he lose or win, he will go. 353. Tense Sequence. The tense of the subjunctive IS usually determined by the tense of the finite verb in the governing clause, as follows :— 1. k present (including pres. subj. and impve.) or a jnture m the governing clause requires the pres. subj. in the governed clause : "^ I doubt that (whether) he will come. Though I doubt that he will come. Doubt that he will come. I shall doubt that he will come. 2. Any Other tense tlian the above (i.e., an impf., past tlef., condl, etc.) requires the impf. subj. : .1 doutuis ^ I doubted that( whether)he would come Quoique jedoutasse I Though I doubted that he would come. Jo doutal r J^ " ^ '««• I doubted that he would come Je douteruls J J gj.ould doubt that he would come. _ 3. Compound tenses follow the same rules, the atixil- mrij being reckoned as the verb : •Je douto (j ai dout6, quoique je I doubt (I have doubted, though I rtoute, quoique j'ale dout6, je doubt, though I have doubted I d..uterai, j'aurai dout6) qu'il shall doubt, I shall have doubted) v.ennc or soit venu. that he will come or has come. •)od,mt:.is (javais dout^-, quoi- I doubted (I haa.st indef. depends upon its value as a pani or -as a jm-mut past (§.S39, 1, 2) : J'al aout6 ^/!'-' ^''^' °^ '"^"'''' '''■ ^'''^"^^' ^^' '^'' ''^^'^- '^'^•^■- "^^y ^''^"^ f«^- Je no dis pus qu'il^ ffit .\ bhimer. I ,lo not say he was to blame. r. In a rtfaf.. dame a pe.rf. may stand for a phqyf. ■ II portait cet habit la seule fois He was wearing that coat the only que je 1 ale vu. time that I saw him. d. The cmdl. of modified assertion (§345, 4), being virtually a pre. is commonly followed by tlie/j/66'. or per/, snhj. : J' / -, is Je destreraiH que vous venlez. I should like you to come II fau.lrait (^u'll aille. He would have to go lo: l!;t:'::f; "^ "'^' ^"'^- -''''' ^^^^ '^'-^ ^^ -^ ^"«- -^^- -y ^o^- II n'y a pas de rang quelle no put There is no rank she could not hold. XiGnir. Jc.Iouteq,,'ilJ„„at (cftt jou,;), I doub; that he w„ul,l play (woul.l s ,1 ava.t (ava,t e„, do I'argent, have played), if l,e l,ad (had had) money. EXERCISE IJII. Je tiens^/, ce que vous appreniez le I am (most) anxious that you shall ^T- ' , .* learn Latin. Nous n annerions pas qu'on se mo- We siiould not like to be made quatdenous. sport of. II me tarde que cela soit fait. I am longing for that to be done. Je voudrais ])ien que vous le fassiez. f^ "^^'* J"" would do it. , „ , ^ I should like vou to do it. 1. Our teacher said that lie wished us to write our exorcise. 2 If you wish to go to the city, you may ipouooir) go (there), but if you wish 353.] EXERCISES. 209 us to go (tluuc), we tell you plainly that we cannot. 3. I wish you to .].; your work ,..^..e (the) breakfast. 4. Our friends wslTustosfy ..th them this week. o. My father is most anxious that I louW learn Irench, but I .lon't li.e it. 6. Would you prefer that J s Z g.. to church this morning' 7 We shonhl ,/f ,.,P """^ ,^^^ ^'^''"^^ • ^e 1' 1 .V" r^ '' •^''" "'^ ^'""^« "^^^ ''"«'"««« ^ith that .'u^' T "" ^r'- '• ' ^'" ^""^^"^^' ^- -y house to i.t t nislied. 10. I am anxious that he shouhl come to see us when he Toronto. 11. My teacher told me that I should writ \^ excr ..1. tha to be done. 14. These chihlren must stay in ; their pLl liavc forbuldeu them to L'o out l"; T «),.,ll • i «" P'lrencs tl.eni fuse • nn) Ifi T T 7 1 , ' "'"^^ '^'"'^^^^ ""*^ ^^ '^'^""t 1. Ml (use . on). 16. I did not ask that I shouhl be answered (use • on) l.fore the others. 17. I shall avoid her speaking to me about" ' 8 le doctor ordered that he should be given no wine. 19. We do not .k that you should pay the money. 20. The rain hinders people (o". n.n. going out to-day. 21. I wish you to know that he is ITylZa 2 1 ou approve of my coming back, do you not 1 23. Yes. I wish you -... \Mutt shall I say to that man? He has insulted me. 26. That n.kes no difference he is not worthy of being answered (use : on). 27 e .loctor gave orders that my father should go out for a drive every ). -8. He has torn his book ; he deserves to be punished (use : on) -!). I should like you to go for a walk with me. 30. Weakness often ;ndcrs good intentions from being fuimied. 31. I long l:^ fretti ;>-. here is no more bread ; I should like you to go and get some . ■ II at man is most anxious that his chihlren shoul.i go to school, but . ..s too poor to (pour) buy them books. 34. Take care that tlie do. O.S not bite you ; he is very cross. 35. That young man is not ver? -uablc ; we should not like him to treat us as he has treated his fattier EXERCISE LIV. 1. It is fitting that children sliould obey their parents. 2. It is good Hat men should sometimes undergo misfortunes. 3. It may be that .as returned, but I have not seen him. 4. It is natural laVw :. '• , ^ ,f ' ^'''^ *^ ^"^^^^ ^'^^'^' f«r he lived in France. 7. We to very ^lad^that you have come. 8. We are very sorry that you did -t come 9 I am surprised that he said so, because hJtold me th^ . uld not say so 10, It i. a pity we cannot always be happy 11. It IS a shame for those young men to be so ignorant. 12. It is sad I* > «■ J !'^ ill V, a 210 FRENnr r.RAMMAR. I "' i«» f"** ..**.*•> »M>* r . ■■ I If: II [1^58 that a iiKiii like him should be so jm.oc. Ill I fear lie will conuiiit Home crime. 14. I am glad you are ho well. 1.5. I am afraid my father is not well enough to (jwur) go wHh ua. 1(5. I wonder ho did not come last night, 17. I know why lie did not come; he was afraid it wouM rain; 18. He was not afraid it w^ould rain ; he was afraid a certain per son would lie there whom ho did not wish to see. 19. I do not fear he will not go. 20. Are you not afraid he will be able to i)revent your intentions from being fultilled ? 21. I doubt whether he will be able to come. 22. I do not deny that I am glad of your ill-foi-tune. 211 Do you doubt that he is an honest man ? 24. Not at all ; I know tliat lie is an honest man ; I have known him for twenty years. 2'). I do not doubt th.at you will be able to fulfil all your intentions. 2(5. It seems he has not received [any] of my letters. 27. It cannot be that ycm are ignorant of his intentions. 28. How is your father ? 29. He is very -well ; he is rarely ill. 30. It seems to me it will be dangerous if we do not follow his advice. 31. That child is afraid you will liiuh him. 32. I am glad you did not hurt yoxu'self, when you fell. 33. We regret very much that we did not see you, when you were in Paris. 34. Are you not afraid that you will tire of 1 icing in the country ? 35. I am not afraid that I shall tire of being in the countiy. EXERCISE LV. 1. Our neighbour is an honest man ; I hojie he will succeed. 2. I do not think he will succeed ; he has not much aliility. 3. We thought he w^ould come to-day. 4. You told me that you did not think he \vonU go away, did you not ? 5. Do you think we must believe what he si'vs ? (i It is probable that we shall go away to-morrow. 7. It is not certain that our friends wall come to-morrow\ 8. Is it prol)able that you will go aM-ay to-day ? 9. We are sure tliat we saw them yesterday. 10. Are you not sure that you saw^ them yesterday? 11. Do you think your father will go to France this sunnner ? 12. It is prd)al)lc he will go there. 1,3. It is certain that all men will die. 14. Is it certain that our friends ^\ill be there this evening? 1,'). Is it not certain that your neighliour A\-ill buy your house ? l(i. Does he imauine wc sliall do that,, merely to (pour) please him? 17. We are not^ sure tliat will please him. bS. Do you think you will go for a walk this evening? 19. Yes, I think I shall go out with my brother. 20. Give me the book which contains that beautiful story \)f which you were speaking. 21. Give me a book which contains some beautiful stories. 22. °I should like to buy a house which would suit me better than this one. 23. 1 am looking for a grammar in which I can find better exercises. e^')a] EXERCISES. 2n Quo vout-il (lire ? On so fie ill liii. Faitos-moi savoir. .fe no re^ois plus de ses nouvelles. II (^st tros occupy. II w'occupe de cela. 4 1 liave a grannuar which has better exercises. 25. Send me some clothes wluch 1 can wear in the liOHe. 20. Has he a sn.gle friend whc istruetohnnV 27. He has not a single friend who is true to him. 28. 1 here is nobody here who can speak French. 29. I have nothing which u the city SI. 1 here are few people here who liave learned French. 6.. It IS the hnest tlung one can see. l^i. That is the largest ship I have ever seen. 34. Whatever you do, you will not be able to persuade me that you are nglit. 35. Whoever you are, you will have to obey the laws, as long as you are in this country. EXEIM ISE I.VI. What does he mean ? f Men trust lam. i He is tru.stod. Send me word (let me know). I never hear from him now. He is very busy. He takes an interest in that. 1. I have told him nothing which could influence him. 2 I know no l.(K,k which pleases me better. 3. I want a house wJiicli will suit me Letter. 4. Mr. .Jackson is the richest man I know. 5. However -ood nun may be, they do not escape misfortune. 6. Let us go out ^)r a AViJk before your father return.. 7. We rose this morning before the sun rose. 8. W ill you not stay here until the weather is warm' 9 Oil, no; we must leave before it begins to be warm. 10. We are goin- to ^^■ork until we go to bed. 11. You must always act so that men may respect you. 12. Tell the truth always, so that men may trust you. 13. He insulted me so that I put him out doors. 14. That gen- tleman made a speech, but he spoke in such a way that one could not tell wJiat he meant, lo. I did not trust him, for fear that he might de- '■eive me. 16. He passed our house, before we had finished oui°break- tast. 17. I explained it to him, for fear he might not know what you meant. 18. I cannot trust you, unless you explain to me what you mean. 19. In case you cannot come, will you be kind enough to send me word. 20. We shall send you our horses and carriage, in case you need Uiem. 21. In case wliat he says is true, we shall send you word -1.. Altliough the children have gone to bed, they have not yet gone to ■^eop 2.S. However little, you may like that man, you must confess •hat I:,: ,s an honest man. 24. Altiiougli we used to be good friends I never hear from him now. 2,^. Not that lie has forgotten me but 1*^ *ii 1^ i ML S. 13 W 'S Jf w 1 ! ; j ( i| ,|||lll»M>« l^ It "• 1! 212 PRKNCH ORAMMAR. [353. he is so much occupiod witli his husincss. 2(5. Far from liissayiny tliat ho hates you, I a.ssure you that lie will .say ho loves you. 27. He ^mvu her the money without my kmnving it. 1>M. Kven if he had told nui Miat he liked me, I whould not have believed it. 2<). Tiiough C'anada he h..sH interesting^ than Knglan.l, we love it better. '.]{). I^cannotgi, o-.it, without my .log following me. ,31. If we are there and see him, wo Hiiall tell him what you .say. .S2. Although he in far awav, I heai- from him oeeasi(mally. 3:i. Not that we take no interest in your enteiprise, but we are so busy with our own work that wo can't think of anything else. :U. We are at the wrong iloor ; w.mld you bo kind enough to tdl us where we are, so that we can find wiu>re our friends live? .T.. We shall i-ise early to-morrow nu)rning, so as to be at the station bef(.ii« our friends start. EXERCIMl-: I.VII. 1. Would to Gyd he were here ! 2. Let him be silent, if he cannot say what he means. S. 'Phe Frenchmen shout " Hurrah for France !" 4. He doubted whether there is a Clod. 5. I should like you to write me a letter, when you are absent. 6. If his father sIduM say so, he would have to do it. 7. I was most anxious that he should succeed in his enterprise. 8. W^e were not willing that you should go away with- out our seeing you. 9. His father gave oi-ders that he should be taken to school, even tlumgh he might not be willing to go. 10. The doctor forbade that the patient should go for a walk. 11. I was longing for that to be done. 12. He would iu)t permit it to be done. l',i.\'\ic rain hindered us all day from going out. 14. It was necessary that we should go away before the others came. l^. It was better that we should be here without their knowing it. 16. I Was afraid that he had said too much. 17. I doubted whether he would be able to pay that price. 18. I was very sorry that we had not been able to go for a walk together; I am sure we should have enjoyed ourselves. 19. Our friends were glad that you had visited them, before they left for Finance. 20. He told me he wouhl go away, unless he succeeded better. 21. We did not say you should ^ynte the letter ; you may do as you wish. •_>•-'. Did you fear he would go away Avithout coming to see you ? 23. ]\ly fat Iier thought you would come, but my nu)ther thought you would not come. 24. It was impossible that he should not be mistaken ; he trusts those who are not worthy of confidence. 2.5. We are not sure they would come. 2(). We waited until they came. 27. We have taken care that they should not see us. 28. No man has ever li\ed who could c.|ual' him in prudence. 29. He was the noblest man I have ever known. "^ !! 353-3S5.1 coKmrioNAi. sentences. 213 n.^vcr seen anything whicli suited me l,etter "^4 \V. , \ , ''° ill, he would net go ho.ne. Althougli he was very Conditional Sentences. .y»4. A condiM-oruiI sentence consists re<>-ulirlv of m.. j...s_.the co..//.^o. (introduced ^y .iJ'ii^'^^, ^IJ'Z (ConditimJ Si j'avais le temps, (Result) j'irais. -'^ I l>«'fl time, I sliould go. a. The condition may. of course, ^.e.erfe or folio., the result • I.->vous s'il pleut V ;vii, ^^^^ • « ne a.t pas beau, je n'irai pas. If it is nof ii'ne, I sll^not go. >. The condition is often cUsyvised or implied, or the result u.Ltood H<:.8ltor serait uno faiblosse. To lw.«.if .... n, '"''"'^tooa. .To n'irais pas («i j V,tul« de ui) ^^^J n ' ' ^^ ''" weakness. Ai . • -j/I • \ ^' ^ should not go (If I were hpl Ah ! SI jY'tais k sa place. Ai, jf t «.^ • i • , *^ • ^"> " J- were in his place ! '"^ H u le temps, il va. Tf l.« i. *• i o-, 1 ^ . -^^ "*^ "'18 time, he iroes ^ >1 a le temps, ditcs-lui d'aller. If he has (h-iv. «ii i . il ijc 11.18 ^ii.ivc, A%ni iiuv'e, should Imve) time, tell him to go. If he has (have, will have, should have) time, he avUI j»o. If ho had (had he, were ho to have, if ho should have, should he have) time, he would so. ''>"il I'a dit, il le f«i»'H rf i x ■■ ■ , M,., ^ '■ -It »t! has said it, he will do it ^ .1 est venu, faites-moi «a,^oir If he has come, lot me know. ' S'il a le temps, il Ira. S'il avalt le temps, il irait. SI I 1*1. .»M ..4fc.r(j 214 FRENCH fJHAMMAR. [365. S'iltt ou lo tcmpa, il uem vcim. If ho Iiiin had time, hu will liuve como. Si j'avniH cu Us temps, jo NontiM Tf I liiul iiiul time, I nIiouIiI imve alh-. gone. 8'il 6tuit brave, il aunilt fait cehi. If lie were liiave, he would hnvo (lone tliat. h. Sometimes the pliijif. mhj. stands in the ' if ' clau»t or the ' re- suli ' rlanw, or in hofh : 8'il oftt (or jivjilt) Hit CL'hi, il ne Ilml he Known that, he woiihl TeAt (or uiinilt) ])us lift. not liuve niild so. c. Oceasionally the t///. iiidlr. stands in the 'if elaimi instead of the pliij)/., and in the • result' c/auMi instead of the cond/. ant. : Si Stanislas (lenieui'alt (n\ alt (le- If Stanislas luul remained, ho nieur6), il 6talt (aiiralt 616) would have been lost, poi'du. d. Quite rarely the condition is expressed by inverHion (without h1) : N'6tait-ce la crainte de cela. If it were not for fear of that. Efit-il 6i6 nioins riche. If he had been poorer. e. A virtual condition (concession) is sometimes expressed by various locutions : Quieonque lo fern. Whoever (If any one) does it. II lo dirait, lo forait-il ? Even if ho sahl it, would ho do it ? Quand niCnie il no Taiirait pasdit. Even though ho had not said so. II le dirait que je ne le croirais Even If he said it, I should not Ije- pas. lieve it. /. The past dtf. is found in the ' if ' dmine, only in the expression s'il en fut : Riche, s'li en fut (jamais), mais Rich, if any one over was, butcor- corronipu. rupt. fir. SI = ' whether ' may take thc/H/. or condl. , but never si = * if ' : Dis-moi si tu Iras (Iraiw). Tell me whetlier (if) you will (would) go. EXERCISE LVIII. Je lui ai dit son fait. I (have) told him whatlthought of liim. Nous nous plaisons a la ville. We like it (like to be) in the city. II so plait j\ la oampagne. He likes it (likes to be) in the country. Qu'ilfasse beau, ou(|u'ilpleuve."\ ttti ^i -^ • /> i ^i ■- • c,.., ^ ., , .., 5 h Whether It IS fine, or whether it rams. k5 li fait beau, ou qu il pleuvo. / 1 355.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCEa 215 tu wncto«eoyou. r, Had it not been «o warm to-day, I nhould have gone away. 6. If the (icrman. had not taken Alsaee. the French would not hate them ho muel, to-day. 7. If I come here next year, I shall nng my brother with me. 8. If I were yon. I should tell him what I l..nk of him. 9. If I be present, whe.i he arrives. I shall tell him what I told you. 10. If it is cold in winter, we go to Florida ; if it is mUd wo remain in Canada. II. If n>y father likes it in the eountry, he wili «tay there till (the) autumn. 12. If I .should like it in the eity. I shall «tay there always. U. I can never trust that boy ; if he should tell mo anytluug. I should not believe him. 14. Whether it rains or is fine we s^.all come. 15. He is a goo7«7f ' - -t, (that) makes no difference to hTm 30 f weTk I'> T ''" '''^' ^^^""'^^^^ -^-^ I thought of mm 32. If we liked it m the country, we should stay there 33 If he had insulted me like that, I should have kicked him out 34 E^en were you to hate me, I should nof, comnhin <^i it o- t , ti 7 "^^.^ ^t in ti. country, if it had not r:b;:r;;:h::;!; :^t ! j 216 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [355-357. The Infinitive Mood. Sryry^ The infinitive is a tjer?^^^ 9zo?^w. As a verb it governs ; as a noun it serves as mhject, object, etc. Voir c'est crolro. Soclng is believing. Vous devriez lul purler. You ought to speak to Jilin. II lit sans coniprendre. He reads Avlthoiit umlerstundlu^'. 356. Tlie eliief difficulty in tlie use of tlie infin. is to determine, (1) wlien it siiould stand without pr 62)., (2) when it sliould have h, (3) when it should have de. 357. Infinitive without Preposition. The infin. without any preposition is used : — 1. As subject, or in apposition : Mentlr est honteux. To lie (lyinj?) is base. A quoi scrt parler ? Of what use is it to talk i Vlvre c'est souffrir. To live is to suffer. 2. As predicate after a few verbs (see list below) : Vous seniblez lidsiter. You seem to hesitate. II est cens6 I'a^ oir fait. He is supposed to have done it. 3. As logical subject after a few impersonals (see list below) : II vaudrait mieux se taire. It would he better to keep quiet. II fait cher vlvre h Paris. Living is dear in Paris. 4. As object or complement after the so-called modal auxiliaries (§310, 1-5), after most verbs of ??zo^/o« (and cau- sation of motion), after verbs of desiring and preferriiuj, after verbs of perceiving, after verbs of tliinl'ing and in- tending, after verbs of saying and declaring, and after certain verbs of lacJcitig imd failing (see list below) : Faites-lui apprendro sa legon. Make him learn his lesson. Will you dlno with us ? Send for the doctor. I should like to speak to him. I see them como (conilnr^. When do you expect to como hack ? He claimp. to he in the right. It was in vain that I shouted. Voulez-vous dSner chez nous ? Envoyez ohercher le rnddecin Je d^sirerais lul parler. Je les vols venlr. Quand comptez-vous revonlr ? II Tjr^tend avoir raison* J'avais beau orier. :i57,35S.] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 217 5. Somotinics in elliptical expressions as imperative inten-o^atim (clir. or indir.), or oLlutely: ''^^'''''''^'' Voir lo.. afliches. ^o^ the posters. Qm fairo ? Ou ,ne cachor ? What (am I) to do ? Where hlclo ' .Te ne sais que fairo. I u^^w not what to do. I enser qu'il a dit cela ! To tl.h.k that he said that ! Reference-Ust of verbs requiring- direct infinitive: r. na,sti'.n.. o.-.,„ „ j •' u.Tonrir, hasteji. envoyer, ,s«,4. atlirnier, «^,n«. esp(:.rerl , /io;;e. aiiiiLT (ooiid].),3 nhould like. Otre, C;c. ai.ner autant, like as well. 6tre censd, he mppov.ed. •Mwmr miQnx, prefer. aller, go. aporcevoir, perceive. assurer, assure. avoir beau, ie in vain avoiicr, avow. coinpteri, intend. (^oiifusser, confess. eoiirir, run. croiic, think. '■\w^ncT, deign. (lui'larcr, declare. (ii^'im.ser, testify. faillirZ, be on point of. faire, make, cause. ilfaitOnijiei-s.), it is. falloir, be necessary. se figurer, imagine. s*imaginer,/a«c2/. ju>,'er, consider. Vr(^i(:TtiY-i, prefer. pr(5teiidre3, assen. se rappelerl, recollect. recoiiiiaitre, acknotvledge. refjarder, look at. rentrer, go in again. retounicr, go back. rovenir, eo7ne back. savoir, know hoiv to, can. soiiiliJer, seem, ^cnth; /tear, feel. jurer I, suwar, attest by oath, souhaituri , wisn. justifier, justify laissera, I, let, allow. inciier, lead, bring. mettre, set, put at. nionter, go tip. ai'sc,.ridre3,t.onie(^o)rfo2/)n. nierl, deny. 'l^sirerl , desire, wish. oser, dare^ 'ItToir, ought, to be, etc. ouir, hear. ''"'"'' ■""J/- V^raitvo, api>ear. ocouter, listen to. penser.'l, intend, be near. pouvoir, can, may. soutenir, maintain. snpjjoser, suppose. otre supjioso, he supposed. ti'iiioig-iier, testify. se trouver, be. valoir autant, be as good. valoir inieux, ito better. venir3, i, come. voir, see. voler, jly. vouloir, will, ivish. entL'Mdre, hear, intend. 1 Sometimes takes de. 2 Sometimes takes h or do. " See also list of verlis re(iuirinj,'' h (§358, 7). ^ See also list of verlis ro,Mlo (§35!?, 6). a. novoir='owe,' 'be indebted' with indir. obj. takes de • Je lui dois d'etre encore en vie. I owe to him that I am still alive. h. Fairo takes do in no fairo quo do : II n. fait que ,le s'amuser. He does nothing but amuse himself '•. No pas lai88or=« not to cease,' etc., takes do : line laisse pas de le dire tt^ Jc „^. P i I I I ■■' ' 1 ■■■ i i 1 ] lk»*M* • , »9 ».•<<■<*' r 'I?3i2 [358. 1. As direct object of a few transitwes (see list below) : J'aime u cli.uiter. I like to hVu^. Contimicz u lire. Contiime to rcart. II in enscigne h chanter. He teaches me to sln^ (siiiRinR). J'ai ji 6tu(licr (leniain. I have to study to-morrow. II n'y a pas j\ so plalndro. There is nothing to complain of. :2. XYmnplemeut after many verbs to denote the object in irhtchtha acthni tends (ansAveriii^'- the (lucistion ' to do what?') or the object in, at, on, about ichlch the action takes place (nnsAvering- the question ' in doinL'- what ? ' ' at doing- what ? ' etc.) : II aspire h dcvonlr riche. Pousaez-les ji ajilr. Je les ai invitV's :\ A'cnfr. Aidez-inoi sY porter cclto malle, II reussit a, me troiiver. Je suis h 6ci'iro mie lettre. II s 'amuse h me taquiner. J'ai gague h vendre ma maison. II joue i\ faii'o Je malade. He aspires to bucoiuo rich. Urge them to act. I have invited them to coiiio. Help mo to carry this trunk. He succeeded In finding me. I am (busy) Avritlns a letter. He amuses hiniself teasing me. I gained by selllii<; my house. Ho plays at l»einsr sick. 3. As i\\(i complement of CQYtmw adjectives (see the Adj.) and noum dvnothig Jit ness, tendency, pu/pose, etc.: Ceci est bon i\ innnsrer. This is good to oat. Je suis prrutL'r (a'-), yet ready. s'arreter, stop. asijiirer, asinrc. assujettir (s'-), subject. astreindre, compel. b'astreindre, hind o. s. attacher, attach. s'attacher, he intent (on), aftendre (ii'-),ex])ect. autorisLT, authorize. f^'avilir, stooj). :aoir, have, must. 80 d(jcidor, rcsolre. d6fier3, challenye, incite. demanderi, ask. deineurer, retnaln. dt''pensor, sjieud (in). di^sappreiidre, ./"/y/('(. deacendviii, stoop, abase, o.s. hair, hate. destiiier, destine. d(5terniiii(!r3, induce. 86 dclcniiiiier, resolve. d6vouer (se-), devote. difi6rer'-i, delay. disposer (se-), dis2)osG, di\ ertir (se-), amuse. doniier, yive s'd'vertuer, exert 0. «., try. excelkr, excel (in). exciter (s'-), excite. exercer (s'-), exercitie (in). exhorter, exhort. exposer(s'-), expose. se fati^'uerS , tireo.s. (in, at). finir(iiej,'.);5, have done. forcer 1 , force. gafe'ner, gain (by). habit,uer2 , accustom. s'liabitiier, accustom 0. s. dresser, train. avoir (de la) peine, /uu'c (?//■- s'etforcerl, try. ficulty (in). s'cigayer, divert o.s. (by). balancer, hesitate. employer (s'-), employ (in). ••■e lioruer, limit 0. s. ^ s'empresserX. 3, he eager. chercher, seek, try. encourager, encourage. ('"nunencers, hryin. cnga,iicr(6'-yz,enjagc,advise. montrer, show how. se complaire, take pleasure enhardir2, embolden. oblij^eri. 0, oblioe, forcA. C"0. e'eiihardir 2 , venture. 8'oblit'er2 , \i,ul o. s. se hasarder-', venture. h(^siter2, hesitate. inciter, incite. incliner, incline. induirc, induce. instriii re, instruct. iiiteresser (s'-), interest (in). inviter, invite. ionvY,play(at). laisser;>.4,7<;au , i ml lice. so rosoiulre, reaolne. larder, /'C /c/ir/, delay (in). tendrt', /*'*/(/. teiiir, /(« ciiKriotis. travaillor, ?('orifc, trciiiMor^, lir)nhlr (at, on') ivcixwcY, Und. veil !'••"•• ', hai>/M*n. viser, ai/*/.. vouer (so-), devote. 2f?0 B'obstiiier, pernint (in). ocoiiper(s -);5, em,plo\i (in) s'offrir2, o/7Vr. s'oiiiiiiiilrer, persist (hi). parvetiir, mtc.eeed (in). passer, siieiid. (in). pori'Oii'r, incline. peiiser 1, think (of). perdre, A»w (in, Ini). persovc-fr, p( ruevere (in). persister, jiennxt (in). se plaire, delight (in). se plier, submit. porter, induce. poust^or, vrcessitt'! do rester. The necessity of remaining. II n'cst pas dignc de vivro. IT(; is uoL \V()ith\ live. J'ai en vie do plouror I feel like cryinj 359.] THE INFIXITIVE MOOD. 221 a. So also, many expressions, like the last example, made from vcrh + noun, (■..(/., Hvolr beNoiii (lionto, iK'ur, raison, soin, tort, etc.), faire onvlo (plaiHlr, Nemblant, etc.), courir risque, etc., etc. 3. After verbs as object or complement, usunlly to denote the source or occasion of action (answcrino- 'wlicnee ?', ' coucerning- what ? ') or to denote; .separation or cessation from (answering 'from wliat?'). See list helow : Je me r^jouis do le voir. 1 rejoice to s«o it. l^:ile so pi/,/. ima|,'irK'r, iiiia;rine. (li.scoiil ii.uor, wrtA'fl. s-impatientcr, "/>*■ impatient disooiivcnii-, ,/,/,„. iinputor, impute. 8C(UNculiuT,r.r<-»/w„.«.(/o/-). H'iiHli^'nor, /«- imlvjnant. »liHi)ciiscr, ,Uki y/t,w f /Vr w). «'i„i.r, ii-r, meddle {with). (JlMsuadcr, (/(wi (louter, lii.'titntf. st'dtHiter, HUSfpect. dcrire, write. «'t'troiccr I , tni. s'l'ifraycr, />(■ tij'mid. eiiipC'dier, j>revent. i). \uH\nvvi;inKj)ire. iiiienlirc, interdict (from). joni; , e)ij(iy. jiii^er hoii, think fit. \\\vvti, ,inimise (on oath). lie pivslaissor-"-! , nottoreiuie. tm lasscr-'i, ^f nrarj/ (of). H'uiiiiH-chiT, ab.^tnin(fr(ym). loner, prtthc (for). H'oinpivHsera, /(«>■/(■),, inaiidcr, W(/. s'empresaer] , be eMjer. nuiiuiiier.'i jinV. /«■ o/i point eiijoiiidre, enjoin af\ s'eiiiiuyerii, 3, be tired(h. 8e tiaiter, fiatter o. s, torccrl , force. fr(5mir, ahudder. gagrer, uwjcr. garder (se-), forbear. gt^niir, (J roan. gCner, incommode. 8e glorilier, boa^t (of). gronder, scold (Jar). 1 Ork. 3 Sometimes h. 3 See also list of verbs requiring ii ^§358, f) 4 See also list ot verbs requiring direct infinitive (§357, pardoiiner, forgive. parier, bet. parler, speak. se i)asser, do without. penuettre (se-), 2>ermit. persuader, persuade. se pi(iuer, pride a. s. (on). plaiiidre, pity se plaindre, complain (of). prendre garde3, lake care noti beware vq/"). l)rendre soin, take care. prescrire, prescribe. pressor, urrfe. Hc |)rcHscr, hasten. pr6suiuer, presume. inicr^i, bey, pray. priv or (so), deprive ((]f). pioje(;ter, intend. pronu'ttro (so-), promise. proposer, propose. so proposer, intend. protestor, protest. \mmv, jiiniish (/or) reconirnander, rcc(ymmend roconnnenoor l , heyin ayai» refusers, refuse. regrettor, reyret. so r6jouir, rejoice. reniereier, thank (for). so repeiitir, repent (oj"). reprendre, reprove (for) repriniander, reprimand (for). reprocher (so-), reproach (with). resoudroa, resolve se ressouvenir, remember. rire(sc-), lauyh. ris(|uer, risk. rougir, blush, soiumer, summon. 80 soueier, care. »o\\&nrl,suj)er. soup(;onner, suspect. sounre, smile se souvenir, recollect. suggdrer, suygcst supplier, beseech. > tricher2 , try. tenters, attempt. troniblera, tremble, fear. trouver bon, think fit. se vanter; boast (of). venir3.4, have just. 6> 360.] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 223 ,Ji '^;.*'*«"«**«"«- A« cippears from the list, the same ve I) sometimes miuires a, d«, or the direct iiilin The iollowing- are examples of the principal cases in which the sense vanes witli tiie construction •— 1. Aimer ? J'ulincralH bliMi ]v co'iiiaitre. J'aliiiu inleux vous dire tout. Aiiiioz-voiis h (iernoiirer ici? 2. D6(>l(I(>r : II m'a iK'fide h eutrcr. Nous d^cldaines (le jxutir, 3. D6fler: On le a^nii ji boire. Jo vous cU^lle (If, prouver oela. 4. DcNceudro : Descend H chercher ton cliapeau. II a descoiidn inenie h voler. 5. Detoi'Jiiiuer : .7e I'al d6toriiiiu(:i h roster. II uvuit do you like to live here V Ho Induced mo to go in. ^Vo deeided to set out. Tlioy ehallensred him to drink. I defy you to prove that. Go down and got your Iiat. He even descended to theft. X Induee^l him to stay. He had doternilued to go. He Hays he saw it. i told him to come. He was oasrer to please her. He hastened to reply. I am (busy) writing letters. It is your place to speak. It is your turn to speak. 1 Hj 5 '''i^^^wl jjHB- ' 1^ Lk I: -i: 224 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [3da ■'» i -i- 1 1 . Jurer : .}(!.} lire I'avoir vii, Je jurtMlo Ic faire. 12. LaisHcr : Je I'ai liiisN6 (lire. Je vou.s lalsHo a penser, II ne liilsHu pjiM (hi parler 1.'^. So luNMur : II s'cst lasso h cf)urir. II so luHHo do oourir. 14. 3Ianqtior : Je Diaiuiuai «Io tomher. II a inanqiio h faire son devoir. 15. Obllffor:, Je I'ai obliiE<:6 a (do) le faire. Obllgez-moi do le faire. IG. Soccupor : II 8'occupo a rien faire. II s'occnpo do tout voir. 17. Pensor : Que ponsez-vous faire ? Je pouHjii toiTiber. Je penso U repliquer <^ cela. 18. Prendre gardo : Pronoz gardo k le faire. Prone/, ffardo a ne pas le faire. Pronoz ffardo do le faire. 19. Pr6teiidro : II pr6tond vous oonnaitre. II pr6tend h devenir savant. 20. Prior : II ni'a pri6 k diner. Je vous prio do nraider. 21. Rof«8or : Me refusez-voua h manger ? Je rofusoral d'aller. 1 Hwoar I saw if . I swear I will do it. I lot Jiini talk. I lojivo you to think. He did not stop talking. TTetir«'!l liiuisolf out (by) runnui«. He In tired of luuning. I was on the point of falling. He lias failed to do his duty. I ol)llg'ed him to do it. Oblige me by doing it. He is busy doing nothing. He is intent on seeing everything. What do you intend to do ? Ithougrlit I should fall. I thinlv of replying to that. Take care to do it. Take caro not to do it. Take caro not to do it. He assorts that he knows you. He aspires to become learned. He invited me to dine. I pray (ask) you to help me. Do you refsise to give me food? I shall refuse to go. at)0-302.] THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 225 22. UtVsoiidro : II 111 'a K'Milii a\ racluiter. .loHuis rcVHolutle raohetur. 2;^. Troiiibler : 11 tremhlc a iiio voir. 11 ti'eiiihlu do 1110 reiicontrer. 24. Venlr: V«»ii«/. noiia voir. Si voiis voiu'z h lo voir. • lo victiH rto le. voir. Ht' iniliu'ccl n\(>. to buy it. I aiMdetoriiilned to buy it. Ho trc>iiil>les when he sees me. He foai's to meet me. €oino to see ua. If you happen to see him. I have, just aocu him. ;J(>1 . Infinitive with otiiei- Prepositions. The iiifin. st.'iuds nlso Jiftcr pjir, pour, sans, fipres entre, and 'M'tvA- locutions ending in de or a (aiin de, fin quo de .jiisqu'jY, etc.) : — ' 1. Par = ' by,' usually only after commeiicer and fliiir . II liuit par m'iubulter. He endocl by insulting me {or He finally insulted me). 2. Pour usually translates 'in order to,' 'for the pur- pose of;' sometimes also 'for,' ' from,' ' because," thoui?h ' etc., and ' to ' after assez, trop, etc. : ' II faut manger pour vivre. We must eat (in order) to live. II est mort pour avoir trop bu. He died from over-drinking. II fut puni pour avoir ri. He was pxmished for laughing. Pouretrepauvre, iln'estpaslarron. Though poor, he is no thief. II est trop franc pour se taire. He is too frank to keep quiet. a. Pour after a verb of motion (§357, 4) emphasizes the purjwse : J'irai pour le voir. I shall go to see him. 3. Sans = ' without ' : N'allez pas sans manger. Bo not go without eating. I. Apres - ' after ' requires the j)erf. infin. : Apres avoir din6, je partis. After having dined, I set out. 862. Infinitive for Subordinate Clause. 1. An in- finitive construction usually replaces a que clause of which the subject is the same with that of the subject or object (dir. or indir.) of the principal clause : II eroit vous avoir vu. He thinks that he has seen you. Dites-leur de s'en aller. Tell them to be gone. *r ! I ^ a 226 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [362-3G4. •r-i ! ! a. 2. Similarly afln do, iV mollis de, aproH, avuiit do do oiaiiitc de, dc pern- do, de fiK«ii a, de iiianie.e ft, pour, sans, atc+the in/in. stMiid for afln que, etc + the suhjimctive, but only when the stih'ect of both vcrhs IS the same : II partit .sans me voir. He went without seeing nte. JJiU : II partit sans que je lo visse. He went without me seeing hna. 30;j. Infinitive with Passive Force. Ktmnsttiv,' inhji. lias passive foi'cc nfter verbs of percdv'mq (voir etc.), after faire, laisser, and alter h in certain cases : J'ai vu bfttir cette maison. I saw this house iK-iuff built Jg me fais fali-o un habit. I am havmg a coat ii.:ule Vous etes i\ plalnclre. You are to bo pitied. N0TK..-TIUB coMstriJction may be explained by supply !,.{,. some such ellipsia as the ollowmjr: J'ai vu b.ltir une maison (fi or par <|nelqu'unV 'I have seen so.no. norty iHiiIdiU},' a house.* 3C *-. Infinitive for Ens-lish -ing. The infin. must he used to translate many such forms (see §3G0, 2, 3, 4). EXERCISE LIX. Jo vaia fnii-K '^""^ promenade. \ ^ . „ fan e -^ ^^^ ^^1^^^ ^^^ pro„,enade. I ' "" ^'""^« ^"^ ^ ^^l^^' Je voudrais le faire. Je voudrais qu'il le fasse (fit). II fait beau marcher (se promener). Vous avez beau dire (parler), J'ai cru voir passer quelqu'un. Je les ai ticout^s chanter. II a pens(i mourir. Je pense h. le faire. II ne fait que de venir (arriver). II veut faire h sa tete. J'aimerais autant aller. Faites-le monter. I should like to do it. I should like him Lo do it. /The walking is good. ^ It is good walking. /It is vain (useless) for you to speak. vYou may say what you like. I thought I saw some one go by. I listened to them 3ing(ing). He was near dying. I am tliinking about doing it. He has just come. He will have his own way. I would as soon go. Send (show) him up (stairs). 1. Let us go for a walk this morning ; the walking is good, and It IS cool. 2. Living i.s Hhvays dearer in the city than in the country. 3. Are the children coming? 4. Yes, I saw them coming, :m.] EXERCISES. 227 when I waaon the Ml f, j ,houhl like to speak to the doctor, when c..nos 6. I shouhl hke you to speak to my father, when you see .... 10 ItwasuHdcs for us to speak, nobody would listen tons I. ri.ke better to live in the country than in the eity. 12. My friends Invve left ine, and I know not what to do. 13. I think it is goh.g ^ t warm to-day. 14. My father thought he heard some one go by'l ut I tl.n.k he was mistaken. 15. My father was very ill last year X was •un ned. 17. I vva. thmkn.g about going to see you. 18. I hope I «i-ll see you, when you con.e. 19. I hope he will come to see me |vl.on he IS here. 20. Did you see my sister at the ball V 21. I tTu" ; I Haw her, but I am not sure (of it), 2-> I am thi,>I-in , / I "» '*^ him i letto,. l.i,fT 1 .11 . . -i ain tlunking about writing ^ m a ettei but I do not like writing letters, and ho I delay (it) from week to week. 2.S. I should like better to go than to stay 24 I " ould be better to go than to stav 9^i rr.,L . i ^' . vouAdsh '>fi \rvn / 1 • ■^''- ^"'"« ^'"^ see ne, whenever y Misih .G. My master has just come ; after he has dined I shall tpll - U.at you are here. 27. I hope I shall beable to go Ta wa k l^t" :; ;;; We" T; / '^''^ r '"''' -"^ ^^^ ^-^-^^ '^-^^ ^^^ yon. Ji. \V e ought to go and see your father, before he leaves •iO Tf Ks ...seless for you to say anything ; he will have his own Z 31 You .ay «ay what you like ; young people will have their own way 32 I \voul(i as soon so im ^f-n? q-j t . "^j^. o— j. go as stay. dS. 1 am not very well this mornir.r, . T am going to send for the doctor ^4 T},» n / u '"""'"'g 5 I I send him un 9 v. w T , '^^^ ^''*' ^^'^'^^^^^ ^^^ J«st come ; shall mu. 1. 1^ ) ^'"^"^'^'"^ '"" ^^"'-^^^ ««•"« "ne go by, but we must have beeji mistaken, *' •'^' EXERCISE LX. II o.st ;\ travailler. •T'y «iiis aoeoiitume. 11 fiaira mal. 'Se plaire k mal faire. n tinde h venir. Tenez-vous (beaucoup) a y aller ? •TtJ n'y tiens pas. He is busy working. I am used to it. He \>'ill come to a bad end. To delight in evil- (wrong-) doing. He is long in coming. Are you (very) anxious to go there? I am not anxious (for it). -t...Io lit , 4,f ''"•"'"[-"* to .lo. 4. 0,„. teacher taught culty in believing that h work to do also. 7. I h e iias done that. 8. How old ave diffi- is that child? M 0. It in too col.l to go for a walk 21. It 18 not cool enough t<, go for a walk. '22. I rose early Huh n.orn- of iv" T '^ ^'"f'^" '" '^" "'^ ^'"'•'^ ^^'"-^ 8"'"K 'l ant amis,' 'So-called friend.s.' 2. In the last ex ample, 8oi-disant, though adj in force, remains invar, in view of the lit. meaning, ' calling themselves.' 3. Ayant and 6tant are also a\\\a.ys invariable. 3. As ti gerund, it denotes either simultaneous action oi means by irJrich, niid is invariable; en = ' while,' 'in; *on,' ' wlien,' 'as,' ' by,' etc.. or is untranslated ; En jouant, j'ai perdu ma montic. En rentrant, j'ai trouv6 la letlre. Vous pertlrez, en a^is-sant ainsi. En lisant on apprend k lire. AVhile playing, I lost my watch. On returning, I found the letter. You will lose, if you act thus. By reading one learns to r^-ad. a. lioth participle and gerund denote simultaneous action, but the use of en (strengthened sometimes by tout) usually emphasizes the cojj- tinuity of the action : (En) disant ceci, il prit la lyre. (While) saying this, he took the harp. Tout en pleurant, elle continua. Still weeping, she went on. h. The gerund usually refers to the subject : Je I'ai vu en allant ;\ la poste. I saw him while going to the post. Bui : L'appotit vient en mangeant. One's appetite comes while eating. c. En is sometimes omitted, especially after aller : G(^n6ralement parlant. Generally speaking. II s'en va (en) grondant. Off he goes grumbling. d. The gerund denotes progressiiTe action in a few expressions formed from aller : Cela alia (en) diminuant. That kept growing less and less. 36(>. EiijLrlisli Forms in -ing. These; are variously transhited into Frencli ; idiomatic differences are : — 1. Periphrastic tense forms arc avoided in French : IlaJou6 tcnite la matint^e. He luw been playing all morning. 366.] THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 231 En lisant on apprend k lire. Jhit : II parle de partlr. II fut pendu pour avoir voU. EIIo partit sans dire adieu. Voir c'est croire. J'iiime la bhnsse {or h chnsiger). Jo suia (Uonn^ qu'Il solt venu. wlH^./^bf^i'?' ^'''''"'^' '"? translated by an -ant form only yhen the prep, en may be used ; otherwise by an infinl hve, a 7ioun, or a clause: '' By reading one learns to read. He speaks of going away. He was hanged fo." liavlng stolen. She went without saying good-bye. Seeing is believing. I like hunting. I am surprised at his coming. 3 After verbs of perception (entendre, sentir voir etc.), the r.to^;. or infimtwe construction is much com^ moner than the participle : Te les vois venir (qui viennent I see them coming or venant) L.'s voil.\ q„: passent ! See them passing ! a vu sortir „,es fr^res. He saw my brothers going out Les avez-vous entendus frapper Did you hear them l^ockLg ^^ ( lui frappaient) ? ^ Je la vis frapper I'enfant. J saw her striking the child Une machine ^ coudro. a sewing-machine. 5. It is often more elegant to avoid a French form in -ant, even when permissible : '"" '"^ Pendant mon voyage. wiiile travelling. EXERC ISE LXII. II s est fach6 contre inoi. He got angry with n.e. IW'men *'.;"•'''"«'««■'>■■"■' y ^Peaknig, Cana.iians ave Letter than Eur- •»™. 10. How happy those pe<.,a„ta «re , They are always 3to|. I »'< i Tm^ in 232 FRENCH GRAMMAR. «»•* i ■ ' J' ■■:i :: } <•') :' 1 1 1 iHP"***'*' It ■^*..u [366-368. ing their beautiful songs, as they work. 1 1 . One's appetite comes while eating ; but, said the Gascon, I have })een eating two hours, and it has not come yet. 12. I like reading, but I prefer hunting and fishing. 13, Where are the children? 14. There they are, playing under the trees. 15. Our neighbour's son has made astonisliiug progress at (the) college. 16. The sewing-machine is an American invention, but there are many of them in Europe now. 17. Our friends were very much as- tonished at our coming ; they thought we were in Europe. 18. As we were taking a Avaik this morning, we met the old gentleman who used to live next door. 19. Our neighbours are speaking of going away, but I do not think they will. 20. That young man went away without say- ing good-bye ; he must have got angry with me. 21. That prince has powerful enemies. 22. That lady, ])eing ill, has not come to-day. 23. Those children, having finished their work, have gone out, 24. Those so called learnfed men, who really know nothing, are very tiresome. 25. Who is that man going past ? 26. That is the would-be nobleman. 27. England has the most powerful fleet in the world. 28. That little girl, having been ill, cannot go to scliool. 29. Our friends, being tired, have gone to bed. 30. Seriously speaking, that young man is not wor- thy of being respected. 31. Those children appear to be well. 32. It the population of the towns goes on increasing, and that of the country diminishing, we shall probably have great misfortunes. 33. I saw him coming down the street, before I met you. 34. While travelling, I saw many astonishing things. 35. Did you not see my brothers going out? The Past Participle. 367. The past participle is used, (1) without auxiliary, (2) with etre, (3) with avoir (or etre used as avoir). 368. Without Auxiliary. A past participle without any auxiliary has the force of an adjective (attributive, predicative, appositive), and agrees like ar. adj. in gender and number with the word qualilled : Des fetes donn^>e8 par le roi. Les battus ; Ics morts. Le pass6 n'est plus h nous. Jean et Marie semblent fatigues. Tenez les portes fermees. II me regard»^rent lHouu^s. Festivities given by the king. The beaten ; the dead. The past is no longer ours. John and Mary look tired. Keep the doors closed. They looked at me astonished. S68^370.] THE PAST pahticiple. 233 Vu les difficulties. T • <. . r^ .. ^^ view of the difficultiV*, I^xeept. eux ; eux except.. Except the. ; thfytrpted. huch are: Approuv6, attendu, certlfl6 collatlnnn^ non co.npri«, entendu, excepts ouV *"''' *'^"'^"«»"'^' ^ comp^is, ; ^. , excepts, ouY, pay6, passd, suppose, vu etc Vous recevez ci-ioint coDie Pf^ v • , "■^I'li-ie. ^.. •• J Woie^ci-;-oil une (la) copi^,Ttr ''' ''''' '''• ^^le^!ollJ(^J. i^t P-'^^-Pl« With etre agrees ives, §324) : ^ ^ ^^'^ compound tenses of reflex- They are (have been) beaten. Mary and Louisa have come. They have gone out. The ladiee iiaving come. TT , ^^^ ^^^^^ ^^ having been wounded II itB.it vom, ai entendue chanter. The lady I heard sing(ing). Les enfants que j'ai vu battre. The children I saw beaten. h. After du, pu, voulu, os6, with auxiliary force, a governing mfin. IS either expressed or implied ; hence no agreement : Jai lu tous les livres que jai pu I read all the books that I could (lire). (read). But Les hvres que j ai voulus. The books I wished. f. Fait + ivjin. is invartahle : Les iiK^decins qu'il a fait venir. The doctors he sent for. d. The past part, of avoir t\ is variaOle or mrariaUe : Leslettresquejai eu ^eues)alire. The letters I had to read. 5. The relative pron, que is sometimes direct object of a verb ni a follownig que clause (either fully expressed or implied) and hence the past participle is invariable: Dos choses que j ai cru qu il ferait. Things I thought he would do. ' J ai lu les hvres quil a voulu (que I read the books which he wished j^ i^sse). (me to read). EXERCISE LXIII. Kile s'y est plu. She liked it there. V'ous etes-vous bien ainus^ ? Did you have a good time ? ElioR se sont donn6 la main. They liave shaken hands. Kllcs se sont brouiliees. They have fallen out. Les grandes chaleurs qu'ii a fait. The great heat that tiiere has been. '' r i I,' 236 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [371, 372. h* ■ 1- 1 <»., • i» H> > ■ 1 ■'• ■i-.II '"iM I^JI ■:::ti 1 ' • ;.' "..M 1 '^ < l«l 1. That is the old lady whom I saw fall in the street yesterday. 2. She fell in front of Mr. Simon's, and I helped her to get up. 3. Our friends have gone away, but they will come back to-morrow. 4. Your mother has been in the country ; how did she like it there ? 5. She en- joyed herself (tliere) very much ; she intends to go back again soon, 6. Your sister and mother have come. 7. You will find enclosed [a copy of the contract which we have signed. 8. The ten hours that he has slept have not been enough to rest him. 9. The children had "a good time to-day at the picnic. 10. Where is the servant ? 11. I have let her go to see her friends. 12. Thone are the three miles that I ran to (pour) fetch the doctor. IS. Those are the dangers we have incurred to save our councry ! 14. She remembered the dangers I had incurred 15. Did those two ladies shake hands ? 16. No ; they did not even look at each other. 17. Those ladies have written each other many letters 18. There are the letters I wrote. 19. Those young ladies have fallen out, and have burnt tlie letters they wrote to each other. 20. They have said good-bye to each other. 21. They liave lost what they have given each other. 22. The great heat that there has been has killed the crops. 23. The person I askedfprierj to sing will not sing. 24. What «iifSculty we have had to remember what y„u told us ! 25. The crops are poor this year ; the great heat has killed tliem. 26. That is the house ^vluch we had built. 27. How many houses they have built ! 2S. How many beautiful houses they liave had built ! 29. I'luit is the lady we heard sing at the concert last eveniag. 30. Those are the children we saw playin- this morning. 31. Those are the beautiful songs we heard sung at the concert. 32. Do you remember the houses we saw l)eing built last year ' 33. There is a letter which I forgot to put in the post. 34. He has read all the books he could. 35. There are the books we sent for. 36. We have told them to go out. 37. Those are the books which I thought he would read. Government op Verbs. 372. Transitive^. 1. A transitive verb g-overns a direct object, as in P]n^lish : J'ai <5crit la lettre (des lettres). I wrote the letter (letters). 2. A transitive can have only one direct object ; other substantives related to it must stand as indirect object or as prepositional complement : Pardonnez lui ses p6eli6s. Pardon him his sins. Je donne le cl6 ii la flUo. I give the girl the thimbln. Je lui donne le d6 avec plafsir. I gi vo her the thimble with pleasure. Je conseille h mon flls d'allor. I advise my son to go. 372-374.] GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 237 a. By an extension of this principle, the verb fulro=« make,' 'cause to,' eto..+ t>i/nK rciuiros an mdir. personal object, when the iafin. has a flir. obj. ; otherwise not : Je fais lire ce livre h mon flls. I make my son read this book Je lul fais lire ce livre. I ,„ake him rea.l this book nuf : Je fais lire mon AN. I m,ike my son read. Je le fais lire. J make him read. h. Lalssor, voir, entendre, ouYr, may have, and frequently do have tlie same construction : Laiasez-le (-lul) lire le livre. Je r (111!) ai vu jouer ce role. Biif. : Laissez lire Tenfunt. Let him read the liook. I saw hiia j)lay that part. Let the child read. 378. Iiitraiisitives. An intransitive verb can have 110 direct object,- but may, ofcoiir.se, luive an indir obi or a. i)repositionaI complement : II parle h ce soidut. H,. i^ speaking to that soldier II lui parle de la guerre. He speaks to him of the war. a. A very few intransitives govern a direct object anomalously : Oil avez-vous pass6 V6t6 ? Where dwl vn,i r^.^c^ u '^ *' "^^^ "iti you pass the summer ? II va tout droit son ehe.nln. He goes straight on his way. XOTR. -Many verbs serve both as tra>mth,rs a.Kl i>itransifive^: 'il est descendu ire'i'ture':''''''""' *""'"'' ' " " ^^■'"^"'^" '' *'^'^'''- (t-"--), 'Ho has taken do.n 374. Predicative Compleiuoi.t. Nouns are used predicatively after certain verbs, as follows :— 1. In nominative relation : Ih sent Ang:lal.s (luMeoins). They are Englishmen (doctors). i'Jle est morte jeune fllle. She died a young girl. Such verbs are : '■icnieurer, remain. ilL'\eiiic, become. enU'tr, enter. Otre, be. Otre cense, he supjwsed. -. In awusatim relation : ^" '^' ^''' •-"*■ Tb.y made him king. .le le oonnais honnete homme. I know him to be an honest man. monrir, die. iiaitre, he born. paraitre, appear. passer, pass. rester, retnain. sembler, seem. sortir, ,70 out. etc. il ' m m ^'m III 238 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 'W f . •A I'KJSr [374. 375. Such verbs are appeler, call. coiironner, crown, croire, hili'cre. (Iu(!larer, declare. dlire, elect. 86 niontrer, nhov one's silj, iiommer, name. proclaiiier, proclaim. savoir, kmnv. etc. estiiner, cuteein. faire, make. se faire, hecome. instituer, institute. juger, jiidz/e. 375. Prepositional Coiiiplciiicnt. The use of de and ji ,'iloiic presents special dimculty, since otlier prepo- sitions have, in general, their usual literal Ibrce :— 1. Some yer1)s with do have tiie force of an Eng-lisli tramitive, do being- untranslated : II iii6clit rte ses voisiiis. He shiiuIcrH his neiglibours. II no jouit de rien. He ciij oy s nothing. abuser de, misuse. se duineMre de, rcxign. se int:ficr de, mistrust. discoiiveiiir de, deny. (louter de, suspect, doubt. ,se doiiter de, suspect. t'Linir de, Iwmoan. jouir de, enjoy. iiuiiiquer de, lack. nu'dire de, slander. 2. Simibirly, sonic verbs with h have the force of an English transifive, a being- untranslated : II obeit h son pferc. He obeys his futlier. Je lul Hi r68i8t6. I have resisted liiiii. Such verbs are : aller 5,, Jit, suit. arriver h,, reach. atteriter h, attempt. eonipatir a, pity. convenir .'i, ,ardonner a, pardon. parvenir.'i, attain. perinettre a, permit. persuader \, persuade. plaire k, please. promettre it, promise. reint'dier a, vmedy. renoncer h, renounce. rL^pondre k, answer. register a, rtsist. resseinbler a, resemble. 8ucc(5der k, succeed. survivre k, survive. etc. 375.] COVEJtNxMENT OV VERBS. 239 Such verbs are : aooepter, accept of, iwliiu'ttre, adtnit of. approuver, approve of. attondre, wail for. chercher, look fur. demander, auk for. payer, pan for. d6sirer, winhfor. regarder, look at. 6couter, listen to. rcMcoiitrer, meet witL envoynrc\wrcher, mid for. souhaiter, ivishfor. espiirer, hope fur. etc. 4. De iind h frequently have, as compared with Eng-- lish, a special idiomatic Ibrcc with certain verbs : (Jela (It^peiul do vous. ■ That deponds on you. Pensez it voire devoir. Tliink of your duty. Such verbs are : s'atHiwer de, rt^e heriterde qqu., be heir of. " de qqch., inherit. i: K 240 FRENCH ORAMMAR. ] 4 lit ,...„> 4. , Jouerqqii., npceive. |,r,j,il la lecliiro ot lo diant. Ho bams »„?i„„ „. . • Aj<- it-ciixis reading and snigin<^ II aime et respecte son oiioio it ^ i i Ti • «"cic. Ho loves luul respects liis iin<.l« II aime son onolo et Inl .,1,/.;^ ir. i , ■'p^-^it. ius uncle. " '"^ '^- l^'^ ^^>^-«« iiud obeys his uncle. EXERCISE LXIV. II se croit honnete l^onane. He thinks he is an honest man II ne s en est pas aperv.i. He did not notice it Ce chapeau ne hii va pas. That Juat <1oe,s not fit him II ne (nousiest pas permis cle . . . We are not permitted to Jo e hu ax pay<^. I paid him forit. Je 1 en a, remerci6. i thani^ed hin. for it Je pense -X vous. j ,,„ .junking ,.f you Que pensez-vous de cela 1 ^Vhat do you think of that ? 1. We shall make them do their work o Th^v /«„ i i suffer ereat ills «? at man. 10. He thinks ho is [a] Hoho ar. 11. I kn..w he in [a] .scholar. 12 We nhouhl not BJandor our iieighhr.urs. IH. 1 porceive.l their dejection, as Hoon as I came in ; ,lid .von ? {.vo mH). 14. No, 1 did not notice it. ID. We cannot do with- out our ho<,k8 ; we are going to n.sc them to-morrow. Ki. I romt-mber ll.e sorrows you ma.le me undergo. 17. These glove-s do not fit me. IS. lliat young la.ly s gloves do not fit her. 19. I .shall look for a hotise which suits me bettor (see §350, 1). 20. That house does not suit our friends. 21. 1 cannot trust hiiv ; he often lies. 22. The 8,m re- .somblcs his father. 2:i ^Vo are not permitted to leave the city U. 1 he law or IViiiello ; Un t'lephant male, (reinelle). A he- (hIip.) elephant. c. Some nouns are/w. ouly, whether applied to males or females : cautioM, Kuretij. i)erHoiiiie, pei-Kon. vedette, Kc«iif. Mmimmn.m'.c,acijuai.ntance. privliiiiu-, t'vsttniwr. viotiiiu-, ni,tim. (liil)e, dupe. recnu', ircniif. vigie, lk-oiU mail. tfaiiacho, blockhead. seiitinelle, i^rntinel. etc. 2. Thv. Mloiyiu}!; live tnascnlhie : — (1) Nnmos oi' at rdinal points iiiul mnds: Le nord ; le sud ; le zephyr. The north ; the south ; the zephyr. a. Feminine exceptions are : bise, north wind, inoussoii, nwnnoon. tramontane, north wind. lirise, breeze, (2) Names of .sea.swi.s; months, days (of the week) : Le printemps ; oetohre ; liiiidi. Spring ; October ; Monday. (3) Names of count t'ies (not in -e) : Le Canada; le Dauphine ; le Chili. Canada; Dauphiny ; Chili. (t) Most names of mountains (not in -es) and mosr names ot rivers : Le Hartz ; le Jura ; les Appenins. Harzmts. ; mt. Jura; the Appenines. Le Volga ; le Rhone ; le Rhin. The Volga ; the Rhone ; the Rhine. But fern. • Les Alpes (Pyri'-nt'cs, Vosges, etc.). a. The rivers of France in -e are nearly aXl feminine : ■ La Seine (Loire, etc.). The Seine (Loire, etc.). (5) Names of trees and .shrubs : Le chene (bouleau, Arable, pommier). The oak (birch, maixte, apple-tree). a. Feminine exceptions are : aub(?pine, hnvihorn, t^bfene, ebony. ronre, hmnitilf hminiaine, buckthorn. ('•})iiu>, fhnni, vi!,T!(>, Hue. l^rayisre, heath, lii^ble, dwarf -elder. viomo, ivild clematis. 380.] GENDEIl OF NOUNS. 243 (()) Nniiu's of weights and measures (metrical system) : IJu m.Hri! (gi-ainnie, litro, otc). A motio (grainnio, litre, etc.). (7) N.'imtjs of metals ami chemmjls: Le fer (or, cuivrc, argent, 8iili)luite). Iron (gold, copper, silver, sulphate). a. Feminine exctjHions are : fonte, cant-iron. t61t', nheet-iron. (H) Words and phrases not nouns when used as nouns : I.e beau; le hlauc ; le fnui(,ai8. The beautiful ; white ; French. I'll a ; nil iiiais ; uii oui-.liro. An ' a' ; a ' but ' ; a rumour, l-e (levant (derriire) de la main. The front (l)ack) of tlie hand. a. Adjs. referring to concirete objects have tlie gender of the noun understood ; for letters of the alphabet, see also §1, note 3 : Hue belle (ttc. dame, femme, etc.). A beauty. Line capitalc (tic. ville, lettre). A capital. 3. Tlie following arc feminine : — (1) Names oi' count ri'es in -o : La Franc*! (Asie, Norniandie). France (Asia, Normandy). rt. Mascidine exceptions are : liT!enj,'ale,'/Jmi/a?. k' yU-x\qx\o, Mfxicn. lo Pi;'lopon(ii)6se, Peloponnesua. It' llanovro, Ifunomir. le Maiiio, i»/ffr;ic(iti Fr.). etc. (2) Most names of cities and towns {ospeciiiUy in -o, -os) : Rome ; Athones ; Tyr ; Ilion. Rome ; Athens ; Tyre ; Ilium. a. Masculine exceptions are : Ic Caire, Cairo. Londres, London. Paris, Paris. It Havre, Havre. Versailles, Veraailles. eta NoTRK.— 1. Any name of a town or city is masc. as a collective : ' Tout Rome le sait,* ' All lioiiu' knows if 2. In ciwe of doubt as to the gender, the name may always be I'reoeded by la vlllo (lo = ' the town (city) of.' (3) Names of Jiolydays (feto do being understood) : La Saint-Martin ; la mi-juin. Martinmas ; mid-June. a. Observe: Noiil (or la Noel, or la fete de Noel), Christmas. (4) Names of arts, scietices, trades: La peinture (chimie, librairie). Painting (chemistry, lK)ok-trade). a. Trinoipal exception : 1« deasin, drawing. .^nLJL. JfU tU ' '•( i'j I'K,.***)**! f j I ,||il<»*M«i'< J »h^ »ns f !***f»£2 '!■•». 244 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [381. 1. MascuUne are most 381. Gender by Endings. nouns ending' as follows : — (1) In .'I voiml sound (not -e mute) : Unop(5m(cot6,chapcan,chevou.) An opera (aide, hat, hair). Un parti (zero, caillou, tissu). A party (zero, pebble, tissue). a. Feminine excejdions are : gu6rma, f/uenlla. moiti6, half. gntiii-]»^rchii, (/utta-pcrcha. founni, ant. polku, polka. iiuM-cl, rncrc}/. raz/Aii, raid. foi, faith. toDibolji, charity-lottery. loi, law. veranda, verandah. paioi, wall. cit6, city. virajfo, viraijo. Further, abstr-.ets hi -t6, -tie : amxti^, friendship. liberty, Hhcrty. GYio.r\t6, ciutrity. ' ]ntiru, daxujhter -in-law. glu, hinl-lime. triliti, tribe. vertn, virtue. can, n-ater. pejiu, Kkin. etc. sant6, health. etc. clef, keij. nef , nhij), nave. soif, thirst. faiiii, hunyer. fa,(;,on, fashion. fin, end. le(,'on, lesson. main, haml. raiH^on, ransom. chair, flesh. cour, court. cuillcr, spoon. Tner, sea. tour, Unvcr, brtbis, sheep. fois, time. oasis, oasis. souris, mouse. ^•i8, screw. dent, tooth. dot, dower. forut, forest. ^,'eiit, ^n'te. niort, A!rt^/t. nuit, /(/(//if. part, ;)«/•«, ,s7mre. chaux, lime. croix, cross. faux, scythe. noix, walnut. paix, peace. pcrdi'ix, partriihje. iwix,j)itch. toux, covyh. voix, t'oicc. etc. !.>82, a) Further, nouns in -son, -ion and most ab.,iracLs in -eur (ef. chanson «o«,,. nation, nation. Uivvxiv, favour. maison, house. occasion, ocasion. fnreur fury ra.^^on, reason. possession, ;«,,v,v,,v.v,V«,,. penr./mr. ' trahison, treason. coulcur, eoloiir. etc. (3) In -aclo, -agre, -asme, -ej?e, -erne, -isuie, -tero : Le spectnclo (voyuffc, sarcas.no. The spectacle (journey, sarcasm, colk^sro, diadinie, magn^tisnie, college, (t!ic (of n book). pla;,e, beach. rage, raye. SSI, 382.] GENDER OF NOUNS. 245 2. Femimne arc most nouns ending as follows :— (1) In -o preceded by a vowel or double conmnmit • Uneann^o (vie vuo, rale, sole, A year (life, sight, streak, silk, roue, pluie, famiHe, fla.nmo, wheel, rain, family, flame, crown, couronne, tnstesse, botte). sadness^ boot). a. For exceptiom, see dictionary. (2) In -ace, -ade, -aiice, -enco, -eiiso, -iere, -oire -ude, -lire : » , v., La pr^faee i.ahuio, constunce. The preface (sahul, constancy, pr^'^ence defense, hnni6re, presence, defence, light, lustory, histoire, habitude, culture). habit, culture). a. For excejnioji.s, see dictionary. r{82. Gender by Derivation. 1. Nouns derived from Latin 7mscs. are regularly masc. : Mur (L murum) ; livre (L. lihrnm) ; Wall ; book ; order ; poet, ordre (L. ordmem) ; po^te (L. 2)oeta). a. Exceptions are not uncommon (see dictionary) ; Latin ma.c. ah- strac'i, in -or (ace. -oreui) have become/em. (except m. honneur, cl6s- hoimeur, labeur, amour) : candeur, f. (L. candarem), candour. *f.'()uleur, f. (L. colnrem), colour. douleur, f. (L. dolorem), pain. Jlfa.c in Huch phrases as 'couleur de feu,' 'couleurde rose, etc.. ..^., .ceruhan est d un beau couleur de rose.' "'■•.<•;/., ce ruuan 2. Nouns derived from Latin /em*-, are reg-ularly fem • Justice (LJusiUian^ ; charit6 (L. cari- Justice; charity; hand"; faith. iatem); mam {L.ma>mm);ioi{L.Jide}n). a. Exceptiom are not uncommon (see dictionary). 3. Nouns derived from Latin ^e^ijfm- arc reg-ularlym/?.s'c • Corps(L. eorpn.);iev{L.ferrumy,ov Body ; iron ; gold ; meadow ; cen- (L. aurum); pr6 (L. pratum)', siecle tury ; verb. (L. scmdum); vcrbe (L. verbuni). a More than a hundred nenterplurs. in -a have become fem. dnrj. in French, just as xf derived from nouns in -a of the Lat. 1st declension «.i e (L. data\ date. si-.ihw (L. a,;,naX ,e<^L ,.,i,vre (h mJnS nn-l- dette (L. dch[ta\ debt. ),„ile (I, nl„\ nil ,^ ^ ^' itudon .i,^-s . 7 "UHLU.. w^- erreur, f. (L. errorem), error. fureur, f. {\.. Jurorvm\ fury. etc. Wl.! ^i Ell iiJ 1^"; ft < I iti I: . ' ,■■*'•-» Met' 246 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [383. 388. Nouns of Double Gender. 1. Some nouns de- noting persons (mostly in -e) and adjs. in -e, when so used, are either masc. or fern. : Vn (uno) artiste ; un (unc) dlfeve. An artist ; a pupil. Un (nne) malade ; uu (uno) rebelle. A patient ; a rebel. Such nouns are : aide, asswtant. »enfant, child. propri(5taire, owner. caniarade, annrade. esclave, slave. pupiHe, ward. coinpatnote, com^mtriot. locataire, tenant. etc. . *Al\vays mane, in the pliir. 2. The meaning of some nouns varies with the gender • Un critique ; une critique. A critic ; a criticism. Le mode ; la mode. The mode, mood (gram. ) ; the fashion, ouch nouns are : Masc. asuistniit, alder, crape, critic, (juard (mil.), keeper, guide, book, handle, mdinoire, itiemorandum, memory. inerci, thanks, mercj/, pity. mode, mode, mood, fashion. moule, mould, m^issel. mousse, cabin-boy, moss. office, service, larder. 3 The following nouns are masc. or fern., either with identical or closely related meaning :_ a. Apr68-n.idi=.' afternoon' and autonino-' autumn' are usuaflv masc., sometimes /ew. 6. An,our(m.)-=' love,' Moved object,' 'passion,' ' amour '; mnour (f. s. poet.) = ' passion,' 'amour' j mnonrs (f. pi. )^' passion,' 'amours ' c DMice-' delight' and orffue=' organ ' (mus.) are ma.sc. in sing. &ndf(m. in jjliir. '' d. Hymne (m.)=.' hymn,' 'song of praise'; hynme (f.)=.' (church) hymn (more usually 'cantique.' m.). 6. Couple (m.H' couple,' 'pair' (joined by affection, sentiment, etc.) ; couple (f.)=.' couple,' 'two' (two like objects taken together): Un couple d'amantft. A uair of lovers Uno couple d'amfs. Two (a couple of) eggt Note : Une palre de gants, etc. A pair of gloves, etc. aide, aune, crfipe, criti(nic, parde, guide, livre, manche. Fkm. assistant, help, ell. ■ 2)ancake. criticism, keeper, body of troops, 2vatch, hilt, rein, pound, sleeve. Masc. Fem. page, jmye, imge{ofabook). pendule, 2><'ndnlui,i, clock. pofile, stove, pall, frying-pan. politi(iue, politician, politics. poste, 2wsition, post-office. somme, sleep, tiap, sum. souris, smile, mouse. stntuaire, sculptor, sculpture. tour, turn, trick, tower. trompette, trumpeter, trumpet. vapeur, steamer, steam. vase, vase, slime, mud. voile, veil, sail. etc. 383, 384] GENDER OF NOUNS. 247 /. Pflquo or pftques (m. s.)=' Easter ' ; pAques fleurles (f. pl.W ' Palm Sunday ' (so also in other phrases) ; pftquo (£.)=:' passover.' " g. Orge (f.)-' barley ' is masc. in orge mond6 (porl6)=' pot- (pear]-) barley . ' A. Foudre (£.)=' thunderbolt' is sometimes masc. in poetry or ele- vated prose ; foudre (m.) in le foudre de Jupltcr=' Jove's thunder- bolt ' and in figurative expressions, e.g., un grand foudre de guerre- ' a great warrior. ' i. (Euvre (f.)= ' work,' 'works,' is sometimes masc. in elevated style ; ojuvre (m. s.) = ' works' (collectively of an engraver or musician) ; lo grand oiuvre = 'the philosopher's stone'; le gros ceuvro^'helvy stone-work ' ; de I'oeuvre (m.)==' silver-lead.' j. Gens (pi. m. or f. ) = « people,' ' persons, ' etc. Attributive adjs. are fern, when preceding and masc. when following gens, but predicatives (before or after) are masc. 'All ' is translated by toutes only when aUrihutive and separated from gens by an adj. variable for the fern. ; otherwise by tous : Resolute old people. The small people and the great. Thanks, good people, thanks. Happy (are) the good-hearted. All the old people. All the clever people. All these people. All are good people. The people are all here. De viellles gens rd^solus. Les pctites gens et les grands, Merci, bonnes gens, merci. Heureux les gens de bon coeur. Toutes les vieilles gens. But : Tous les habiies gens. Tous ces gens-ci. Tous sont de bonnes gens. Les gens sont tous ici. Notes.— 1. Apron, to which gens is antecedent is masc: 'Les g-ens qui sont Venus,' 'The people who have co».: .■ 2. Gens in expressions like gens de robe - ' lawyers ' and in j eunes gens - ' youn^' men ' is always ma.sc. ♦i84. Formation of the Feminine. Most noans de- mtmg living beings distinguish the masc. and fern, as to Mows : — 1. Some by a different icord : M. bi.euf, ox, bouc, he-goat. <;oq, cock. fi'ei'e, brother. lioinme, man. F. vache. eh6vre. poule. soeur. femme. M. mari, husband. oncle, nncle. parrain, god-father. pore, pig. etc. F. femme. tante. marraine. truie. etc. W'3 H I' »,«••«**) 111 Zi'}i ' .'■»,- :-3 u It ;f:=.i 248 FRENCH GRAMMAR. a. The fern, forta is often obviously cognate : M. F. ambassadeur, ambassador, ambassadrice. canard, drake, *clianteur, singer, cochon, hog. conipagnon, companion dindoii, turkey-cock. empereur, emperor. cane. cantatrice. coche. conipagne. (linde. inipiiratrice. *Al8o in -ease, see §415, 2, (2), a. 2. Some by adding -esse to the last consonant : M, gouverneur, tutor. loup, wolf. mulct, iimlc. *procureur, proxy. serviteur, servant. vieillard, old man. etc. pS'i, F. gouvernante. loHve. mule. procuratrice. servante. vieille. etc M. abb6, abbot. S,ne, ass. chauoiiie, canon. coiiite, count. (liable, devil. clri)le, rogue. druide, druid. bote, host. F. abbesse. riuessu. chanoinesse. cointesse. diablesse, drolesse. druidesse. liotesse. maitrtsse. M. ogre, ogre. pair, peer, pauvre, pauper. pretre, priest. prince, 2^ri7ice. Suisse, Swiss. tigre, tige.r, traitre, traitor. etc. maitrt, master. a. So also the following, but with changes in the stem F. ogrosse. pairesse. pauvresse. pretresse. princesse. suissesse. tigre.sse. traitresse. etc. M. dieu, god. doge, doge, due, duke. larron, thief. ni'gre, negro. patron, patron. proph6te, jrrophet. bailleur, lessor. F. ddesse. dogaresse. duchesse. larronnesse. ni^gresse. patronnesse. prophtl'tesse. bailleresse. M. *chasseur, huntsman, dtifendeur, defendant. *demandeur, plaintiff. enchanteur, enchanter. p^cheur, sinner. *veiKleur, seller (law), vengeur, avenger. P chasseresse. dcifenderesse. demanderesse. enchanteresse. pt5cheresse. venderesse. vengeresse. *Also in -euse, see §415, 2, (2), n. 3. A few nouns take -iiie ; czar, czar. czarlne. Philippe, Philip. Philipply©. h^ros, hero. h^roYne. etc. etc. 4. Most Other nouns follow the analog-y of adjs. of like termination, and will be noted under the Adjective. EXERCISE LXV. I. Tell the servant to put the frying-pan on the stove. 2. That man is a regular dupe. 3. He is not a friend ; he is a mere acquaintance. 384-386.] NUMBER OF NOUNS. 249 4. Ho was received with all the honours. 5. That poet is always sing- ing of his first love. 6. The errors of men are numerous. 7. The old man has (fairc) a nap after dinner. 8. He paid me a large sum of money. 9. My memory is not good ; give nie a memorandum of that affair. 10. Steam makes the steamer go. 1 1. That man and his wife are a happy couple. 12, I have Hugo's works at home. \X The works of the sculpor P.aryo were exhihited in Paris in 1889. 14. Old people are generally less thoughtless than young people. 15. Those people !kre not all good. 16. All those people were present. 17. All good people are worthy of respect. 18. All the clever people in (de) the town were present at the ball. 19. Hajipy [are] the people who do not love vice. 20. All the young men of the village were present at the Liclebration. Number of Nouns. 385. General Rule. The plural of a noun is regu- larly formed by adding- s to the sing : Roi(8) ; reine(8) ; ville(8); jardin(8). King(8) ; (iueen(8) ; town(s) ; garden(8). 386. Principal Exceptions. The following are the principal exceptions to the above rule : 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -z remain unchanged in the plur. ; so also invariable twrds when used as liouns : Le bras ; la voix ; le nez. The arm ; the voice ; the nose. Los bras ; les voix ; les nez. The arms ; the voices ; the noses. Los oui et les iion ; les on dlt. The uyes and noes ; the rnniours. I'iusiours pen font un beaucoup. Many littles make a ' muckle.' 2. Nouns in -un, -eu and seven in -ou take -x : Noyau(x) ; chateau(x) ; jeu(x), Kernel(s) ; castle(s) ; game(8) ; vow(8). vaHi(x). The seven nouns in -on are : hijou(x), jeioel. . genou(x), knee. caillou(x), pebble. hibou(x), owl. chou(x), cabbage. But: Glou(8), Tiail, sou(8), half -penny, etc. 3. Most nouns in -al change -al to -au and add -x as above : General ; eheval ; journal. General ; horse ; newspaper. Gd'n6raax ; chevaux ; journanx. Generals ; horses ; newspapers. joujou(x), toy. pou(x), Jou^e. I. s ! :r ' f i: i ■• .IF-- J I '•' HI ■i 250 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [3«6-388. a. But the following, and a few ran^r ones in -al, are rejjular . aval(8), I'lidorseuient. bal(8), haU{for ihindivj). (N'il(s), calhmty. rariiaval(8), curniml. ch&(:a,\(B), jackal. r(5j,'al(8), treat. 4. The followiiij^- in -ail luivc the plural in -aux : l)all (-aux), /ease. travail (-aux), work. vitrail (-aux), sf.ain- corall (-aux), coral, vnnlull {-aux), jhldiiKj-door. ed-(jcasii nnitdoiv. '30ui)irail (-aux), ventail (-aux), rtntail. air-hole. But: details), detail ; (!;ventail(8)s/a?i, etc., arc retjidar. NoTK. — Hestiaux (pi.), cattle ia often y;\\m as the plur. of b6tall, cattle ; it 's from an obsolete form bestiail, parallel to betall. 5. Gout - ' race,' ' tribe,' has the plural «-eiis = ' i)eople,' etc. NoTR.— A sin' ilar omission of t in the plur. of nouns in -aut, -ent, now archaic, is maintained in the kevuc des deux Mondes, e.g., enfans for e^ifanta. 387. Double Plurals. The following have tico plural forms, mostly with varying meaning : aicul (aieiix), aneestor. " (ai'eula), (jrandfather ail (aiilx), tjarlic. " (ails), " ciel (cieux), sly, heaven, climate. <.eil (yeux) eye. " ((ells-) in compounds, e.g. cuils-de-ba'uf, oval ivindoicn. pal (paux), pale, utake. " (pals), " " " {Gieh),hed-tet:iter,skt/{inpai')it- travail (travaux), ivork. inej), roof {of a (juarry). " (travails), re/jori (o/ a mms- ter, etc. ), h7-ake {for horse-shoeing). Ohs : Tlie x plur. reg\ilarly has the literal lueaninj,'- of the word. 388. Forcif;ii Nouns. Nouns of foreign origin take -s usually only Avhcn fully naturalized, but usage varies greatly (see dictionary) : — a. Partial list of variahle foreign nouns : acoeHit,(8), honourable men- bill(s), hill, tion. dvio(s), duo. aU)uni(s), album. jury(8% jxry. alibi(s), alibi. opiH"a(.^), !:pe.ra. bifteck(s), heefsfcak. pensu!.i(8), tai^k, b. Partial list of invayhthie foreign nouns : amen. item. interim. post-scriptum. vade mecum d6flc.it. in-folio. n-agnificat. requiem. veto. facsimile. in-octavo. 'lotu bene. Te Deuiu. etc. toast(8), toant. tram way(8), atreet-ra ilway. vivat(.s), hurrah. etc. 0^ 38^.s• .'ina a(ljectlm.s. Tiie folloujn- are spcciial rules :-^ *" I. (^ompouiKls «vY^/)«^ hyphen are treated as one word and tullow the (jeneml rules: Portemanteau(x) ; grancrnK,re(8). ^^alise(s) ; gran,lniother(M). a. Except iovft are : monsa.,uHn.css.ou..s), M.-.. sir, etc. n.on.d.ncu.. (.n.s..i.„..„..H), Lv /.r.. 2 Wlien placed in juxtaposition and connected hv a hyphen imu?is and mljs. are variable: Chof(s)-lieu(x) ; c]iou(x)-fleur(«) ; County-t„wn(.s) ; cauliflovver(s) ; grana(H)-p6re(«). granafather(«). a. Demi- is invariable in compounds : Desdemi-heures. Half-hours. ^. Furtlier excerptions are : l.lanc-seinjf(s), siijnature in blank. terre-p]eln(s), platform. dievau-h'.-er(8), liijht.h,r»cman. etc. ' '" "^ ' /;// .^y^"" nouns joined by preposition and hyphens the jit St only IS variable : Arc(8)-en-ciel ; c]ief(s)-d'ceuvre. Rainbow ; masterpiece. a. The preposition do is sometimes iindtr-stood itST'"'/""' •;■";"*''• xn-{cu, b,;- rand ,oup Pied-ii-terre, temporary lodinff. roveille-niatin, rf/rjrHi.-(7r« ^. c()',i|)t'-g-()i'{,'-o, mt-throftt placi: ppfci-rn i^'c, snoir-ihini, HtTre-Lotu, liiud-hand. criive-wuur, heart-break, pric-difii, /irft!/in;/->itvuL eto. contre-poisoii, anluiote. boule-eii-traiii, joll if fellow. h. On the other hand, a final noun of clearly phir, sense retains -8 in the ,n)iij : un (des) casHO-noiscttes, nut-craeker. uii (di's) i>()rtf-di'i:'H, turnkey. un (dcs) cuire-dc'JitH, footh-tn'ck. etc. 5. InvarluhU' yw>y/.s' (verb, adv., prop., etc.) arc hirari- ahle ill cuinpoiiiuls : Des on dlt ; des puHHu-piirtont. l-vumours ; ii\ister-keys. a. tJjirdc- is lusually rariahle in compounds denoting 2f. The two Itiirincs. Les Coraellle et Ics Racine de la The Cornellles and R.-iclnes of tlie sc6ne. stage (/. c, Corneille, Racine ana others like them). Les Duval sont arrives. (The) Dnvals have come. a. A few Latin nameH (originally plur. in form) and certain well- known historical names of families and dynasties take -s : Les Bourboiiw Ta.'S Ciisars. Lea Co)id(^8. b. Names of persons used as common nouns to denote ' persons like ' f)r ' works by ' those named are often variable, but usage is not H,xed : Les Corneilles sont rares. Corneilles are rare, J'ai vu deux Raphaels. ■ I saw two Raphaels. Bui : Les Hamlet ; les La Fontaine ; les (Joetlie ; les Washington, etc. 2. Names of places take -s when tlie idea is plur. : Les Tnd'!H ; l<.%s Vosges. The Indies ; the Vosgea. Les deux Romes. The two Romes (*, e. , the old and new). Lfs 0rac(nie8. Les Pharaons. Les Tudors Lua Guilts. Les Scipions. etc. Les Horaces. Les Stuarts. 391, 392.] CASE RELATION AND AGREEMENT. 253 lea does not retains -8 in C3 mrari- rtaiii well- Case Relation and Agreement of Nouns. .•{})1. Case KelntioiiH. The noun in French (h)es not vary in form to denote case ; it is used : — 1. With verbs, as suhjecf, obj<>d, jn-edkate (cf. P72-4) : Le p^ro aiino sou AIh. Tlie father loves his son. .Tean est dovenu soldat. John lias become a soldier. 2. In apposif}(ms and witli adjccfrnd force : Henri TV, rol de France. Hcinry IV., King of France. Un roi onfsiiit. A child king. H. After j)rej)ns/.ffn)hs : J'ai parle i'l son pi^ro. I liave spoken to his father. 4. Ahmlutely, ^'•enerally with adrerhial forc^e : Le tltner fini, il partit. The dinner ended, he set out. II 6tait \k, le chupcaii u la main. He was tliere (with) his hat in his hand. I came on Saturday. He stayed three hours. I walked ten miles. We bought it for ten francs. Je suis venu sained I. II est rest6 trolH Ii cures. J'ai marche dix inillcs. Nous I'avons acthett'^ dix francs. 5. Vocatively : Bon jour, nies amis. Good morning, my friends. 392. AjLjTccmoiit. A predicate noun, or a noun used adjectivally, usually a^rec^s like an adj. with the word re- ferred to (see ag-reement of the Adjective) : lis (elles) sont Alleniand(e)8. They are Germans. La reine m6re. The queen mother. EXERCISE IvXVI. Tomber h genoux. To fall on one's knees. Le petit bonhomme. The l)rave little fellow. L That man has broken his two arms. 2. The ' ifa ' and the ' buts ' are often convenient words. 3. The criminal fell on his knees before the king. 4. That little boy likes to pick up pebbles. 5. The generals have good liorses. 0. We read the newspapers before going downtown [in] the morning. 7. Frenchmen like carnivals and balls. 8. Our neighbour has some beautiful corals at home. 9. The Minister of Public M-' i*>. .«*••» ► •«* 2'^'* FRENPFl fiUAMMAU. . [392-306. WorkH lias ordered a railway t.. U- ooiiHtructiid. 10. His grandfathers .m; .J iul. II. Our amosLors woro grtwit men wlio left [behind themj many nohlc worka. 12. The poor hoy had tears in his (auj) eyea when ho was told that his bird was dead. i;^. That painter makes beantiful skies. 14. Sevtiral Te Doums were sung this year in that chureh. 15. Give me two postage-stamps, if you please, 16. We had some delightful private inter vi(!ws. 1". Those eorirscrews are useless. 18. Those lunipahiides ii,re very pretty. 19. (Jive me a tooth-pick, if you j)lease. '20. Do not eondemn me on rumours. 21. The two Cor- neilles were ladies waiting for you. 28. (Jood morning, ladies ; h(,w do you do ? 2J). I have visited all the county-towns of that part of France. 30. Many of Moli^re'a works are masterpieces. 'If' >Mmi> ^!*,; THE ARTICLE. 393. The Indefinite Article. Masc. Fkm. un, a fa;/). utn\ a (an). 394. The Definite Article. P. la (1')) M. or F. los, the. Ohs.: For the forms in parentliesis, see §73. 395. Contractions. The prepositions de, c^ -f- le, les, are always contracted as follows : de-t-le=du, k-fle=-au. de + les=de8. i + les-aux. Notes.— 1. No contraction takes place with la. 1'. 2. Formerly en-f-les was con- tracted to fes, a form still used in ticadeinical titles, e. g., 'Maitre ks arts ' 'Master o Arts.' 396. Agrreement and Repetition. The article agrees hi gender and number with its noun, and is regularly 39G-398.J USE OF tite arttcle wrrn nouns. 255 n^pcatcil (n,s also dc, h) Ix'forc^ cnch noun or adjectivo (l ohjcct. Uno maison ot un jardiu. A houso and garden. L« flux et lo rollnx. High an.l low tide. An }.on et lui mauvais cAt«5. On the good and had side. la'H h„n8 et loH mauvais. The good and the Imd. DeH liomincs ou dvn fennnos. Men or women, Lu hmgue frunvai«e ou I'anglaise. The Frt^nch hmgiiage or tlie Knglish. /iuf : Lc hon et pitmx pr.'t re. l ,- k ind and pious priest. L© delta ou hasse lOgypte. The Delta f)r Lower Kgypt. a. The def. art. is vof. rrpmt,d when one adj. precedes houuh joined liy et : Uh principales villes et provinces The principal towns and provinces de la France. ^f France. h. Sing. adjs. in apposition to a plur-. noun oviit the article Los Ungues francaiso et anfflalso. The French and English langiiages. Or: lAi langue franraise et la langue anglaise. La langue fran^;aisc et I'anglaise. c. A few expressions of collective force, like the following, are per- nimihle, but are either not obligatory or are confined to set expressions : Les pt^re et miVe. The parents. Les lui.di et mardi. (On) Mondays and Tuesdays. lAs trois et (puitrc avril. Tlie third and fourtli of April. Les otHciers et soldats. The officers and soldiers. Kcole (ies ponts et chauss^es. School of bridges and roads. d. For the repetition of s^lperlati^■e le, la, Ies, see Comparison of Adjs. Use op the Article with Nouns. .'5f)7. French and En^-Iish a^ree to a considerable ex- tent in tlie use of the article ; dillerences are noted below. 898. The Indefinite Article. 1. Its use corresponds in s-(uieral with that of Eng-. 'a,' 'an'; its plur. is the par- titive des (§401) : ^ . ^ Un homme ; une femme ; des gens. A man ; a' woman ; people. 2. Contrary to Eng-. usags, the indef. art. also commonly stands before a noun denoting an immaterlai object iA 256 FRENCH (JHAAIMAU. m Nil •111 Ml ^"» ' ''ill 1 ■ Itt I" .1W ml '>-»«•*' ill k pJW-401. ^usually ail abstract noun;, when qualijied hy an adi or claiLs(i : ^ ^ J- II montni tin soiii extrt^me. He hIiowcmI extreme care. II a uiio piitience ;\ touto ('•preuvc. He has patience equal to aiiytlnn.'. Kile jouit il'iine Loniie santci. ,Slu! enjoys good health. '^ ' "est uiic iiouvellu triste. It is sad newH. ft. 'I'ho adjective may ho mideratood iii exclamations : VoilA uii« i)ationce ! TJiere is i«itienee for you ! NoTK.-Kor Ht'veml c-iwch in which the Kuw. UuM. i.s ropWHcl l.y the French dcf ,t OT^e verm, or \h oniittt'd, hoc below. 3«)J). The Gciicnil Noun. A noun used in a (/(^tn'ral sense (/. e., 'in ^n;ner;.l,' 'mII,' 'every,' etc., lu-jni;- implied AviMijt) re^nilnrly lias M,e clef. art. in French, thoiiirii n<.t usually in English : ^ Till A'lo est eoiirtc. Lo fer ct lu enivro son t utiles. .r^tiidie la iiiuNl(|ue. Ij08 FrunvalN ainieiit lu jsrioiro. Ijifo is short. Iron ;nid copper are useful. I am studying nuiNio. The French love VTlory, Le chcval est I'anil I(\', • r Mil whoiit'; ' Quel est le prix du hU\ ?, « What Ih the prlee of file wheat '." 402. Partltivo fife wfthoiit Art. The ]).'irtitiveHonse is ("xpirssc'd l>y do aloue-v the. noiui as follows : — 1. When an ndjrctivo i)roct'(l('S the noun ; soiilso, when .'I noun is une gros livres ct de petits {nc. livres). Big books and little ones. But: Den aoldats fian^aia. French soldiers. J'ai du pain blanc. I have white bread. a. The art. is not omitted wlien the noun has a distinctive adjunct : Hu bon papier qu'il a achet^. Some of the good paper he bought. h. The art. is not omitted when adj. and noun are indivisible in sense {i.e., when forming a real or a virtual compound) : Des grands-p^;res ; des petits-fils. Grandfathers ; grandchildren. IK'H petitH pois ; du 1)oii sens. Green peas ; common sense. Des jeunes gens ; do In bonne foi. Young men ; honesty. f. Familiarly, the art. is often used contrary to the rule: Du bon vin ; du vrai bonheur. Good wine ; true happiness. 2. After a general nes-ation (implying non-existence of Mie object in question) : Ho has no (not any) watch, I have no (not any) books. Without having (any) money. He made lio remarks. No money and no friends. 1 1 n'a pas de montre. Je n'ai point do livres. SauBayoir d'argent. II ne fit pas do r«^marques. Pas d'argent et pas d'amis. Wpi ( 7 m fill *t , ^M^ ^ iH .H I > > . , ,,gM if' lit ' ..J It ■•r m III ' ■ -I ii ll u < . »t ;'ii ' ■*' i; ■■ 258 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [402, 408. But the article is not omitted (the neg-ation beino- no longer general) : ^ & ^fe »" a. V7hen the noun h.as a distinctive adjunct : Je n'ai ph.s du vin \^ Robert. 40(5. Article for Possessive. The def. art. is com- monly used with the force of a poss. adi., when no am- biguity arises from its use : t>'p^ m I ill ■ ^M ill . ..I |if U ■n ' « h 'II li ■ *W k-lb »■' 'M • , , ,..'' III 260 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [406-408. Donnez-moi la main. Give me your hand II a perdu la vie. He has lost Iiis life. EUe a otti les gants. She took off lior gloves. a. The use of indir. pron. ohj. +de/. art. often avoids ambiguity : Le courage lul manqua. His courage failed (hiiii). II s'est d6chir6 I'habit, He tore his coat. II lu'a d6chir6 I'habit. He tore my coat. b. Possessive force appears also in avoir mal (froid, cliaiid, etc.), h + def. art. +a nomi denoting part of the person ; similarly, in phiases of personal description made up of avoir + def. art. + noun + adj. : J'ai mal a la tete. I have a headache (my head aclies). II a mal aux yeux. He has sore eyes (his eyes, e1*r;. ). II a froid aux pieds. He has cold feet (liis feet, etc. ). II a la tete grosse (or une grosse He has a large head. tete). II ft les bras longs {or do longs bras). He has long arms. Le chene a I'^corce rude. The oak has (a) rough bark 407. Article Distribiitivoly. 1. The clef. art. witl; distributive force replaces Eng-. ' a ' of weig-ht, measure, number, wlien indicating price : Deux francs la livre (lo mtNtre). Two francs a pound (a metre). Des a'ufs dix sous la douzaine. Eggs at ten cents a dozen l)es poires un soi^ la pi^ce. Pears at a cent apiece. a. Otherwise par is generally used with price : Cinq francs par jour. Five francs a (per) day. Cent francs par tete. A hundred francs a (per) head. Trois francs par IcQon. Three fcuics a (per) lesson. 2. The def. art. is also used distributively with names of days : II vient le dimanche. He comes (on) Simdays (=:every S. ). Le bateau part les lundis. The boat goes (on) Mondays (=r every TNI.). 408. Omission of the Article. The article (whether def., indef., or partitive) is frequently omitted. This takes place : — 1. In a larg-e numbv^r of expressions made up of verh + noun : J'ai sommeil ; il a honte. I am sleepy ; ho is ashamed. Je vous demande pardon, I be" vour nardon. 408.] USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 261 Further examples are : avoir besoin, 7ieed, donner avis, notify. faire place, make room. avoir faim, be hungry. donner ordre, give orders. prendre conjf^, take leave. avoir bonne mine, ZoofciceW. faire attention, pay atten- prendre garde, « l>' 408.] vSon frt^re est un artiste de nitrite. His brothw is an artist of merit, lis sont devenus des g(in(5ruux dis- They became distinguished generals. tinga6s. c. Oliserve tlie predicative force of a noun after tralter + do, quali- flor + de : II m'a traitL^ de sot. He called me a fool. Je qualifie cela de fruudo. I call that fraud. d. After c'est, oe sont, the noun is logical subject (notpred.), and hence the art. or some other determinating word must be used with it : C'est uno Allemande. She is (a) German. Ce sont les (mes) gants. Those are the (luy) gloves. 4. Before such an appositive noun as serves merely the purpose of a parenthetical explanation : L'Avare, traer^dle de Moli^re. L'Avaie a tragedy by Molifere. Paris, flls de Priam, ravitF^l^ne, Paris, the (a) son of Priam, carried femnie de M6nelas. off Helena, (the) wife of Mene- lans. a. Thus is explained the omission of the art. in numerical titles : Jacques premier (deux). James the First (the Second). b. An apposition which distinguishes, contrasta, compares, regularly has the art. , as in English Pierre le Grand. Peter the Great. Racine lo flis et non R. le pi?re. Racinethe sonand notR. the father. Montreal la plus grande ville du Montreal the largest towninCanada. Canada. M. Cook, un ami de mon p^re. Mr. Cook, a friend of my fatuer. c. Collotjuially, the art. is often omitted in contrasts : Dumas pere eb Dumas flls. Dumas the elder and D. the younger. NoTK.— Psendo-appositioii (really ellipsis of de or of a de clause) is found in many cases like ' L'.wiisc. (,sr. de) Saint-Pierre', 'SL IVter's Church ' ; ' des nieubles (,w. du temps do) Louis XV, ' Louis XV. furniture ' ; ' La rue {ac. de) Mirabeau', Mirabeau Street.' 5. Ill condensed sentencoK (such as titles of hooks, etc., addresses, advertisemeiiLs, proverbs, antithetical expres- sions, etc.), and usually after iii . . . ni, smih . /. ni, soit soit tant que Jmnais : 408, 409.] USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH NOUNS. 263 C'uu808 de la perte do Rome. Portrait de Napolooii HI. Soldjits, otticlers, cltoyons, touo accciu'urent. liuaut^, tuleut, esprit, touts'use k la longue. II logo rue Richelieu. M.iison k vendre. Cliapeaux pour homines. Corps et ame ; nni stjour. Soit pour, soit prudence, il 6vita le combat. II n'a ni p6re ni infero. Sans amis ni ardent. Taut Iioinines que foininos. -Jamais p6re a tant aime. Causes of the fall of Rome. (A) portrait of Napoleon III. Soldiers, olficers, citizens, all has- tened up. Beauty, talent, wit, everything wears out in the long run. He lives in Richelieu street. ( 4) Iiouse for sale. Mens' hats. Body and soul ; night and dp.y. Whether from feor or prudence, he avoid-ed tlwj combat. He has neither father nor mother. Witliout friends or money. As well men as women. Never did a father love so much. 409. Unclassified Examples. The folloAviiig ex- iiinples show idiomatic distinctions in the use of the nrt. which cannot conveniently be brought under general rules : Vous etes le bienvenu. Demander (faire) I'aumone. Avoir le temps. Aller k I'ecole (I'oglise). Commander le respect. Le feu s'est declare. Faire la guerre. -leter (lever) I'ancre. Carder le silence. ^lettre le feu k. J^ur (vers) les trois heures. Au re voir ! L'annt^e derni^ro (prochaine). La semaine (l'ann^.e) pass^e. Le vendredi saint. Le mercredi au:s cendres. Le printemps, V^t6., etc. An printemps, en 6U, etc. La lac, fAte de) Saint-Micbel. R You are welcome. Ask (give) alms. To have time. To go to school (church). Command respect. Fire broke out. Make war. Cast (weigh) anchor. Keep silence. To set fire t, . Towards three o'clock. Good-bye ! Last (next) year. Last week (year). Good Friday. Ash Wednesday. Spring, summer, etc. In spring, in summer, ete. Michaelmas. i >■ 1 ! 264 FRENCH GRAMMAR. i ?'••--< -j^iii ■ t*?^^* iM-w; ■i I Ml>l [409, 410. La (."«f. ffite de) mi-juin. La moiti6 de ranut^'e. Lies deux tiers du teiiipB. Tous (les) deux ; tous-(lo8) trois. Tou8 lo8 mois. Le ministre de la guerre. Le lueilleur ties aiuia. Tl cria k rassasahi. Je I'ai dit an hasard. Prendre le deuil de quelqu'uu. Sentir la f umt'^e. Je vous aoiihaite In bonne annt^e. II n'a pas le sou. "Mid-June. (The) half (of) the year. Two-thirds of the time. Both ; all three. Every month. The minister of war. The host of friends. He cried murder. I said it at random. Go into mourning for somebody. Smell of smoke. I wisli you a happy now year. He has not a cent. II est plus grand que vous de la He is taller tlian you by a head. tete. Un homme k la barbe noire. La bfllt: .juostion ! A la ( >'■. mode) fran^aise. S'eu iller k I'anglaise. A la {sr. mode de) Henri IV Cent (mille) uns. Los amis, od allez-vous ? A man with a black beard. What a (fine) ((ucstiou ! In tlie French style. To take French leave. In the style of Henry IV. A hundred (u thousand) years. (Jly) friends, where are you going? PllE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NaMES. 410. Names Of Persons. 1. Names of persons usually take no article, as in Kiig-ll^h : Corneille ; George Fox. Corneille ; George Fox. a. The def. art. i8 a constituent pait of some surnames : Les romans de Lesage. The novels of Lesage. Les fables de La Fontaine. The fables of La Fontaine. 2. The def. art. is used according- to Italian analogy in the French form of a few famous Italian surnames'; so also, in a very few non-Italian names : Le Corvi-i^e ; le po.nit: du TasHe. CorresTgio ; the poem of Tasso. Le Poussln ; le Camo^nH. Pon».*ln ; Canioens. 3. The art. is used when the name has a distinctive adjunct, when it is plur., or when used as a common nOUii . 1 of Tasgo. 410, 411.] THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NAMES. ^65 L^tf' 1 VT. Christ (-. the 'Anointed'). Con". "" '"^ ^'""' ^I"^-'« «-tan ; the Great Cond^. Les Corneille et les Racine. C'eat un Alexandre. C'est clu Ci«-6roii tout pur. J'ai lu le Tel were ab- sent most of the time. 27. Silk dresses and gold watches are not always necessary. 28. Horses are animals which are useful to men. 2!) Queen \ .ctona has been reigning a long time. 30. The Presioy? 40. My hands and feet are cold. EXERCISE LXVIII. nmbien les ave.-vous payes ? How much did you pay for them ? c lo. u pay^s d,x francs la douzaine. I paid ten francs a I # 14 •Mil »•■. ... ,} ,:t» ■■P S^WMK*- I. t.' '* III iM :^Sg :: till ;i „ 268 FRENCH (JllAMMAIl. [413, 41 1.. 1. You have Bome very fine peara ; how much did you pay for them? 2. I paid two cents apiece for tlieni. [\. That is not (har ; I thought that pears wouhl not .sell so cheap this year. 4, Carpenters are eaitiing ten fran(;8 a day at present. 5. We do not go to scliool «m Sat iirday. 6. Ho will conio on Saturday. 7. You were wrong to come on Wed- nesday, you should always come on Thursday. 8. Did I step on your toe? I ask your pardon. 9. Are you going on hoiseback or on foot? 10. Tfow we love spring! 11. In spring nature awakes from its long rei)OBe. 12. In winttr we have often much snow in Canada. 13. Those gentlemen are Frenchmen. 14. Our neighbour is a carpenter. 15. His son has become a distinguished physician. 16. Charles the First, King of England, was beheaded. 17. Slie was born in Marseilles, a city of southern France. IS. We were without friends and money. 19. Those children have neither father nor mother. 20. He will come home at Michaelmas. 21. Those ladies dress in French style. 22. Have you ever read Tasso's great poem ? 23. Yes, and Ariosto's also, 24. We are to start for Europe to-morrow. 25. Normandy ia a province of France. 26. Did you ever live in Paris ? 27. Yes, I lived a long time in France, and in P^ngland too. 28. My brotlier has lived in China, but he is living now in Japan. 29. The United States is the most important country in North America. 30. Havre is an important seaport of the north of France. 31. New Orleans is a large city of the United States. 32. French wines are celebrated in all parts of the world. 33. That traveller comes from Africa, and is going to South America. 34. Ladies, you are welcome ; we are always glad to receive you. 35. Our neigh- bour goes to the city every other day. thp:: x\djective. The Feminine of Adjectives. 414. General Rule. The feminine of an adjective is reg-iilarly formed l)}^ adding o to the masc. sing., but ad- jectives ending in -e remain unchanged : M. grand, F. grande, tall. joli, jolio, '^)retty. rus6, rus^e, cMnning. bless(!;, blessee, wounded. mort< morte. dead. M. facile, F. facile, easy. jeune, jeune, young. sincore, sincfere, sincere. c^U'bre, c^lfebre, celebrated, etc. etc. [413, 41 1. 414,415.] THE FKMINIxVE OF ADJECTIVES. 269 ,y for them ? ; I thought ( are earning n Saturday. me on Wed- step on your or on foot ? roni its long 13. Those er. 15. His ! First, King es, a city of 19. Those )me home at J. Have you 24. We are 3e of France, le in France, a, but hf, is it important aport of the nited States. i. 33. That 34. Ladies, . Our iieigh- djective is >■., but ad- aey. ouny. sincere, celebrated. a. Similarly, notmn of like termination (but see §384, 2) : marquis, »ki» 71// maniuiao. article, rtrfwt, artinte. Mm,/rierul, ainio. camarade, (•r)mrady). d. Besides adjs. in -o, a very few others are invariable for the fern., I. 'J., oapot (in Atrc oapot-^' have come to grief '), groKuoii, iprimbling, rococo, rococo, sterlinijr, Stirling, and rarer ono«. NoTK. -Here also propirly hv\im^ |Bri*uiul in f^rund'ni^ru, etc.. In O. F. ji^rund wasmoBO. or fern., but granimarianH at a later dale K'avo it the apostrophe to denote tiie supposed elision of o, after the general analo^'y. 415. Special Rules. 1. Irrcsfularities consist chiefly of changes in the stem on adding the fern, sign e ; thus, when e is added : — (1) Final f = v, x = s, c = ch (in some) and qii (in others), g - gu : actif, active, active, heureux, happy, heureuse. +publio,pMA;j>,publique. l)ref, brief, br6ve. *blanc, white, blanche. long, long, loni?ue. *SoalRo: Franc, /m))fc, franche ; hcc, dry, s^ehe. tSo also : Aninionlac (-que), nnmMnim; oaduo (-q^aQ), decrepit ; franc (-que) Frankish; turo(-que), Turkiah. a. SijTiilarly, nouns of like termination : veuf, ■um.loiver, veuve. (ipoux, upmij^e, ('.\w\ise. turc, Turk, turqae. NoTB.— Here also belonj^s l>allll, baUiffi^O. F. haillif), baillive. b. The adjs. doux, douce, f^wec.t ; faux, fauH8e,/a/,sp; roux, rousse, red (of hair, etc.); retain the s sound (§15, 13) in the fern., denoted by o m\, 2) and ss(§57, 1) respectively; grec, Greek, has fem. grecque (cf. cqu in acqu6rir (§7(>, 15) ; prf^fix (pr^jiksj, prefixed, is retrular. (2) Final -el, -eil, -ien, -on, and usually -s, -t, double the final consonant : ^pais, thick, (''paisse. expr^*, express, expresse. profits, jirofcxsed, professe. mnet, dumb, muette. sot, foolii^h, sotte. etc. et/C cruel, cruel. crueUe. pareil, like. pareille. ancien, old, ancienne. bon, good, bonne. has, low. basse. gros, big. grosse. \m IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) A 4^ .V / ^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 ISO 1^ IIIIIM 1^ 1^ m S I4S ililO U i 1.6 ^ V]

    sound (§17, 2, note). (5) The following fem. stems show etymological ele- ments which have disappeared in the masc. : coi (L. quietus), quiet, coite. frais(L.L./rc,so««),coo^,fralclie, b^nin (L. hfmi<]nus), benign, bi'nijarne. tiers (L. tertiwt), third, tierce. favori {lt./avorito)J'avourite, favorite. 415-417.] THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES. 271 e of which 2. Adjectives in -eur form their fern, as follows :— (1) Majeur, niiueur, luoilleur and those in -erieuf are regular : maieuv, major, majeure. exUrionr, exterior, ext^rieuro. meilleur, better, meilleure. supdrieur, mperior, supt^rieure. iiiineur, minor, niineure. etc. etc. a. Similarly, jioims of like termination : inineur, minor, mineure. prieur, prior, prieuro. inf6rieur, inferior, iiifd-rieure. (2) Those in -eur with a cognate present participle in -ant chang-e -r to s and add o : causeur, talkative, caiiseuse. reveur, dreamy, reveuse. flatteur, Jlattcriiuj, llatteuse. troiupeur, deceiiful, trompeuse. luonteur, lyinf), menteuse. etc. etc. a. Similarly, nouns of like termination (but see also §38-t, 1 , a, 2, a) : v. jumeau(x), ^«m. h6hTevi{x), Hebrew. But:hlcn(s), blue; {exi{»), late, deceased. 3. Masc. adjs. in -a! regularly have the pliir. in -aux •. amical(-aux). brutal (-aux). capital(-uux). cardinal(-anx 6gal(-aux). fi8cal(-aux). g<^n6ral(-aux). l(''gal(-aux). Iib6»al(-aux). local(-aux). spteial(-aux), trivial(-aux). etc. loyal(-aux). niartial(-aux), nioral(-aux). principal(-aux). rural(-anx). a. Fatal makes ' fatals ;' Littr^ gives also flnal(8). h. According to the Dictionnaire de VAc.addmk the following have rw masc. plur. : . *autoinnal. fruffal »4rv.rioi r. , , irugai. jovial. naval. fpascal ^colossal. glacial. natal. ^partial. *Littr6 gives ajilur. in -aux. tLittrd admits a plur. in -aux, and quotes authority for a plur. in -g. N0TK8.-1 There are upwards of a hundred and fifty adjs. in -al. The Di^t. d» VA- cod^mre 18 81 entregardingthemasc. plur. of some sixty of these.to nearly fifty of which, however, Littr6 gives a plur. in -aux. The following have not been pronounced upon by either authonty : Brumal, d61oyal, diagonal, instrumental, labial, m^-dicinal, mental monacal, paradoxal, quadragesimal, total, virginal. 2. Regular plurs. in -als were formerly much commoner, and usage is still unsettled for some words. When the plur is wanting or doubtful it isoften avoided, e.g., ' Un rep.us frugal ; des repa« simples • '^Z: iizz!' " ""'*^' "■' ■ ^'''''' '"'^'' ^••"^"^^' '''^'^' ^-*>'^^- -tinal,*:.!!!. Agreement of Adjectives. 418. General Rule. An adjective, whether attribu- tive or predicative, regularly agrees in gender and num- ber with Its substantive : Cold seasons are healthful. They are pleased. They said they were ill. I believe them sincere. a When the substantive has a de clause, the agreement is parallel with that explamed for subject and verb (cf. §312, 2). 6. The agreement with voas is according to the' sense : Madame, vous etes bien bonne. Madam, you are very kind. 419. Manifold Substantive. 1. One adj. qualifying two or more substantives is made plur., and agrees in Les saisons froides sont saines Elles sont contentes. lis so disaient malades. Je les crois 8ince;r(e)8. ent is parallel 419-421.] AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 273 tZfjlXl!'^' ^^"V if «f the same gender; if of different ^^ender, the adj. is masc. : l)e la vlftndo et des ponunes de Cold meat and potatoes. terre froides. Sh «Bur et lul sent contents. His sister and he are pleased. a When substantives are joined by ou, nl . . . nl, or are synonomons ov iovma.chmax, etc., the principles stated for agreement of subject and verb apply (cf. §313). b. When nouns differ in gender, the masc. one is usually placed nearest the adj., especially when the fern, form is distinct from the Jiiasc. : La mer et le ciel bleus. The blue sea and sky. 2. When the noun is followed hy b. prep. + nmn, the ag-reement is, of course, according to the meaning : Uno table de bois dur. A table of hard wood Uue table de bois carrde. A square wooden table. 420. Manifold Adjective. When two or more adis. denoting different objects sing, refer to one noun, the noun IS made plur., and the adjs. follow it in the sing or the noun is made sing., and the art. repeated with each adj. : Les nations grecque et romalne. The Greek and Roman nations La nation grecque et la romaine. The Greek nation and the Roman. Or : La nation grecque et la nation romaine. a. The agreement for a preceding ordiTial is parallel to this : Le sixl^me et septlfeme rangs. The sixth and seventh ranks. The sixth rank and the seventh. The sixth and the seventh rank. . Adjectives used as adverbs Le sixienie rang et le septi^me. Le sixifeme et le septifeme rang. 421, Special Oases. are regularly invariable : Cette rose sent donx. Les livres coiltent clier ici. a. Possible, replacing a clause, and fort in se faire fort- ' to pledge one's self,' are considered as adverbs : J'aifaitlemoins de fautes possl- I have made as few mistakes as ***«• possible. Kile se fait fort de le payer. She pledges herself to pay it That rose smells sweet. Books cost dear here. M I i.. ,;:« 7 '*, |*2^**** i ,' fir; •*'!, 274 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [421. Des mots grecs-moderne. Des enfants court vetus. Une dame haut plac^e. Des enfauta mort- (nouveau-) 116 2. Compound adjectives (with or without h^'plicii) arc treated as follows : — (1) Both components are variable when co-ordiiuite, ex- cept first components in -o : Des sourd(c)8 -miiet(te)8. Deaf-mutes. Des oranges aigres-doucos. Sourish oranges. But : Les lettres grdco-romaines. Grseco-Romaii literature. (2) A subordinate component is usually invariable (be- ing* rot^arded as adverbial), but the i)rinciple is not fully carried out : Modern Greek words. Short-coated chihlren, A lady of high rank. Still- (new-) bom infanta. a. But the subordinated component is variable in frais cuellli = ' freshly gathered,' in Ivre mort =^' dead drunk,' in j^rund ouvert — 'wide open,' and in premier, dernier, nonvoan + a pad 2>art- (except nouv©au-n6, see above) : Des fleurs frafcbes cueillies. Freshly gathered flowers. La porte est grande ouverte. The door is wide open. Les nouveaux mari^s. The bridegroom and Ijride. 3. Nouns serving as adjs. of colour arc regularly invar- iable : Des robea lllas (citron). Purple (lemon-coloured) dresses. a. Rose, cramoisl, pourpre, are exceptions, and vary : Des robes roses (cramoisies). Pink (crimson) dresses. b. Modified adjs. of colour are also usually invariable (the modifier being also invar, by rule, 2 (2), above) : Des cheveux l>lond ardent. Reddish blond hair. NoTK. — These constructions are explained by supplyinjjf the ellipsis : ' Des robes (cou- leur de) li'as' ; ' Des cheveux (couleur de) blond ardent.' 4. A few adjs. are variable or invariable according to position or context : — a. D©ml = ' half,' nu= ' naked,' ploln=' full of,' are invariablt before and variable after the noun ; so also, excepts and others (^.'^(iS, o, b) ; franc d© port ^^ ' post-paid ' (also ' franco,' adv. ) is invariable before and mucUly variable after : 421^423.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 275 ! (the modifier ; ' Des robes (cou- Une aeinl-heiire ; une heure et Half an hour ; an hour and a half, demie. II a de I'or pleln scs poohea. He has his pockets full of gold II est nu-tote ; il a les l.ras nus. He is bareheaded ; his aruis are l.aro. il a lea yeux pleius de larnios. His eyes are full of tears. Recevoir franc de port une lettre. To receive a letter post-paid. Des lettres frant'lies de port. Post-paid letters. Obs. : Heiiil, nu, when preceding, form a compound with hyphen. h. Feu- 'late,' 'deceased,' is invar, when preceding the def. art. (or determinative) and variable after it : Feu la reine (la feue reine). The late qiieen. c. After avoir l"alr= ' have an air (appearance) ' the a^j. agrees with air; but agrees M'ith the subject of the»verb when- 'seem,' 'appear' (always so of things) : Cette dame a I'air liautaln. That lady has a haughty air. Kile a I'air malheureuse. She seems unhappy. Cette soupe a I'air bonne. This soup s«ems good. 5. A very few adjs. are alwaj^s invariable : Nous avons c^t^ capot. We had come to grief. Vingt livres sterllnsr. Twenty pounds sterling. 422. Nomis as Adjectives. By a sort of apposition nouns are frociuently used as adjs. ; when so used, thev usually agree like adjs. : Une nialtresse chemin^e. A main chimney. Des philosophes pontes. Poet philosophers. Jiut : La race iifeg:re ; un pied m6re, etc. a. T6nioin---=' witness,' at the head of a phrase, is adverbial and in- variable : J'ai bien combattu, t6moin les I have fought well, witness the blessures que j'ai rei^aies. wounds I received. /'. For nouns as adjs. of colour, see §421, S. Comparison of Adjectives 423. The Comparative. It is regularly denoted bv placing plus ^ « more,' moiiis = ' less ' (for inequality), and aussi = ' as ' (for equality) before each adjective compared; than ' or ' as ' = que : Mil S76 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [423, 424. II est pluH f(rand quo Jean. II est inolnH Kranil quo Jean. He is tailor than John. He is lesH tall than 'not so till! as) Jolin. He is u» tall as John. He is more dlltsrent and (ni«rv) attentive than John. He is nioro Avoak than ill. II est anfwl jsrrand quo Jean. II est plUH dlllfifont ct plus ut- tentlf quo Jean. II est pluH falble quo nialade. a. AushI, used imjatively, may be replaced by si : II n'est puH auHHi(Hi) grand que J. He is not so tall as John. h. When ansHi or si is omitted, commo {not que) is used : Un roi rlche t'onnno Cr^sus. A king as rich as Crd'sus. c. After plus, nioins, affirmatively, * than '=quc . . . no before a finite verb : II est plus grand qu'il no(le)parait. He is taller than he seems. d. ' More ^nd more {or -er and -er) '-de plus on plus ; * less and less {or -er and -ei) '-do inoins on nioius ; 'the more (less) . . . the more (less) '==plus (inuins) . . . (et) plus (moins) ; ' the more {or -er) . . .' = d'autant plus . . . : L'airdevintdopluson plus froid. II devint do nioins on inoins actif . Plus il devaent riohe (ot) nioins 11 est )s^6n6roux. II en sera d'autunt plus rieho. The air became coldor and colder. He became loss and less active. The richer he becomes the less generous is he. He will be the richer for it. 424. Irreii»-ular Compiirison. The adjectives bon, mauvais, petit, have a special comparative form : Pos. COMP. Pos. COMP. bon, good, niellleur. or bon, plus bon (rare). niauvais, bad, plre. or niauvais. plus niauvais. petit, small. inoindro. or petit, plus petit. a. Bon is hardly ever compared regularly : A bon march6, h meilleur march6. Cheap, cheaper. Cela sent bon (melllenr). That smells good (better). But : Ce n'est ni plus bon ni plus niauvais. Notes. — 1. In expressions like ' Ce vin est plus ou moins bon,' bon is nofc really oomparative. 2. Some jframinarians admit plus bon = ' more good-natured.' 6. Pire is, in general, stronger than plus inauvais, and may serve also as a comparative to ni6ohant = ' bad,' ' evil,' ' wicked.' Cet homme est ni6ohant (piro). That man is bad (worse). 424-426.] -^Mi'ARisoN of adjectives. 277 c. In general, moln.Ire 'less,' 'leaser,' ' lesa (in importance) ' and plus petit -' anialler,' ' lesa (in size) ' : Votre douleur en sera niolntlre. Your sorrow will hence bo lo«8. Une plus petlto pomnie. A smaller iipple. 425. The Siiporlative Relative. 1. It is denoted bv placing the deliiiire article (vumhle) or a possessive ad- jective (variable) before tlic comparative of inequality : Elle est la mollis iilmable. She i.s tlio least amiable. Mes mellleurs amis. My best friend.s. La molridre dilficult^. The sli^'litest .UHicuIty. a. When the superlative follows the noun, the def. art. is not omitted : C'est I'enfant le plus diligent et lo He is the most diligent and atten- plus attentif L'homme le plus riche de la ville. The richest man In the city. Le meiUeur (krivain d« Canada. The best writer 1« Canada. Le plus brave (d')entre le.s Grecs. The bravest among the Greeks. 426. The Superlative Absolute. It is expressed bv le(inyar.) + plu8 (moiii.s) before the adj., or else by ail adverb (tre.s, bieii, fort, extrememeiit, etc.) or other modifying expression : Kile est le plus heureuse (moins She is happiest (least happy) heureuse) quand elle est seule. when she is alone. Vous etes trfes almable. You are very (most) kind. C'est tout ce qu'il y a de plus beau. It is most beautiful. Uu brave des braves. One of the bravest. Uu homme des plus dlgrncs. A most worthy man. Une dame on ne pent plus dlgne. A most worthy woman. Des tribus sauvages au possible. Most savage tribes. n. Occasionally it is denoted by reveHtion of the adj. (fam ) or bv isNimo (fam.) : ' ' Get homme est rus^. rus6 ! That man is very, very cunuing ! n est richlsslmo. He is very wealthy. :^i ::ui mi: - 1 ,lif Il.**fM( lUli pm^^ ..•,,; -if f W 278 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [427-420. 427. RomnrkH. 1. CoinnnrMthMMnul superlative nrc iindistin^niislijiblci in eoTistructit)ns rcciuirin^ a del', an. hd'ore l\\v comiuirntive : Ui pltiH f«»i-t (le iius (Unix fn res. Tlu' HtroiiRcr of my two brolhera. 2. Do (leiidtcs « by how much ' after a comparative or superlative : Plus ago rto trois uns. Older l)y three years. II est le plus grand tie beaucoup. Ho is the tallgst by far. Jinf : II est beaucoup pbis grand. He is nnich taDer. 3. Observe the followiiifj: : Les biiHHCH chisses. The lower classes. J'ai fait niou possible. I did my utmost. Position op Adjkc:tives. 428. Prodieaitive Adjectives. They are placed, In general, as in English : Kllcs sont contcntes. They are pleased. EUe parut futlffu6o. She sccinod tired. Brave, savant, vertuenx, il se Brave, learned, virtuous, he fit aimer de tons. niade himself beloved by all. a. Observe the position after assex, after plus (niolns) . . . plus (molns) and in exclamations with conibien !, eonune !, que !, tant ! : II est assez sot pour le croire. He is silly enouffli to believe it. Plus il devint rlclie molns il fut The richer he became the less K6n6reux. generous was he. Que vous I'tes alniable ! How kind you are ! 429. Attributive Adjectives. When used literally, to define, distinguish, specify, emphasize, etc., they usually follow; but when used lignratively, or as mere ornamen- tal epithet, or denoting a quality viewed as essential to the object, or when forming, as it were, one idea with the noun, they usually precede : Una rue dtrolte ; una 6trolte a- A narrow street ; an intimate miti(^. friendship. Un roi savant ; le savant auteur. A learned king; thelearned author. Le fameux Titt ; un rus6 coquin. The famous Pitt ; a cunning rogue. a. The following, of very common use, generally precede : beau. grand. joli. nieilleur. pire. vilain. bon. gros. long. moindre. sot. court. ieune. mauvais. petit. vieux. 430.] POSITION OF ADJECTIVES. 279 re placed, (n ) ; an intimate 430. Special Rules for Attributives. 1. Certain (1) Adjectives of physical quality : Uno table c«rr6o;une Pierre dure; A nquaro table ; a hard «to«e • de 1 eau frolde (chaude) ; de cold ( hot) water ; black .nk ;' I encre noire ; une sauce ,il- a piquant sauce. qnnnto. a. IJy the general rule (§429) they sometimes precede • De nolrn chagrins; une vorte Dark sorrows ; a ^reen old a.e • vieillesse ; le bleu oiel d'ltalie. tli. blue sky of Italy. ' (2) Adjectives Of nationality, religion, profession titlP and those from proper names : proression, title, La loi anglaLe ; un pr^tre catho- The English law; a Catholic Tuln :r7'^f ^"^ '"^^^^ -' P"-t ; royal splendour ; C.ce- le latm clc6ronlon. Ionian Latin. (3) Participles used as adjectives : ..rult ; une poHe .uverte. man ; ar. open door. a. By the geneial rule (§429) they sometimes precede : Una ^olatanto victoire. a signal victory. /'. Past participial forms which have become real adjs. (e.n pr6ten- ;';;::r;.xx:r'- -- --• ->. -^ -« p^":! Uuo felnte modestie. p^io^^i i ^ T„, .^ , *oigmcd modesty, Le pr6te„du comte. x,^^ ^^^^^^ ^^ J^^^^ tl.5//i'''''*''^^' '^^^^^"^^« follow the noun on account of 1 ^^ J^"^*« or their function ; thus :- ^ 11 .s, Dieu, fort, plus, uioiiis, assez) : Uu discours extremement lonff An Avfr.«.^«i . paSonTT" '""'"''"' "^'^ ^° '^^'^■•'''^' phrase, or in com- "r ™lt"'°'"'' =" ™- Adi,tri.tHohinwi„es. gue,„«. brav„ comme un lion. A warrior a, br.v» a» a Uon. ^HH^ ^^H ^H' 9 ■ Hi 1 1 1 ill: . I J, ■ ; I. •-■4411 « 1 i y i ii 280 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [430-433. (3) Nouns usecl ai)i)Ositively as a(\jective8 : Une puissunce umlo. A frlemlly power. 3. Two or more adjs., with ouo noun, follow, inj^fMioral, the rules stated, hut if joined by a conjunction thry all follow, in case one is such as must follow : Une J olio potlte fiUe. A pretty llttio girl. Une bello nuUHon blanche. A benutlfiil white house. Un object blano et 6tlnc«lant. A white luid duxKlIn):; object, Une dame bello et oiivanto. A beautiful and loarnoil lady. a. Tlie more Bpecific of two or more adjs. which follow cornea laat, contrary to English usage : Des (icrivains frant^ais hablloH. Clover French writers. 4. A considerable number of adjs. differ more or less widely in meaning, according? as they precede or follow : Mon ehor enfant ; uno robe oh6ro. My dear child ; a contly (hesB, Une franclie coquette ; une feni- A thorouffh coquette ; a plalu- me francho. spokou woniaut Such adjectives are : ancien. bon. brave. certain. cher. commun cruel dernier. di(T6rent. diffne. divere. famoux. faux. fier. fort. bravo. furieux. galaiit. grand. gro8. haut. pur. sage. Heul. simple. triste. veritable. vrai, etc. honnCte. nouveau. jeune. parfait. niaigre. pauvro. nialhonnCte. petit. niauvais. plaisant. mochant. i)reniier. niort. propre. NoTB.-Di8tinctions of this kind depend, in the main, upon the general principlen laid down above, but they are too numerous and too subtle to be given in detail here. Observation, and the use of a good dictionary will, in time, make the learner familial with the most important of them. 4.31. Determinatives. Such adjectives (including numerals, possessives, demonstratives, indefinites) ^recec^e; Prepositional Complement of Ad.tectives. 432. An adjective is often followed by a complement connected with it by a preposition {h, de, en, envers, etc.). The prep, to be used is determined by the meaning of tlie adj., as explained in the following sections. 433. Adjective + a. The prep. 6- = 'to,' 'at,' 'for,' etc., is required after most adjs. denoting tendency, fitness (and opposites), comparison, etc. : 433-434.] COMPLEMENT OF ADJECTIVKS. 281 ( 'ct hoiniiiu est luloniu- t^i la InnHson. That man ia addirtccit bicn habilu uiix utrairua. Un Ijommo HU|H^rieur ii touB. Ce n'cBt Inm h ricn. Such adjectives are : accouturm;-, aciru»Utnwd (to). Mtlo, faithful (in). He ia favorable to my projecta. He ia very clever la buainuaa. A man auperior to all. That ia g(M)d for nothing. twlroit, clever {at), iifrriablt', pleaxant (^)). anlnfieur, anterior (to), :irik'nt, ardent (in). Imhi, i^iood. Jit (for). iher, dear (to). coiivenalilo, suitable (to). I'Knl, eijnal (to). fxiict, exact (in). fort, clever (at). hardi, bold (in). iinpropro, vnjit (for). inferieur, inferior (to). iiifl<161e, unfaithful (to). inutile, UHeleHM(to). lent, Mow (in). nulsiblc, hurtful (to). pareil, similar (to), \wti6, inclined (to), prCt, ready (to). proniiit, jyronijit (in). prKpioe, propitioua (to), pro])rt>, /?< (/()/■). Hei)it>lul)le, xiinilnr (to). Utile, useful (to). «to. oppoa»5, opjMsed (to), a. Hon pour=:' good for,' ' beueficial to,' ' kind to,' 4;J4. AdJoctlvo + (/e. The prop. do = 'Of,' 'from,' ' with,' etc., is rc(iuir(d after most ndjs. (lenotinpf .sotwce or origin (hence also, fe(!lin^^, sentiment, abundance), .^epara- tinn (hence also, absence, distance, want, etc.), and after most past i)articiples as adj. to denote the ^/ytvi^ (cf. §320) : J'^Itea-voua natif de Paris? Are you a native of Paria? 11;^ sont contents do nioii succta. They are pleased at my Hucceas. She ia full of vanity. I am free from jiain. He ia unknown to all. Kilo est pleine jlo vanitd .1 f siiia libre do douleur. II ost inccmnu do tous. Such adjectivea are : aliSi'nt, absent (from). iillli^'6, grieved (at), aise, tilad (of). al:inni5, alarmed (at). :iiii))itieux, ambitious (of), avif)e, (f reedy (of). belli, hlesMd (by). iMI'.ible, capable (of). cliar'iiii, deliyhtod (with). clii ri, beloved (by). (uiiifiis, confused (at). coiitrarid, vexed (with), iK'Uwi, destitute (of). 'li]iour\'u, devoid(of), 'lOsireux, desirous (of). '' iiTciont, different (from), •li^'no, worthy (of). 6\oi\<;n6, distant (from). lourd, heavy (iHth). enc'hantd, deliyhted (ivith). malhcureux, vnhappy (at). ennuyd, iveary (of), c'tonnd, astonished (at), exempt, free (from), fhchi, sorry (for). Her, proud (of). glorieux, proud (of), h6ris8(5, brustfing (with). heureux, glad (of). honteux, ashamed (of). ignorant, ignorant (of). indignc, unworthy (of). inquiet, uneasy (about), ivre, intoxicated (with). jaloux, jealous (of). libre, free (from). offen3(5, offended (at). pauvre, poor (in). \)\ein, full (of). ravi, delighted (with). satisfait, satisfied (iri^h), soucieux, anxious (about). souilld, soiled (urith). sftr, sure (of). surpris, surjyrised (at). triste, sad (at), vain, vain (of). vex6, vexed (at). victorieux, victorious (over). vide, empty (of). etc. ft. FacU6 contre=' angry at or with (a person).' ■/-> * a ■il: '< ■ f — / . It ■^ ■:--»W tl , ^5' ;^.\ 1 - »- '^ '^ 282 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [435, 4P.G. 435. Adjective + en. En is required after a few adjs. denotinjt? abundance, skill, etc. : Le Canada (ist, fertile on bl6. Canada is fertile in wheat. II est expert on chirurgie. He is expert in surgery. Such adjectives are : aboruiant, ahoundiny (in), fort, strong {in), learned (in), riche, rich (in). f6com\,/riUtful(in). ignorant, pjnorant (in). savant, learned (iu). a. Fort and Iffnorant sometimes have sup : II eat f(jrt huf Ihistoire. He is well versed (good) in history. Ignorant siir ces m;i.tii''ves-l;\. Ignorant about those matters. •AJU?. Adjective + ewt;e/'S. Envers is used aftermost adjs. dcnotiiKT dispimtion ov fedinij towards: II est liberal envcf s tons. He is liberal towards all. Such adjectives S'e : honntltc, polite. indulgent, indulgent. ingrat, unoraie/jd. insolent, insolent. juste, juM. m6chant, malici kk. niiMtTicorfUeux, vicrciful. otficieux, ohliijimj. a. Bou, dur, very frequently take pom* ; indulffont may take pour c k ; civil, »6vero, ni;iy take a, Toffard do : II est bon (dur) pour inoi. He is kind (harsh) to me. Indulgent pour (j\) scs enfants. Indulgent to his children. Civil (s6v6re) jY I'egard de ses do- Cuil (harsh) to his servants. mestiques. EXT.RCIPF- LXIX. 1. That little boy's grandmother has given him a knife. 2. That little girl is very foolish. 3. I know t hose old ladies well ; thoy "-re our old neighbours. 4. What a fine looking man! Do you know him? 5. Theie are some beautiful trees ! (3. i'iie prmce addrtssed him most flattering Avords. 7, That statesman is celebrated for his liberal prin- ciples. 8. There arc, according to Catholic doctrine, seven capital sins. 9. The nian and his wife were both oM. 10. Tlie French and Italian nations are often called Latin nations. 11. Those flowers smell sweet, do they not ? 12. That large }>nilding is the school for ( d'' ) ihv.\.f-m\}toH. 13. He left the door wide open, when he went out this morning. affable, affable. bon, kind. charitable, charitable. civil, cicil. cruel, ciiieL (lur, hard, hnrnh. g6n6rGux, generouH. grossier, rude. poli, polite. prodigue, lainxh. rt'connaissant, gratefid. respecti'.eux, rexpevt/nl, responsable, respi.nnihle, rigor.reux, .s'fe/vt. s6v6re, ser.cre, stern etc. 2 I 430.] KXERCISES. 283 may take pour 14. Tho newly married couple had just left the church. 15. My mother luid ]>hw oyes and light auhuni hair. ]H. When 1 was voui'ig, I used to go barefoot to school. 17. That lady looks kind. 18.' A pound ster- ling is Morth twenty-five .rancs. 19. He is getting richer and richer. 20. He is richer than people Cow, ; believe. 21. The older one is, the wiser one sliouhl ]>e. 22. My brotlier is older than I by four years. '2;i Tlie richer one part of the population l^ecomcs, the poorer the rest ofteii beco.ne. iU. Your house is small, but ours is smaller still. •J."), lliat man is bad, but his brother is still worse. 26. The dc^arer tlioae articles are, the less of them we shall be able to buy. 27. Our house is good, but yours is better. 28. His most intimate friends Uew nothing of his good fortune. 29. Men are often tlie most un- happy, wlieu they ought to be the most happy. 30. Is that not a splendid sight? 31. Yes, it is most beautiful! 32. The richest men Ml the world are not always the happiest. 33. She is shorter than I by three inches. EXERCISE LXX. 1. You are all welcome, ladies ; how kind you are to come to see me ' 2. What a pretty little girl ! ^^^hat is her name '! 3. There were black horses an.I white ones in the procession. 4. Will you give me some cold water to (pour) drink? 5. Whose is that broken cane? 6. Our noigldjour is not an educated man. 7. Our friends live in a beautiful white house l^ehind the town. 8. The English language is spoken in all l)arts of tlie world. 9. I have just seen that pretended no],lcman go by. 1 0. We have just been at a political meeting, wliere we listened to a very long speech. 1 1 . My dear child, you are too young to wear dear dresses ! 12. I lov-j that gentleman ; he is so kind to children. 13. Are you not ready to start ? You are very slow in dressing. 1 4. I am very glad to ■see you ; when are you coming to visit me ? 15. I am very sorry to say that I have no time to visit you before I go away. 16. We are ch.irmed with the beautiful present you gave (/aire) us. 17. You are not angry with me, are you? 18. I do not like that man ; he is too >s>nere with his children. 19. That is a nice little girl ; she is so polite to everybo.ly. 20. Th.at little boy is very clever at history and arith- -'■etic. 21. Ihatarmyisweakinnm.ibers. 22. We must be charitable to cvery])ody. 23. Living languages are more useful than dead langu- ages. 24. \\ e must not confound the verbal adjectives with the present I^rliciples. 25. That young man is the living image of his father. - , J .le more learned tliut man becomes, the less generous he becomes. HI etc. e-a-K,they,t.hem. ellcs,thcy, them. sA. >nous,i('<',tt.i. VOU8, ?/oM. 5p j ^[N.=noininative ; D.=dative; A.=aecu8ative ; P.=object of a prep.]. Note -A more scientific terminology would le ? — Je la suis. Are you the bride ? — I am. Sont-ce Ik vos livres ?— Ce los sont. Are those your books ?— They are. 2. Le (invar.) is used when referring to an adjective, or to a noun as adjective : fi: I's VOU8 fatigu^e ?— Je le suis. Are you tired ?— I am. fiteo-vous mere ?— Je le suis. Are you a mother ?— I am. Sout-ils Anglais ?— lis le sont. Are they English ?— They are. '443. Pleonastic fe. The neutral form le (§439, d) is often pleonastic, as compared with English usage : 443, 444.] THE PERSONAL PRONOUN. 287 6tes-vou8 mtre ? — Jo le suis. Are yt>ii a mother ? — I am. Qu'ils boient vemis, ju lo aum. That they liave come, I know. Fais ca bien, quand tu lo peux. Do good, when you can. Ce qu'il voulait, il lo veut encore. What he wished, he still wishes. Je suis prete, s'il lo faut. I am ready, if need be. J'irai si vous lo d(^3irez. I shall go, if you wish (It), lis sont comme je (lo) d^sirerais. They are as I should like. II est plus ag6 que je ne (lo) suis. He is older than I am. 06s. ; This 1© is optional in comparative clauses. a. L© is also used in a numbar of fixed expressions : II ne 1© cfede k personne. He yields to nobody. Nous I'avons emport6. We have carried the day. II I'a 6chapp6 belle. He had a narrow escape. &. Lo may sometimes be translated by ' one' or ' so.' II eat soldat ; je 1© suis ausai. He is a soldier ; I am on© too. Sois brave, et je 1© serai aussi. Be brave, and I shall be so too. 444, Reflexives. 1. A special conjunctive reflexive form (se for dat. or ace. of either gen. or num.) is required in the 3rd pers. only ; for the 1st and 2nd pers. the ordin- ary forms are used (cf. §322, 2) : II (elle) 8© loue. He (she) praises him (her) -self. lis (elles) 8© le sont dit. They said so to each other Brit : Je me loue ; tu to loues ; nous nous louons ; vous vous louez. 2. The disjunctive soi is hardly used beyond the 3rd sing", in an indefinite or general sense : Chacun travaille pour sol. Every one works for himself. On doit parler rarement de sol. One should rarely speak of one's self. De sol le vice est odieux. In itself vice is hateful. Bnt: Elle est contente d'ello-mftme ; ils ne songent qu'i oux-ni6ines, etc. a. The use of sol is rarer for the fern, than for the masc. : Un bienfait porte sa rt^compense A good deed brings its reward with avec soi (lui). it. La guerre entraine a^ ^ <. elle (sol) War brings after it countless evils. des maux sans nombre. Note.— Soi is no longer used of persons denoted by a general noun, e.g., ' L'avare ne vit que pour Ini-in^me ' (not ' pour soi '), nor is it used, as formerly, of persons to avoid ambiguity, e.g., 'Quoique son trkre soit dans la misisre, il ne pense qu'ii lui- m6me (not '4 soi*). If ' ' 1 1 !»i ?•«.., .•! if , , 1 1 .1 i •■ f 1 \ 1 1 H- 1 ■*.l •.i\\ w ill I.V 288 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [445 445. Uses of ew. 1. En is in function an t.M|iiivaleiit of cle + a jjron. (3rd pers. of either ^'•ender or number) ; it is used of tliingfs, and less commonly of persons : Je parle ties plumes ; j'on parlc. I speak of the pens ; I speak of them Give me them ; I need them. He is my friend ; I answer for him. Ileloveshissons.andis h)ved by them. There you are ; I ain glad of it. Does he come from T. ? He does. Donnez-les-moi ; j'cn ai bcsoin, II est mou ami ; j'on rt'ponds. II aime ses fils, et il on est aim6. Vous v<»ila ; j'en suia content. Vient-il de Toronto ?— II en vient a. The antecedent is often understood or indefinite Voyons ! oii cmi ^tions-noua? lis on sont venus aux mains. II m'en veut. Tant s'on faut. Con est ia,ii de lui. A vous on croire. Quoi qu'il en soit. Je n'on puis plus. II y on a qui le croient. Let me sec, where were we ? They came to blows. He has a grudge against me. Far from it. It is all up with him. If one is to believe you. However it may be. I am done out. There are some who think so. 2. Through a somewhat special application of the gen- eral principle, it is further used : — (1) In Si partitive sense : Voici du papier; en vonlez-vous? Here is some paper; do you wish any — Merci, j'en ai. of it? — Thank you, I have some. Avez-vous une plume? -J'en ai Have you a pen? — I have one (I une (j'en ai plusieurs). have several). II me faut en acheter d'autres. I must buy others. (2) Ell =* thereof ' + ^/ie def. art. replaces a possessive adj. referring to a possessor in the preceding sentence, but only when the thing possessed is a dir. obj., a subject of etre, or a predicate noun : J'aime ce pays ; j'eM admire les in- I like this country; I admire Its stitiitions. institutions. Blamez les p6ch^8 de ces gens, mais Blame the sins of those people, but n'on bUmez pas les malheurs. do not blame their misfortunes. Cette affaire est di!dicate ; lo sue- That affair is delicate ; its success cfea en est douteux. ia doubtful, Ceci est la gloire du pays ; cela on 'J'his is the country's glory ; that est la honte. is its disgrace. 445-447.] THE PERSONAL PIIONOUN. 289 ; I admire Its 's glory ; that But : Cctte maisou a sos dufauts ( — possessor not being in the previous Beutenoe) ; J'ainie ces vers ; Icur hariiionie me ravit ( — the thing pos- sessed being 8u>)ject of another verb than 6tre) ; J'admire ce pays ; il est fameiix pour ses bonnes lois ( — the thing possessed being governed by a prep.). 441$. Use of y. Y is in function equivalent to k (en, claii8, etc.) + « prow. (3rd pcrs. of either gender or num- ber) ; it is used of tiling:*, and rarely of persons : Je pense h mes pt^^ch^s ; j'y pense. I think of my sins ; I think of them. II est en Eur<)])e ; il y est; et nioi j'y vais aussi. II se connait en ces choses, mais moi je ne m'y connais pas. II aspire h, celo ; il y aspire. Vous tiez-vous k lui ? — Je m'y fie. He is in Europe ; he is there, and I am going tliere too. He is an expert in those things, but I am not. He aspires to that ; he aspires to it. Do you trust him ? — I trust him. a. The antecedent is often understood or indefinite : II y va de votre vie. J'y suis ! Qu'ya-t-il? II s'y prend adroitement. Est-ce que Monsieur B. y est ? ¥ pensez-vous ! Your life is at stake, I have it ! What is the matter ? He goes about it cleverly. Is Mr. B. at home ? You don't mean it ! 447. Position of Conjunctive Objects. 1. They stand immediately before their governing verb (except the impve. affirmative) : Je ieur en parlerai. I shall speak to them of it. Je I'y ai envoys pour lo Ieur dire. I sent him there to tell them it. II lui faut parler ; il faut lul parler. He must speak ; one must speak to him. Obs. : Remember that the aux. is the verb in compound tenses. a. With negative infin. , the object may stand between ne and pan (point, rlon, etc.) ; similarly adv. +ivfn. : Je suis 6tonn6 de ne point lo voir I am astonished not to see him. {or ne lo point voir). Pour les bien consid^rer. To consider them well. b. The objects of an infin. governed by falre, laissor (cf . §310, 6, 7) or a verb of perceiving (entendre, voir, etc.), accompany the, finite verb: Je lo lul ferai dire. I shall make him say it. II so lo voit refuser. He sees himself refused it. Faites-vous-la raconter. Have it related to you. i'^ 290 FRENCH GRAMMAR. m I' V**. How many apples have you ? 14. 1 have six. b>. Hej o are some fine pears ; do you wish any? 16. Yes, I sh«ml i like some, for I liave none. 17. Canada is my country ; I love its blue sky and free institutions. 18. I planted this apple-tree ; I hope I sluill eat its fruit. 19. Do you ever flunk of your country, when you are in foreign countrioe? 20. When I am far away, I always think of it. 21. My brother has gone homo, and I am going too. 22. I see a cr()\\ d of people in the ati'eoL; what is the matter? '2.S. Were you ever in Euro])e ? 24. I at/er was. 25. We shall make him Tnine., . In nilenno Ics iiilenncfi I m. Us tien los tiens \,,. f. lutlcnno le« tIennoHi '^"''' ^'^''*- m. le sien Ioh hIohh \his, herft, its, f. la Nienno los slennes I one's own. m. lo nAtrol , r , } les nAtroM, ours. I. lunAtro^ m. lo vOtrel , ,/ r , ^, f les vOtrcs, yours. I. la vfitroJ - ' , . t les lewrs, theirs. I. la leur J ms. : 1. The forms in parenthesis, iiion, Of>s. ; 1. The feni. (except for lour) is ton, son, are used instead of ma, ta, formed as for adjs. of like ending. 2. De sii, before a vowel or li mute: friend of mine,' etc., is not literally translated : Un de mes amis. A friend of mine. Un m^decin de mes amis. /One of my friends, (who) is a doctoi'. Un ami a moi. Mon ami ennissiblc, e.g., ' Votre lettre {not ' la v6tre ')de la semaine deriiicre.* EXERCISE L.XXIIT. Elle lui a ferm6 la porte au nez. She shut the door in his face. Cela lui a fait venir I'cau h la bouche. That made his mouth water. Cette nuit ; de toute la nuit. Last night ; all night. 1. My fiither and yours will soon be here. 2. I have your hooks and my own. 3. Our friends are coming by tlie railway ; yours arc comiiij; by the steamer. 4. My brother and sister have gone away ; they will nse is familiar. ours are coiuiiij; iway ; they will 455,450.] THE demonstrative pronoun. 299 not be back till V/e.bieaday next. 5. One should not fail to pay one'a ihibts. 6. I had my hair cut this m<.rning ; I am afraid I shall catch a cold 7. The duke Mas presented to the queen, and he kissed her wind. 8. She has cut her finger. 9. I shall love hin., aa long as my heart beats. 10. It was so warm that 1 could not close my eyes aU night. 11. Close your eyes, and open your mouth. 12. He shuts lus eyes to the light. 13. He was walking [with] his eyes closed ; he ell and broke In. arm. 14. I have my hands full ; I cannot help you lo. I went to see liim, but he shut the door in my face. 16 It is a very cold morning ; will you not warm your hands ? 17. Thank you • M.y hands are not cold. 18. That clun.sy fellow stepped on my toe! ami he hurt me very nmch. 19. My head aches this morning ; I did not close my eyes last night. 20. The sight of those beautiful apples made n.y mouth water. 21 . He stood there, [with] his arms fol.led, awaiting lu« fate like a brave soldier. 22. As long as my heart beats, I shall never forget you. 23. If they come here, we shall shut the door in their face. 24. Do you see those poor children ; those beautiful pears made their mouths water. 25. Let us hope that the law has not lost Its force m this country. 26. He has a watch of his own. 27 Whom do you mean; his father or her father? 28. I mean h.r father. •-.). 1 his house IS hi^ not yours. 30. They lost their lives fighting for tieu-r/«; country. 31. Negroes have dark skins and large mouths. . -. One of my friends who is a doctor toid me tlie following story .U. 1 am going to take away these Ijooks of yours. 34. The ditFerence between mine and thine is not always easy to determine. 35. I love very much these books of mine. 456. 1. Adjectival forms : Si.vo. plur. 111. ce feet)) ,,. ,. , f. cette r'^'*'"'«'' ««s The Demonstrative Pronoun. Demonstratives. 2. Pronominal forms :^^ Pli'r. "1 ee(cet). . . -cl '• <'ette . "1- <'e(cet). . . Ih f eette . . . -lii ' . {■ this. ces. I that, ces . . SiNO. ^■''^}]'^\that(on.),etc. c«ux ) t. celle > cellest .el. .". celul-cl ) ^j^ oeux-d ) f. cellc-ci > cellescl) t^ colle lii » eelles 1& » W.'.. Tho form oet is uspd hoforo a 2 coei this '^"'-^ or 1, mvte: Cot u.l,ro ; oet ^ celjM/,«(. vowel or h mnte (§73) ; c' becomes o' h»- for*. » (§41, 2): '9'a(5t4' PKl i ' t lU f 300 FRENCH QKAMMAR. [457-459. ;*♦•» Ji tni : I- I ! . M i 457. Agreement. The adjectival form apcrees in f^en- der and number witli the noun before Avhich it stands ; the pronominal foi'm agrees in fifender and. number with the noun instend of which it stands : Cetto plume et coUo de Jean. This pen and that of John. J'ainie ces livies-cl, mais je n'aime I like these books, but I do not like pas ceux-h\. those, a. The dcnionatr. adj. must be repeated like the def. art. (cf. §396.) 458. Use of Adjectival Forms. Ce (cette, etc.) = ' this ' or ' that ' ; to distinj^uish * this ' from ' that ' -ci and -111 are respectively added to the noun : Lis CO livre-cl ; lis co livre-ltV. Kead this book ; read that book. J'aiine ces tableaux-lii. I like thosu pictures. a. Ce (cctte, etc.), referring to what has been already mentioned, sometimes ha* tlie force of ' tliat' : Le t^K'graphe, cetto grande d6- The telegraph, that great discov- couverte de notre si^cle. ery of our century. b. The def. art. replaces the demonstr. adj. in a few idioms : Ne parlez pas de la sorte. Do not speak in that way. J'irai k I'instant. I shall go this (very) moment. Use of Pronominal Forms : — 459. Celiii. The pronoun celni (celle, etc,) = 'that,' 'that one,' 'the one,' 'he', is regularly used only along with a relative clause or a de clause : Ceiix qui rient pleureront. Those who laugh will weep. Cello dont je parle est venue. Slio of avIioiu I speak has come. Le devoir d'aimer Dieu et eelnl The duty of loving God and that d'aimer son prochain. of loving one's neighbour. Cette fobe et celle quo j'ai vue. This dress and the one I saw. Mes plumes et eellesdo inon fr6re. !My pens and my brother's. 06s. ; Note the use of colui=Eng-. possessive noun substantively. a. The relative sentence is sometimes elliptically expressed by the past participle : Les d^couvertes (^num^r^es sont The discoveries enumerated are celles faites par I]dison. tJioee made by Edison. h. Colui-1 ji replaces colni when the pn^lioate comes before the relat. ; Celui-lii est riche qui est toujours lie (thnt man) is rich who is ah cout«nt. ways happy. 460, 461.] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 801 that book. y mentioned, 4(50. Colui-ci, celiii-1^. The pronouns celiii-ci (oel- lo-ci, etc.) = 'this,' « this one,' 'he,' 'the latter' and celui- Iji (celle-la, etc.) -'that,' 'that one,' 'tlie former,' are used to contrast the nearer with the more remote: Voici les deux chaines ; gardez eel- Here are the two chains ; keep this le-cl, et renvoyez celle-lA,. (ono), and send back that(onej. Vent-il coux-cl ou ceux-lii ? Docs he wish these or those ? Ciccron et Virgile ^taient Romains ; Cicero and Virgil were Romans ; celul-oi 6tait ^obte, et celul- the former was an orator, and lt\ orateur. the latter a poet. Obs. : The idiom in the last example is lit. ' the latter . . ., ih& former.' a. ' This ' 0?^ 'that ' for emphasis, not contrast, is celul-I& : C'est une bonne loi (que) cclle-l&. This (that) is a good law. 461. Ce + etre. Ce = 'this,' 'tliat," these,' 'those, "he,' 'slie,' 'it,' 'they.' according- to the context, is used with etro (or devoir, poiivoir, savoir + etre), as follows : — 1. As representative subject, when the logical subject is: — ( 1 ) A proper noun, or a determinate noun (including adjs. as such) : It is Mary and her mother. That (it) will be a fine sight. These (those) are our pens. Was it the best ? They (those) are Germans. He (she) is my friend. That may be John. a. Before fetre + an indeterminate noun il (lis, elles) is the regular construction : II est temps d'aller. it is time to go. lis sont amis (Allemands). They are friends (Germans). EUe est couturitjre. She is a seamstress. NoTK.— For a few expressions like c'est dominate, etc., in which c'est stands with an indeterminate noun, see 2, (1), note 3 below. /*. II est is always used to indicate hours of the day : II est midi (trois heures). It is noon (three o'clock). liiit,: Quelle lieuve est-ce (jui vient de sonner?— Clcst cinq heures (—ac- cording to rule). C'est Marie et sa mere. Ce sera un beau spectacle, Co sont nos plumes. Ktait-ce le meilleur? Co sont des Allemands. C'est mon ami(e). Co pent etre Jean. ^14 !l f, ! ft. ; . i. i j -i i ^ » 1 ( 302 FRENCH GllAMMAU. [461. V/ho is It ?— It is they. Those are tlieirs. It is this ; It is that. Tlicy (those) were the same. Those must be mine. Will you not go ? Where is It that he is ? It is not that he is afraid. c. Observe the use of ce in the following date idioms : C'est aujourd'hui lundi. To-day is Monday. Ce sera demain le quatre. To-morrow will be the foui-th. (2) A pronoun : Qui est-c« ? — Ce sont eux. Ce sont les leurs. C'est ceci ; c'est cela. C'6taient les niemes. Ce doivent etre les miens. (3) An infinitive (or infin. witli de) : Ce serai t tout perdre. Thiit would be losing everything. Voir o'est croire. Seeing is believing. Ce que je crains c'est de I'ofTenser. What I fear is to offend him. (4) A noun sentence : Est-oe que vous if irez pas ? Oil est-ce qu'il est ? Ce n'est pas qu'il ait peur. a. The noun sentence may l)e understood : Vous irez, n'est-ce pas ? (=n'est-ce You will go, will you not ? pas que vous irez ?). (5) An adverb of qucantity : Conibien est-ce ? C'a 6t6 trop. How much is It? It was too much. Note —For agreement of the verb, see §312, 3. 2. Ce stands as real subject, wlien tlie complement of etre is : — (1) An adj., an adj. + h + infin., an infin. preceded by k, an adverb (in all cases without further syntactical connec- tion, see a, below) : C'est facile (vrai, bien). That (it) is easy (true, well). Ce doit etre (ne saurait etre) vrai. That must be (cannot be) true. II est parti, c'est clair. He is gone, that is clear. C'est clair, il est parti. It is clear, he is gone. C'est k d(5!sirer. That (it) is 1o be desired. Oil sera-ee ? Where will it (that) be ? C'^tait bien mal h vous. That was very wrong of you. ivas too much. 461,462.] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 303 a. When foHowed by Av> + inf(n. or 1)y a quo dame, the regular con- struction for the above is impersonal 11 {not ' ee ') ; so also the paren- thetical il est vrai and n'est-ll pus vrul? (^--n'est-oe pus?), though without syntactical connection : II est facile do dire cela. 11 est triste do vous voir ainsi. II est clair quo j'ai raison. II est k d^'sirer quo la guerre fi- nisse biuntot. On rit, 11 est vrai, niais attendez. It is easy to say tluit. It is sad to see you thus. It is clear that I am right. It is to be desired that the war will soon end. They laugh, to be sure, but wait. II est bien nial ;\ vous do parler It is very wrong of you to speak ainsi. go^ NOTES.-I. Colloquially, c'est is pretty freely used instead of 11 est »)eforede+m;f»i or a quo claim'.: 'C'est facile do faire celu'; ' Cest clair que j'ai raison,' etc. 2. Tins use of co is permissible in the literary style only in expressions of i'motion,e ,j Cost lieuroux (nuillieureux, beau, triste, 6tonnunt, [et(.), c'est h l)resun.or(craindre, roffretter, etc.) : 'Cest triste do vous voir'; 'C'est i\ cramdre qu'.l ne soit noyc^.' 3. The ce construction is obligatory after a few noun phrases of like value, e,j. ; Cost doniniaffo (pltI6, plalslr, justice, etc.): C est piti6 do I'entendre. ' (2) A prei)ositioiial clause, or a conjunction : C^est pour vous. it (that) is for you. C'est pourquoi je suis venu. Tliat is why I came. C'est conime vous (le) dites. it is as you say. 462. Ce-Vii Relative. Ce (as antecedent) + a rela- tive denotes 'that which,' 'what,' 'which,' etc. : Co qui m'amuse. What (that wlilcli) amuses me. Co quo je dis est vrai. wiiat I say is true. Co dont nous parlions. What we were speaking of. Co k quol je pense. what I am thinking of. II est ag6, CO qui est dommage. He is old, which is a pity. a. Co, so used, either immediately precedes the relative, or is, for em- phasis, divided from it by Urn -v a predicate mhstantive : Co qu'il veut est la gloire. What he desires is glory. C est la gloire qu'il veut. It is glory that he desires. em^ZiT^*"'' 'fr,' °/ f ""•''^''•"^* '"" i« ^"^'^ ^'^-^^' ^^-> render a predicate substantive emphatc, e.g., 'C'est ton frfere qui le dit' ; 'C'est.t vous quo (='^ qui') je parU'; C est mourir que de vnre ainsi ' ; ' C'est une belle viUe que Paris.' ' " ^ J '- IM I'CJD i. 1 304 FRENOH CJUAMMAR. [403-465. 40;{. Other iiseH of ce. Apart from it.^ uso with 6tro or ^\hh n rcJative, co is i'ouiHl in a few i)hmscs only mostly urcli.'iic, faiiiilinr or jocular: Ce devint un u«age. tIiIh (that) became a custom. Tu craiiis, ev> lui tlit-il. You fear, said he to liim. Sur CO, je vouH quitte. And now, I leave you. I)e ce non content. Not satisfied with tills. a. The parenlhetical co stMnl)le may l)e used only when unconnected (of. §-lGl, 2, (1), a), otherwise ii Hoiiiblc : C'est lui, ce me semble, an moins. It's he, it seems to me, at least. Btit: II me seml)Ie qiu-! c'est lui. 464. Pleonastic ce. As compared with Eng.,ce is often pleonastic ; thus, it is used with etre + rt logical subj. :— 1. Regularly, after celiii qui and ce qui : Celle qui I'a dit c'est vous. The one who said so is you. ' Ce que je craius ce sont mes pr6- What I fear is my would-be friends. tendus amis. Ce h quoi je pense c'est sa santt^. Wliat I think of is his health, 2. Reg-ularly, between infinitives (not negative) : Penser, c'est vivre. To think is to live. But. : V^'gi-ter (ce) n'est pas vivre. 3. Regularly, in inversions with que : C'est une belle ville que Paris. | Paris is a beautiful city. I It is a fine city, (* is ') Paris. 4. Optionally, in other inversions for emphasis : La guerre (ce) serait la ruine. ^V' ar would be rum. Note.— When the complement of 6tre is an adj. or participle, pleonastic ce n.ay not be used : ' Ce qui est utile n'cst pas toujours juste.' 465. Geci and ce/a. Ceci = 'this' (the nearer) and cela - 'that' (the more remote) are used to denote some- thing indicated, but not yet named : Gardez ceci et donnez-moi cela. Keep this and give me that. Obs. : If the object has been already named, or if the name is fully implied by the context, celui-ci (-Ih) must be used. a. Cecl also refers to what is about to be said, and cela to what has been said : R^fl^chisse/ bien k ceci. Think well on this. 'Jenedispasdavantage,ceiasutiit. 1 say no more, tliat is enough. ic ce niay not o what has 4G5.] THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN. 306 3cret. \ secret. / That is a secret. b. Ceol {7wt ' cela ') may have a predicate noun : Cuol est uu secret, or C'eat lol un This is a secret. secret (ruior). But: C'est li\ un secr« Gulii c'est xm Note. -Cela in not so divided before in£>me, seal, and its division in negations is optional: ' Cola aeul (mCme) en ent la cause' ; 'Celan'est poaC^r ce n'est pas Ik) line faute.' c. Cela {not ' ceci ')=* this ' before a tie clause : Paris a cela d'avantageux. Paris has this advantage. d. Cela may be rei)lace(l by Ih after do and par : Do U\ vient que, etc. From that it comes that, etc. 11 faut commencer jiar Ih. We must begin with that. e. Cela is often contracted to 9a colloquially : Ca ne fait rien. That doesn't matter. /. Ca is sometimes used familiarly or contemptuously of persons in- stead of a personal pronoun : Regardez comme ^a mange. Look how thoy (etc. ) eat. Ca veut faire h sa tete. You (etc. ) wish to do as you please. NOTB.— Distinguish 9a from i}h (adv.) and . Is that the houst; of which you 8j)oke to me ? .iO. No, it is the next one. ;^1. VViio is that lady? :i'2. She is the lady who lives next door. 'AX What I fear is that he will never eome hack. lU. It is not that he is losing his numyy, hut he is destroying his health also. 35. It is time to go home. EXKIti ISIO LXXV. C'est une l)elle chose (pie de pro- It is a fine thing to i)rotect txie teger les faibles. weak. Ce sont des (jualilcs ni^'cessaires Mihhui.ss and liiinness are neces- pour n'-gner cpie la douceur et sary (jualities for ruling. la fci'mett';. ' II a cela de bon. He has this good thing about him. 1. It is they who liave done it. 2. It was kind of you to help those poor people. 3. You can do it ; it is easy. 4. That was not kind of you ; you should have allowed me to do it. 5. You are ricli ; it is easy for you to say so. (i. It is a pity that we did not know it sooner. 7. It is unfortunate that he did not come yesterday. H. My fathoi told mc you were here ; that is why I came. 9. It is to be feared that the traveller has died of hunger. 10. It is to be desired that those misfor- tunes will never happen. 11. What we were speaking of has happened. 12. What I am thinking of is the way of preventing that misfortune. 13. What he says is true. 14. It's a fine thing, ('is') money ! 15. Itis not to you that I speak. 10. He has lost all his money, which is sad. 17. What a beautiful thing is virtue ! 18. It is money that he wishes. 19. He is a fine young man, ('is') John ! 20. It would be a good thing to go away. 21. It is a fine thing to love virtue. 22. Health and good sense are qualities necessary for succeeding in the world. 23. You are the one who did that. 24. Love is the strongest of all passions. 25. This does not belong to me, but that does. 26. Give me this ; keep that for yourself. 27. He has this good thing about him, that he al- ways tells the truth. 28. What a lazy beast ; and yet he thinks that he M'orks ! 29. Did he give you back your pencil ? 30. No, but that does not matter ; I have another heie. 31. It is difhcult to translate the word 'l!hat' into French. ,32, 1 am sure that that 'that' that that aian uses is superfluous. i» 4t66-468.] THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN. 307 40(J. The Intehuogativk Pronoun. Iiiterrojjriitives. 1. Adjectival I'ornis :— 2. Pronominal forms :-« m.qnolV quelw? )7<;AwA?, ni. Icqiiel V lesquoUV ) wfttc/i;, w/ticft f. quoHo? quollu8V*7pAa«?,cte.f. l.-iquclle? lenquollos? > ortt;Aa«(M»e(«)? qui?, who}, whom t Obs. : For tho fern, and plur of. §§415, 1, (2) and 410. «ine ?, ((;/ta« ? 467. AsTocmont. ordinary atl,joctivcs ; G. quol?, u'liat? OhK. : 1. Lioquol=lti+quol, both parts he- iriK' inflfcted (SS;«»i, 40<>, 1); do, A contract with lo, loH (dnqucl, uuiiui;!, etc., (if. §395). 2. 8, Quel ?, Loqucl ?. The adj. quol ? (quelle ?, etc.) = *Avhich?', 'what?' and tho pron. loquel? (Ijiquclle?, etc.) = « which (one) ?', ' what (one) ?' refer either to persons or things, and stand both indirect and indirect questions : Quels livres avez-vous ? Dites-moi quel livre il a. I)es«iuel8 avez-vous hosoin ? Dites-moi leHtiuelN vous avez. Quelle (lame est arriv6e? Je ne sais pas luquello. Quelles sont vos raisons ? Quel homme est-ce \k ? Auquel des hommes parle-t-il ? Which (what) books have you ? Tell me Avhieh (what) book ho has. Wliich (ones) do you need ? Tell me Avhleh (ones) you have. Which (what) lady has come ? I do not know wliieh (one). What are your reasons ? What (what kind of) man is that ? To which of the men does he speak ? a. Quol ! in exclamations a()metimes:= ' what a ! ', ' what ! ' Quel h«^.ros ! Quels h6ros ! What a hero ! AVhat heroes I Quelle l)elle sc^ne ! \\Miat a beautiful scene 1 11 mi: \ 308 KUKNCH (illAMMAU. [468 470. ■ 'K V t ,i. i % i ' '' 1 J, " 1 } . 1 i1 ' 1 1 h. Quel? ua priMlioutivu udj. often loplucjiH qui V 'who?' : Quol.H soiit ccH geim-lii ? Who are those people? {or what kind of pcMtple are tlioso?) Sais-tu quollo est cette dame ? Do you know who I hat hidy iu ? NoTK.— A pleonuMtio de is coiiiinonly u«i'>1 ?, lev quel ? fttid other interroKiitiveti, probuMy ciiuHed by cose uttractiori with cIohiIcmix, often prcHeiit in auch exprensions : ' t^iitl (dcH deux) est lo plim habilt-, do i et Iioinnje- ci ou do eelui i.i V ; ' Laquelle ent la plus iUustre, d'Athijiits on do Hume ?' 4(J9 Qui?. 1. The pron. qiii?-'\vli()?', Mvliomy, is rc^nilarly used of persons only, and stuiids in botli direct and Indirect qiu'stions : Qui f rappe ? Qu I est 1{\ ? De qui {h qui) parlo-t-il? Qui avez-vous vu ? Qui etes-vou8j? Dites-nioi qui est venu. Who is knocking ? Who is there ? Of whom (to whom) is he speaking? Whom did you see ? Who are you ? Tell me wlio has come. a. Qui ? is sometimes used (though rarely and not necessarily) as sub- ject to a transitive verb in the sense of ' what V : Qui vous amine de si bonne heure ? What brings you so early ? h. Qui ?, predicatively, is often replaced (especially when fem. or plur.)by quel?: Quelle est cette dame ? who is that lady ? ( What 1. is that?). Quels sont-ils ? who are they ? 2. ' Whose ?', denoting ownership simply, - k qui ? ; otherwise generally de qui?, sometimes quel? (but never ' dont ') : A qui est cette maisou-li? WhoHo house is that ? Do qui etes vous fils ? Whoso son are you ? Quelle maison a ^ttJ brM^e : AA'hoso (what) house was burnt? Note.— Compare with thia the idiom o'cst h qui: 'O'^tait fi qui finirait Ic pre- mier,' • It was a strife as to who would finish first.' 470. Que?, Quoi?. The form que ?=' what ?' is conjunctive, while quoi ?=• what?' is disjunctive; their uses in detail are : — 1. Que? stands regularly as direct object or as predi cate, and in direct question only : Que vous a-t-il dit ? •C"-» *'-t**'f' ^^fUcj . Qu© sont-ils devenus ? What did he say to you ? What are you lookitig fur? Whiit has liecome of them ? 3sarily) aa aub- hat Lis that?). 470,471.] TIIK INTERROGATIVE PEONUUN. 309 a. Que? (altenmtively with quol ?) may ataiul with au iniin. in in- direct 4iicati(>ii : Jo ne BaiH quo (quol) diro. ' I know not what tr* say. />. Que ?^(quo !) sonietiines lias advcrhiul foiuo : Q»o no ui Wz-vouB .lit oela ? Why did you not tell mo that ' Qn« VOU8 oto8 heurcux ! How l.,i|,,,y y„„ are ' Quo d'argent ponlu ! wi.at a <,uu..tlty of money lost ! 2. ' Wluit?' as mihject of ii verb is regularly qu'cst-ee qui ^^ : o J ^ V Qu'out-co qui VOU8 a frappti ? What struck you ? a The form quo ? may stand as .nhjrct to a few intransitivos (mostly 8uch as may also he impera.). hut never as subject to a transitive: Quo sert de ph^urer ? what is the use of crying ? Que vous en semble ? what do you think of it ' ho7n, vhich, that. (lont, irhose, of whom, of which, etc, oil, in lohich, into which, at xvhich, to irhich, i tc. lequel, m. s. lo«quel., m. pi. V,,.;,^^ ,,h^,„^ ,,j,i,h^ tJiat. Inqucllo, f. s. lesquelles, f. pi. J quol, ichat, which. Ohs. : For qn', hcc §73. 473. Agrroemont. A relative iiroiioiiii, whether vm riable or invariable in form, is of the yender, niunber and person of \\^ antecedent : Moi qwi ^tais (vousqui 6tiez)lcl. Les lettres que j'ai apportt'es. Moi qui siiis son aiiii(c). Dieux (a'ous) qui lu'cxjiucez ! C'est nous asons are. 4. What sort of weather is it this morning ? 5. I think it will be fine. 3. I do not know to which of those men we were speak) ug. 7. What fine weather ! I hope it will continue until we leave. 8. ^^']lo '» that': 9. It is the man I sold my house to. 10. What was the mai rcr this morning; I heard a great noise in the sti'eet ? 11. What were yon speaking of to that man you met ? 12. I was speaking to him of what we weie discussing yesterday. ].']. Scoundicl that you are, if I catch you, I'll give you wliat you deserve. 14. What I complain of is that you make no progres.s in your studies. 15. I do not undevsi;and you : will you explain to me clearly what you mean '! 16. What has beconit; [479, 480. THE INDEFINITE IMIONOUN. 315 that book as some- of that young gentleman with whom I saw you? 17. I don't know Avhat has Iniconie of him; 1 have not .seen him lately 18. VV^hieh of those ladies did you see V 19. I miw the one that was here yesterday. 20. What are you thinking of? 21. I am thinking of what we are going to do to-morrow. 22. What did your father tell you to do? 23. I have done what he told me to do. 24. The gentleman, whose son was vi^^itiiig us l:i«t year, will couje himself next year. 25. The lady, whose daugliter lias just been married, will speml some weeks with us next summer. 20. The people, of whom t speak, would never do such a thing. 27. I, wiio am your friend, tell you so, and you ought to believe it. 2S. It was we who ga\e them their liberty, and yet to-day they arc our enemies. 2!). He has gone away, and what is wor.se, he has not ps.id his debts. 30. That is very strange ! T sent him a letter, and yet he says he ncvei' recei veil it. 3 1 . To w hom are you speaking, sir ? 32. It is to you J am speaking, and I want you to pay attention to what I say. 33. The house they are coming out of belongs to my father. 34. The people of the village M'hich ho came from were very glad to be rid of him. 35. The gentleman, for whose house I oflered such a high pi-ice, has bought another. 3(j. The cause, for which those soldiers fought, was the deliverance of their country. 37. The man, in whom I trust, will not deceive me. 38. That child is deaf and dumb, which is a great pity, for he seems very intelligent. 39. I thank you very much. 40. Don't mention it. 41. What I was expecting was that he would pay nie. 42. That is not a poor man ; he is well off. 43. Where is the pen I made use of yesterday ? 44. Take what you need ; there will be enough for all. 45. Which way did you come this morning ? 46. I variom,efc., ell verses, f. pi. J 5. lutiiiit, many a. (i. quulque, some ; pi. , some (few). Obg. : Except for divers, the feniiiiine and plural are fonned like those of ordinary adjectives. f 1 IL fe HM 1' 1 1 \ 316 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [480, 481. ■ 1 h'lM it 1 n i j ' 1 1 ■ . , ■ qnolqu'unu, f. e. J quolquus-uiiM, in. pi. Y.soww/'y^eo qnolques-unes, f, ■pl.Jjdc), etc. quelqiie t'hoHc, something. Note ■ Vsuch, etc. 2. Pronomirxal forms : — 1. autrul, o//(r/\s, other people, etc. 2. chiicun, m. \eat7i (o7ie), every ohacune, I. J (one). 3. on (I'on), one, people, cic. 4. porsonno. . . ne, nob. '.' : 7. rlen . . . ne, nothiny. Obs. : 1. Unless otherwise iruiicu^ca above, th.se forms are invariable. 2. On often beeomcs I'on after a vowel sound to avoid hiatus (especially after et, ou, ou, r(m. pei'Noiino i.s ///«.sc. (sonictiiiies sylleptically fcm, like on, U, c, above) ; the noun perHOiino is always /cm. (ct. i'MO, 1, c ), 5. Qnolqii'uii(c) =^ 'somebody,' 'someone,' 'anyone,' btc, with its plur. (niclqiics-uii(c)s = ' some,' some i)eopl(',' 'any,' 'a few,' etc., is the proii. corresponding to the adj. quelque (^481, 5) : II y a quolqu-un \h. Thero is Honiobotly there. Y a-t-il quelqu'un Ikl Is there any ono there ? A-t-il quolques-unoH des Heurs? Has he Noniu (uuy) of the flowera? lien resto quelquoH-unoM. A few of them r'jiiiain. Qnclqu'une des dames viondra. Sonic one of the ladies will come. Quelque8-iir<* le croieiit. Some (people) believe it. 6. Qiielqno choso = ' sometliing,' 'anything,' and is inasc, though fornuid from the fem. noun chose : Qnelque chose est promis, Sonietliln^ is promised. A-t-il dit quelque t'lu)se? Did lie say iinythlng:? A-t-il qnelque t'liose de bou 'i Has he anything goo ( ave me another pen. II II encore uno n J h. 'Others,' 'other people '==leH uutres or d'aiitres, sometimes au- trul (cf. §482, 1) : 11 80 mt'^fie toujours den autroH. He always suspects others. D'autri'H pensont autrement. Others think otherwise. JJlen d'antrus. Many others. Obs. : The d' of d'antrcH is partitive si^'n (cf. §403, 1, h). c. Autres is often added familiarly to nous, vous : \ous autres peintres. We painters. VouM autreH Frantjais parlez trcs You Frenchmen spwik very fast, vite. d. Observe the following expressions "Vf ith autre : Autre part ; de part et d'autre. Filsewliere : reciprocally. (-'est (tout) un autre homme. He ia a very different man. I'arler de 3hoses et d'autres. To speak of this and that. T/autro jour. The other day. Autre est promettrc, autre esi; It is one thing to promise, and an- donner. Tout autre que lui. De temps h. autre. A d'autres (fam. ). e. For I'un . . . I'autro, les uns. other to give. Any one but him. From time to time. Tell that to the maiiucs (farn. ). . . les autres, see §483, 7, (2). S ■11 I;- I ! y:::jii [ 'Mi h' !S..„jll! !'%• i. ti 322 PUENCH fJHAMMAR. [48n. 3. Mdme varies in motminjj^ and form ju'cording tu pOKition ami riinction : — (1) Precedimj its nmin or as a pmnoun, ineme = ' nainc, and n(;arly always lias tl»e articles : La (lea) mAiiio(8) cho8«\»)> Tl'<5 wiiiie thiiig(8). Lea miens wont lea iii^iiioh. Mino are the huiiio. I)onn«!z-moi des ineineH. Give inu some of the miiiio. Uao iiiCnie affaire. One an. Observe the following idiomatic expressions : Tout le monde (cf. le monde entier). Everybody (cf. the whole world). Touto ma vie ; tou» les honnneo. Tout homme ; tonte creature. Tons (tontes) sont venu(e)8. Cest tout ; de touM cot^s. Tout m'effraie. 'I'ouH les mois ; pas du tout. Tons les deux jours. Tons (les*) deux or les deux. Tout a rheure. Tout l>eau ; tout doux. (Pour) tout de bon. Every month ; not at all. Every other (alternate) day. Both. Presently (or a little ago). Gently (slowly) ; softly. Seriously. 'Tous doux (trols, Ptc.)— without 'les'— usually denotes ' siinultaneousnesa, (^-' both together,' etc.) ; les is obligatory above ten, and usual from^cc to ten. <'. For the distinction between tout and chaque see §481, 2, a ; for tout. . . (|ue=^' however,' see §481, .">, a, note. 7. Ull is used either alone or as correlative to autre ; fl) Un (as adj.) = 'a,' 'an,' (cf. § 398), 'one,' 'a certain '• nti (as pron.)= ' one ' : • lii 324 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [483, 484 <*% :\'i 1 r P"**! S*^** If' . 1 « ri: I * 1 J • I ... ^ i l> i La inaisou est (Vun c6t6. Un monsieur A. I'a dit. Une des dames I'a dit. Voici un crayon. — J 'en ai un. The house is on one side. A (ccrttiiu) Mr. A, said so. One of the ladies said so. Here is a pencil. — I have one. Ijeg una sont de cot avis, les au- Sonieareof this opinion, (the) others tres n'en sont pas. are not. a. Un as a pron, is often preceded by 1', especially with a do clause : L'un des consuls est arriv6. One of the consuls lias come. (2) L'uii(o), I'aiitre (les iiii(e)s, les autres) are com- bined, into various correlative plirases, as follows : — l'un I'autre^ ' each other,' 'one another ' ; pi. ditto. run et rtiutre= ' both ' ; pi., ' both,' ' all.' l'un ou I'autroi =' either ' ; pi , ditto. ni Tun nl I'liutre (. . . ne) = 'neither ' ; pi., 'neither,' 'none.' EUes se flattent I'uno Tautro. They flatter each other, lis parlent les uns dos autres. They speak of one another. Lios uns pour les autres. For one another. i.'uno et I'autre occasion. Both occasions. -• .V* nna et les autres parlent. Both (all of them) speak, Dites ceci aux uns et aux autres. Say this to both (all). Je prends l'un(e) ou I'autre. I take either. Parle h I'une ou k I'autre. Speak to either. Nl les un(e)8 nl les autres ne Neither (none of them) are fot sont pour vous. you. Ni pour l'un(e) ni pour I'autre. For neither. 484. Indefinite Relatives. 1. Adjectival : — 2. Pronominal : — Queloonque, any (irhatever, at all). Quioonque, whoever. Quel que ( +subj. of 6tre), whatever. Qui que . . . ( +subj. of 6tre), who- Quelque . . . que( + subj. ), whatever. ever. Quoi que . . . ( + subj.), whatever. Obs. : Quelconque takes g for the plur., and always follows its noun ; quicon- «]iue is invariable ; the other forms are made up from quel, quelque, qui, quo!, +que. Un (deux) point(s) quolconque(s). Any (two) point(8) whatever. D'^3 raisons qucloonquos. Any reasons whatever (at all). Quioonque parle sera puni(e). Whoever speaks will be punished. Qvielsqtie soient (puissent t-tve) Whateverbe(maybe)yonrde«igiis. (Tos desseins. them) are fat j. of 6tre), trhn- ■s) ydnr de«igiis. 484.] EXERCISES. 325 Quollo que fftt la loi. Wimtovor the law might be. Quelquefl efforts qu'il fasse. Whatever efforts he makes. Qui quo tu sois (puissea 6tre). Whoever you be (may be). Quol que vous fassiez. Wlmtevor you do. Obs. : For the use of the subjunctive, see §35G, 4 . a. Qui quo and quol quo are also used with ce before solt : (Jul qiu* CO solt qui le dise. WhoHoovor saya it. Quol quo CO solt qu'il dise. Whatsoover he says. EXERCISE LXXVII. 1. Certain people say the criminal has escaped. 2. Each day brings its labour. 3. We rise every morning at six o'clock. 4. I have seen liim many a time. 5. I have no apples, but I have some pears and l)eaches. 6. However great and rich we may be, we must die. 7. Whatever your intentions were, your actions were not good. S. However good your intentions were, you did not succeed in doing us good. 9. We should respect the rights of others. 10. Every one for himself is, happily, not a maxim which everybody practises. 11. If we do not love others, others will not love us. 12. Those children will receive, each one at his majority, their portion of their father's estate. 1 ;{. Mother, will you come down ? You are wanted. 14. It is said that tlie robber has been caught. 15. It is not known whether the ship was Nviecked or not. 16. When one is pretty, one is rarely ignorant of it. 17. People wonder why that young man associates with those scoun- •b els. 18. When one sees a noble action, it always gives one pleasure. IS). I have never seen any one who had so many nolJe qualities. 20. I am afraid to say anythirtr about it to any one. 21. No one has ever .lone anything like that. 22. What a beautiful view ! Did you ever soe anything like it? 23. He went away without visiting anyone. 24. Did you lind anything where you v^ere looking yesterday ? 25. I do 'u.t know anyone of his friends. 26. I doubt whether anyone of you will ,lo so. 27. If I can do it without any expense, I shall do it willingly. '2S. I do not like this book ; give me another. 29. That little boy has liad one apple, and now he wants another. 30. Frenchmen often laugh at us Englishmen, because we are less gay than they. 31. This man I have seen elsewhere, but that one I never saw anywhere. .32. These are the same people that were here yesterday morning. 33. That lady is goodness itself. .34. Even if you were to say so, I should not believe It. 35. That is a young man in whom I have confidence ; I shall put him in a position to make his fortune. .36. Were there any children at r' ^' I ( ' 326 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [484,485. Ill m h V ^51! t ! , 1 Hi »nH^l! the meeting? 37. Yes, there were several. 38. I shall never accept such conditions. 39. I never saw such a foolish man. 40. If he were to say such a thing to me, I should put him out of doors. 41. He spent his whole life in doing good. 42. Our neighbour's daughters have become quite tall. 43. He conies to town every other week. 44. Where are the children ? Both were here a little ago. 45. I found two apples in the basket, but neither is good. 46. Any line being given, draw a straight line which shall be equal to it. 47. There is no reason what- ever which can persuade me. 48. Whoever has stolen that poor woman's money ought to be punislied. 49. WHioever he is who told you that, he is mistaken. 50. Whatever that man may do, he will never succeed. 51. Whatever the reason may be, he will never come to see us. THE ADVERB. ;5. simple Adverbs. The following- list contains the commoner simple adverbs : — 485. ailleurs, c.lsetohere. ainsi, thus, so. alors, then. aprfes, afterwards. assez, enough, rather. aujourd'hui, to-day. auparavant, before. aussi, also, too, as. aussitot, directly. autant, as much. autrefois, formerly. beaucoup, much. bien, well, very, much. bientot, soon. cependant, hoxoever. certcs, indeed. demain, to-morrow. derrit;re, behind. d(f!Sorriais, hencefcn^th. dessous, under. dessus, above. devant, hcfore. niaintenant, now. mal, badly. meme, even. mieux, better. morns, less. ne . . . , not. dor^navant, henceforth. n6anmoins,r^,ver-M)orrf. THE ADVERB. en effet, in. fact. on haul, ahnre, up utaim. lit-bas, yonder. l.'i-des.sus, Ihereiipon plus tut, sooner. sans doutc, doithtless. 329 tfit ou tard, soutur or later. tour .\ tour, in turn. tout ii coiii>, suddenly. tout (k suite, at once. tout d'un coup, all at onoe.. etc., etc. " en has, /wJovo, down stairs, tant inicux, .sv> much the better. 480. Comparison Of Ad verbs. 1. Adverbs are roLni- larly compared like adjectives (i^l23) by the use of plus moms, aussi ; quo = ' tliaii ', ' as ' : ' Plus, moins, (aussi) facilenient More, less, (as) easily than ^as) que Jean. j„h,i. a Further examples, illustrating §423, a, h, c, d, as applied to ad- verbs : II ne niarche pas aussl (si) vite. He does not walk as (so) fast Vite conin.e uu ('.clair. As quick as liglitning. II marche plus vite (luo je ne pensais. He walks faster than I thouglit Do plus en plus vite. Paster and faster. Plus jc le connais (et) moins je The more I know him the less I l'^^^""'^- esteem him. h. 'More than,' 'less than,' as adverbs of ry„a.,///y ..,„„« ^e, moins de, respectively; they must be carefully distinguislied from plus (moins) que:= ' more (less) than' in an elliptical sentence : J'ai plus (n.olns) cle dix francs. I have more (leHs)than ten francs. I'.n nioins d une demi-heure. In less than half an hour Jhit: Un elephant mange plus /vn elephant eats more thau-six quo SIX chevaux (ne mangent). horses (eat). 2. The following are irregulcuiij compared blen, welt. mieux, httter. beaucoup, much null, badly, ill. f pis, war ^-e. pt^u, little. ' plus mal, worst. a Beaucoup^ 'much (many)' or ' very much (many) ' and is never m(Kiihed by another adv. (except pas). 3. Tlie superlative is formed by placing- lo (invar ) be- fore the comparative of ine.iuality : ^ '^ To plus souvent (moins souvcnt). (The) most frequently (least f ) J^.Ue parle le plus (mieux, moins). She speaks (the) most (best, least). plug, more. moins, lesn. ♦ii- n ,fr^ vm U^ r ,• 1 ' |-J' ! 330 FRENCH OR AM MAR. [490. 490. Position. 1. An advcrl) rc^'uhirly stands im- mediutely after its verb (rarely betwi^eu subject and verb) : Charles port<> souvcnt ma canne. Charles often carries my cane. On devrait lire lentt'iiient. One should read nlowly. Se levant taril, se outluuit tf>t. Rising early, going to hcd late: lis I'ont blen reyii. They have received liim well. Obs. : Hence the lulw comes between tlie aiix. and the i)artioiiilu in eonii). tenses. a. The adverbs mi jourcl'hui, liier, domain, autrefoiM, t«'>t, tard, It'!, la, allleurs, partout, never come between aux. and participle. II est parti hior. He went away yesterday. Je I'ai clierchi'' part- -ut. I looked for it everywhere. b. Long adverbs in -tiient not uncommonly stand after the past part. : II a parlt^ 61o«iueuinient. He has spoken eIo7'( cede the infiiiitioc. : Tu ne devrais pas trop lire. You should not read too much. II ne saurait niieux faire. He cannot do lietler. II parle do ne pas allcr. He sjjcaks of not going. d. Interrogative advs. liead the phrase, as in Eng. ; other advK. are not uncommonly placed first for emphasis (cf. §317, 3). Qnand allez-vous revenir ? When are you going to come back ? Aujoiird'liul je vais me reposer. To-day I am going to rest. Mallioureuseinent tout est perdu. Unfortunately all is lost. 2. Adverbs usually precede the nouns, adjs., advs. and phrases laodilied by them : Assez de livres, et assez chers. Rooks enough, and dear enonjU^h. tiien mal ;i propos. Very unseasonably. a. For conibien !, connne !, que !, tant I, and plus (nioins) . . . pins (. . , nioins) with adjs. or advs., cf. §428, a. 3. Adverbial phrases follow the same rules as advs., ex- cept that only the shorter ones maj^ usually come between aux. and verb : Nous etions it peine partis. Hardly had we gone. 491, 492.] NEGATION. 331 >o IllUCtl. icr advK. arc Negation. 491. Nesratioii without Vorb. Non - ' no,' 'not, apart from a verl> ; it is often euipluisized by pas,' point': L'avez-vous cUt ?— Kon. Dj.i you say it ?~No. Vous vien 2. Other forms of less frequent use are : a. Ne . . . quelconque=' no. . . whatsoever (at all),' no . , . qui que CO 8oit= 'nobody whatsoever (at all),' no. . . q».ol que co soi---' no- thing whatsoever (at all).' Je n'ai dit quoi que oo solt. I said otiiing at all. i h. Ne. . . brin (lit. 'mote'), or mle (lit. 'crumb'), or jjoutte (lit. ' drop '), or mot (lit. ' word ') = no . . . rien, in certain phrases : II n'y en a brin. There is nothing of it. Je n'y entends goutte. t understand notliing of it. ne ne ne ne ue point, not. ne . gutjre, hardly, ne . jamais, never, ne . plus, no more, ne . que, only. ne . li '•1 li'. ■ w <- } ;ii' 1(1 "V 332 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [492, 493. c. Nil... Aiiio vivantu, or Iioinino qui vivti, or Amu qui vtve, etc. =no . . . porwouiie : II n'y avait ftino vlvunte dans la Tliere was not a livings sonl in the maison. house. d. Ne ... do f-Amc, r. tj. hi (iiia) vie, dc hult Jours, etc. : tie no I'oublierai do nia vio. I shall not forget it whllo I llvo. 4J>.'J. Position. No always precedes tlie verb (and its conjunctive objects, if any) ; i>a.s, point and other ad- verbs immediately foIJofC) the verb (and its conjunctive pronouns, if any) ; indefinites have their usual place. (For exceptions, see a, b) : Je no Ic Iciir ai pas (point) (lit Je n'en ai ffuforo. No lea a-t-il jamais vus ? Je n'y resterai plus. II no Ic voiit nuUeniont. II no preiid aucun .soin. Pei'sonno no pout le dire. II n'a mal quolt'onquo. Je no I'ai dit h, qvii quo oo soit. I did not tell them it. I iiave liardly any of it. Did he never see them ? I shall stay there no longer. He diK^s not Avish it at all. He takes no care. NolMxly can say (it). He lias no pain at all. I have told it to nobody at all. a. l*as, point, usually, and plus, often, precede the dimple injin. (and its conjunctive ol)jccts) ; tliey may precede or follow avoir, fttro, either when alone or in a comp. infin. : II parle dc no piw vous voir. He speaks of not seeing you. !fitre ou no pas etre (n'ctre pas). To be or not to be. J'^tais fache de no vous avoir pas I was sorry not to have seen you. vu {or de no pas vous avoir vu, or de ne vous pus ;ivoir vu). /). RIen (indef. ) as object is treated as an adv. ; it may also precede an infin. like an adv. : II promet de no rien dire. He promises to say nothing. c. The quo of no. . . quo must imniediately precede the word whiah it modifies : Je nen ai vu quo trois. I saw only three of them. d. To denote ' neitlicr . . . nor,' ni is placed before each co-ordinate (if not a finite verb) andne stands before the finite verl) (if any); when finilo verbs are co-oi"dinated, no' stands before each of them, whil»* ni also must staiid with the last, but may not stand with the first,. and is optional with others ; 493-495 ] Qui lo salt ? — Nl lui nl moi. II u'a ni paienta ni amis. .Te neTai iil vu nl enteiidii. II no Bait n! lire ml iV-rire. NEGATION. 333 Who knows it ? — Neither lie nor I. Ho lias neither relativfa nor friends. I neither saw nor lieard it. He can neither rrad nor write. Jo no veux nl qu'il Use nl (|u'il I neither wish him to read nor to (derive. write. n ne le blUme nl ne lo lone. He neltlier blames nor praises it. .le no pouvais, (i>.l) nc devais, nl I neither could, nor aliould, nor no voulais coder. would yield. 494. Ellipsi.s of the Verb. If the verb be omitted (but understood ), no is also omitted, and the correlative itscif denotes negation : Est-il venu ? — Pas encore ( = II Has he come ? — Not yet ( = He has n'est pas encore venu). not yet come). Qui est \k ?— Personno. Who i.s there ? — Nol>o 1; ^^;i! •wi* J I 331 FHENCII (JKAMMAU. [495, 49(5. a. More obscure cuhi'8 of iinpliud uogiition aro i>i'«'ki /ftirtlo <|ae= * take care that not,' etc, and such ex])re.s8ioii8 as II ticnt ' it depends on ' (used interrogatively) : Prenez garde (ju'il no tond)e: 'lake care he does not fall. (Janlez (|u'il no sorti-. 'lake care he (h)es not go out. A quoi tient-il . Pleonastic ne. In a que clause iie is often pleonastic, as compared with Eng'lish ; tlius, ne stands :— 1. After cinpecher = 'prevent,' eviter = ' avoid,' k moins qno = ' unless,' (or que so used) : Empechez (pi'il no pr)i-te. Prevent him from going out, JVivite (|u' on no me voie. I avoid being seen. A moins que je no sois retenu. Unless I be detained. a. T\m no is often omitted after onip{^chor and 6vltep (after emp6cher mostly when negative or interrogative) : b. Ne may stand also after avant quo : Avant (ju'il (no) parte. Before hv- goes away. 2. After expresRions of fearing (erafndre, rc-doister, etc., avoir pour, etc.), when not negatke (or when nega- 406.J NKciATION. ;335 tion is HOC implied by liitoiTof^atioii (^\{)Ccti„{_Miegiitive au- swer, or by con(lif,i<*n) : Je crams (jti'il iie viunne. ( fear ho will come. Craignez-vou8 (ju'il no vioiiiu! ? Do you fear ho uill come ? Ihd : Jo no craiiis pas ([u'll vicnne. Smiis craiiulro du'il Vienna. Crnignez-vous (lu'il vicnne ?-Non ; si jo craignais i[\\[\ vint. h. What it is (or is not) feared will not. happen has the full ne^jation ue . . . pa« in tlie quo clause : Je Grains qu'il no viciuic pas. I fear he will not come. Jene crain&pas»>puis que je no vous ai vu. Smce I saw you mltir^^^ tense (,p.7. 2. .3S, 4) negatively. „....p^, ^^,^ Voili un an qu'il ne buvait pIuH. He had drunk no more for a year. Use of Certain Adverrs. 497. r#i8tfncti«„s. The following. ro especially liabk tobe conioundela me plait encore davantajce That pleases me still more, (plus). 'e suis riche ; il Test bien duvan- I am rich ; he is much raor© so. t«so (plus). Ihit only: J'en ai plus (jue Ini ; il est plus habile ; plus de dix francs ; c'est ce qui le flatte lo plus, etc. "Duvautag^e id occasionally followed by que in archaic style. 4. Ne.. .quo, Soulomeut. Sculenient must be u.sed, (1) when no verb is present, (2) when ' only ' refers to the subject, (.3) or to theverb. (4) or to a que clause, and (5) it may be used to strengthen a ne . . . que ; otherwise ' only ' = 110 . . . quo or HculoHient : S^ul.Mnent les braves. Only the brave. Smiloment mon fr6rr> le sait. Only my brother knows it. Ecoutez seulcmcnt. Only listen. II dit seulement qu'il irait. He only said he would go. II n 'a ^oulemeut qu'k venir. He has only to come. But: Nous ne serons que trois {or trois s.) ; je no veux que voir son p^re (or je veux settlement voir son ptire), etc. a. ' Only, ' referring to the subject, ir ay be turned also by 11 n'y a que, CO n'est que ; 'oaly,' referring to the verb, may be turned by the V^p nf fairp : " »^V Pauele<'TOO'^^^«qu',n«?r9vi^n- Tb» dead only do net come back. vf-^% pas. 'lie t.e fait qii« pi<»u»"»r She doe« nothing but ■»veeD mn k i '-i •»•«« MH« -,■ If F5 :; ¥i' en- i f 338 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [49^ EXERCISK JLXXVIII. 1. I will not sell it, cheap or dear. 2, You did it on purpose, did you not ? 3. Not at all, it was quite acoiilontal. 4. A christian ought to love not only his friends but even his eneiuies. 5. Those poor people had scarcely any bread to eat, when we found them. 6. *Wo have said nothing at all about it. 7. That is a very complicated affair ; I can understand nothing of it. 8. ^Ve did not see a living soul in tlie street, when we rose that morning. 9. Whom did you see? I saw nobody at all. 10. I shall be silent, so as not to liinder you from work- ing. 11. He told me to do nothing until he leturned. 12. I did not do it so as not to be punished. 13. Wliat is tlie matter with that little boy? 14. I do not know, sir ; I neitlier did Jior said anything to him. 15. Would you not be glad to see our old friend V 1(5. No, I neither wish to see liim nor speak to liim. 17. I liave a headache this evening ; I can neither sing nor i>lay. 18. Neither li<3 nor liis father were tliere. 19. I saw neitlier him nor his brother. 20. I have neither friend nor money, but I have strong arms and courage. 21. No more regrets; take courage, and forget the past. 22. Why did he not tell me so beforo leading me into this peril ? 23. There is nobody here he docs not know. 24. Take care that you are not deceived. 25. There is nothing which does not please me better than that. 26. Not one of those we invited has come. 27. Do you know where Dr. B. lives ? 28. I cannot tell you. 29. If you have no use for this book, lend it to me. 30. Unless you do what you said, I shall not pay you. 31. Do ytni not fear he will go away ? 32. I do not fear he will go away. 33. I am afraid our friends will not be there. 34. If I were afraid he would do it, I should do something to hinder him (from it). 35. If I were not afraid he would hurt himself with it, I should let him have it. 36. That man ivritea better tlian he speaks. 37. We do not wish more money than we havf> now. 38. I do not doubt that that is true. 39. Not much is lacking for the number to be complete. 40. We have not seen each other for three years. 41. It is more than three years since we were there. 42. I cannot go with you ; I have no time. 43. Yes, you have, you arc not so busy. 44. You have stolen my apples. 45. I tell you I have not. 46. But I say yes, for I saw you. 47. He has as much money oh you have, but he has not as much as I have. 48. Lst us sav re mcro about.it. 49. We ar^ in a burn?': let us not stay wy longer, £0. I have Hiorp tbpji fifty **'sns&, but h? l.svs ^©re tb&^ I, wid .hif brotJ5«- [497 498.] THE NUMERAL. 339 purpose, did A christian Those poor :;m. G. *Wo catcd affair; ; soul in tlie see ? I saw I from work- l. I did not th that little ling to him. ro, I neither his evening ; were there, r friend nor ore regrets ; me so before es not know, thing which we invited cannot tell 30. Unless fear ho will 1 afraid our I it, I should lid he would - man ^vritea a an we havf> h is lacking 3h other for were there, ave, you are . you I have ch moiiey an lay ro mere i^gf^r. CO. I tiip: numeral. 498. Cardinals. The cardinal numerals denote ' how many ' : 1- iin(e). 4. (juatre. 7. sept. 10. dix. 2. deux. ;■). cinq. 8. huit. 11. on/.e. :i. trois. (j. six. 9. neuf. etc. See also ,^208, tor remarks on formation and pronunci- ation. ft. .Un (f. uno) is the only cardinal which varies for (jender : Uno (deux, trois, etc.) plume{s). One (two, three, etc.) pen(s). Vingt et une vaches. Twenty-one cows. />. Cardinals are invar, for number, except that s is added to quatre- vitiRt and the multiples of cent, but only when immediately precedimj a noun (or adj. +novn), or when they themselves serve asnoum of number.- Quatre-vingts francs. Eighty francs. Trois cents (l)()nnes) pluraets. Three hundred (good) pens. Deux cents millions. Two hundred millions. Trois cents de pommes. Three hundred apples. Les cinq cents. The five hundreds. But : Trois cent un francs ; les cent hommes engages ; quatre-vlnfft- une jilumes ; deux cent niille ; trois niille milles, etc. N.B. -They are not nonnx of number in daten (c. below) or when used an ordinala (sr,Ol) : ' L'an (juatrc cent ' ; ' paj^'e deux cent ' ; ' page quatre-vingt.' r. Tlie form mil {not ' mille ") is used in dates oi the christian era from 1001 to 1999: Kn mil huit cent iiuatre-vingt- In eighteen hundred and ninety-one. onze. [Vm) r-xn mil six. (In) the year 1(X)6. Hut: L'an nullc (sometimes mil); I'an deux millo trois cent; I'an millu cent du monde, etc. d. From 1100 to 1900 numbers are often expressed by hundreds, as so frequently in P^nglish : Eleven hundred ; thirteen hundred. Fifteen hundred and fifty. cent ; ' a (or one) thousand '= niille : A (one) thousjind soldiers. Note.— Septanto = 70, octjinte^SO, nonunte=90, 8lx-vlnprt(8)=r20, and «lUinze-vins't(s)=.iOO, are now obsolete in tht: litoniry laiiffuage. Onze cont(s) ; treize cent(s). Q.uinze cent cinquante. e. ' A (or one) hundred ' = -Millo soldats. '4 I 340 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [499,500. |.f ; > ]. i i. i b I 499. Ordinals. The ordinal numerals denote order or place in a series relatively to the first ; they are formed, from 3rd up, by adding -ieme to the last consonant of the corresponding cardinal (cinq adding u, and f of neuf be- coming V before -ieme) : 1st premier. Srd. troisi^me. 9th. neuvi^me. 101st. cent unit'sme. 2nd l^*^^^"*^^' 4th. quatri^me. 21st. vingt et unifeme. etc., etc. Ideuxifeme. 5th. cinqui^me. 22nd. vingt-deuxi^me. Notes.— 1. Besides the ordinary forms, tiers (f. tlerce)= ' third,' quart(e)^ • fourth,' are used in a few expressions and in fractions : *Le tiers (Stat,' ' The com- moners ' ; ' Fn maison tierce,' ' In the house of a third i)arty ' ; ' Une fi6vre arnil (some- times entre) : Une brebis pariiil les loups. A sheep ainonpr wolves. II fut trouv(5 ontro les morts. He was found aiiion^' the deaa. 2. ' Among (distributively or reciprocally) ' = entre : il le partagea entre ses amis. He divided it anions; his friends, lis parlaient entre eux. They spoke anion ? themselves. 3. Unclassified : C'^tait ainsi cbez les Grecs. It was so amon^ the Greeks. 516. At. 1. Denoting place, time,=h (sometimes on) : A r^cole ; it Douvres ; h table ; At school ; at Dover ; at taole ; h ciiKj heures ; h I'age de ; on at five o'clock ; at the age of ; at tote de ; on (jiu) meme temps ; the head of; at the same tinje; {\ la fin (onfin). at last. 2. In the sense of 'at the house, etc., of,' 'at — '8' = chez : J'ai ^t6 cbez vous ; il est cboz I was at your house ; he is at Mr. Monsieur Ribot. Ribot's. 3. Unclassified : A mes dC'pens ; 4\ tout prix ; d'abord ; At my expense ; at any price ; at sons la main ; entrer par la first ; at hand ; come (go) in fenetre ; ©n haut (bas) ; ati at the window ; at the top moins ; sur mer ; ©n guerre. (bottom); at least; at sea ; at war. 517. Before. 1. Denoting place, in the sense of 'in front of,' 'in the presence of '=d©\aiit ; 348 FRENCH GIIAMMA .. [517-519. '•' III. n "i i.*'»ni ■! I i!i1 Mette/ cela cluvaiit le feu ; lo jar- I'ut that ImTopo thv firo ; the gar- dui <;. ( iluvaiit la maiaun ; il «lcii is lu'loro tlio house; !»e |iii't'fore (levant le juge. the judge. 51 8. By. 1. Denoting the aifenf. (after tlu pasHivo) -par, do (cf. '^'i'20) : EUe fut sivisie par lo volcur ; ils She was seized l»y tlie robber- ; they sont ainids ile tons. are loved by all. 2. Denoting means, way, etc. =par (usually) : Pur la posto ; par chcniin y ten do dix ans («lo beaucoup) ; years (by fai) ; heavier by a pluslourd d'une livre ; moin- pound; less by half; ten feet dre do la moitie ; dix pieda by six. 8ur six. 4. Unclassified : De jour (nuit) ; h l'ann6e ; goutte By day (night) ; by the year ; drop h goutte ; il est midi h ma by drop ; it is noon by my watch ; to know by sight ; by word of month ; a tailor by trade ; to sell by weight ; made by hand. • montre ; connaitre do vue ; do vive voix; lin taillcur do son otat ; vendre an poids ; fait h la main. 519. For 1. In the sense of 'for the sake of,' 'instead of,' '(in exchange) for = pour. Mourir pour la patrie ; j'irai To die for one's country ; I shall pour vons ; donnez-moi ceci go for you ; give me this for pour cela. that. 619-521.] IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS. 349 / ; i>y this I. iler i>y ten L'jivior 1 ».V ii If; ten feet 2. ])em)tiug dmtinatum : Je paivs pour la France ; uiio let- I leave for France ; a letter for tre pour voiis. y()n. 3. Denoting a period of time (future) = ponr : Jo resterai (pour) huit jours ; j'en I shall stay (for) a week; I have ai pour dix ans. enough of it for ten years. NoTK.- 'For' of thiif not future is variouHly rendi c-*! : ' .)'i5tai8 huit joiifs absent or J'6taiH absent pendant huit jours,' ' I waH absent for a week'; 'U y a(volci, voilA) deux heurea que je lis itr Je liii depuifi deux houres,' I liavo been reodinpr for two hours.' 4. Unclaasified : Mot i\ inot ; un reint*)(lo contro Word for word ; a remedy for ; to tremble for fear ; for example; im for nie ; to sell for ten francs or to give for ten francs ; to thank (punish) for ; to change* for ; it is for you to say ; for all tliat. (pour); trenihlerdc crainte ; p«r exemi>l(! ; quant ji, moi ; vendrc dix franc3 or laisser (donncr) pour dix francs ; remercier (punir) do; chan- ger pour (contre) ; c'est h vous de dire ; inHl^re tout cela. 520. From. 1. Usually -=^ de : II vieut do Paris ; de trois k (piatre He comes from Paris ; from three heures ; je I'ai appris de lui. to four o'clock ; I heard it from him. 2. In the sense of * because of,' ' out of,' ' through '--par : Cela arriva par nt'^gligence ; i).'ir That happened from carelessness ; experience (amitii). from experience (friendship). 3. In the sense of ' dating from '=d68, depuis, h partir de : ^)e8(depui8, ;\ partir de)ce jonr ; From that day ; from 1820 (on). h partir do 1820. 4. Unclassiiied : D'aujourd'hui en huit ; dessiuc^ d' A week from to-day ; drawn froiu apr&s nature ; boire dans un nature ; to drink from a glaas ; verre ; otez cela h I'enfant. take that from the child. 521. In (into). 1 . Denoting place or time specifically, i. ■ , in the sense of ' inside of,' 'in(to) the interior of '= dans (cf. §411, 2, 3) : m si ii !* 350 FRENCH (JIIAMMAR [521,522. * "It* 1 DiiiiH CO paquet (champ) ; (Inns la In tliig parcel (field); In(to) the inuiuoii ; iIuiih TAfiuiuo au8- houso ; In South Africa ; in the tralc ; cliuiii touto lu ville ; whole city ; In the Baine year. tlanH la iiiume ann^e. NoTB.— The governed noun usually has the ilef. art, 2. Denoting place or time generally =: on, h (cf. §411, 2, 3) : En Afrique ; h la niaison ; aux In Africa; In the house (at home); In champs ; uu Canada ; h lier- the lielda ; In Canada ; In Ber- lin; ii la canipague (ville) ; ou lin ; lu the country (city); In hiver ; au priutenips ; on paix. winter ; in spring ; In peace. Note.— Tho governed word after en ha« but rarely the def. art. (mostly in fixed exproHNiotis before initial vowel houikI) : ' En I'air' ; 'En I'honiieur de,' etc. .S. In the sense of * at the end of (time) ' = clans ; 'in the course of (time) ' = en : Le train part dnns une heure ; on The train leaves In an hour ; one pent aller h L. en uno heure. can go to L. In an hour. 4. Denoting i^lace, after a superlative— An : La plus grando ville du monde. The largest city In the world. a. Unclassified : Par la pluie ; le matin ; de Ros jours ; par le pass^ ; h I'avenir ; d'avance ; entre les mains de ; k man. avis ; sous le rtgne de ; •GUN prcsse ; de cette nianifere ; un 8ur dix. 522. Of. 1. Usually =de: Le toit de la niaison ; la ville de The roof of the house ; the city of Paris ; un homme d'influence ; I'aris ; a man of influence ; a une livre de th^ ; digne d'hon- pound of tea ; worthy of hon- neur ; il parle d 'aller. our ; he speaks of going. 2. Denoting ma^en'a/ — en : Un pont en bois (fer) ; les pieces A bridge of wood (iron) ; ten franc de dix francs sont en or. pieces are of gold. 3. Unclassified : C'est aimable h vous ; sur 100 per- It is kind of you ; of 100 persons sonnes iiO sont ^chaiTD^es ; doc- -50 escaTied : doctor of medicine; teur en m^decine ; un des mes one of my friends ; of age. amis; majeur. In the rain ; In the morning ; In our days ; In the past ; In the future ; in advance ; In the hands of ; in my opinion ; lu the reign of ; in press ; In this way ; one In ten. 62.V525.] IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS. 361 On (upon). 523. 1. UBually -^Hur : Le livrc est (jo mets Ic livre) hut The liook i» (I put the ljusine88. 524. Out of. 1. Unclassified : Boire duns un verre ; copier rtJi.iH To drink out of a glass ; to copy un livre ; regarder par la out t»f a book ; to look out of fenetre. the window. 525. Over. 1. In the sense of * above '=au-desHus de : Au-dessn8 de la porte «5taient Merits Over tlie door were written these ces mots ; les nombres au- words ; the numbers over on« dossus de uuUe. thousand. 2. Denoting motion above=aur, par, par-dessus : Pas.sez la main sur ce drap ; par Pass your hand over this cloth ; inonts et par vaux ; 11 sauta over hill and dale ; he leaped par-dcssu8 la hale. over the hedge. 3. Unclassified: Au del^ de la rivifere ; I'emporter Over the river ; to triumph over; sur (triompher de) ; se rejouir to rejoice over ; to watoli over. de ; veiller sur. i ill If! 352 u '• oil ♦ M„ H FRENCH (GRAMMAR. [526-630 1. Denoting ,«o^,-o„, across, h t.-Hvors (uu travorH.lo). par • Jepa.saUtruvor«(nutruvors.lc) I passed thro„,.h the fc.re.r, ; to la foret ; passer pur Berlin. pass throuffh lieilin. • 2. In tlie scjise of ' because of,' ' (,wing to '=-=par : Par n(''gligence. rn. , , * *' TIiron8:h carelessness, '''*-'^- Till (until). 1. Unclassified: J»«<,n-.V.!.,„ai„;,,asav.-.„.:n„„W.„ Till t„.m„nw ; „,„, tm „o.|, P ..*«.,o:,,.»,,,ioU,,„„,aUn yean ,„„., ,,,„„ „„;„. ing till night. 528. r,.^ 1. Denot'iig the /;?.r/zVeci! ohject^h (of. §440 '>) . Je I'ai ,lonno A x.n and. j ^,,;, j^ L^jfrjond. tn.r..l . „, ' '^"-P''" > *" '•' ^'^11 : to J^^i-ance ; tngal;cl.ez eiix ; cl,,,z mon to PoHiur.,! • <■« +1 • i a„,j\ '"^ J omig.ii ; to tlieir house, etc. : to niy friend's), 4. In the sense of ' as far as '-jusqu'jV • Venez J„.pvaa l.out de la rue. Come tothe end of the street. o. Unclassified : iuu. .o„, ,|,ct,.„ ; „..„, ce t„ wri.o t„ ,liclati„„ ; to thiB end. ^'^^^^ Towards. See §r)2S, 3. ^30. Under (underneath). 1. Usually = sous : "") brick or stone. 32. It was kind of you to aid me in my misfortune 33. In i.iny weather we stay at home. 34. We shall go away ont*- ^XoflftreTT. "^'"'''"^^^"'- ''■ Ourhouseisonth.-s side of the street, and his xs on that side. 37. When you come to the next stree , turn to the right. 38. Instead of stud.lg heTs-lwav lookmg out of the window. 39. Hisgunwasluingingabo;'^: •'::' 40. The dog jurnped over the fence. 4J. HewaL.edovermyii to t'' 42. In passing through the forest we saw many rare plautT 43^ work from mornine till niiriit dd w« . "^ piaats. i.i. v\ c 45 The troin f ^r> . ^ „ , • ^^<^^^«g"ing to our friends' house. 45. Ihe tram for Pans will be here immediately. 4(5 They sol.I those goods under their value. 47. Wicked men fro..? r- /''^^ «f ' foot. 4«. If ,„„ .,„ live with „:, we l^^rt .T^v^^' '^ZyZ .told us her story with tears in her eyes. y ''^- ^'h THE CONJUNCTION. r>32. Conjunctions and Conjunctive Locutions. ta(la) condition que\ on condition ainsi, there/ore, hence amsi que, as well as, an. that. "afiu que-, in order that, ao that. afcrs que, when. 532.] THE CONJUNCTION. 355 k mesure que, cw, just an. *& moins que . . . ne^, nnlesft. aprtlia que, after. a proportion que, in proportion as. attendu que, considering that, fau cas oil*, in case (that). *nu cas que*^, iyicase (that). Aussi, hejire, therefore. uussitot que, as soon a.?. *avant que^, before. '^bien que'*, though, although. car, for. ^ce n'est pas que^, notthui. jependant, however, yet. fiomme, as. tdans le cas oh^, in case (thur). *de crainte que. . . ne^, for fra,- that. fde fagon que 2, so that. fde maniere que^, so tliat. de nieme que, as icdl as. *de peur que . . . ue"^ , for fear that. dopuis quo, since. fde (telle) sorte que^^ so that. dts que, as soon as, ivh/.n, sinn'. done, now, then, therefore. *en attendant que^, nnfif. *en cas que-", in caf1, 2 (purpose or result). 3 See §351, 3 (condition). 4 See §351, 4 (concession). 5 See §351, 5 (negation). 6 See §349, §351, (5, und §535 (below). Use of Certain Coxjunctiuxs. 53ii. Et. 1. When roiiented, ot usually cloiiott's 'l)otli . . . and' ; otherwise it stands with the last only of two or more clauses : Et vous et lui (vous) savez luioux. ^Jotli you iind he know better. Les feiniiies pleuraient, criaient The women wept (and) screanie.l et gesticulaient. and gesticulated. 2. * And ' after a verb of motion is usually untranslated . Allez leur parler. Go and .speak to them. 534. Ni. 1. A ilnite verb with iii( . . . ni) must lya preceded by iie : II n'a nl or nl argent. He has iiuituer gold nor silver. II lie mange nl iie boit. He neither eats nor drinks. a. For the position of nl . . . nl . . . ne, see §493, d. 2. In sentences of neg-ative force, 'and,' 'or' are ren- dered by iii : Honneui-.s nl richesses ne font le Honours and wealth do not -jon- 1j«"1>«»i"- stitute happiness. 3. Observe the following- equivalents of 'neither,' 'not either,' 'nor either,' 'nor,' when oiot correlative. Je u'irai pas.— Nl moi non plus. I shall not go. -Nor I either (or No ther shall I). II n'ira pas noi« plus. He will not go either. II n est pas allt'-, et il n'ira pus. He has not gone, nor will he (go). 535. Que. 1. QiiQ . < that' is followed by the indica- tive or subjunctive according to the context : ' Je dis que vous avez raison. I say that you are right. J« suis ikoh^ que vous ayeas raison. I am sorry that y»u are right. are reii- n not: con- 535, 536.] USE of certain conjunctions. 357 2. Que often replaces another conjunction ; when so used, it takes the same constructien as the conjunction for which it stands, except that que instead of si = ' if always requires the subjunctive : Quand vous aurez fini, et que vous When you have finished, and (when aurez le temps. you) have time. Venez qtie (='afin que,' 'pour Come that I may see you, que ') je vous voio. SI vous venez demain, et quo vous If you come to-mle to be confounded in use : 1. Quiiiul, Liorstiuo. They are equivalents in the sense of 'when,' but quand {not 'lorsque') serves also as an interrogative adverb in direct or indirect questions : Quand est il arrive ? AVhcn did he come? Dis-moi quand il est arriv^. Tell me when he came. Quand (or lors(iue) je Tai vu. When I saw him. Nous partirons lorsquo (o?- quand) We shall leave when the letter la lettre arrivera. comes. 2. Pendant que, Tandis que. Pendant que = ' while,' 'whilst,' 'during the time that'; tandiH que- 'while,' 'whilst,' 'during the time that,' and also, 'whilst,' ' on the contrary,' 'whereas' : Lisez le journal pendant (|ue j'eeris Read the newspaper wlille I w rite ce billet. this note. T.iidis que vous 6tes ici. Whilst you are here. J.e p^re travaille, tandis que le fils The father works, wliilo the son ne fait rien. does nothing. 3. Dopuig que, Pulsque. Depuls que denotes time. ; puisquo denotes cause assujned : Je suis solitaire depuls que mon I am lonely since my brother went hvve est parti. awcy. Il me faut rester, puisqu'il n'y a 1 must remain, since there is no pas de train ce soir. train this evening. r f I lii i;iisi^M|iA.f 358 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [537. EXEUnSE T.XXXI. 1. For fear it should rain we shall not go away to-day. '2. He did his work so that all were pleased with him, 3. Unless you come to- morrow, we shall not wait for you. 4. Botli he and his brother were there. 5. Go and get us some bread. 6, She neither laughs nor cries. 7. Those poor people are without bread or meat. 8. He does not believe what you say ; nor I either. 9. We shall not be there ; nor he either 1 0. We have not gone away, nor shall we. 1 1 . As soon as you are there and have the time, Avill you go and visit my brother ? 12. If he is there and wt' see him, we sliall tell him wliat you say. 13. When bread is dear and the weatlier is cold, the poor sufTer. 14. I think we shall go away the day after to-morrow. 15. If your friend comes to the meeting and I am there, I shall speak to him. 16. Since you went away I have btcn Avriting letters. 17. Since you cannot do it, you must let me try. 18. Since you went away yesterday he has done nothing but play. 19. Since every, action brings its recompense with it, we must pay at- tention to what we do. 20. \V\n\e I was doing my exercise, she was writinc her letters. 21. The good shall be rewarded, whilst the bad shall be punished. 22. W^lien I saw him, he was busy working in his field. 23. As long as the world lasts, iustice shall prevail over injustice. 24. He did his Mork, so that he was praised by all. 25. He was kind to the poor, so tliat ho might Ijc praised by all. ^'i!E INTERJECTION. 537. interjections. Tlio commoner interjoctioiis and expressions used as such ai'c : 1. Joy, admiration, approval : Ah ! (ah!) ; ha, ha ! or hi, hi ". ^ /aiKjhter) ; bon ! ('jood!) ; bien ! (good!) ; ainervcille ! {caivfal! ) ; h. la bonne heure ! (w.ll done .', Uiut'-i rt(iht. ! ) ; bis ! (encore !) : bravo ! 07' bravissimo ! (ivf-Jl done !, bravo !) ; hourra ! or \nva,t ! (hurrah!). 2. Disj;,aist, disapproval, indifference : Fi ! (fid); fi d*>nc : (for shavu: ! ) ; lie de ! (Jie on!) ; foin de : (a plague upon !) ; pouah ! (disgusting !, fo,ugh !) ; oh ! (oh ! ) ; bah ! or ali ! bah! (nonmme!, pooh-pooh! ) ; baste! ( : par exemple ! (d-nr nif- ! ) : y^'*- ! ^' .>-'A-"".'j. 3. Grief, tVar, pain : Ah ! (ah !) ; oh 1 (oh } : h^las : (ala>i!) ; aie ! (oh!, ohdearfj; mis^ri- cordt ! (nu ; Ikmiiu ! (cannonading); ratapla,! ' (th-am); dare dare! (quick movement); cahin-uaha (jor/- iliiuj along); clopin-clopnnt. (hohhling); tic tac (ticking), etc. ABBREVIATIONS. 5.38. French Abbreviations. Tlie following are the L'ouimoner abbreviations used in French : — Q.-k-6.. =^c'est-d-dire, tha: iz. IJ' or G" = compagnie, com- pany. <>tc. = et cwtera. It. or f. =franc,'^j francs. 1i. -- heure, h< ur. iii-f " = in-foUo, folio. .l.-C. =- Jesufi-Ghrid, Jesus uhrist. M. = Mondeur^ Mr X YM. = Mes.sicm's, IVIessrs. M. K. or M. R . . . Mou.Kiejir R. or Monsieur R TroU- Etolles, Mr. R. or Mr. R — . W = marchand, merchant. M*" (|)l. M' ") = tnaUre, master. Mgr (pi. NNSS.) = monseig- netir, my lord. M"' (pl.M""")-- MademoUslle, Miss. 360 FRENCH GRAMMAR. [<«W a.-ent. -^ sous-eni'mdu, un- derstood. M™" (pi. M^*) = Madame, Mrs. W^maUou, house, firm. ms. (pi. mss.) = rnamiscrit, S. Exc. =/So/» Excellence, manuscript. N.-D. = Notre- Dame, Our Lady. His Excellency. S. M. (pi. LL. MM.) = Sa Majeste, His (Her) Majesty. N.S. = Notre Seigneur, Our S.S. = Sa Saintete, His Holi- Lord. * ness. n" = wwm^ro, number. s. v. p. =s'/7 vouy ptatt, if S.AM.^Son Altesse Boyale, you please. His Royal Highness. V" = veuve, widow. T"" (in tit\iis)= premier, the 1" {fern. V")^ premier, tirst. First. 2'' = deuxieme, second. n (in titles) =- deux, the V=primo, firstly. Second. T''" = septemhre, September Lc XV siecle, etc. = le qiiln- etc., etc. zieme siecle, the 15th cen- tury m <-*ii EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 361 :B>j^Tirn zv. ?]XERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 1. The largest clt)ck ini the worhl will be the one- which sooii^ will adorn the city-hall of Phihulelpliia. The dial of this colossal ch)ck will be* ten metres in diameter, and will be placed and illuminated so as to be visible night and day everywhere in the city. The hands will be, one-'"' four metres and tiie other three metres long ; the bell oi the strik- ing part will weigh forty-six thousand pounds, and in order to wind the clock a steam-engine placed in the tower will be used daily ( = one will use daily a steam-engine, etc. ). ^ SIM, 5. 3 §490. 4. §505, obs. 3. 6g4S3, 7, (1), a. 2 §469. 2. Horsesi, bl.-dsi and animals^ of all (the) sorts spoak a language as well as men^ We camxot understand all ( -all that which) tliey say, but wo understand enough of it to2 know that they have thoughts'* and feel- ings'5. They are sad when (lu^y lose a companion, or when they are driven awayi from home. They are pleased, when they are well treated^, and angry when they are ill treated*. Tliey have, so to -speak, a conscience : they feel asliamed, when tlsey do what displeases us, and are very glad, when they merit our approbation. Kindness^ on our part towards them is as reasonable as lovei andkindnessi between brothers^ of the same family. 1 §399. - ^'Wl, 2. ;5 S40(). 4 §321, 2, a. a, A rich 1 man, it is said 2, once'* asked* a learned man what was ^ the reason that scientific men were-" so often^' seen at the doors of the lieh, while the rich were" very rarely seen'- at the doors of the learned. " It is," replied-i the scholar, " because the man of science knows- the • lue of rif'hes^'*, Init the Ti<-h man dues not always know the value of Kciencew T- W- 83*21, 2, a. 3 §490. * §34a 5 §338, 5. '! §338, 1. V §204. 8 §399. I] I 1- If:- 362 FRENCH (JHAMMAR. 4. Moli^re, th«' great Freucli i author, waa horn" in Paris in thu year one thousand six hundred find twenty-two His father was the king's upholsterer and wiin proljahly a ratlier rich^ man. The sou reeeived" a good education, but not nuich is known" of his youth. When he was about twenty years ohl'', he organized •• a company of actors, which was'' called IjIlluHtrc ThnUrc. But in tins enterprise lie did not suceeod" very well. He soon^ lost" all his money, and with his froupi' was'' forced to" leave Paris and (to) make a tour in [llu^] province[s]. This tour lasted'' from sixteen hundred and forty-six to sixteen hundred and fifty-eight. During these years he travelled''' over nearly the whole of France, and played'* in many of the hirge cities. After his return to Paris ho became''' the king's favourite, and produced'' the masterpieces which have rendcjcd liim so celebrated. At last, after fifteen years of great prosperity, he died'' in sixteen hundred and seventy-three at the age of fifty-one. 1 §430, 1, (-2). 4 §420. « §321, 2, a. « §4!10. 2 I'ast ])ef. "• i?34a 7 §507. »> §3.W, «■ 3 §498, c. 5. Speaking of the small world in which oven the greatest live i, Lord Beaconstield used to tell^ tliat Xapoleou I., a year after he became Emperor, determined to"' find out if there was* anybotly in the world who had never heard of him. \\'ithin a fortnight the police of Paris had'"' discovercda wood-clioppct at Montmartre, in T'aris itself, who had never heard of tl.e Revolution, nor of the death of Louis XVI., nor of the Emperor Na})oleon. 1 §317, (5. 3 §359, 6. ^ §338, 5. * §312, 1. 2 §338, 2. 6. Napoleon, the greatest general of modern times^, was born 2 at Ajaccio on the l^th August, ITtiU. At the age of ten^' he was sent to the military ^ school at Brienne, where he remained more than'"' five years. Then entering the French-^ army, he was, in 1706, appointed general of the army of Italy", an.l soon succeeded in comiuering'' that country. He used so well the oijportunities whicli were offered him by the weakness of the Republic that in less than ten years he was elected Emperor. The ten years' struggle, in which he engaged with the pur- pose of subduing*^ Europe", ended witli the battle of Waterloo in li! EXHIKMSKS !N TRANSLATION. 3(>?? J the year the king's ■ucfived" a It'll he was vliich was'' J siiceeed" (111 pi' WIIH'' L![s]. This lulled and 3 wliolo of return to latorpioLies !n years of ree at the ivei, Lord he liccame the worhl ce of Paris f, who had VI., nor of born 2 at I'as sent to than-'' five appointed sring^ that red him by vas elected ]x the pur- 'aterloo in ISlf). Baninlied to (en) St. Helena ho die(n'> there on thcfjth of May, iH'il. Twenty cars after his death his roinaiiiH were brought back to (m) Frauee, and interred in the ffoli / (l:n Invalided. M3i)9. I S »;!(», 1, (-2). T )f;tr.8, 2, « 8411, 1. ■5 §PiwtDef. 5 Slh!), 1,6. 8 §351), 2. 10 ^iinnirut or •■» §507, oba. 2. §411, •>, note. ei>t moH. 7. Great Britain* and Ireland* arc two hirge islandH in the west of Europe*' Great IJritaiu is the larger of the two and coiiiprise.s Eng- laiuP, Scotland* and Wales* . The monarch of the United Kingdom of (Jreat Britain- and Ireland- is (^Uieen^ Victoria who waa born^ on the '24ih of May, 1819, She is the daughter of the Duke of Kent, son of George III. She ascemled the throne on (a) the death of William IV. in 1837. She has to (pour) assist her in the govern- ment of the country a parliament which meets once a year at West- minster. When she appeared before (k) parliament for the first time, , IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // <^^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 ■- !■■ mil 2 2 lis IIIIIM 1.4 1.8 1.6 ^ >^ ^^ %. # 0^ PhotogTdphic Sciences Corporation ..^•^ 4 s^ O 23 WEST MAIN STREET V.£BSTER,N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 ) U.X ^ m 1 '4 s ^H I- I ■s I' 1 1 ' I I 'l': ^'■' '4,, Hi*.' • |j4 . 364 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 9. The unknown! author of " Beowulf " was not aZ native of England, and so the first of the long line uf Englishs poets is really Csedmon. Brtida tells us a pretty story of the way in which* Ciedmon became a 3 poet. He was already almost an2 old man before he knew anything^ of the art of poetry. At the feasts, in those days, everybody used to sing« in turn to 7 amuse the company, but Ca-dmon used to leave « the table before the harp was givenS to him. One evening, when he had done thus, he went to the stable and lay down, after having" cared for the cattle, be- cause, you must know, he was only a farm-servant in the monastery at Whitby. As he slepti «, some one appeared to him, and said, " Ctedmon, sing a song to me. " " I cannot^ i sing," he replied, " and that is why I left the feast." "Nevertheless," was the answer, "you must sing tome." "Well, then," asked Ctedmon, "what shall I sing?" The other replied, "sing the beginning of created thingsi2.» Thereupon he made somd verses, which he still remembered when he awoke. The Abbess Hilda, hearing of his dream, believed (that) the grace oi God had been given him, and made him a2 monk. 1 §430, 1, (3). 4 §475. 7 §361, 2. 10 §338, 1. 2 §408, 3. 6 §482, 4, a. 8 §321, 2, a. 11 §310, 4. 3 §430, 1, (2). 6 §338, 2. 9 §361, 4. 1 2 10. A miser went^ one day to market^, and bought^ some"^ fine apples. He carriedi them home, arrangedi tliem carefully in his cupboard, and used to go'i and look at them almost every day, but would^ not eat any until they began to spoil. Every time he did eat one he regretted it. But he had a son, a young school-boy, who liked apples ; and one day, with a school-fellow, he found the miser's treasure. I do not know how he found the key of the cupboard ; but he did", and you may im- agine how many apples they ate. When they had^ finished the apples, the old father came, and caught them. How angryS lie was ! How he shouted at them ! " Wretches ! where are my beautiful a})ples ? You shall lioth be hanged ! You have eaten them all !" His son replied : "Do not be angry, father" ! You only eat the bad apples; we have not touched those ; we liave eaten the good ones, and left you yours." ^ §310. 2 §400, ex. 4. 3 §402. 1. 4 S33S, 2. '' §3^5, 1, b. (•> §336. ' §342. 3. 8 §128, a. e $454, 4. 'IS EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 365 F England, T Csedmon. became a 3 iiy thing" of 3ed to sing<5 ' the table . done thus, ) cattle, be- mastery at "Cajdmon, -hat is why must sing ag?" The Thereupon ^oke. The ice ol God ne apples, board, and lot eat any gretted it. d one day, not know n may im- the apples, ! How he >les ? You n replied : ; we have u yours." 11. A hungry 1 fox was one day looking for- a poultry-yard. It was late ta the afternoon, and, ap he was passing ^ a farmhouse, he saw* a cock and some hens which had" gone up into a tree for the night. He drew near*, and invited* them to" come down and^ rejoice with him on ac- count of a new treaty of peace which had been formed between the animals. The cock said he was 8 very glad of it, but that he did not intend^ toO come down before the next morning. " But," said he, "I see two dogs coming^O; I have no doubt they will be^i glad toi2 cele- brate the peace with you. " Just then the fox remembered that he had businesses elsewhere, and, bidding the cock good-bye, began^ to run, •' Why do you run ? " said the cock, " if the animals have made a peace, the dogs won't hurt you. I know them, they are good, loyaU * dogs, and would not harm any one. " " Ah," said the fox, " I am afraid they havens not yet heard the news." 1 §430, 1, (3). 5 §§309; 342, 2. 9 §359, 2, a. 13 §401. 2 §§338, 1 ; 375, 3. 6 §358, 7. 10 §366, 3. XJ. §430, 3. 3 §338, 1. 7 §533, 2. 11 §349, 5, 15 §349, 4, a. * §340. 8 §338, 5. 12 §434, 12. A woodman, who was cutting i wood on the bank of a river, let^ his axe falP into the water. He at once* began- to" pray [to] the gods to« find it for him. Mercury appeared^ and asked^ him what was^ the matter. " I have lost my axe," said2 he. Having heard this, Mercury dived^ into the water, and brought- up a golden axe. " Is this^ yours ? " " No,'- said the man. Next time Mercury brought up a silver one. " Is this one yours?" "No," said2 the chopper again. The third time Mercury brought up an iron one, which the man said was his, as soon as he saw'^ it. " It is yours," said the god, " and for your honesty I shall give you the other two also. " 1 §;«J5, 1. 3 §310, 6, a, and 7. 5 §358, 7. 7 §338, 5. 2 §340. 4 §490. C §359, C. 8 §316, "2. 13. Two men were trav^^.llingJ^ together, when they saw^ a bear coming out"' of the forest. The one climbed into a tree, and tried to* ccnccrl himself in the branches. The other, when he saw that the bear would =was going to^ attack him, threw himself upon the ground, and, m ' sn ■M I 366 FRENCH GRAMMAR. i w tip M» the bear came up he ceased to* breathe, for it is said" that t- bear will not touch* a dead^ body. When tlie bear liad^ gone, his companion came down, and asked : "What was it that the bear was saying to you ? '' His friend replied : *' He advised me not» to travel with a friend wlio runs away at the approach of danger^". 1S33S. 1. 4 §359, 6. 7 §480, 1.(3). 9 §493, a. - ^^*^- S §321, 2, a. 8 §342. 3. lo §399. , 3 S^60, 3. (J §375^ 5. 14. A well-knowni English^ actor, travelling to Birmingham by the Great Westerns railway the other day, on approaching* Banbury, began to teel hungry, and determined to have one of the buns for whick the town is famous. The train liaving stopped, lie called a boy, gave him sixpence, and asked him t(^ get "two Banburys," promising him one of the two for his trouble. Just as the train was about to start, the boy rushed up to the car- nage m which the impatient actor was seated, and ofTering him three- pence, exclaimed : — " Here's your change, sir."' " Bother the change ; where's the bun ? " roared the hungry actor " There was only one left," replied the boy, - and I'm eating that ' " 1 §430. 1. (3). 2 §430. 1, (2). 3 §408, 4. c, note. 4 §37o 1 15. Under a magnificent walnut-tree near the village, two little boys found a walnut. " It belongs to me," said the one, "forit was i P who was the first to see it ( = who have seen it the first). " "No it belongs to me," exclaimed the other, " for it wasi 12 who picked it up » There upon there3 arose between them a violent quarrel. " I am goine to make peace* between you," said to them a third boy, who was passing at that moment. The latter placed himself between the two claimants opened the walnut, and pronounced this sentence : " One of the shells belongs to hims who was thn first to seethe walnut; the other to himS r Tu^''^'Ji\T ' ^' ^" *^'' ^'™'^' ^ ^^^P ^^ ^«^ ^l'« «°«ts of the court. " Ihis, added he, laughing, " is generally the end of lawsuits* " In )3 EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 367 16. Many years agoi there^ lived in the city of Paris a celebrated^ phr- sician wlio was very fon.l of animals. One day a friend of his* brought tohishouseafavourite3 dog, whose leg had been broken, and asked him If he could do anything for the poor creature. The kind doctor ex- amined the wounded 5 animal, and, prescribing a treatment for him, soon6 cured him, and received the warm thanks of his friend, who set a very high value upon his dog. Not very long afterwards, the doctor was in his room busy studying^. He thought^ he heard a noise at the door, as if some animal was scratching in order to be let" in. For sornr^ tune he paid no attention to the noise, but continued stu.lyingio ^t last, however, he rose up and opened the door. To his great astonish- ment he saw enter the dog whicli he had cured, and with him another clog The latter also had a broken^ leg, and was able to move only with great difficulty. The dog which the surgeon had cured had brought his friend to his benefactor, in ord-.r that he, too, might beii healed ; and, as well as he could, he made the doctor^^ understand that; this was what he wanted. 1 §330, 4. i §465, 3. 2 §332, 2, 6 §430, 1, (3). 3 §429. 6 §490. 7 §358, 2. « 8535, 3. 9 §321, 2, a. 10 §}68, 7. 1 1 8351, 2. 12 8310,6,6. ■if 17. There was once a cat who was ai great enemy of the rats. He had eaten a great many^^, and they were much afraid of him. So the chiefs of the rats called a meeting to3 discuss what tliey should do to3 rid themselves of him. A great many plans were proposed, but after a little discussion they were all abandoned. At last a young rat, who thought himself very clever, rose and said : " Do not despair my friends, I have not yet proposed a plan. A splendid idea occurs to me ; I know what we can do. We can, if we are economical, soon save enough money to3 buy a little bell. This we can attach to the neck of our old enemy, and, if he approaches, we can* flee to a place of safety. " The young rats all applauded the idea, but one of the old [ones], who up to this time had said nothing, gravely « asked the one who had made the speech if he would promise to put the bell on the cat. The young rat blushed, and said he would think of it". The meeting rose shortly after, and the rats dispersed without doing anything^. • 1 §408, 3. ^ §445, 2, (1). 3 ^mi, 2, 4 s343. 2. B §490. 7 §4S2, 4, a. 368 FRENCH GRAMMAR. i i' •*„ L ! 18. Long agoi the frogs, tired of having2 a republic, resolved to^ ask Jupiter to send them a king. Jupiter did not receive their petition with much favour, but as they seemed really to* desire one, he thought (that) it would be l)etter to j)lease5 them. So, one fine day, when they were all expecting" their king, a great log fell from the sky into the pond, where they were «. They were very much afraid of the noise^ it made, and they took refuge in holes and in the mud at the bottom of the pond. Little by little, however, they approached^ their king to« get a good look at him, and seeing that he was so quiet, they became more bold, and finally leaped on him, and treated him with great familiarity. Then they complained again to Jupiter saying that the king he had sent was not worthy of their respect, and that they desired another, who would showio more vigour. In order to please them Jupiter sent them this time a stork, who immediately began to devour them with reiuch avidity; They complained again, but Jupiter told them that, ainceii they had desired a king, they would be forced to quietly sub- mit to the onei2 he had sent. 1 §330, 4. 4 §357, 6. 7 §479, 1. 10 §350, 1. 2P69. 2. 6 §375, 2. 8 §375, 1. 11 §536,8. 3 §359, G. 6 §338, 1. 9 §361, 2. 1 2 §§469 ; 479, 1. 19. The two youngest of my children were already in bed and asleep, the third hadi gone out, but at my return I found him sitting beside my '^ate, weeping2 very sore. I asked him the reason. "Fathers," said he, "I took this morning from-* my mother, without her knowings it, one of those three apples you brought her, and I kept" it a long while ; * but, as I was playing some time ago'' with my little brother in the street, a slave that went« by snatched it out of my hands, and carried it off: I ran after him asking for it, and besides, told him that it belonged to my motlior, who was ill, and that you had taken a fort- night's journey to fetch it ; but all in vain, he wouldo not give it back. And bo(^anse I still followed him, (trying out, he stopped and beat me, and then ran away as fast as ho could, from one street to another, till at length I lost sight of him. I have since that been walking outside the town, expecting your retura, io pray you, dear father, not to tell my mother [of] it, lest it should make her worse." An in It I i EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 20. 369 A celebrated Italiaui painter had told his pupils to2 ask the name of any (tout) person who niiglit conie^ to his house during his absence in the city. One day three gentlemen came to* see the painter, and the latter was not at homo. One of the pupils whose name was John opened the door for them^ , said that his master was not in, and let them depart without asking their names. When the master returned and" heard of the three gentlemen, he asked'' John who they were. John could say nothing })ut, " I do not know, sir." The painter got angry, but John, with a few strokes of his pencil drew (favre) the portrait of the three, and gave it to his master, who immediately^ recognized them. The artist admired the skill of the young man so much that he took the drawing, and kept it afterwards among his most precious possessions. It is neetlless to» add that he pardoned the pupil. 1 §430, 1, (2). 4 §357, 6. C §535, 2. 8 §490. ^ §'*''^"' «• '' §440. a 7 §375, 2. » §401, 2, (1), a. 3 §350, 1. 21. A man (celui) who would i have friends must show himself friendly. A man was passing the night at an inn. He had just left a town, where he had spent several years. The landlord asked 2 him why he had left the place. He replied, "because my neighbors were so disagreeable and disobliging that one could not live with them." The landlord replied, "you v/ill find exactly the same sort of neighbors where you are going. " Tlie following day another traveller came from the same place. He told the landlord that he was obliged to leave the place where he was living, and that it cost him great pain to part with his neighbors, who liad been so kind and obliging. The landlord encouraged him by tell- iiig3 him that he would find exactly the same sort of neighbors where he was going. ^ §310, 1. 2 §375, 4. 3 §365, 3. 22. When I wasi at school, I wasi often very idle. Even in [the] class I used to playi with boys as idle as myself. We used to tryi to hide this from2 our master, but one day he caught^ us cleverly. " You must not be idle," said he. " You must not raise your* eyes from your books. You do not know what you lose by idleness^. Study 370 FRENCH r.RAMMAR. w^ii^li i ■'- while you are young ; you will not be able to attuly when you are" old. If any one sees aiiotlier boy, who is not Htudying, let him tell nie7. "Now," said I to myself, " tlierc is Fred Smith, I do not like him. If I see that he is not studying, I shall telH," Soon after, I saM' FrvA Smith looking out« of the window, and I told the master what I had seen. " Indeed ! " said he, "how do you know he was idle ? " " If you please, sir," said I, " I sawO him." " O you 8aw» him, and where were your eyes when you saw'' him ?" I saw the other boys laugh«, and I waai« ashamed, for the master sjniled, and said it was a good lesson for me. 1 §338. 4. §4()fl. 7 §443. 9 §:«.», 2. 2 §'17fi, 4. 5 §399. 8 §306, 3. 1 () «33S, 1. 3 §340. fi §343, 2. 23. When Lord Nels(m wasi quite a small child he lefts one day his grandmother's house in company with a cowboy. The dinner hour passed'^ he was^ absent, and couldi not be'« found, and the alarm of the family became very great, for they feared that he might have been* carried off by gypsies. At length, after search had Ijeen made^ for him in various directions, he was^ discovered alone, sitting composedly on the bank of a brook which he could not get over. " I wonder, cliild " said the old lady, when she saw^ him, " that hunger and fear did not drives you« home." " Fear? ! grandmamma," replied the future hero, " I never saw fear !— what is it« ? " Once, after the winter holidays,' when he and his brother William had» started on horseback to return to school, they came back because a great deal of snow had'» fallen, and William, who did not like to go away, said it was^o too deep to ad- vance, "If that be the case." said the father, "you certainly shall not go ; biit try it again, and I shall leave it to your hojiour. If the road is dangerous, you may return ; but remember, boys^ i, I leave it to your honour." The snow was deep enough to give them a reason- aj)le excuse ; but Horatio could not be^ forced to go back. " We must go on," said he, " remember, brother! i , it was left to our honour ! " 1 §338. 4 §349, 4, a. 7 §399. 1 §3;58, 5 2 §340. 5 §349, 4. 8 §401. 1 1 §454' 4' 3 §321, 2, a. (t §461, 1. 9 §.309. 24. The princes of Europei have found out a manner of rewardingZ their suDjeots who have behaved well, by presentings rhem with about two yards of blue* riblwn, which is wornS on the sbouider. Those who are EXERCISES IN TRANSLATION. 371 honoured with tlua nmrk of distinction are called knighta, and the king hini«elf 18 always at the head of the order. This is a cheap method of recon,pensing2 the n.ost important services ; and it is very fortunate for kings" that tlieir subjects are^ satisfied with such^ trifling rewards. Shouhl" a nobleman lose his leg in a battle, the king presents him with two yards of nJ,bo«, and he is pai.l for the loss of his leg. Should") an anJ^assador spend all his imternal fortune inio supporting the honour of Ills country abroad, the king presents him with two yards of rib- bon, which is eon.sidere. and, breaking off an arm buried the statue in a place, where excavations were being madei It was soon found, aiul was lauded by critics^ an.l by the public asa valu. able relic of anti(iuity 2. When Michael Angca.. thought the time oppor- tune, he produced the broken arm, and. to the great mortification of the critics, revealed himself as the sculptor. 1§321.2. 2 §399. 3 §338, 3. 4 §430. 1, (3). 26. Had you seen us. Mr. Harley. when we were turned out of South-hill I am sure you would Lave wept at the sight. You remember olcl Trusty, my dog ; I shall never forget it while I live ; the poor creature was blind with age, and could scarce crawl after us to the door • he went, however, as far as the gooseberry-bush, which you may remem- ber stood on the left side of the yard ; he was wont to bask in the sun there ; when he had reached that spot, he stopped ; we went on • 1 called him ; he wagged his tail, Imt did not stir ; I called again ; he lay down ; I whistled, and cried Trusty ; he gave a short howl, and died I I could have lain down and died too ; but God gave me strength to Uve for my childicn. 372 FRENCH GRAMMAR. vo o^bxjxj^i?.-y-. *> FRENCII-ENGLISH. r<',. rii h, prep., to, at, (or, in. abiiiier, v. r., to Hpoil. al)8eiioe, «./., Jilweiice. absent, adj., absent. abaohinioiit, ado., absohUf' ly, (luite. aocon»iMi),'ner, v. r., to ac- company, j ac'beter, v />•.((} Ml, 2),tobuy. affaire, /)./., affair, business. afln de, prep., in order to. afin que, conj., tliat, in or- der that. &ge, 11. 7)1., afc'e ; (pul due a- t-il ?, how old is he ? agr^able, adj., a^'reeable, pleasant. aimable, adj., aniiablo, jileu- sant. aimer, v.r., to love, like ; aimer mieux, to like bet- ter, prefer. aincS, adj., elder, eldest. aller, y.iV.,(§-2-42), to go ; com- merit allez-coiin }, com- ment fa va-t-ll I, comment fa vn I, how does it go ?, how are you ? allumer, v.r., to light, to kindle. alors, adv., then. amener, v.ir., (§241,1), to lead to, bring. ami, -e, n.mf., friend. amusant, adj., amusing. amuser, v. r., to amuse ; s'amiiser, to enjoy one's self. an, n. m., year. f a»ieien,-ne, adj. , old.'former. anglaiH, n. and adj., Eng- lish, Englishman. An;''- tcrre, n./., England. anifial, n. m., animal. anni^-e, «./.,year. aoiit, n. VI., August. apjiorter, v. /•., to carry to, bring. iil>prendre, v. ir., (§28:5), to learn. aprt'H, adi\, prep., after. apri,a que, conj., after that, after. apr^s-demain, adi\, the day after to-morrow. apr6s-midi, n.m. or/., after- noon, arbre, n. m., tree, argent, n. m., silver, money. arreter, v.r., to stop ; n'arrc- ter, to stop one's self, stop, arriv^e, «./., arrival. arriver, v.r., to arrive, come. assassiner, v. r., to assassin- ate, murder. assemblee, n./., assend^ly, meeiing. assez, adv. and n. m., enough. attendre, v. ir., (§291), to wait, wait for. attraper, v. r., to catch. au, contraction for d+le. au-dessou J de, lielow, under. au-dessus de, above, over. aujourd iiui, adv., to-«iay. aui»aravaiit, adv., before. aussi, adv., also, too, as. aussitot que, oonj., 08 soon as. aiil re, adj. am\indi[f. pron., o( her. tx\nnt,j>rej),, before. iivant a.s .?, what is the matter with youV ; // y a, tliere is, there are. avril,n.»i., April. B. bal, n. m., ball. bateau, n. m., boat; ba- teau (I vapeur, steam^ boat. biUir, V. r., to build. baton, n. in., stick. beau, bel, belle, adj., fine, beautiful, hand.some ; il /ait beau, it is fine. beaucotip, adv. anfl n. in., miicli, many, very mu(!h. beau-fr6re, n. m., brother- in-law. belle-nicNre, n. /., mother- in-law. belle-soBur, n.f., sister-in- law. Ijesoin, ?i.jn.,need ; avoirbe- .loin de, to need, to want. beurre, n. Hi., butter. hien, adv. and n. in., well : very ; much, many ; eh hien. .\ very M'ell 1 oonj., as soon (I imlcf. pron., blen (jiie, conj., although. bientdt, adv., soon. blano, hlanchu, adj., white. hU, n. m., wheat. hois, n. m., wood, foreHt. bolte, n./., box. bon, -ne, adj., good, kind ; d la bonne heure, ull riftlit. bonheur, n. w., happinoaa, good fortune, bou i, n. m. , end. branohe, n. /. , branch. O. 9a, dem. pron., contraction of cela, that. Cain.n. ni., Cain, campajpie, n.f., country, canadicn, -ne, adj. and n., Canadian, canne, n.f., cane, capitale, n. /. , capital, car, conj., for. oarafe, nj., decanter, water- bottle. oe, cet, cette, ces, dem. adj., this, that, these, those , ee... -ci, this, cc . . . -Id, that, ce, dem. pron., it, he, she, they ; ce qui, ce (jue, what; est-cequ'U e,st.', is he ? ; n'ext-ce pa,s }, does he not?, etc., etc cela, dem. pron., that, oelui, celle, dem. pron., tliis, that, the one, he ; celui de mon/rtre, my broth- er's ; celui-ci, this ojie, the latter ; c^ui-ld, that one, tiie former, chanibre, n.f., room, champ, n./., fieUl. chanson, n.f., soi>g. chant, n. ?n., singing, song, chanter, v. r., to sinjf. chapeau, n. m. , hat. chapitre, n. m.. chapter, oharmant, adj., charming. VOOAntTLART. oharnier, v. r., to oharni, delight. ohar]>entier, n. m,, oan>cn- ter. cha«sejir, n. m., hunter (•hat,n. m., cat. chaud, adj. and n.m., warm, heat; il fait chmid, it is warm ; il a chaml, ho is warm, chemin, n. m., road; che- min defer, railway. chCne, n m., oak, ohor, ch6re, adj., dear ; moiiui eher, clieaper. cher, n(f«.,dear. chcrcher, v. r., to seek, look for,8carcIi ; aUercheivher, to go for, fetch, go a«id get ; envoyer cherchcr, to send for. cheval, n. m., horse, chez, prep., at the house of, at the shop of, eU\ ; chrz moi, etc., at home, chien, a. m., dog. chose, n.f, thing ; r/velrive chose, indef. pnm. in., sometliiiig. cinq, num. adj., five. cinqui6me, num. adj., fifth., clou, n. m. , nail, coin, n.m., corner, colline, n.f, hill. coml)ien, ado. and n. m., how much, how many ; combiea (/r/f(w,h(;w of tfii. commo, adv., how, as, like, conunencer, v. ir., (§239), to commence, begin, comment, adv., how, what, complet, -hte, adj., com- plete, connaitre, v. ir., (g2C9), to know. co:is«l, n. m., counsel, ad- vice, content, adj. ,content,pleas- ed. L'lad. 373 contlnuer, 0. n, to continue, coquin, n. m., rogue, scoun- drel. cordoTuiier, • n. m., shoe- maker. cflt6, n. m., side ; d cfilf, beside, next door. (•(Hiclier (hc), v. r., to lie down, go to bed. couper, v.r., to cut, out- down, courage, n. m., courage, courir, v.ir., (S'21(!), to run. cousin, -e, n. m. and /., cousin, coutcau, n,m., knife. cofiter, v.r., to cost, crayon, n.m., pencil, croire, v. ir., (2272), to be- lieve, think, cueillir, v. ir., (§247), to gather, pluck, cuisine, n./., kitchen. I>. dame, n./., lady. dam, prep., in, into. di;,pri'p., of, from, etc. d6, n.m., thimble. diicembre, n. m., Decem- ber. dikhirer, v. r., to tear. defaut, n m., defect, fault. dijk, adv., already. dtijeuner, v. r., to hreakfsist. dejeuner, n. m,, i»reiikfast. deniain, adv., to-morrow, demander, v. r., to ask, ask for. demeurer, ». r., to dwell, live. demi, adj. , half ; d unc heure et demie, at half-past one. dent, n.f., tooth. depuis, prep, and adv. .since depuis que, conj. , since. denii6rement, adv., lately. derri6re, /wcp., behind. dh% que, cothq., as soon as. 374 FRENCH OnAMMAR. 'M m <.■■ duw^cndre, v, ir. , (§291), t« (Il'mcvikI, (fodowii, iili^'liU dt'iHirer, 9.r,,to dcHiru, wwh, want ; jo iWgirerain, I Rhould liku. deux, num. adj. f two. duuxi6nie, num. adj., wv coiid. duviuil, Jtrep., before, in , front of. d"V()ir, r. »>., (S2»4), to owe ; U doit le /aire, he itt to do It ; ildi'vrait le/n ire , 1 le ought to do it ; il a di\ li- /aire, he must have done M; il aiiritit di'i Icfalir, ho ou^,'lit. to liiivedoiio it. Dicu, n. 7n., God. ditlk'ilo, adj., ditHcult. dinmiioho, n. m., Hnnday. diner, r. r., to dine. diner, n. m., diiuier. dire, v »>., (§274),to siiy, tell dix, num. adj., ten. dix-huit, mim. adj., ci;,'h- teen. dix-neuf, ««»?.. adj., nine- teen. dix-sept, nvm: adj., aoven- teen. donieati(iue, ii. in. /., ser- vant. doiuier, v. r., to give, give aw.ay. dont, rel. pron., of whom, of which, whose. dorniir, v. ir., (§248), to s'eep. dos, n. in., back. doute, 71. m., doubt; nans doutc, no doubt. douter, v.r., to doubt; sc dontcr, to suspect. douze, num. adj., twelve. E. eau, n. /., water, dcole, M. /., school. ^rire, t;.ir.,(§275), to write. (SiMirie, n. /., 8tah1& eglise, n. /., chun-h. tile vtS, «(/>., bred ; bieniHeoii, well-bred, elle, elles, 7«'/*«. pron,, ahe, her, it, they, them, einiuener, v. ir., (1241,1), to take away, eniporter, v, r., to carry away, take off. en, pron,, of hnu, of them, of it, Hoine, any. vu,i>r , in, to. encore, «(/<'., yet, still.agalii; pan encore, not yet. encre, «./., ink. enfant, n. m.f., child, boy, girl, enruiyer, v. ir., (S2t()), to annoy, ensenilile, adv., together, cntrer, w. r., to enter, go in, come in. envie, n.f., desire ; avoir cnrie, to have a desire, notion, environ, irrep. OJiil adi\, al)0ut. envoyer, V. ir., (§24;i), to send, cpicier, n.m., grocer. espiice, n./., kind, sort, et, coiij., and J (itat, n. 1)1,., state. Etats-llnis, ft. in.. United States. (Storte, n./., cloth. Ctre, V. ir., (§238), to be ; etrc d, to belong to. (iludier, v. r., to study. eux,2«'r«. j^'on. , them, they, exemplaire, n.m., copy. F. fachii, adj., sorry, facile, adj., easy, facilement, adv., easily, t'aini, 11./., hunger; aiwir faim to be hungry. fttir«, t>. ir., (|27fl), to 4; make ; /aire /aire, to get e, Mrs. ; mendames, phtr., ladies; mademoiselle, n, /., Miss; contracted into 3Ille ; inesdctnoiselles, plur,. young ladies. mai, n. m.. May. maintenant, adv., now, mais, covj., but ; 7nai8 si, yes indeed ; mais non, not at all. maison,n./., house. mal, n. to., evil, pain ache ; avoir mal a, to have a pain in, have . . . -ache. mal, adv., ill, badly, not well. molade, adj., sick, ill. malheur, n. m., misfortune. malle, n./., trunk. ,v. 378 FllENJH GRAMMAR. uc..ian, n. /., nmmnia. manger, i;. ir., (§ii39, 2), to eat. narchand, n.m., merchant, marcher, v. r., to walk, go. mardi, n. ni., Tuesday. x\ia.ne,n./., Mary, mariiie, n. / , bride, mars, n. m., Slarch. nifttin, n. m., morning ; le i-^atin, ill the morning, raaavais, adj., bad, evil, mtichant, adj„ naughty, cross, bad. md Jecin, ii. m., doctor, phy- sician, ireilleur, adj.. better, best. m6me, adj , self, very, mendiant, -e, n. m.f., beg- gar, merci, n.m., I thank you, thanks, mercredi, n.m. , Wednesday, mfcre. n.f., mother, mfetrc, 11. iu. , metre, yard, mettre, v. it:, (S27i)), to put, put on ; mettre iXlaportc, to put cut of doors; sc mettre, to dress ; il est Men miii, he is well dress- ed ; "e mettre A, to begin ; jfe mettre il table, to sit down ti> dinner, etc. inidi, M. m., noon, mien, -ne (le, \a),po8>i.pron. , mine, mioux, adv., better, best, minuit, n. m., midnight. moi, pers.pron., to me, me; I. moins, adv., less; d dix heurcs moins quime, at flfleen minutes to ten. mois, n. m., month, m^itid, n.f., half. raon, mo, mes, poss. adj., my. monde, n, m., world ; tout le motide, everybody. monsieur, n, m., sir, gentle- man ; contracted into M., Mr. ; messieurs f plur., gentlemen. montre, n.f., watch. moiceau, n. m., bit, piece. N. navire, n. m., ship. ne, ado., noj not; ne . . . pas, not ; ne . . . jamais, never. ndeessaire, adj., necessary. n6g'igent, arfj., negligent, careless, neuf, num. adj., nine. neuf, -ve, adj., new. ni. conj., neither, nor ; ni . . . ni, neither . . . no' . noir, adj., black. non, adr., no, not. notre, nos, poss. adj., our. notre (le, la), >)0S8. pron , ours. i.ous, pef-s. pron., we, us. nouveau, nouvel, nouvelle, new ; que dit-an de nou- veau}, qii'y a-t-il de nou- veau 7, what is the news? novembre, /f.m., November. O. obiiir, V. r. , to obey. octobre, n. m., October. (jouvre, n.f. in., work. offenser, v. r., to offen''. oie, n.f, goose. oiseau, n. m., iiird. on, indef. pron., one, peo- ple, we. oncle, ji. m. , uncle. onze, num. adj., eleven. or, n. m. , gold. oser, V. -/•,, to dare. oter, V, r., to take off. ou, conj., either, or. on arft'. , wiiere, whither, in which. oui, adv., yes. ouvrage, n. m., work. ouvrier, n, wi., workman. P. pain, n. m., bread, panier, n. m., basket. papier, n. m., paper. par, prep., by. jiarce que, conj. , because. pardon, interj., I beg youi pardon. parent, -e,n.m.f., relative, parent. parler, v, r,, to speak. partir, v. ir., (§248), to de- part, leave. pas, adv. ; ne. . . . pas, not ; je n'enaipas, I have !ione. pass(5, adj., past; I'ann^e passie, last year. passer, V. r., to pass ; passer dt'oant, to go past. passer chez, to call on. pasteur, n. m., pastor. niitisserie, n.f, pastry. pauvre, y- mj., because, jrj., I beg youi .in./., relative, to speak. , (§248), to de- c. . . . pafi, not ; as, I have !ione. past ; l'ann4e t year. to pass ; panser go past, to call on. ft., pastor. ./., pastry. , poor. Dountry. n. 11. f., peas- p., during, for. ,(§;^91),tohang. , thought , to think ; je !la, I think of ,(§291), to lose. , partridge. lost. father. n. /., pennis- . /., person ; )le. 'on. in., any dy ; ne . . . per- ody, ttle, small. i n. m., littk, peur, n. /., fear ; avmr pent; to be afraid, philosophie, n. /., philo- sophy. piene, n./., stone, pi re, adj., worse, worst, plaire, «.t>.,(§282), to please ; s'il oous 2>la,it, if you please, plaislr, n. m., pleasure, plaiiche, n./., board, plank, pleurer, v. v., to weep, cry plume, n.f., feather, pen. plus, ads., more; ne . . . plan, no more, no longer, pociie, n.j:, i)ocket. poi?te, n. in., poet, poire, n. f,, pear, poirier, n. m., pear-tree, poisson, 71. m., flsli. poliment, adv., politely, ponmie, n./., ap{)le. pommier, n. m , apple-tree, porte, ?i./.,door. porte nionnaie, n. m., purse, porter, v. r., to carry, wear ; fc porter, to be, do. poste, M./.,post, post-office. Vour, prep., for. pour que, cunj., in order to. pourquoi, adv., why. pouvoir, V. ir , (15301), to be able ; may, can ; cela se peat, tliat may bo. pr»5cis, aii/., precise; a trow heures p-rccinen, at three o'clock precisely, premier, -6re, adj., (irst. prendre, v. ir., (§283), to -ake, get. present, adj., present; d present, at present, now. l)res(iue, adv., almost, preter, v. r., to lend. I'l-i'T V. r., to pray, heg, ask. prin temps, n w., spring, prochain, adj., next ; Van- "^eprochaim, next year. VOCABULARY. produit, n. m., product. |>rofesseur, n. m., professor, teacher, promener (pj), v. ir., (§241 1), to tal.e a walk, etc. proprii'^tc, n./., property. prosj^drittS n./., prosperity, pru.ie, n.f., plum, punir, y. n, topunisii. 377 Q. quand, adv. mdconj., when, whenever; dcpuis qiiandj, how long V quart, n. m , quarter ; a six heures et (piart, at a (|uar- ter pa.st six. •luatorze, num. adj., fom-- teen. quatre^ num. adj., four, que, reL and inter, pron., that, which, what. I que, conj., that, tJian, as. I que, adv., how ; ne. . . que, only, quel, -le, adj., what, which, quelque, adj., some, (luelciuefois, adv., some- times. ^., sleep; avoir soinnu'il, to be sleepy. son, sa, ses, jm.^s. adj , his, lier, its so tir, M. n'.,f§248),togoout, come out. sou, n. m., halfpenny, cent. souhaiter, v.r., to wish. Soulier, ih. in., shoe. sous, prep , under. souvenir, n. m., remem- brance. souvent, adv., often. Sucre, n. m., sugar. suite, n. /., sequel ; vt ainsi de suite, .siud so on ; tout de sxiite, immediately, sur, prep., on, upon ; sur vous, with you, about you. surtout, n. ni., overcoat. T. table, n.f., table, tableau, n ni., picture, tant, adv. and n. ni., so nmeh, so many, tant que, conj., as long as. tante, n.f, aunt. t.e, pcrs.pron. , thee, to thee; you, to you. temps, n.m., time, weather; dans ee temps-k\, at that time ; de temps d autre, now and then. tote, n.f., head. th6me, n. m., exercise, toi, pers. jn-an., to theo, thee ; to you, you tomljer, v. r., to fall, tome, n. m., volume, ton, ta, tes, pass, adj., thy, your, tort, n. m., wrong; awir tort, to be in the wrong, tot, adv., soon ; plus t6t, sooner, toujours, adv., always, still, tout, toute, touH, adj., all, everj'. train, n. m., trrin. travaille •, v. r., to work, treize, num. adj., thirteen, trente, 7ium. adj., thirty. tr6s, adv., very, triste, adj., sad. trois, num. adj., three, tromper, v. r., to deceive ; se tromper, to be mis- taken ; se tromper de che- min, to take the wrong road, trop, adv. and 71. in., too; too much, too many, trouver, v.r., to find ; think ; alter trouver, to go to ; vous trouvez ?, do you think so ? ; se trouver, to be. tu, pers. pron., thou, you. tuer, V. r., to kill. U. un, une, num. adj. and in- def. art., one, a, an. utile, adj., useful. V. ^ vapeur, r. /., steam. vendre, v. ./., (§291), to sell ; se vendre, to sell. vendredi, n.m , Friday. ; venir, v. ir. (§259), to come; venez me voir, come and see me; ilvientdepartir, he has juht gone. vent, n. m., wind. vcrn,prep., towards, about. vertu,n./., virtue. viande, n./., meat vieux, vieil, vieille, adj., old ; mon vieux, old fel- low. village, n. m. , village. ville, 71. f, town, city. vingt, num. adj., twenty visiter, v.r., to visit. vite, adv , quickly, fast. voici, prep., here is, here are, see here. vQi\h, prep., there is, there are, see there. voir, V. ir., (§304), to see. voisin, -e, adj. and n. m.f, neighbour. voiture, n./., carriage. voler, v.r., to steal. volume, 71. m., volume. votre, vos, pons. adj. , your. votre (le, la), poss. pron., yours. vouloir, t).iV.,(§305), to wish, will ; voulez-vous Men le faire ?, will you kindly do it? ; vou.si'uudriezle faire, you would like to do it, vous, pi'rs. i)ron. , you. Y. y, pron., there, in it, to it. VOCABULARY. 379 ENGLISH-FRENCH. [h aspirate is indicated thus : 7t,] A. ere is, there a, un. abandon, abandnnner. abbess, nhhesur. ability, capacity, f., talent, in. able ; be —,poumir (§301). about, de, siir, environ ; — throe o'clock, vers les trois heures ; — it, en ; bo — , s'agir de, itre sur le point de, aller (§242). above, au-dessus de. abroad, A V stranger. absence, absence, f. absent, absent. absolutely, absolument. abundant, abondant. accept, accepter, accidental, accidentel. according to, selnn. account ; on — of, d cauac de. ache ; have head — , avuir mal d la tftc. acquaintance, connais- sance, f. acquire, aequ6rir (§244). act, a(jir. action, action, f. actor, acteur, cotnddien. add, ajouter. address, adressei: adjective, adjectij, m. athnire, admirer, admit, adniettre (§279). adorn, fi; ',-e (§276) Vornc- went dr. advance, avanr.er (§239, 1). advice, avis, m., constdl, ni. atlvise, conseillor. Iffair, affaire, f. affection, affection, f. afraid ; be — , avoir pcur, craindrc (§271) ; be much — ,avi)irijrand'peur, avoir bien j)eur, Africa, Afriqve, f. after, prep, and adv., ajrri^s, after, conj., apt'i's que. afternoon, a2»'t's-7nidi, m, t. afterwards, apris. again, encore, encore unc /ois, de nouveau. age, dge, m. ago, il y a. agreeable, agreable, aid, aider. alarm, alarmc, f. alight, descendre (§291). all, tout ; not at — , pafi du tout. allow, 2)erniettre (§279). almost, presquc, alone, scul. already, dejd, Alsace, Ahace, f. also, au.ssi. although, quoique, hiea que. always, tou jours. amba.ssador, ambassadexi r. America, Am6rique, I. American, ann'ricain. amiable, aimable. among, amongst, jianni, ciitrc, chez. amuse, amuser, an, un, ancestors, anaUres, aieux. ancient, ancicn. and, ct, angry at (with), fdchd de (fiontrc); be (get) — , se /d<'u>\ aninia;, animal, m. annoy, ennuyer (§240). another, un autre, encorr un. answer, n., riponse, t, answer, v., repondre (§291). antiquity, antiquite, i. anxious; be — , temrd(i^2[>9). any, de, du, en, aucun, quel- conque, lout; don't give him — , nc lui en donnez pas; have you — V, en avcz-vousj, anybody, any one, quel- qu'un ; not . . . . — , ne pcrsonne. anything, quelque chose, m ; not .... — , ne . . . . rien; — good, quelque chose de bun ; not .... — good, ne .... rien de ban. anywhere ; not .... — , ne .... nullc j)art, apiece, chacun, lapiPce. a})pear, para Itre (§2G9).s<>w- bler, comparaltre (§269). appetite, appMt, m. applaud, applaudir. apjile, pommc, f. apple-tree, pommicr, ni. appoint, nonnner, ai)proach, n., approchc, t. approach, v. , s'approchcr de. approbation, approbation, f. approve, trouver bon. argument, argument, m. Ariosto, Arioste. arise, s'ilever (§241), nattre (§281). arithmetic, arithrndtique, £. arm, bras, m, army, arm^c f. around, autour de. arrange, arranger (§238X m fc .;ii Sk**^: or T 4 ^1 R 'f-h > ' ') t ' "■ 1 fE*l P' 21 -» J 380 arrival, arriv^e, t arrive, nrrioer, art, art, in. article, article, m artist, artintc. as, 0M«s/, «i, coinme, jcn- dant que, en; iis. . . — , ausui , . . que ; not (— ) so ... — , pas (rt «*tst) si . . . que ; — lonjf — , taiU que ; — soon — , (iuf!sit6t qur- ; — if, coiiuiw fi. ascend, inonter (nur). ashamed ; lie (feel) — , avm'r hoHtc oak, deviander, prier; — for, demnnder ; — him for it, Ic lui deiiuinder. aa]ecy),e)idoniiif be — ,etro endormi, (ior/niV (§248) ; fall — , s'eiKhtriiiir (§24S). assail, a^milHri^'2'i7). assemble, xe rmair. assist, aider. associate, s'aKxocicr. assure, ax>tnrer. astonish, t'tonner. astonishment, (Uoimement, ni. at. A, chez, de ; — my fath- er's, ctiez mon pt're; — mj' house, chez iiioi. attach, attacher. attack, attaqner. attention, attention, t. ; jiay (give) —,faire (S27C) at- tention. auburn, chdtain. audience, attxiatants, m, plur. August, aout, m. Augustas, Avfjiiitte. aunt, tante author, auteur. autumn, automne, m. avidity, aviditd, f. avoid, Winter. await, attcndra (§291). awake, «c r&oeUler. FRENCH GRAMMAR. axe, 'hachc, f. B. i)ack,n., doH, m.; be — , Hre de retour. bud, inauvais, viAchant. badly, inal ; hurt (very) — , /aire beaucoup de vial d. ball, bal, m. banish, hannir. bank, hord, m. ; on the — , a.xt hord. l)arefoot, nu-pieds, lesincdfi nan. bargain, nmrchi, m. bask, se eha uffer. hiiaket, 2'(i>iier, m. l?;istille, JBastille, f. battle, Ijataillc^ f. be, etre, y avoir ; — (of health), se porter, alter (si;42) ; — about to, aller, dcnoir (s291) ; — (of weather), /aire (§276) ; — (of age), avoir; — (of time), y avoir ; is he finish- ing?, finit-iU ; ate they not ?, n'eat-ce pas ! ; how are you?, cmmiwnt vous portez- vous }, comment allez-vous ?, comment ga va-t-il 1, com itioU j'o. va } ; I am well, je me parte Men, frt va Men; it is fine, il fait bean ; I am to do it, je dois le /aire ; is it ?, vraiment h bear, ours, m, beard, barbe, t. huast, animal, m. beat, battrc (§261). beautiful, bean. beauty, beauU, f. because, parce qne, become, (suit) seoir (§295), devenir (§259); sc /aire (§276) ; what has — of her?, qu'est-elle deoenuei. bed, lit, m. ; be in — , Hre an lit ; go to — , se coveher. bed-room, chambre d cou- cher. before, prep., devant (ol place) ; avant (of time), before, conj., avant que. before, adv., auparavant. beg, memlier. beggar, inendiant begin, eoinuiencer{i2;i9, 1), sc inettre d (§27!)). beginning, commence- ment, m. behave, se compm'ter. behead, dt'capiter^ beliirid, derrO'.re. believe, croire (§272) ; it if believed, on cr(nt. bell, cloche, f. ; little l)ell, (jrelot, m. belong, Hre d, appartenir (§259). benefactor, bicn/aiteur. beside, d ccW. de. besides, d'ailleurs. bust, adj., le meilleur. best, adv., le mieux. better, adj., nwilleur. better, adv. , •^nieux ; be — , valoir (§303j mieux. between, cntre. hcvfMG prenihe(^'2^S)r/arde. bid good-bye, dire (S274) a dieu d. big, ijrand, gros. bird, oiseau, m. birtViday,/ital, adj., capital. capital, n., capital', f card, carte, t. care ; — for, soigner ; take — , prendre (§28 ) garde. carefully, soigncuseinent. careless, negligent. carnival, carnaval, m. carpenter, charpentier. carriage, voiture, t. carry, porter ; — off, em- porter ; — the day, I'cm- porter. case, cas, m.; in — (that),rf w cas que; if that be the — , daufi ce cas. cat, chat, m. catch, attraper. catholic, catholique. ca.ttle, bi ^IMe, m. certain, certain. certainly, certainement. change, monnaie, f. chapter, chapitre, m. charge, charge, f. charitable, charitable. 381 charm, charnnir. charming, charmant. charmingly, d ravir. chase, chasser. cheap, {d)bon marchi; peu coMeux ; cheaper, d meil- leur marcM, moins cher. cheese, from age, m. cherry, cerise, f. chief, cJief. child, enfant, m. f. chimney, cheminfe, t. China, Chine, f, ch()i>per, bficheron. christian, chrt'tien. Christopher, Chrijit-qihe. church, t'glise, f, ; at (to) — , d Vi'glise. city, ville, f. ; in the — , d la ville. city-hall, h6tel(m.)de ville. claimant, irrHendant, class, classe, i. clean, nettoyer (§240). clearly, clairemeht. clever, habile, fort. cleverly, habilement. climb, grimper, clock, hcrloge, t. close, fermer, clove (§264). cloth, ^toffc, t cilothe, vetir (§200). clothes, habits, m. plnr. clumsy fellow, mnladroit. coat, habit, ni. cock, coq. cold, froid ; be — (of living hei\vx»), avoir froid ; be — (of weather), fuire (§270) froid; I have — hands, fai froid aux mains ; catch a — , s'enrhumer. college, college, m. colossal, colossal. Columbus, Colomb. come, venir (§269), arriver ; — back, — home, revenir (§259) ; — to see, ■— and see, venir voir ; — down, 382 FRENCH GRAMMAR. !' ^""i. 1 descendre (§291) ; — up, monter, arriuer ; — in, entrer ; — out, sortir (§218) ; come 1, voyons .', alloiiH !. comfortable ; be — , faire (§276) hon. 3ommand, commander. commandment, eommande- ment, m, commence, commencer , (§239). commit, commettre (§279). companion, compagnon, m. company, compagnic, f. ; in — with, en compagm'e de. complsiln, Deplaindre (§271). complete, complet. complicated, comiMqui. corapXTmentfCompliment, m. composedly, tranqxiille- ment. oompri8e,coTOprenrfre(§283). conceal, tacher. concert, concert, m. conclude, conclure (§265). cendenin, condamner. condition, condition, t. confess, avouer. confidence, confiance, f. confound, confondre (§291). conquer, conquirir (§244), vaincre (§290). conscience, conscience, f. consecrate, Mnir (§245). consent, consentir (§248). consider, considirer (§241). construct, construire (§266). contain, contenir (§259). continually, eans cesse. continue, continuer. contract, contrat, m. convenient, commode. cool, /rats. copy, exemplaire, m., copie, t. coral, corail, m. corkscrew, tire-bouchon, m corner, coin, in. coHta,fraui, m. plur. cost, coMer. country, payii, m. ; — (as opposed to town), cam- pagne, f. ; (native) — , patrie, t. ; in the — , d la campagne. county-town, chef-lieu, m. couple, couple, m. f. courage, courage, m. ; take — , prendre (i283) cour- age. c:ourt, cour, f. cousin, cousin, m„ cousine, t. cover, couvrir (§258). cow, vache. cowboy, vaeher. crawl, se trainer. create, cr^er. creature, creature, t. crime, crime, m. criminal, criminel. critic, critique, m, Crnosns, Cr^s^is. crops, r,'eulte, f. cross, michant. crowd, foule, i. crown, couronne, t. cry, pleurer, crier ; — out, crier. cup, coupe, t. cupboard, armoire, f. cure, guMr. curse, maudire (§274). cut, coujier. D. daily, tous les jours. dance, danser. danger, danger, m. dangerous, dangereux. dare, oser. dark, noir ; be — , faire (§276) 7ioir (obscur). daughter, /ille. day, jour, m., jourru>.e f. ; th« — after, le lendcynain (de) ; the — atter to-mor- row, apris-detnain ; the — before yesterday.auant- hier; all — (long), toute la joum^e ; from — to — , de jour en jour ; be — (day- light), faire (§276) jour. dead, mort. deaf-mute, deaf and dumb, sourd-muet. deal ; a great — , beaucoup. dear, cAcr; notso—, pax id cher, moins cher. death, mort, f. debt, dette, t. decanter, carafe, f. deceive, trouiper. declare, declarer. decline, dichoir (§296). deep, profond. defect, difaut, m. dejection, abatteT\ent, tn. delay, diff&rer (§241). delight in, seplaire d (§282). delightful, charmant. deliverance, dilivrance, f. denj', nicr. depart, partir (§248). deptnd on, d4pendre de (§291). describe, dicrire (§275). de8er\e, mAriter. desire, n., envie, f.; I have no — ,je n'aipas envie. desire, v., ddsirer, vouloir (§305). despair, disespirer (§911). destroy, ddtruire (§2H6). determine, determiner, re- * soudre (§284). devour, ddvorer. dial, cadran, m. diameter, diamilfre, m. die, mourir (§256); — a- way, se mourir, difference, difference, t. ; that makes no — , cela ne fait rien. difficult, difficile. VOCABULARY. 883 ^e, m. 56); - ■ a- ence, t.; -, cela ne difficulty, difficult«M ^^^^bIsm' , ^^■ll'l ' ^^H ; t i I !■ I -, 11 I 384 explain, crpliqner. eye, ceil, m., plur. yeux. F. 'ac', /,7»rf, f., r/,vrt,,/,., ni.; shut (he door in one's —, fenncr la parte au nez d qqun. fact, fait, m. fail, fiiiUir (g2J0) ; — in (to), inanqvrr rt. fairy,/,Hr, f. fly, voler. foggy ; be — , faire (§276) rftt brouillard. folded, ci'oisi. follow, snivre (§287). following, Ruivant. folly, folle, f. fond ; be — of, ahner. foolish, /oM. foot, pied, m. ; on — , d ined. fop, /a«. for, prep., pour, pendant, de, contre,par; I am sorry — it, fen mis fdch^ ; 1 have been hero— a week, je auis ici depuis vne semaine. for, couj., car, forbid, dtfendre (§291). force, n., force, t. force, v., /om'r (§239). foreign, stranger, forest, f ore t,t. forget, oublier. fom\, former, former (the), ecln, -.III. fortnight, qninzaiiw., f., qui me jours, m. fortiniate, hcureux. fortune, fortune, f. ; good — , bonhcur, m. forty, quarante. four, quatre, fourteen, quatorzc. fourth, qxHitrihne. fox, renard, m. franc, franc, m. France, France, f. free, libre. freeze, f^cZcr (§241, 2). French, frangais ; Krcnch- man, Fran^wis. fresh, /rr/ts. Friday, vendredi, m, friend, rt?ni, m., aj/oV, f. friendly, aimable. friendship, amitie, f. frog, grcnonille, f. from, dc. A, d. partir de, dans, d'aprH, drpriis. front ; in — of, derant. fni\t,fruit, m. frying-pan, pofle, f. fulfil, aci'omj'lir. full, plein. future, futur. G. garden, jardin, m. gate, parte, f. gather, eueillir (§247). gatlicring, assemblee, t. Ray, flr«r. VOCABULARY. 385 (ifeiicral, iiMiral. ijeiierally, ett ijin^ral, ji- 7i(' rale riicnt. geiieroua, {/tWrcJix. gentleman, monricur (Jernian, allcmnml. yet, itrcndn: (§283), aller (§242) chercher; dcvcnir (§2:'9) ; — made, fa ire /a/»T(5276); — there, i^ar- river ; — up, se lercr (§211)- — over, i>(i»iier, travcrfcr. ghost, revennnt, ni. (jird en, crimlri' (§;<7]). i;\r\, Jilli: give, — away, dnninr ; — badt, rendrc (§291). gla^l (at, of), contoiit (dr), charuii' (de). glory, ijloire, t. i!;\ove,gartt, m. <,'o, aller (§242), viarcher; — away, x'cn aller, partir (§248) ; - for, — after, — and get, aller chercher; — back (again), retoiir- iier ; — ioh&\,ce covcher ; — down, (/cAwnrirf (§291) ; — down town, aller en villc ; — home, aller chez soi, rentrer ; — in (to), cntrer (_dans) ; — for a drive, se promener (S241) en roiture ; — for a row, (sail), sc prohiener en bateau ; — (out) for a walk, aller i^ejiromeiier {d pied), aller /aire unepro- wcnade {A pied) ; — on, avancer (§239) ; — out, sortir (§2*8) ; — past, — by, pasaer ; — and see, — to see, aller voir; — to, aller trouver ; — up, — upstairs, monter. God, Dieu. gold, or, m, golden, d'or. gowl, adj., hfrn, Irrave ; be so — as to, be — enough to, veuillez. good, n.,bien, m. gooti-bye, adieu, au revoir. goodness, bonti', t. goods, rnarchandiiieit,f. plur. goo8eberry-bu8h,r^ro«ct7//c/', m. governess, gouvemante, ^oxemmeni, gouverncment, ni. grace, grdce, f. grannnar, grnwniaire, f. grandfather, grand-pi're, aJeiil. grandmannna, grandmother, grand' mt're. grass, hcrbe, t. gravely, grarement, great, grand, gros. tJreat Britain, Gratide-Bre- tagne, t. Greek, grec. green, vert, grind, movdrc (§280). grocer, fpicier. ground, terre, f.;upon the — , (\ terre. grow, eroitrc (§273). grudge ; have a — against, en vonh ir d (§30.^). guard, garde, m. gun, fiml, m. gypsy, bohiUnien. n. hair, cheveiix, m. plur. half, moiti^, f. half -past two, deux heures et demie. hand, main, f.; — (of a clock), aiguille, t. handsome, beau. liang, pendre (§291). happen, arriver, venir A (§259). happily, heiireusernent. hap])ines8, b(mf"'ur, m. ht'PP.V, heureux, content. hard, adv., fort. hardly, d peine. harm, /aire (§276) mat d harp, 'harpe, t. hasten, se hdter, ne dijtfchar. hat, chapeau, m. hate, 'hair (§254). hatred, 'haine, f. liave, aiwir (§2.S8) ; I _ to be there, il/aut qite j'g .sow; —built, fa ire (§176) /'(?(iV;- haircut, sr/n/(v couper le.s' rhevevx ; — to do with, avoir affaire d. Havre, le Jldvre. hay, /oin, m. he, il, lui, ee, (;a ; than — , que lui; — who, celui qxd. head, t^te, I. headache ; have — , avoir maldlatite. heal, gufrir. health, sante, f. hear, entendre (§291); — from, recevoir (§294) des nouvellen de ; — of, enten- dre parler de. heart, cwxir, m. heat, ehaleur, t. help, aider. hen, poulc, f. hence, axirnii, done. Henry, 'Henri. her, poas. adj., son, m, sea; lui ...le (d elle). her, pers. pron., la, elle; to — , lui, d elle. here, ici ; — below, ici-bas ; — is, — are, void. hero, 'hrron. hers, her own, le siert, d elle. herself, ne, elle-nulme. hide, cacher. high, 'haut. hill, colline, t. him, le, lui, celui ; to — ,lui, himself, se, soi, lui, lui- vietne. M ^^ p.' i I J •<.., m 38u hinder, empfcher. his, iK)HH. aiJJ., «o», ga, gen; lui. .. le(dlni). his, poss. pron., le men, d lui ; — own, le Hien. history, fiistoi/r, f. hold, tenir (§259). hole, troii, m. holidays, vacanecu, f. plur. holy, bt'nit. homo ; (at) — , chez not, d la in a mm. houcnt,/iiinni'tc,lni/ol,j,ri,h(; honesty, loyaut^, f., pro- hit,<, t. honour, n., hommir, m. honour, v., honorer, hope, Ci(/>(?»r/-(§241). horse, cheml, ni. horseback ; on -J-, a cheval. hotel, Jtdtel, m. hour, henrc, t. house, mauon, f.; at (to) my — , c7(tv vwi. how, connticnt, comnie, com- Men : — far ?, combien y a-t-il ?; — many, — much, combien, que ; — lony have you been here ?, depiiis quand (teH-vous ici?; ~ happy she is!, qW clle est hcureme !. however, cepcndant ; — good, quelqite bon que; — that may be, quoi qu'il en «()»< howl, en, m. hundred (a, one), cent. hungry, afonw ; he (feel) — , avoir /aim. hunger, /aim, f. hunt, chasucr. hunter, chasseur. hunting, cfiasse, t hurrah for!, vive(nt).\ hurry ; be in a—, Hrepressi. h«rt, fah-c (§276) vial A; — one's self, sefaire mal. husband, viari., ^potix. FRENCH GRAMMAR. I. I. je, moi idea, iddc, f, idle, paresseux. idleness, parcssr, f. if, si. ignorant, ignorant ; ]»o - of, ij/norer. ill, adj., malade. ill, adv. and n., mal, m. ill-fortune, tiuilhiur, m. ill treat, maltraiter. illuminate, illuminer. image, imaije, t. iniagine, s'imagitier. immediately, tovt dc suite. inipatient, impatient. important, important. impossible, imposdble. in, dans, en, A, de, snr ; be I — , 2/ fire, Hre chez sot. inch, police, m. | income, rei'cnu, m. | increase, ain/menter. incur, courir (§240). indeed !, vraiment !. influence, n., injliicnce, t. influence, v., injiuniccr (§239). injustice, injustice, f. ink, encre, t. inn, auberge, t. innkeeper, mtbergiste. instead of, au lieu de. institution, institution, f. insult, dire (§274) des in- jures A, insulter. intellip-ent, intelligent. intend, avoir (/•) intention de. intention, intention, f. inter,, enterrer. interest, n., iiit^n't, ni. ; take — in, prendre (§283) int^rft A, s'occuper de. interest, v., intiresscr. interesting, inti'ressant. interview (private), t^-A- tCtc, m. I intimate, intime. I into, dang, en ; — It, y, la dedans. introduce, prdsenter. invention, invention, t. invite, invitrr. rieland, Irlandc, f. [ iron,/»T, m. island, tie, t. it, il,elle,ce; le, la; of — , en; — i.syou, fV,v( raas , — is they, ec sont eiix Italian, italien. Italy, Italic, f. itfl, son,sa, ses ; en . . . le. itself, liii-rmhne ; viinn'. J. Japan, Japon, m. I •lolin, Jea>i. I joke, plaisanter. 'ourney, voyage, m. I judge, n. ; be a good - , s<- commit re (A, en) (§209). Judge, jitger (§239). 'July, juilht, m. jump, .sa liter. Jnnc,juin, m. just, juste, pn'eis ; have — , t;e>uV(§259)(/c, nefaire (§276) que de ; - then d ce mo'ment; — as, an moment 'r (§259), kernel, amandc, f. key, clef, f. kick out, mcttre (§279) (i In porte. kill, tuer,faire (§276) mou- rir, kind, n., sorte, t. kind, adj., bon (pour) ; he so — as, be — enough to, vouloir (§305) Men ; it is -— of him to, c'est bmi A ■ hiide. kindle, aUumer. kindly, blcn. kindiieuH, bont^, t ; liavo the — to, vmiloir (S.'Wr.) hien, avoir la bonti' de. kinj,', toi, kingdom, royauiiie, m. ; United - , lioyuvtne- Uni. kiss, embraHxer, baiwr. kitchen, cuiinne, t. knee, ijenou, lu. knife, couteau, in. knight, chevalier, k\Mc]i, fni2)per. know, mvuir (§302), cw.- nattre (S2Ci)) ; — how, x(K!()tV (§;«i2). knowledge, connaiHHaneeK, t. plur, li. labour, labeur, in. Ittok, manqver; much is lacking, i7 «'c»i /a»/ de beaucoup. lady, dame; youiij,' — , de- moiselle, jeuno danii'. ; younj,' ladies (in ad(he.s.s), mesdeinoiselles. lake, lac, m. lamp, larnpe, f. lamp-shade, abat-jour, m. landlord, auberijistc. language, languc, i. ; — (of animals, etc.), langaije, m. large, grand. last, dernier, 2>asS(' ; — year, Vannie derniire, I'aniii'e passfe ; — evening, Mrr (au)soir; — night, cette nuit ; at — , A la fin, en- fin. last, v., durer. late, ttud, en retard ; ho is — , il est en retard ; it is — , il est tard ; it is get- vHig — , il Ke fait tard. lately, derniiremeat. VOOAKTTLAHY. T^tin, latin. latter (the), celui-d. laud, lover. laugh (at), rire (de) (§286), se moquer de. law, loi, t, lawsuit, precis, m. lazy, pareHHeux. lead, viener (§241, 1), ctm- duire (§206). league, ^iotte, f. leap, sauter. learn, appremlre (§283), KiiroiV (§302). learned, — man, savant. leave, v. tr., quitter, laisser. leave, v. intr.,;remit'res amours love, v., aimer. loyal, loyal. M. machine, machine, t. 388 FIIKNCH OltAMMAU. ^^% { h'N Si I i I j" 1 1 i^k...;. m!u\,,fou. iim "t\i, dire. meat, viandc. . medicine, r iet'; i t. meet, rencmurer, se r6- unir. meeting', asuemblee, i. memorandutn, mi'iixiire, m. memory, uuUiioin', f. nifnlion ; don't — it, il n'y apande qv> §298) ; you — , il vousfaut (with infin.), il faut que vous (with subj.) ; he — have done it, il adillefairc. my, mon, le : ve, . . .le ; — father's, eeiid de Mon pire, myself, me, nioi, inoi-nteme.. mysterious, mystdrieux. N. nail, clou, m. name, nam, m. ; be named, s'aj'peler (^'ii\) ; what is his — '?, comnuint s'ap- pelle-t-il i, nap, soimne, m. Napoleon, Napolion. '; I have no—, luiy —,jt) ii'en - iiiDtiey limn, nt. qiif : I have <(* a I vticore ; '/it, 111. ; in ttift in; Ki>" t it) n ci)l«l - , (•(' matin, vnirtijii'ation, H,/ (I qqun. il I'lnprit. o'clo(!k, hvure, t. ; at four — , d quntreheurex. of, (ft! ; _. it, _ them, en, y. offend, offenxer, di'plaire (tX ' (S2S2). offer, ojrir (§258). often, xoiinnt : how , conibicn dej'oia. oh, oh. old, vieux, di/><, ancien ; — •>oy, - fellow, mon vieux ; how — are you '!, quel dije acez-vous}; I uin ten years — , j'al dix ans ; — man, vieillard. on, sat; d, en, de. once, une J'ois ; at — , toui dc xuite, one, adj., un. one, indef. pron., on ; an iron — , un en fer ; a small — , un i}elit ; the - who, celui qui; that — celui-ld. one's, xoti ; le. one's self, se, aoi. only, seulement, ne. .. que; — (one), seal. open, V. tr., ouvrir (§258). open, v.intr.,.v'ouunr(§258), dclore (§204). open, adj., ouvert ; wide — , grand(e) ouvert(e). opium, opium, m. opportune, owortun. opportunity, opportunity, t. ^90 FRENCH GRAMMAR. 1' If BiiF or, ou, ni (after sans). orator, orafcur, oivler, n.,ordre, m. ; in — to, fifin (f(';'in — i\\a.*,,ajin i^iie. oi'der, v., iji- o — s, onUm- ncr; — (-send tor), /aire (S27C) venir. or|,'anize, oruaniser. other, auti-)', ; many — ^ tfVn iVanttn: ouffht, (ft:r(u> (i294) ; he - todo'it, ildcvrait hfaire ; — to ha\ e done it, il aw rait dil le /aire. our, voire. ours, U] ndtrc. ourselves, luniK, noun- mdnex. out ; l)e — , ^«ycWi-- dtA'sM.v, m. owe, devoii- (§294). ">wn, proijre ; my — , fc »rtten; of his -, « ^Mt. P. pail, seau, m. pain, peine, £. paint, pcindre (§271). painter, ■pcintiv. papa, ;w,'/rf., VH(j» yx^Ati. paper, ^,..^.,W, ni. pardon, n., pardon, m, pardon, \-. , pardonncr qqch. il 'jipni. parent, i/a/t'»i/, ni. Parisian, parisicn. parliament, pndcment, m. parlour, mlon, m. parrot, perroquet, m. part, n.,2)nrti.(t, f., ^rtrf, f. ; play a — , jaiicr uii n'tlr. ; on our — , de nolfre part. part, V. ; — with (from), .se St: purer dc. particip/'j, partieipa, ui jiartridge, perdn'x, f. pass, panser (devant). passion, i>fi.s.sn//i, f. l^ast, 2'a.s>' ', m. paternal, pnternel. p;>iK'noe,2w'w'«ft', f. patient, inalade, ni. f. pa\ , pay for, payer (§240) ; — attent' m, /aire (§27o) attention. payment, paieinent, m. l)eac'e, paix, t. l>uavh, j>i'c?ie, f. pfiar, poire, f. pear-tree, iwinor, in. peasant, paijuan. peliblc, caiUou, m. peel, ^/('?cv (§241, 2). pen, plume, f. pencil, crayon, m. penny, deux nous. peovde, on, peupile, ni., yens, m. f. plur. ; few — , 2ieu de yens ; most — , la piiqiart dex yens. perceive, s'apeiccvcir {de) (§201). perfection, perfection, t. perhaps, pevt-iitre peril, 2>i'ril, ni. permission, permimon, f. permit, pern wit re (§279) ; wo are permitted to, il noun est perinin de. persist, pcrsblaine, f. ] > lai 1 1 ly , fra nchenient. plan, plan, m. plant, n., 2'lante, t, plant, v., 2>lanfer. play, jo)(cr ; -- at (fjames), jouer d ; — on (instru- ments), jor/er de. l)leasant, aimahle. please, 2>iaire(d) (§282); if you — , .s' il vous 2>lait ; as we — , cmnme il nous plaira. pleased, content. pleasure, i)lavdr, m. plum, prune , f. pocket, 2)<>cltc, L poem, pohne, m. poet, xxiite. poetry, 2)o>'iiic, f. Poland, Poloyne, f. Pole, 2>'>l(»iais. police, police, i. polite, 2>oli, political, politique. pond, etany, m. poor, pavi>rc, mauvais. poi)ulation, po> dilation, t. I>ortion, 2>art, i. portrait, portrait, m. position ; put in a — txi, nu'ttre (§279) (I mane dc. possession, 7>(M',ses.«on, f. 1 Kissible, possible. post, post-office, paste, f. ; put in the — , mettre (§279) (\ la 2>i>sto. l)ostaj,'e stamp,* i»i6re-jposte, ni. puultry-yard, basse-cour, f. pound, iivre, t. it l/ien dom- isae-cour, i. powerful, puismnt. practise, mettrc (§279) en pratique. praise, louer. pray, j^Tier. precious, prMexix. precisely ^of hours), prdcin; at tliree o'clock — , a trois heurcs pix'mes. prefer, aimer micux, pr(- f'h-er (mi). prescrihe, prescrire (§275;. present, adj., jyrimnt ; a.t ~, (I pri'sent. present, n., cadeau, m. present (witii), pn'nentor. preserve, confire (S2GS), president, «i«)wi<'M/-^(ij;i(i,sf. dent. pretend, faire (§276) sem- hlant de. pretended, pr&emhi. pretty, adj., joli. pretty, adv., asxez. prevail over, Vemporter mr. prevent, empecher. price, pnx, m. ; at what — , d quel pn'x, (a.) combien. priest, pretre. prince, jmnce. principle, princijic, m. probable, probable. probably, probabhnnent procession, corthje, m. pro/v;(iMtY, ni. progress, i)»-o;/,v.s-, ni. plur. promise, n.., promesxe, f. promise, v, promcttre (§279). pronounce,j:'ro)io?wc;-(§ 2 ;iO). property,p»-oi>j^«j, i-Menn, n . plur. propliet, prophHe. propose, proposer. prosperity, prosp(;nf<>, t. pro8perou8,/?ormrt;>/(s;?5i) prove, motifrer, provid« with, /lit* r?J7>. rOCABULAlvY. province, province, t. pAidence, pntdence, i. public, public; ~ works, les travaux pxihlics ; the — , le public. punish, xmnir. pupil, m.vc, ni. f. puri)oso ; on — , exjn-i)^ ; with the — , dans le but. purse, porte-inonnaie, ni. pursue, poursuivre (§287). put, mettre, attacher; — on (clothing), mettre (§279); —out (fire, etc ), Hcindrc (§271); — out (of doors), mettre A la parte ; — to -ieath, mettrc d mart. 391 z Q. quality, (fialiti^ f. qunntity, quantity, f. quarrel, dispute, f. leuvoir (§300). rainy ; in — weather, quand il pleiit, quand le temps est d la pluie. raise, lever (§241). rare, rare, rarely, rare^nent. rascal, coquin. rat, rat, m. rather, assez. reach, airiver d. read, lire (§278). reading, lecture, t ready, 2>rSt. really, reelle'inent,vraiment. re-appear, reparaltre (%269). reason, raison, t. reasonable, raisonnable. receive, recevoir (§294X recite, ricitcr. recognize , reconnaUre{%2Q9). recompense, n. .recampense, t. recompense, v., ricompen scr. red, roui/e. refuge ; take — , se r^fu. 'jicr. regret, n., regret, m. regret, v., rctrrett^r. regular, vra>.. reign, n., r>;/ne, m. reign, v., nU/mr (§2il, 1). rejoice, je rdjouir. rejoin, rojoindre (§271). relative, parent, m. relic, relique, *. religion, religion, f. remain, restcr. remains, restes, m. plur. rei larkable, remarqmible. reiicmi)er, sr souvenir (§2,'i0), se rapveler (§241), rrtctiir(r2r>d); — me to tliem, rappelez-moi d leur bon souvenir. render, wnr^j'c (§2!)1). repeat, r,'p,pon- dre (§291). repose, rcpos, m. rci)resent, represent er. republic, n ' t return, n., r'etnvr, m. ; on my — , d nion retour. return, v., revenir (§25fl), retourncr ; — hwme, rcn- trer. reveal, rMler (§241). revolution, revolution, f. reward, n. , r^covipemte, t. reward, v., ricmnpenscr. ribbon, ruban, m, rich, riche. riches, richesse, f. rid ; ])e — of, fe promener <,%2A\)6nbateou. sale ; for - , as si . . . que; I think — , je le crois ; I am — , je le sitis ; — as to, afin de, de man- idre d; —many, tant; — much, tant, tellement ; — that, afin que, de sorte que ; — well, si Men, tant. so-called, soi-disant, prf- tendu. soldier, soldat. solve, rismidrc (§284). some, de, du, quelque(s); en ; I have — , j'en ai. somebody, some one, qiu-l- q%Cun. somethinET, qiielque cfmsc, ™- 5 — Roo(*i quelquc VOCABULARY. chose de hon ; — • strange and mysterious, je ne sais qiioi de iitysferietix. sometimes, quelqnefois. son, fils. song, chanson, f., chant, m. soon, bientM ; as — as, aussitOtqiic; sooner, plus t6t. sore, adv.,/ort. sore ; have a — , avoir mal d. sorrow, cliagrin, m. sorry (for), fdcM (de). sort, sortc, f. ; what — of weather ?, qtiel tewj/s ?. soul, dme, f. South America, AmMque (t)duSud. southern, mMdional. sow, semcr (§241, 1). speak, parlor; — French, imrler fran^ais ; so to — , pour ainsi dire. sjicech, discours, m. s\^Qn([,d(:penser ;— (of time), passer. si>lendid, niagnifiqnc si)oiI, !/dter. sport ; make — of, se mo- qucr de. spot, endroit, m. spriny:, n., 2'nntemps, m. ; in — , au printcmps. spring, v., sourdre (§280). stable, ('curie, t, ('table, m. stake ; be at — , y aller de (§242). stand, ,ie tenir (§259), se trourer. start (with fear, etc.), trc.^- saillir{!^2ri),partir(,^2iS). statesman, hani^ne d' I'fat. station ; railway --, i/are, f. statue, statue, f. stay, re.'^ter, s' arrtter ; -- in. Tester d la niaison, restcr chez .toi. steal, roler, dArnher. steam, vapeur, f. 393 steam-boat, steamer, bateau d vaj>eur, m. steam-enyine. machine d vapeur, f. step, marcher. sterling, sterling (invar.). St. Helena, Sainte-HiHhw, f. stick, bdton, in. still, encore, toujours. stir, houeifluous, de ttop. support, soutenir (§259). r 39^4 FRENCH GRAMMAR. )•) m h I ; ,i, fcf" ' 1 1 I i I ^- 111 sure, sHr, surfe'eon, mMecin. surprise, Kurpranlrc (§283). suspect, «e douter, mup<;on- ner. swallow, hirmideUe, f. swear, jurer. Swedish, suMout. sweet, doux ; smell — , wn- tir (§248) hmi. swim, Hai/er (§239). sword, ^p6e^ t. table, to?»fc, f. tail, qxicue, f, tailor, taillcnr. take, 2)'rcndre (§283), porter, ewporter, mencr (§211), emmener (241) ; — after, tenir de (§259) ; — away, 6ter, einporter ; — care, prendre garde ; — a jour- ney, faire (§276) un iv;//- dO^ : — off, 6ter ; — up, wonter. talk, parlcr. tall, grand. Tasso, Taxse. tea, /?(e. the, le ; — richer one is, plus on est ri^hc; — less one has of them, vioins on en a. their, poss. adj., Icur. their, i>oss. pron., le leur. them, les, leur, eux, elles; to — , leur. themselves, se, emx, eux- incnies. then, alors, lors. there, Id, y. there is, there are, voild, il y a; — happen(8), il arrire; if — ever was one, s'il en Jut jamais; — he comes !, le voild qui v'ient .'. thereupon, Id-dessus. they, ils, eux, elles, ce ; it is — , ce sont eux. thief, volcur. thimble, di', m. thine, le tien. thinj,', chose, f. ; this good — , cela dc bon. think, prnsar, croire (§272), trovrer; what are you thinking of (about)?, d quoi pcnscz-vous ? ; one would — , on croirait ; what I — of him, son fait. third, troisiiime. thirsty ; bo — , a%mr soif. thirteen, treize. tliirty, trente. this, demonstr. adj., cc ; — man, cet hommc-ci, this, demonstr. pron., ce, ceci, celui-ci ; — one. celui-ci; — . . . . ol mine, mon . . . nr. tread under toot,fotaer aux picds. treasure, tr^sor, m. treat, traitcr. treatment, traitement, m. treaty, traiti, ni. tree, arbre, m. tiifling, imvjnifiant. trooj)s, troiipes, f., phir. trouble, peine, t. troupe, troupe, f. true, vrai, Jidble. trunk, j/(,a^fe, f, trust, n., confiance, f. trust, v., avoir conjiance en, sefier d. truth, mWW, f. try, tdcher, Tuesday, mardi, m. t'lrn, n., tour, m. ; in — , tour d tour, turn, v., tourncr ; — out of, cteswr tfe; _ out of doors, mettre (§2; 9) ,i Ui porte. twelve, doMz^; — o'clock, widi, m., minuit,m. twenty, vinfft. two, deux. VOCABULARY. under},'-o, fiubir. understand, cmnpremlre (§283). undertake, entrcprendre (§283). unfortunate, malheureux. unhappy, malheureux. United Kingdom, lioyaume- Uni, ni. United States, hata-Unis, m. unknown, ineonnu. unless, d inoins que. . . ne. ^*>ii^ii,Jn'(§'241). welcome, aceHt'ilUr (S'2-17) ; bo — , ftre le bieuvftm. well, bicn, ch biiii ; very — , trfH bicn, (7i bicn; be — off, amiir de quoi vivni. well-bred, birn I'lcm'. well kiuiwii, bien eonnu. west, ouent, m. what, adj., le, m. when, quand, lornque, que, (Iquelle heitre; hardly . . . — , (i peine .... que. whenever, quand. where, oii; — . . . tTo\n,d'ou. whether, .s't, (7) que . . . ou (que). whioh, iritcrroi,'. adj., quel. which, interrojj. pron., le- quel. which, rel. pron., q}d, que, lequel ; in — , dan.^ le- quel, oil, dont; of — , from — , dont, duquel. while ; alonj,'— , lon/jtempn. while, prep., en. Ahilo, whilst, conj., p<-n- dant que, tamlix que, taut que. whiHtle, niffler, wliite, blanc who, interroK. pron., qui. who, rel. proii., qui, lequel. whoever, qui que, quieon- que, qui que ce unit. whole, tou^: the — year, toute I'anm'e, whom, interrog. pron., qui. whom, rel. pron., >io). wisdom, m(/esne, f. wise, nai/e. wish, de.sirer, ('«?f?o)7-(8305) ; as you — , cifinme voiiti voudrez ; when (ever) yon — , quand otms voudrez ; if you — , si volts voulez. with, avec, de, chez, d, par ; — it, — them, en. wilhin, dans, nu hinif de. witliDut-, \m'\\,mnK ;- - . . . and (or), sans .... ni. without, conj., mns que. without ; do — , se passer de. woman, Jew trie, wonder, s'ctonner, so de- nt under. wont ; he —, avoir e.outumt de. wo(k1, woods, 1)018, m. wood-choi)per, woodman, biieheroti. word, mot, m., parole, t, ; .send -, /aire (§270) sa- voir. work, n., travail, m., ou- vra (§303). t(', On toe. ismul oftoii by c, or {;!oiidl. ; ,pUltdJ)ieu! ; II ... OH, j'aiine- t . . . i/ue d<'.. li-dinant, pri- j., §81, 3, §440, 2, §528. 1 ; verb +^tl = Eiif,'. tran., 8375, 2* idioiiiatio with verbs, §375, 4 ; with iiaiiieci of countries, §411,3, obs. ; deiiotinj,' possession after I'tre, §455, 1 ; in preposi- tional plirases, §509 ; repe- tition, §511; -:'eoncern- i">,'', 'of, §513, 2; of 'place', 'time', §516, l, §521, 2 ; of ' motion to- wards', §628,2; ='with' (characteristic), §531, 4. abbaije, prncn., §23, 2, exc. abbreviations, §538. •about', §513. accent, accent marks, §2, 1, 2, S ; stress, §66, §07. acute accent, §2, 1. Achille, prncn., §42, 2, exc. 1, §61, 2, exo. 1. adjective, §§414-436, see also possessive adj., den)- onstr. adj., interrog. adj., indef.adj., numeral; fern., §§414-415 ; plur. §§416- 417; agreement, §§418- 422 ; as adv., §487, §421; Houns as adjs., §422 ; comparison, §§423-427 ; position, §§428-431 ; with il, §433 ; with de, §434 ; with en, §435; with envem, §436. adverb, §§485-497 ; list, §485; in •menc from adjs., 84sr. ; adjs. as advs., §487 ; ad- verbial locutions, §488 ; comparison, §489; posi- tion, §490; negatives. §§491-490 ; distinctions in use, §497 ; numeral advs., §503. (tfiii que, +subj. ,§5.32, §351,2. 'after', §514. aijir, impers., §332, 1, oLs. Hi {at), prncn., §22. aicul, plur., §387. aiij^ie, prncn,, §45, exc. 2. ai'juille, proncn., §45, exc. 1. uil, plur., §387. (tim, prncn., §35. aimer -^a. +ds. without lliu, prncn., §i;o. Aix, pr?icn., §G2, exc. 3. album, prncn., §37, exc. Aljred, prncn., §43, exc. ««er,+infin., §310, 8 ; im- pers., §332, 1, obs. ; ,s'c/i allcr, §327. allez, special force, §347, h, allon"^, special force, §347, b. almanack, imicji., §42, exo 2. alphabet, §1 ; names of let- ters and gender, §1, n. 3 ; prncn., §§16-03. aljihabetical equivalents, §76. am, prncn., §34. -am, prncn., §34, exc, 2. dme qui Vive, with rie, §492, 2, c. dme vivante, with ne, §492, 2,c. '? moim que, with ne., §490, 'among,' §615. anwur, gender, §383, 3, ft. an, prncn., §34. 'and,' untranslated, §533. ^; =m, §53 J, 2. amU., prncn., §16, 2, exo. aiwstrophe, §2, 6. apposition, use of art., §408, 4, appruuvd, §363, a. apr&H, §514. rt/>n>.v,-f infin., §301, 4. aprts-midi, gentler, §383, 3, a. aquatic, prncn., §65, exo. ara/ievequv, prncn., §42, 2, exc. 1. archiduc, prncn., §42, 2, exc. 1. amver, impers., §332,', obs. article, §§393-413, see also def. art. and indef. art.; agreement and repetition, §390 ; use with nouns, §§397-413 ; omission, §408; in appositions, §408, 4; unclassified examples, §409 ; with proper names, §§410-413. ' at', §516. aftemlant ; en — que, + subj., §53.', §351, 1. attemlu, §308, a. au, prncn., §24. au,Wt+lc, §S95. awfM/i(.y),§480,3; use, §483, 1 ; with ne, §492. aucunement, with ne, §492. au-deasus de, §625, 1. av-dcx.wufi de, §530, 2. aush%, in compaa-ison (adj,). §423 ; (adv.) §489. autant, §497, 2, II . INDEX. 399 autel, pmcn. , §24, exc. automne, prncn. , §52, exc. 1; tf end., §383, 3, a. autour (ic, ^C>13, 1. autre, §48(), 3 ; use, §483, 2, 7, (2) ; with iie, §4t»6, 3, n. autre tiwnt, with ne, §496, 3, n. aittnd, §480, 2 ; use, §482, 1. aux, =di-le>i, §395. auxiliary verb.s, use §§307- 319; modal auxs., §310, 5, II. avant, §r)17, 2. (leant que, with nc, §490, 1, b; acant f/wtJ.+ Hubj., §632, §351, 1, f,lau. plur., §386, 4, n. Men, i!rn<-n., §34, exe. X **'««., with partitive, §403, 1, h ; irreg. comparison, 8189, 2. bien qvA:,-\-9\xh]:, §532, §351, 4. i/x, prncn., §57, 2, exc. 1. bwafx, prncn., §44, exc. bon, comparison, §424 ;-f(l or pour, §433, §433, a, §430, a. bou(jer, with jw abnc, §495,4. /wwf ; au—de, §514,2. ^r(/t, with /ic, §492, -2, 6. Bruxellex, j)rncii.,§02, exc.3. i(«^ prncn., §60, 2, exc. 2. 'by', §51S; of « dimension', §505, a. C. c, prncn., §41 ; final, §39, 2. i; §41, 2, n. '.', §456, 2, obs. i'd, for cela, §405, e,/ ; dis- tinguished from i^d and S', c, d, e. ■cer, verbs in, §239. eerise, prncn., §17, 4, exc. certain, §41.0. 1 ; use, §481, 1. eertijh', §308, a. eesxer, with ne nlone, §496,4. eet, for ce, §450, 1, obs. (7;, pincn.,§42. ehaeiin, §48i', 2 ; use, 482, 2. '■/"'V'"', §480,1; use,§4iJ,2. chef-d'oeuvre, prncn., §44, exc. eJienil, prncn , §50, exc. 1. elie.rubin,\n-t\cn., §4 J, exc 1 Chez, s516, 2, §528, 2, §631, 2 chim^re, pnicu., §42, 2 exc. 1. Christ (Jdsus-), prncn., §60, 2, exc. 1. ■ci, §458. Cid He), prncn., §43, exc. del, plur., §387. ci-inclus, §308, h. ci-joint, §368, b. Cinna, prncn., §53, exc, 2. circumflex accent, §2, 3. fu'i7,-f (I Veuard de, §436, a. ck, prncn., §49. clef, prncn., §44, exc. club, prncn., §40, exc 2. Coblentz, prncn., §63, exc. 2. collationne, §368, a. collectives, §500. CuJcr/ift, prncn., §40, exc. 2. coinhicn, agreement, §312, 2. b. romvw, tor que in compari- son, §423. I). 400 FllENCn GI{AMMAR. 1^1 ' ! f^ r I if' Li ?^ Iff compariHon, of odjs., 5§423- 427 ;uf a(ivs.,§189;irre|^. (mlj.), j424 ; irref,'.(adv.), §481>, 2; remarks, §427; foUowHl by ne, §496, 3. comparative, see conipari- HOIl. complement, predicative, §374 ; prepositional, §375 ; composite, §377. compound adjs. plur.. §421, 2. compound nouns, plur., 8389. compound tenses, forma- tion, §§307-301» ; se(iu(!nce of sul)j., §353, 3; in condl.sent., §355, a,p, 213. compris (»/), mm—, §308. a. compto, prncn., §54, exc, 2. ' concernipif ', §5 3, 2. condition; dla — qtie, +in- dic. or8ubj.,§532, §351, 3. conditional sentences, §354, §355 ; use of mood and tense in, §355. conditional, tense §346, in condl. sent., §355, p. 213. conditional anterior, tense, §34C ; replaced by plupf. subj., §352, 3 ; replaced by impf. indie, in 'result' clause, §3.55, c, p. 214. conjunction, §§.^132-530 ; list, §.'');}2 ; with indio., 8ul)j., indie, or subj., see list, §532 ; use of certain, §§533-536 ; distinctions, §636. conjunctive, pron., §437and n.; use, §§140-419. consonant;! | men., §§39-63; final, prncn , § 9, 1, 2 ; double, §39, 3. consonant sounds, §16. Ciirti'z, prncn . §03, exc. 1. couulr, ^Ci\i\vv, §3^;{, ;!, e. craindre, with lie, §49tj, 2. crainte ; dp, — que . . . ne, + 8ubj.,§532, S3£l, 2. creute, prncn.. §20, oxc. 2. cnir, prncn., §41, 1, exc. 1. rulde-sac, prncn., §50, ext;. 1. ciira(;ua prncn., §16, 2, exc. D. d, prncn., §43 ; in • liaison', §71. d'ahord, §503, a. diunii4'r,\m\cxu, §52, exc. 1. dam, §521, 1, S ; with names of countries, §411, 3, oIjs. dates, §504, §219. dative, of pers. pron., §440, 2 ; ethical, §440, n. davantaije, §497, 3. Daii'tZ, prncn., §43, exc. de, as partitive sign, §§401- 403 ; agent after passive, §320, §434, §518,1; verb -f ile^^FMg. transitive, §375 1 ; idiomatic with verbs, §375, 4 ; witk names of countries, §411, 2; de-= 'in', after siiperl., §425, 2 ; denoting ' by how much ',afterHiiporl., §427, 2 ; pleonastic after inter- rog., §468, n. ;of 'dhiien- sion', §f,Ou, obs. 1, §507, obs. 3; in prepositional l)lira8es, §509 ; repetition, §511 ;(ie=' by '(measure), §518,'3 ;(?<>=.=' from ',§520, 1 ; of ' place ' (after sup- erl.), §521, 4; d!6'='of', §5'22, 1; rf<;=--' with ',§531, 6 ; -= ' concerning ', ' of '^ §513, 2. de ce que, constr. . §349,4, b. decider, +d,+de, §300, 2. dt'jier, +a+de, §360, 3. definite article, forms, §394 ; contractions, §.395 ; agree- ment and repetition, Sl!9(i, §425, a ; with geticral noun, §399 ; with parti- tive noiui, §401 ; in titles, §405 ; for possessive adj.. §406 ; distrlbutivcly, §407; omission, $408, $411, 4 ; uncrlassifled examples, §409 ; with names of per- sons, §410; with names of countries, §411 ; with names of cities, etc., §412 ; with names of mountains and rivers, §413 ; in sup- erlative, §§425-427 ; re- placing demonsti. adj . §458, b ; in fractions, §501, b. dHice, gender, §383, c. demi, agreement, §421, 4, a; in compounds, §389, 2, a, §421, 4, a; infractions, §501, o. demonstrative adjective, forms, §456, 1; agreements §457 ; repetition, §4r7, a ; use, §458 ; replaced by def. art., §468, b. demonstrative pronoun, forms, §456, 2 ; agree- meiit,§457 ; use,§8459-465. demonstratives, see e,+df,+dir. infln., §360, 0. direct obj,, §372. disjunctive pron., §437 and n. ; use, §460 ; avoided, §450, 6, n. divem, §480, 1 ; use, §481, 3. (lomptcr, jirncn., §54, oxc.'i. done, i)nicn., §41, 1, exc. 1. domwr, conjugation, §237. dont, §472 ; uae, §475. dot, prncn., §C0, 2, exc. 1. double, as adv., §502, a. du, ^de+le, §305. dii, a5,'reeinent, §371, 4, 6. Ihi/reunc, prncn., §57,exc. 2. dur,+]wur, §436, a. durant, position, §510, b. B. e (rncn., §24. dchecD, prncn., §41, 1, exc. 1. ■iffe, i-igc), prncn., §17, 1, exc. ei, prncn., §26. eim, prncn., §85. ein, prncn. , §35. 'either', 'nor—', 'not—', §534, 3. •eler, verbs in, §241, 2. elision, §73. elhptical tense forms, t!336. em,, prncn., %?,\. ■''■m, prncn., §34, oxc. 2. fnieute, prncn., §26, 2, exc. 2. amm-, prncn., §34, exc. 1. ■ailment, prncn., §17, 6. iniijM'chir, with ne, §496, 1. t;Hi;/rc«wr(«'), +d, +de, §360, 7. en, prncn., §34. ->7*, prncn., §34, exc. 2, 3. en (pron. adv.), §438 ; use, 5445, §4.''.0, 6, n.; position, §417,3,(2). en (prep.\ in f,'crunds, §365, 3 ; a^yreenient of past part.. §371, 3, a: with names of countries (no art.), §411, 2 ; repetition, §511 ; of ' place ', ' time ', §516, 1, §521, 2, 3; of 'malerial', §.VJ2, 2; of ' motion towards ', §528, 2. encore . enfrndu, §368, a, §371, 4, «. entre, §516, 1, 2. d'entre, after superl. ,§426,2. e7ivers, §r.28, 3. environ, §513, 4. I'quateur, prncn., §55,exc. 2. e'liiextre, prncn., §55, e.xn. 8. (>.•?, ==eH leu, §395, n. 2. •esse feni. er.diny, §384, 2. eM-ee que, use of, §316, 4. estomac, prncn., §41, 1, exc. 1. et (conj.), use of, §533 ; prncn. in ' liaision ', §72, 4, obs. Atd, invar., §319, oba. -eler, verbs in, §24], 2. ethical dative, §440, n. etre, §238 ; forrnitiff conip. tenses, §308, §309 ; form- ing passive, §819 ; form. inKreflexivecou.p. tenses, §322, 2 ; OS impers. verb, §330,2; +(l + infln., §368, 7, b; +fl,+a....d«,-|-d (I, §860, 8. eu (eil), prncn., §20 ; prncn. of eu of avoir, §26, 2, exo. 1. eu, past part., agreement, §371, 4, (/. eun, prncn., §37. ■eiir, fem. of, §415, 2. (2). europi'en, prncn. , §34, exo. 3. Aviiuiment, prncn., §17, 1, exc. Mter, with n«, §49©, 1. examen, prncn., §34, exo. 3. excepts, §368, o. ?!/, prncn., §27. F. /, prncn., §44 ; final, §39, 2 ; ill ' liaison ', §71. y(tcA(',+cono, exc. 1. future, §343 ; in condl. «fn- tenw, §;J55 ; r«-j)lii((.(l by l>rt'8.,s:W,4, f. ; rei.liiciMl t>y condl., §345, 3. futtire anterior, §;Ml ; rc- pliiced hy past indi'f., S 139, 3. o. i/, prncn., 845; in 'iiiilNOM', S7I. » Oatnljctta, prncn., g6(), e.xc 8. l/arde-, in (!onipoun, exc. 2. 9e6le, prncn., §17, exc. 4. CrWrr/es, prnen.,§l7,exc. 4. gerund, §365, 3; English, §366, 2. gis^r, prncn., §57, 2, exc 4. 017 Blax, prncn., §57, 2, exc. 1. gn, prncn., §4S. FHENCK fJH.AMMAM. Ottth, prncn., 800, fx'nil, prniMi., 850, ex. 2. .'/". prncn., §45, 2, n. 1 aiid exc. ,'/i/(V.!, with ne, §4t»2. ^''//■./.•(A■),prncn.,848,exo. I. ''"IXC, prncn., §45, exc. 1. gnltiiml,\mum ,g00,exc.3. H. Ii, prncn., !(17. fi'tir, -f(/cfinfin., S35S, 7, c. /idiif, for hauteur, ^U0:\, ol)s, 4. /«'7(r«.', prncn.,§57,2. exc. l. hiiiinte qui vivc, with nc, 8 «!»2, 2, c. 'however', 8481, 5, a, (2) and n. Ilunibcrt, prncn., §37, exc. hyvien, prncn., §34, exc. 2. hynuic, gender, §;583, 3, ,/ hyphen, use, §2, 7, I. Iff), prncn., §18; eliHion, §73. ignorant, -f,vt/r, §435, a. ignorcr, f negative, constr. after, §310, 5, c. U (iniperH.), agreement, §312, 4, §139, d; as sub- je(!t of iin])or.s. verb, §323, §332, 2, s333;,7,vrt,§330, 3; (7e.A§330, 2, §461,1, (l)i &;' il favt, §331 ; i7 H'enfaut, §331, 5; distin- guished from ce, §461, 2, (1), a; t7 f,v< wm/, §461, 2, (1). a; ilsemble, §:63, a; i7 ,sV« /a«(, with nc, §496, 5 ; t7 ,/ a, with ma, §496, 6. i'7;-, prn'in., §50, exc. 3. n/i, i)rn(!n., §35. inim-, pnicn. , §62, exc. 2. imperative, §347 ; in condl. sentinco, §86B,p. 2J3; re placed by fut., §343, 4. imperfect, (indie), 8M8; In narrative, examples of, §;!U ; in condl. sentence, §3.-i5, p. 213; replacing ilupf. or condl. unt. in condl sentence, §355, <;, p. 214 ; (HubJ.), 8;{63, '1 and 4, (•; for perf. subj., §353, 4, rt. imiMTsonal verbs, §8323-338; verbs n.sfd impersonally, §332 ; r//'-(-inl'in. as logical Hlll.j. of, i;,i !), 1. inip:'rt,-(3 ; agreement and re- petition, §:{<)(i ; use, §:!i)S ; omission, §40S ; uneliwsi- tled e.\ample.H, §400 ; with names of persons, §410, .3. indefinite adj., forms, §480, 1, 3, §(81, 1 ; use, §481, §433, §484 ; j)ositioii in negation, §40 J. indefinite pron., forms, §480, •2, 3, §484, 2 ; n.se, §482, §483, §184 ; po.sition in negation, §493, §493, b. indefinites, sea indef. adj. and pron. indicative mood, §334, see also tho various tenses; in conditions, §355, nbs., p. 213. indirect discotirse, mood 01, §334, n. 1 ; tense of, §338, 5; indirect obj., §372, 2, §373, §440, 2, §528, 1. indulgent, + pour or d, §436, a. -ine, fcm. ending, §384, 3. infinitive mood, §355-364; '.vithont prep., gb'57, vo- fcrenwe list, §357, 6 ; with INDEX. 403 A, 1368, Tefcrenro lint, mx, 7 ; wiih ,/,., s:jr,i), rcffrt'iico list, ^m>, 0; historical, g3r.», 4 ; diH- tinotions, gaCO ; with othir \>vc\m., i<3«l ; for Biibordiimti' ciuiisu, g;i«;2 ; with iKissivo force, S3(W; forlMijr. -inj,', »jfl4,§30(),3. iiitfrjfction, ^537. iiiterrofjution, worti ordiT, §31G ; indirtrt, s;U8. Inteiro^rativo oflj., forms, §400, 1 ; ivjjruoiiient, JKi? ; tiw, S4«^, SIO!), 1, h,2. intcrro;,'ativt'lociitiorKs,S471. interrogative proii., forms, §40(1, 2 ; aK-reeiuerit, §407 ; use, )!S4(iS-470. intorr«)i,'ativeH, see interrojf. adj. and pron. •into', j(521, intransitive verbs, S373. inversions, rhetorical, §317. irr-, iirncii.,§56, exc. 3. irre^-ular verbs, i;ii23i»-30(; ; listof, §3CG; in -cr, j'jji'W- 243 ; in -rcr, -tjcr, §23;) ; in ■yer, §240; wiHi sfcni- vowole(0, §241; in -,*r, ■eter, §241 ; in -//•, §§244- 200; in -rv., §§261-292; in -o»>, §§293-30.'-, ; in-o/((//v, ■endrc, -crdre, -(mire- ■ordre, §291. ■isKimc, superl. eiidini,', §426, a. jUIMlk, §110,1.(3). jurer, >^^§4,S0, 1 ;use, §4N1.4. Maintre, prncn., §57, 2.exe. 2. tnul, irrejf. ;'onipuriHo;i, §489, 2. MaleKherbi'K, prncn., |f7, exc. 2. inal(jri qua, -f-suhj., §532, §361, 4. ma mie, §452, n. iii'diiKiitr, !i462, n. manikre., de — que, -f indlc. orsubj., §.53'.', §351, 2. Ilia iKj net; +d, +de, §300, 14. »*«(>, prncn., §57,2, exc. 1. masculine, see gender. mauvaui, prncn., §24, exc. ; irrej;. comparison, §424. meiltcur, §424. inline, §480, 3 ; use, ti483, 3. Metz, prncn., §63, oxc. 2. meule, prncn., §26, ex(! 2. Michel, pnicn., §42, 2. exo. 1. niir, with nc, §492, 2, h. mien, etc., for le mien, §155,2. iiiicux, §489, 2. Diil, in dates, §498, c. mil, ( = ' millet '), prncn., §51,2, ex. wi7/f, prncn., §51 2,cxc. 1., §J9S, c. million, prncn., §51, 2, exc. 1. ' mine ', etc., translated, §455, 1. moelie, prncn., §17, 2, exc. ma'urs, prncn., §57, 2, exc. 4. )noi, for /jtc, §447, 3, (3), obs. 1. 404 FRENCH GRAMMAR. •i U t ,1 « Is! ! t's ■».„ moindre, §424. moim, §189, 2 ; In compari- son (adj.), §423, (adv.), §489 ;«ioinN(/*', 489, §!,/>; d mains qve ... 7u;, + subj., §532, §351, 3, — + de dcfux, agreement of, §312, 2, c. mol, §415, 1, (3). mon, for ma, g452, 1, obs. 1 ; in address, §454, 4. monarchie, prncn., §42, exc. 1. monsieur, prncn., "SO, exc. Montesquieu, prncn., §57,2, exc. 2. mood, see the various moods ; of subordinate clause, §334, n. 2. ' more ' ; ' more and more ', §423, rf, §489; 'the more', §423, d, §J89 ; 'more than', (adv. of quantity), §489, h. mot, with nc, §49ii, 2, 6. multiplicatives, §,502. X. n, prncn., §53 ; in 'liaison,' §71. nahab, prncn., §40, exc. 2. narrow, of sounds, §3, 1. nasal vowels, prncn., §§33- 3S; in 'liaison,' §71 nasal vowel sounds, §12, §13. n'avoirgnrdc, §495, 5 ne (n'), §§492-49(? ; wWhpas, point, etc., §492; posi- tion, §493 ; omission, §494 ; alone as ncg'ative, §495 ; pleonastic, §496 ; ne. . . quo, position, §493, c; nc . . . ni, position, §493, d : nc . . . que and iiculcment, §497, 4. negation, §§491-496 ; sec also ne, nan, pas, etc. ' neither . . . nor', translat- ed, §Mt3,(/, §,-,34, 3 ueniii, prncn., §17, 6, nrrfs, prncn., §44, exc. net, prncn., §00, 2, oxc 1. neuf, prncn., §44, exc. ni, use, §313, b , §634, 1 ; with ne, §492; jji.. . vs, position, §493, d. n'importe, §495, B. nombre, -f de, agreement with verb, §312, 2, a. non (pas, point), §491 ; que non, §497, 1, a. nonante, §493, n. nonobstant , que, -j- .subj., §532, §351, 4. non (pas) que, +snhj., §532, §3 1, 5. ' nor ' ; — ' either ', §534, 3. 'not' ; — 'either', §534, 3. noun, §§379-392 ; gender, §§379-384, §§414-415; luun- ber, §§385-390 ; case rela- tion, §391 ; agrecmem, §392 ; as adjs., §421, 3, §422, §430, 2, (3). nous, for je, §439, a ; pleonastic, §450, 5, a, nous autres, §483, 2, c. nouvel, §415, 1, (3). mi, agreement, §421, 4, a. mt;, §480, 3, §415, 1, (2), b; use, §483, 1 ; with ne, §492. nuUement, with rw, §492. number, of nouns, §§386- 390 ; general rule, §385 ; exceptions, §386 ; double plurs., §387 ; foreign nouns, §338 ; comp. nouns, §389 ; plur. of proper nouns, §390 ; of adjs., §§416-417. ninucral, §208, §§493-507; cardinals, §49S ; ordinals, §499; collectives, §500; fractions, §501 ; nmlMpli- cativcs, §5^2 ; adyerb, §£03 ; remarks on use, §§504-507; in dates, titles, etc., §504; fordimension, §505 ; for time of day §506 ; for aire, §507. O. ()(o), prncn., 19. obrir, in pa^isive, §321, 1, object, dir. andindir.,§372; position, §376. obVujer, +(l ,+(?etU, irreg. comparison, §424. 2>eri, irreg. comparison, §489, 2. pen, +de, §312, 2, a, b; with partitive, §403, 1, d. ppiir ; de — que . , . ne, + subj., §632, §351, 2. X>eut-ftre que, constr., §349, 5, n. ; no inversion, §317, 3. phonetic transcription, ex- amples of, §77. pire, §424. i«w, §489, 2. plein, when invar., §421, 4, a. plupart, agreement of verb, §312, 2, a, b ; with parti- tive, §403, 1, c. pluperfect (indie), §342 ; re- placed by plupf. subj., §352, 3 ; replaced by impf. indie, §355, c, p. 214 : (subj.),§353,§352; replaced by perf. subj., §353, 4, c; replacing plupf. indie, or condl. ant., §352, 8 ; se- quence, §353, 3, 4, a; replacing plui)f. indie, in ' if ' clause or ' result ' clause, §355, b, p. 214. plural, see number. plus, §489, 2 ; in compari- son (adj.), §423, (adv.), §489 ;-; with ne,^\%2;i)h(sa.m\damn- tagc, §497, 3 ; — d'un, agreement, §312, 2, c. phmeurs, §480, 3 ; use, §483, 4. l^lns tm, with w §496, 3, n. phit6t, with ne, §i96, 3, n. point, with ne, §492, and n. 1 ; pns-Hn!!, §493. 406 FRENCH GRAMMAR. i' I l.i^ mi ' ...... ^ I possessiTe, adj., forms, §452, 1 ; aKTecment, §453 ; re- petition, §453, a ; usu, §454 ; def. art. for, §4H(1 §454, 1 ; en,+(.M. art. for, §415, 2,(2), §454,2. possessivo pron.,fonns,§462, 2 ; agreeiueut, §153 ; use, §455. possessives, see poss. adj. and poijs. pron. l>mir, §519, 1, 2, 3 ; +infin., §361, 2;—5ue + subj.,iij32, §351, '2;~pcti que+snhj., §532, §351, 4 ; — . . . >jve, constr., §481, 5, (2), n. pourvu que, + subj., §532, §351, .3. 2>ouvoir, + infin., §310, 3 ; ijMpers., §332, 1, obs. ; with 7ie alone, §495, 4. predicate noun, omission of art., §408, 3. predicative complement, §374, §408, 3. prciiiwr, in dates, etc., §514, §408, 4, a; -fsubj., §350, 3; +«+ infin., §358, 3, a. ■prendre garde, +d, +de, §300, 18, preposition, §§505-531 ; list of simple, §5i8 ; position, §51 > ; locutions, §5C9 ; repetition, §511 ; idioma- tic distinctions, SSSri-.n.'U. prepositional complement, §375. j>rt\s; -de, §513, 4 ; d pen—, §513, 4. present, indie, §337; as historical i)ast, examples, §341 ; replaced by ini|)f., §338, 5 ; in condl. sen- tences, §355, p. 213. present participle, 305. present subj., §3.53, 1. Priam, pnicn., §34, exc. 2. preteiidre, +d, -fdir. infm., §360, 19. prie.\ +0, +de, §300,20. primary tenses, see princi- l)iil parts. jirhno {seeando, etc.), §503, a. principal parts, formation of tenses from, §174. prompte, prncn., §51, exc l)ronomin;d advs., §438. pronoun, §§437-484, see also personal, possessive, etc. proimnciation, §§3-03 ; of vowels, §§Ui-21 ; of vowel combinations, §§22-32 ; of nasals,§!;H3- 8 ; of conson- ants, §§;!9-ii3. pro])er nouns, plur , §39 ■ ; use of art. with, §§41'.- 413. propre, §J5J, 3. pit, agreement, §371, 4, !>. pin's, §{n3, a. pvixque, distincruished from dcpiitH que, §5.30, 3. punch, prncn., §37, exc, §12, exc. 1. punctuation, §74. Q q, J rncn., §.')5. qu, prncn., S55. qvadriipi'de, itrncn., §55, exc. 2. qualifier de, §40^, 3, c. qunnd, disiinyuishcd from lorsqiH', §530, 1. quaiid (i)iane), condl, after, §315, 0, §355, e, p. 214 ; sometimes takes subj., §351, 4, I), §352, 3; -fin- die, or subj., §63', §351, 4. <{uantite,+de, ngreenient of verb §312, 2, rr. (juantity, of vowels, §08. quart, §499, n. 1. qnalrr-riiu/t(s), §498, a. b. que .?, §400, 2 ; use, §470. que .', 5470, 1, b. (/Mc(relat.), §472; use, §474; in inversions (empliatio), §174, 2, n., §402, a, n.; past part, invar, after, §371,6. que (conj.), condl. after, §345, ; replacing other conjs., §351, 0, §535, 2 ; -' than ', 'as', in com- parison, §423, §489 ; with tie, §492 ; for d moiiis que, §490, 1 ; -)-indic. or subj., §532, §349, §351, 6, §535 ; not omitted, §535, 3. qi'rl'i §40(5, 1; use, §468, §409, 2. quel !, §403, a. qvelconquc, §484 ; with ne, §492, 2, a. quel que, +subj. of Urc, §484. quelque, §480, 1 ; use, §481, 5 ; as adv., §481, 5, a. quelque chose, §480, 2 ; use, §482, 6. quelque .... que, + subj., §481. quelqu'un, §480, 2 ; use, §482, 5. qu'e.st-ce qui f, §470, 2. question, direct, §310; in- direct, §318. qui I, §4CC, 2 ; use, §469 ; replaced by qml, §4CS, b, §409, b. qui, §472 ; ilse, §474 ; ro- placinj^ celui qui, les una . . . lenauireii, cc qui, §474, 1, a, b; qui que, +suhj. of i'tre, §484 ; qid que ce soit, §484 ; qtd que oe soit ■\-nc, §492, 2, a. quiconque, §484. quint, §499, n. 2. quintuple, prncn., §55, exc. 2. qiiinze-vinijtis), §408, n. Quirinul, prncn., §55, oxc. 3 72 ; use, §474 ; 18 Xempliatic), , §462, a, n.; invar, after, condl. after, plaoiiij,' other L, C, §535, 2 ; as ', ill foin- !3, §489 ; with r il moinn que, ndic. or suV>j., §351, 6, §535 ; , §535, 3. L ; use, §468, 184 ; with ne, ubj. of i;trc, 1 ; use, §481, §181, 5, a. §480, '2 ; use, jue, + subj., 80, 2 ; use, §470, 2. ct, §310; in- ; use, §469; 'liwl, g40S, h, e, §474 ; re- '■ qi(i, l<:s unit , ce qui, §474, I qvc,+9\ib]. ; qtd que cc ui que ce soit , a. 1. 2. en., §55, exc. , §498, n. n., §55, oxc. INDEX. 7"ofA§46o,2;u8e,§470 «""'•. §4/2 ; use, §478; .yuo.- 5««... +sul,j.. g, 4. Qu,n que ce ,oU, §484 ; With ne, § 190, 2 a ^7''^"'''+subj'.,§532.g3Jl, 4. ' B. r, pmcn., §56 ; final, §39^ <, »•»•. prncn., §50, exc 2 reciprocal verbs, §323 reflexive pers.pron8.,* §441 reflexive verb, formation oi comp. tenses, §322, 2- With reciprocal force, §323- agreement of pa«t part.,' J>-i24 ; omission of reflex obj §325 ; comparison ^ithl,n^r., §326;replac. i"ff passive, §321, 2, 6 ^^eM, prncn.. §46. exc. relativepron., forms. §,72- agreen, nfc. §473. ^^ ' §S474-4/9; remarks, §479. not omitted, §479, l ; re- lative clause for Emr -2;§366.3;indef.relat; 8484. ' 'tr^' +i, +ae, §360. ^Jauran^, prncn., §24, exc. At<2, prncn., §63, exc. 2 ^^n, §480,2; use. §482,' 4- With 7IC, §492. ^ofc/y,i«ye. prncn., §5? exc. 2. ' ;""f '•''. conjugation, §237 ^lffoueauld(^a),pracn:, §5^ exc. 2. rounding (],», g, fassy'sdiagrau,. ^7' ' S. *. prncn., §57;in -liaison', s71. sacke, Irreg. use, §•'62, 2 «««*, +infJn., mi, 3; _f <^"«'e 5,'' prncn., §17, exc. 4 m>t, prncn., §.-,4, exc. 2 f*51, 6; in conditional sen - tence,§354;oniission,§355 '^.P.214;M-(==^orte ; de (telle) - que, -f in'iic. orsubj.,§532.§351, 2 ; <>« _ ry«e, -f i„,jic. o,' «"'»j.,§.r,3.^, §^51^2. ™' l^''"""-. §60, 2, exc. 2 •'*"rtA prncn., §fio, exc. 1 sounds of French, descrip. t'onof. §3-16; symbols, table of, §5. «''^'m7, prncn.. §50, exc. ^ »nus, §530. 1. St. Bernard, prncn., c^s exc. ■ ' stress, §00, §07. ■subjunctive, §§348-353; in subordinate clause, §§348- 334, n. 2 ; in noun ciause. §349; in adjectival clause, §350; in adverbial clause. §561 ; in princii)al clause,' §352 ; as imperative, §3f,2,' 1. a; tense sequence §353 such'. §483. Band n. Snez, prncn., §63, exc. 1. *«#>, +indic. or subj., §532, §351, 2. tel, §480, 3 ; use, §483, 5. Umoin, §422, a. tenses, formation of comp., §§307-809 ; formation from principal parts, §174; of indie, §§335-346; peri- phrastic £ng., §335 ; elliptical Eng., §336 ; in narration,§§338-341; tense sequence of subj., §353. •teur, fem. of, §415, 2, (3). •through', §526. tiers, §499, n. 1. Hiir, §527. time, how expressed, §329, 1, §506. •to', §528. toi, for te, §447,3,(3), obs. 1. ton, for ta, §452, l,obs. 1. tous, prncn., §57, 2, exc, 4 tous (les) deux, §483, 6, b. tout, §480,3; use, §483, 6; as adv. (variable), §483, 6, o; with gens, §383, 8, j- tout... que, constr., §481, 6,<2), n. tout-puissant, §483, 6, a, n. • towards ', §629. trailer de, §408, 3, c. iwmsitive verbs,, §372, §3/3, n. ; in i^>.=Eng. verb -f pnPM 8075, 3. travail, plur,,§387, travers ;